ROCHE Hitachi 911 User Manual

BM/HITACHI 911
Copyright Boehringer Mannheim GmbH 1993

Main Table of Contents
PREFACE
P.1 Overview...................................................................................................... P 1
P.2 Purpose And Scope of Manual .................................................................. P 2
P.3 Facility Specifications ................................................................................ P 3
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 1 1
1.2 Control System ........................................................................................... 1 4
1.3 Sampling System...................................................................................... 1 18
1.4 Reagent System........................................................................................ 1 22
1.5 Photometric Measuring System .............................................................. 1 26
1.6 Cell Rinse System..................................................................................... 1 30
1.7 ISE System................................................................................................ 1 31
1.8 Operational Modes ................................................................................... 1 33
1.9 Operational Flow....................................................................................... 1 35
1.10 Instrument Specifications ........................................................................ 1 37
CHAPTER 2: OPERATIONS
Part A - Operating Instructions
2.1 Daily Operating Check ............................................................................... 2 1
2.2 Daily Start-Up .............................................................................................. 2 5
2.3 Calibration................................................................................................... 2 9
2.4 Control Test Selection.............................................................................. 2 11
2.5 Routine Patient Test Selection Without Bar Code Reader .................... 2 13
2.6 Routine Patient Test Selection With Bar Code Reader.......................... 2 15
2.7 Initiate Run ................................................................................................ 2 17
2.8 Stat Test Selection.................................................................................... 2 20
2.9 Measurement of Additional Routine Samples ........................................ 2 22
2.10 Rerun Sample Processing....................................................................... 2 24
2.11 Within-Run Recalibration ......................................................................... 2 27
2.12 Data Editing............................................................................................... 2 28
2.13 Quality Control Procedures ..................................................................... 2 29
2.14 QC File Maintenance................................................................................. 2 30
2.15 Patient Reports ......................................................................................... 2 32
Part B - CRT Screen Displays
2.16 Overview.................................................................................................... 2 33
2.17 Operation Monitor ..................................................................................... 2 36
2.18 Routine Job - - Menu ................................................................................ 2 40
2.19 Routine Job - - Reagent Status................................................................ 2 41
2.20 Routine Job - - Calibration Test Selection .............................................. 2 49
2.21 Routine Job - - Patient Test Selection Without Bar Code Reader ........ 2 53
2.22 Routine Job - - Patient Test Selection With Bar Code Reader .............. 2 58
2.23 Routine Job - - Start Conditions .............................................................. 2 62
2.24 Routine Job - - Real Time Data Monitor .................................................. 2 68
2.25 Routine Job - - Data Review .................................................................... 2 70
2.26 Routine Job - - Rerun Samples................................................................ 2 76
2.27 Routine Job - - Status Setting .................................................................. 2 80
2.28 Stat Reception .......................................................................................... 2 83
2.30 Quality Control Job - - Menu .................................................................... 2 89
2.31 Quality Control Job - - Real Time QC....................................................... 2 90
2.32 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC Monitor ......................................... 2 93
2.33 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC List ................................................ 2 96
2.34 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC Chart............................................. 2 99
2.35 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC Monitor .................................... 2 101
2.36 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC List ........................................... 2 104
2.37 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC Chart ........................................ 2 106
2.38 Data Monitor Job - - Menu ...................................................................... 2 108
2.39 Data Monitor Job - - Reaction Monitor .................................................. 2 109
2.40 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration Trace .................................................. 2 112
2.41 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration List ...................................................... 2 114
2.42 Data Monitor Job - - ISE Calibration Monitor ........................................ 2 116
2.43 Data Monitor Job - - Working Curve ...................................................... 2 118
2.44 Parameter Job - - Menu .......................................................................... 2 120
2.45 Parameter Job - - Chemistry Parameters .............................................. 2 121
2.46 Parameter Job - - Profiling ..................................................................... 2 136
2.47 Parameter Job - - Calculated Test ......................................................... 2 138
2.48 Parameter Job - - Print Order ................................................................. 2 143
2.49 Parameter Job - - Report Format ........................................................... 2 145
2.50 Parameter Job - - Control Test Selection .............................................. 2 151
2.51 Parameter Job - - Control Value Setting ............................................... 2 153
2.52 Parameter Job - - Special Wash Programming .................................... 2 155
2.53 Parameter Job - - System Parameters................................................... 2 159
2.54 Parameter Job - - Channel Assignment ................................................ 2 167
2.55 Maintenance Job - - Menu ...................................................................... 2 170
2.56 Maintenance Job - - Analyzer Maintenance.......................................... 2 171
2.57 Maintenance Job - - Mechanisms Check .............................................. 2 175
2.58 Maintenance Job - - Support Functions ............................................... 2 178
2.59 Maintenance Job - - Working Information............................................. 2 181
Part C - Reports
2.60 Overview.................................................................................................. 2 185
2.61 Reagent Status ....................................................................................... 2 186
2.62 Requisition List - - Without Bar Code Reader....................................... 2 188
2.63 Requisition List - - With Bar Code Reader ............................................ 2 190
2.64 Calibrator Load List ................................................................................ 2 192
2.65 Rerun List ................................................................................................ 2 194
2.66 Calibration Monitor ................................................................................. 2 196
2.67 Individual QC Monitor ............................................................................. 2 199
2.68 Individual QC List.................................................................................... 2 201
2.69 Cumulative QC Monitor .......................................................................... 2 203
2.70 Cumulative QC List ................................................................................. 2 205
2.71 Reaction Monitor .................................................................................... 2 207
2.72 Patient Reports - - Report Format.......................................................... 2 210
2.73 Patient Reports - - Short Format ............................................................ 2 213
2.74 Calibration Trace .................................................................................... 2 215
2.75 Profiling List ............................................................................................ 2 217
2.76 Photometer Check.................................................................................. 2 219
2.77 Cell Blank ................................................................................................ 2 221
2.78 Bar Code Reader Check ........................................................................ 2 223
2.79 ISE Check................................................................................................ 2 225
2.80 Printer Check .......................................................................................... 2 227
2.81 Daily Alarm Trace.................................................................................... 2 228
2.82 Cumulative Alarm Trace ......................................................................... 2 230
2.83 Host Communication Log...................................................................... 2 232
2.84 Floppy Disk Check ................................................................................. 2 233
2.85 Memory Check ........................................................................................ 2 234
2.86 Precision Check...................................................................................... 2 235
2.87 Maintenance Report ............................................................................... 2 237
2.88 Cumulative Operations Report .............................................................. 2 238
2.89 Original Absorbance............................................................................... 2 240
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance
3.1 Maintenance Procedures Overview .......................................................... 3 1
3.2 Working Information................................................................................... 3 2
3.3 Reaction System Wash .............................................................................. 3 4
3.4 Empty Waste Solution Reservoir .............................................................. 3 5
3.5 ISE Maintenance ......................................................................................... 3 6
3.6 Clean DI Water Reservoir ........................................................................... 3 8
3.7 Check Reaction Cell Condition ................................................................. 3 9
3.8 Clean and Adjust Reaction System Components ................................. 3 11
3.9 Replace Reaction Cells and Clean Reaction Bath ................................. 3 16
3.10 Clean Sample and Reagent Disk Compartments................................... 3 21
3.11 Clean Refrigerator Condenser Filter ....................................................... 3 27
3.12 Clean Inlet Water Filter ............................................................................. 3 28
3.13 Replace ISE Pinch Valve Tubing ............................................................. 3 30
3.14 Replace Pipettor Seals ............................................................................. 3 33
Part B - Unscheduled Maintenance
3.15 Floppy Disk Replacement ........................................................................ 3 45
3.16 System Software Installation ................................................................... 3 50
3.17 Clean Cell Rinse Unit ................................................................................ 3 53
3.18 Replace Photometer Lamp ...................................................................... 3 56
3.19 Clean ISE Reagent Flowpath ................................................................... 3 62
3.20 Replace ISE Measuring Cartridge (Na
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
) ....................................... 3 65
3.21 Replace ISE Reference Cartridge............................................................ 3 70
3.22 Check/Refill Multiclean Solution.............................................................. 3 76
3.23 Replace Sample Probe............................................................................. 3 79
3.24 Replace Reagent Probes ......................................................................... 3 93
3.25 Replace Stirring Paddle ......................................................................... 3 108
3.26 Load Continuous-Form Paper ............................................................... 3 111
3.27 Replace Printer Ribbon Cassette .......................................................... 3 116
CHAPTER 4: TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................... 4 1
4.2 Troubleshooting Conditions That Occur At Power Up............................ 4 3
4.3 Chemistry Troubleshooting....................................................................... 4 4
4.4 Instrument Troubleshooting.................................................................... 4 12
4.5 Data Alarms ............................................................................................... 4 13
4.6 Instrument Alarms .................................................................................... 4 21
CHAPTER 5: THEORY
Part A - Instrument Theory
5.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 5 1
5.2 Cell Rinse And Blanking ............................................................................ 5 5
5.3 Begin Operation.......................................................................................... 5 8
5.4 Sample Aspiration and Dispense ............................................................ 5 14
5.5 Sample Predilution ................................................................................... 5 18
5.6 Reagent Aspiration and Dispense .......................................................... 5 22
5.7 Sampling End............................................................................................ 5 29
5.8 ISE System Components ......................................................................... 5 30
Part B - Chemistry Theory
5.9 Overview.................................................................................................... 5 40
5.10 Assay Techniques.................................................................................... 5 43
5.11 1-Point Endpoint Assay ........................................................................... 5 46
5.12 2-Point Rate Assay ................................................................................... 5 48
5.15 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay ........................................................... 5 56
5.16 Rate A Assay ............................................................................................. 5 58
5.17 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1 ........................................................................... 5 61
5.18 Rate B Assay - - Mode 2 ........................................................................... 5 64
5.19 Summary of Assay Techniques .............................................................. 5 66
5.20 Calibration Overview ................................................................................ 5 67
5.21 1-Point Linear Calibration ........................................................................ 5 71
5.23 Multipoint Linear Calibration.................................................................... 5 75
5.24 Non-Linear Logit-log 3P Calibration........................................................ 5 77
5.27 Non-Linear Exponential Calibration........................................................ 5 83
5.28 Non-Linear Spline Calibration ................................................................. 5 85
5.29 Isozyme P Calibration .............................................................................. 5 87
5.30 Isozyme Q Calibration .............................................................................. 5 89
5.31 ISE Calibration .......................................................................................... 5 91
5.32 Result Integrity Checks ............................................................................ 5 95
5.33 Serum Index Function .............................................................................. 5 98
5.34 Real Time QC Evaluation ....................................................................... 5 103
5.35 Reagent Labelling................................................................................... 5 110
PREFACE
P.1 Overview...................................................................................................... P 1
P.1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... P 1
P.1.2 Precautions Against Potential Hazards ............................................................................. P 1
P.2 Purpose And Scope of Manual .................................................................. P 2
P.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... P 2
P.2.2 Use of Manual ...................................................................................................................... P 2
P.2.3 Manual Outline .................................................................................................................... P 2
P.2.4 Manual Numbering System ................................................................................................ P 2
P.2.5 Manual Revisions ................................................................................................................ P 2
P.3 Facility Specifications ................................................................................ P 3
P.3.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... P 3
P.3.2 Electrical Requirements...................................................................................................... P 3
P.3.3 Water .................................................................................................................................... P 3
P.3.4 Drain ..................................................................................................................................... P 3
P.3.5 Temperature and Humidity ................................................................................................ P 3
P.3.6 Instrument ............................................................................................................................ P 3
PREFACE
Contents
PREFACE
Contents
P 1
P.1 Overview
P.1.1 Introduction
The Boehringer Mannheim/Hitachi 911 Analyzer is a
fully automated, discrete, computerized chemistry
analyzer. It is intended for in vitro quantitative or
qualitative determination of a wide range of analytes
in various body fluids.
Packaged with your analyzer, you will receive:
Accessory Box
ISE Accessory Parts Case
Installation Kit
After your instrument is installed, the following
consumable materials should be ordered as
necessary from Boehringer Mannheim:
Bar-CodedReagents
Printer Paper
Printer Ribbon
Reaction Cells
Hitergent
Sample Cups
Pipettor Seals
Photometer Lamps
Probes
ISE Cartridges
Multiclean
ISE Cleaning Solution
P.1.2 Precautions Against Potential
Hazards
Chemical
The operator is responsible for taking all necessary
precautions against hazards associated with the use
of cl i ni cal l aboratory chemi cal s. Speci fi c
recommendations for each reagent used on the
analyzer are found on the package insert for each
chemistry. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are
available for Boehringer Mannheim reagents.
Please ensure that all samples have been
allowed to coagulate completely and are
subsequently centrifuged correctly!
Samples containing fibrin clots may block the
sample probe and lead to incorrect sampling.
If you are using blood-collection tubes
containing a gel (e.g. Vacutainer SST) please
follow the manufacturers recommendation.
Immediately remove any reagent spillage from the
instrument.
Electrical
As with any electronic equipment, electrical shock
can occur. Use extreme caution when working
around the instrument. Avoid contact with any
electrical wire or components. DO NOT attempt to
work in any electronic compartment with the power
on. ALWAYS turn the MAIN circuit breaker off and
unplug the instrument from the power source before
working where contact with electrical wires, terminal
strips, motors, or other electrical components is
possible.
Should one of the instrument circuit breakers or fuses
"blow", DO NOT attempt to operate the analyzer
before calling Boehringer Mannheim Customer
Technical Support.
Mechanical
As with any mechanical system, there are certain
precautions to take when operating the instrument.
DO NOT wear loose garments or jewelry that could
catch in mechanisms such as the sample probe
assembly. Whenever possible, operate the
instrument with the main cover down. DO NOT
attempt mechanical repair unless the instrument is in
Stand-by or OFF.
P.1 Overview
PREFACE
P 2
P.2 Purpose And Scope of
Manual
P.2.1 Introduction
This Operators Manual is an instructional aid in the
performance of tasks related to the operation and
general maintenance of this instrument. The manual
contains detailed descriptions of instrument features
and specifications. It also contains general theory of
operation, function and use of controls, emergency
procedures and maintenance procedures.
P.2.2 Use of Manual
This manual is arranged in a progressive sequence for
easy study and reference. Do not operate the
instrument until thoroughly familiar with the
information in this manual. The key to good
performance is good preparation by thoroughly
studying the information contained in this manual.
P.2.3 Manual Outline
The manual contains the following sections:
Preface
Chapter 1 - - Introduction
Chapter 2 - - Operation
Part A - -Operating Instructions
Part B - - CRT Job Screens
Part C - - Reports
Chapter 3 - - Maintenance
Chapter 4 - - Troubleshooting
Chapter 5 - - Theory
P.2.4 Manual Numbering System
The manual numbering system provides easy
location of information. The pages, paragraphs,
pictorials, tables and the table of contents are
established in a manner helpful to the user. The
general table of contents at the beginning of the
manual, along with individual table of contents for
each chapter, provide points of quick correlation in
cross referencing. Pictorials are repeated as
necessary to minimize page flipping and references
are made between sections to point out specific
information.
P.2.5 Manual Revisions
The arrangement of the manual facilitates easy
updating and revision. Page revision packages are
issued from time to time for user insertion into the
manual.
P.2 Purpose And Scope of Manual
PREFACE
P 3
P.3 Facility Specifications
P.3.1 Introduction
Installation of the instrument is performed by a
Boehringer Mannheim representative. The customer
is responsible for providing the necessary facilities as
specified in Section P.3.6.
P.3.2 Electrical Requirements
The analyzer must be wired for 115 10% VAC,
30 amp, 60 Hz. A separate, instrument-dedicated
circuit must be provided.
P.3.3 Water
The instrument requires 15-30 liters of bacteria-free
deionized water per hour during operation, with a
minimum resistance of 1.5 megohm. The water flow
rate to the instrument must be at least 80 liters per
hour during operation with a minimum pressure of 15
psi and a maximum pressure of 25 psi. This flow rate
(not to be confused with actual water consumption)
permits the deionized water reservoir to fill quickly
when necessary.
P.3.4 Drain
Although the instrument is equipped with a 10-liter
waste water container, it is preferable that a floor drain
be provided. It should be capable of carrying 30 liters
of waste water per hour during maximum operation.
The drain cannot be more than 10 cm above the floor
level.
P.3.5 Temperature and Humidity
The instrument generates approximately 6700 Btu/
hour. There must be adequate ventilation in the area
of the instrument to maintain a temperature range from
15 to 32 C. Room temperature variation within any
specific day should not exceed 2 C. The top of the
instrument must not be in direct sunlight or in the path
of forced air flow. Free air flow must be allowed around
all sides of the instrument.
Relative environmental (humidity) range: 45 - 85%
without condensation.
P.3.6 Instrument
The di mensi ons of the anal yti cal uni t are
approximately 99 cm wide 74 cm deep 112 cm
high. The dimensions of the control unit are
approximately 61 cm wide 74 cm deep 122 cm
high. Clearance on all sides should be 91 cm
minimum after installation. The instrument requires a
minimum door width of 122 cm and a turning radius of
127 cm. The analytical unit weighs approximately 410
kg. The weight is evenly distributed on four leveling
feet. The operational unit weighs approximately 50 kg.
Access to normal laboratory facilities such as sink,
refrigerator, and storage space is essential. No fume
hood or external exhaust system is required.
PREFACE
P 4
PREFACE
NOTES
1. INTRODUCTION
Contents
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 1 1
1.1.1 Name and Intended Use ..................................................................................................... 1 1
1.1.2 Analyzer Characteristics ..................................................................................................... 1 2
1.1.3 Analyzer Operational Systems........................................................................................... 1 2
1.1.4 Analytical Unit Operating Principle ................................................................................... 1 3
1.2 Control System ........................................................................................... 1 4
1.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 1 4
1.2.2 CRT Job Screens ................................................................................................................. 1 4
1.2.3 Keyboard Description.......................................................................................................... 1 4
1.2.4 Analyzer Control Keys ....................................................................................................... 1 11
1.2.5 Job Menu Selection Keys .................................................................................................. 1 11
1.2.6 Screen Navigation Keys..................................................................................................... 1 13
1.2.7 Data Entry Keys .................................................................................................................. 1 14
1.2.8 Printer Control Keys ........................................................................................................... 1 15
1.2.9 Buz. Off Key ........................................................................................................................ 1 16
1.2.10 Control Processing Unit ..................................................................................................... 1 16
1.2.11 Floppy Disk Drives .............................................................................................................. 1 16
1.2.12 Printer ................................................................................................................................. 1 16
1.2.13 Host Interface...................................................................................................................... 1 16
1.2.14 Data Storage....................................................................................................................... 1 17
1.3 Sampling System...................................................................................... 1 18
1.3.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1 18
1.3.2 Sample Disk........................................................................................................................ 1 19
1.3.3 Sample Probe..................................................................................................................... 1 19
1.3.4 Sample Probe Arm............................................................................................................. 1 20
1.3.5 Sample Pipettor ................................................................................................................. 1 20
1.3.6 Sample Probe Rinse Station ............................................................................................. 1 20
1.3.7 Sampling System Flowpath .............................................................................................. 1 20
1.3.8 Sample Container Sizes ....................................................................................................1 21
1. INTRODUCTION
Contents
1.4 Reagent System........................................................................................ 1 22
1.4.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1 22
1.4.2 Reagent Disks ..................................................................................................................... 1 22
1.4.3 Reagent Probes .................................................................................................................. 1 23
1.4.4 Reagent Probe Arms .......................................................................................................... 1 23
1.4.5 Reagent Pipettors............................................................................................................... 1 24
1.4.6 Reagent Probe Rinse Stations .......................................................................................... 1 24
1.4.7 Stirring Units ....................................................................................................................... 1 24
1.4.8 Reagent Flowpath .............................................................................................................. 1 25
1.5 Photometric Measuring System .............................................................. 1 26
1.5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1 26
1.5.2 Reaction Disk ...................................................................................................................... 1 26
1.5.3 Reaction Bath ..................................................................................................................... 1 27
1.5.4 Hitergent ............................................................................................................................. 1 27
1.5.5 Photometer ................................................................................................................ ......... 1 28
1.6 Cell Rinse System..................................................................................... 1 30
1.6.1 Cell Rinse Unit .................................................................................................................... 1 30
1.6.2 Water Supply ...................................................................................................................... 1 30
1.6.3 Vacuum System.................................................................................................................. 1 30
1.7 ISE System ................................................................................................ 1 31
1.7.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1 31
1.7.2 ISE Calibration.................................................................................................................... 1 32
1.7.3 ISE Sample Aspiration ....................................................................................................... 1 32
1.7.4 Sample Dispense and Dilution .......................................................................................... 1 32
1.7.5 ISE Measurement Flowpath .............................................................................................. 1 32
1.7.6 Rinse.................................................................................................................................... 1 32
1.7.7 Internal Reference Solution .............................................................................................. 1 32
1.8 Operational Modes ................................................................................... 1 33
1.8.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1 33
1.8.2 Initialization........................................................................................................................ 1 33
1.8.3 Stand-by .............................................................................................................................. 1 33
1.8.4 Parameter Check ............................................................................................................... 1 33
1.8.5 Reset.................................................................................................................................... 1 33
1.8.6 Operate ............................................................................................................................... 1 33
1.8.7 Sampling Stop............................................................................................................. ....... 1 34
1.8.8 Probe Wash ........................................................................................................................ 1 34
1.8.9 Stop ..................................................................................................................................... 1 34
1.8.10 Sleep ................................................................................................................................... 1 34
1.8.11 Wake Up.............................................................................................................................. 1 34
1.8.12 Stat Stand-by ...................................................................................................................... 1 34
1.8.13 Stat Operation .................................................................................................................... 1 34
1.8.14 Check................................................................................................................................... 1 34
1.9 Operational Flow....................................................................................... 1 35
1.9.1 Daily Check......................................................................................................................... 1 35
1.9.2 Power Up/Start Up.............................................................................................................. 1 35
1.9.3 Calibrators and Controls .................................................................................................... 1 35
1.9.4 Patient Test Selection........................................................................................................ 1 35
1.9.5 Start Conditions Screen..................................................................................................... 1 35
1.9.6 Begin Operation ................................................................................................................. 1 35
1.9.7 Results ................................................................................................................................. 1 35
1.9.8 Additional Runs .................................................................................................................. 1 35
1.9.9 Daily Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 1 36
1.10 Instrument Specifications ........................................................................ 1 37
1.10.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 1 37
1.10.2 Dimensions ......................................................................................................................... 1 37
1.10.3 Electrical ............................................................................................................................. 1 37
1.10.4 Interface .............................................................................................................................. 1 37
1.10.5 Test Modes .......................................................................................................................... 1 37
1.10.6 Control System ................................................................................................................... 1 37
1.10.7 ISE System.......................................................................................................................... 1 37
1.10.8 Sampling System ............................................................................................................... 1 38
1.10.9 Reagent System ................................................................................................................. 1 38
1.10.10 Measuring System (photometric) ...................................................................................... 1 38
1.10.11 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................................... 1 38
1. INTRODUCTION
Contents
1. INTRODUCTION
Contents
1 1
1.1 Overview
1.1.1 Name and Intended Use
1 Analytical Unit
The Boehringer Mannheim/Hitachi 911 Analyzer is
shown in Figure 1-1. The analyzer is used to report
test results on various body fluid samples for a wide
range of analytes. This analyzer:
is fully automated
is discrete
is computerized
uses serum, urine, plasma, and CSF sample types
performs in vitro quantitative and qualitative tests
on a wide range of analytes
performs potentiometric and photometric assays.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview
2 Control Unit
The 911 analyzer is composed of two hardware units:
the analytical unit and the control unit.
The analytical unit includes:
the ISE system
photometric measuring systems
Central Processing Unit (CPU).
The control unit includes:
the monitor (CRT)
keyboard
printer.
Figure 1-1: 911 Analyzer
'
^
STAT OPERATION MONITOR ROUTINE QC MONITOR PARAM. MAINTE. GUIDANCE PAGE CONTINUE PAGE BACK PAGE FORWARD PRINT STOP
COPY BUZ OFF
CAPS LOCK
START STOP SAMPLING STOP STOP
7A 8B 9C 4D 5E 6F 1G 2H 3I 0J . K _L C ENTER
BACK SPACE !
1
@
2
#
3
$
4
%
5
"
6
&
7
*
8
(
9
)
10
-
11
+
12
,
ISE Q
13
W
14
E
15
R
16
T
17
Y
18
U
19
I
20
O
21
P
22
/
23
=
24 A
25
S
26
D
27
F
28
G
29
H
30
J
31
K
32
L
33
;
34
:
35 Z
37
X
38
C
39
V
40
B
41
N
42
M
43
<
46
SHIFT ,
44
.
45
ENTER
?
36 SHIFT >
S.INDEX CAPS LOCK
1 2
1.1.2 Analyzer Characteristics
Analyzer characteristics include:
true stat results availability
ready to use 24 hours per day
sample bar code capability
reagent bar code capability
360 tests/hour throughput (photometric)
720 tests/hour throughput with ISEs (K
+
, Na
+
,
and Cl
-
)
micro sample cup - - reduced sample evaporation,
good for pediatric samples
automated maintenance functions
data reduction, nonlinear chemistries:
- three parameter logit-log
- four parameter logit-log
- five parameter logit-log
- five parameter exponential
- cubic spline
automatic calibration
automatic sample blanking
automatic sample dilution capabilities
QC capabilities for 8 control levels
refrigerated storage for 64 reagent containers
refrigerated storage for 8 controls and 17
calibrators
automatic evaluation of within-run control results
bidirectional host interface capability
automatic rerun capability
endpoint, kinetic, and isoenzyme chemistries
micro (3-50 microliter) sample sizes.
46 programmable tests
1.1.3 Analyzer Operational Systems
The analyzer uses several operational systems to
perform required functions. These systems include:
Control System
Sampling System
Reagent System
Reaction Bath System
Cell Rinse System
Photometric Measuring System
ISE System.
The Control System consists of the control unit (CRT,
keyboard, and printer) that is a free-standing hardware
module, external to the analytical unit and the CPU,
which is located in the analyzer unit. This system is
discussed in Section 1.2.
The remaining systems are all part of the analytical
unit and are discussed in detail, beginning with
Section 1.3. Additional information about the
mechanical operation of the anlyzer is given in Chapter
5, Part A.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview
1 3
1.1.4 Analytical Unit Operating
Principle
Figure 1-2 gives an operational overview of the
photometric portion of the instrument. The general
sequence of events illustrated is:
The sample disk rotates the appropriate sample to
the sample probe (1).
The sample probe aspirates sample for testing (2).
If ISEs are selected, the sample is delivered into
the ISE dilution vessel (3).
If photometric chemistries are selected, the
sample is delivered into a reaction cell on the
reaction disk (4).
Figure 1-2: Operational Overview
1 Sample Disk
2 Sample Probe
3 ISE Dilution Vessel
4 Reaction Disk/Incubation Bath
After the sample is placed into the reaction cell,
the reagent probes add up to four different
reagents in separate dispense cycles (5).
Stirring paddles mix the sample after the
addition of each reagent (6).
Incubation occurs as cells are immersed in the
incubation bath below the reaction disk. Reaction
cells rotate through the photometer lightpath and
a measurement is taken (7).
The cell rinse unit removes reaction product
waste and cleans reaction cells for reuse (8).
5 Reagent Probes
6 Stirring Paddles
7 Photometer
8 Cell Rinse Unit
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 Overview
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
I
I
I
I
I
I
^
'
1 4
1.2 Control System
1.2.1 Introduction
The control system is used to control all instrument
functions. Components include the computer (located
on the analytical unit), keyboard, CRT, and printer
(located on the control unit). An interface port for a
host computer is available for use, if desired. This port
is located on the back left side of the analytical unit.
1.2.2 CRT Job Screens
The CRT is used to:
display information from the computer memory
monitor the instrument status
monitor instrument functions.
Each CRT screen displays information relating to a
specific instrument function. For example, the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen contains
information necessary for the instrument to perform a
specific chemical analysis and the REAGENT
STATUS screen displays information about each
reagent on board the analyzer.
Similar CRT screens are grouped into Job Selection
Menus. For example, screens used regularly during
routine patient processing are grouped together in the
ROUTINE JOB MENU. To view the ROUTINE JOB
MENU, press the ROUTINE key.
In some cases, an individual CRT screen may not be
listed in a Job Menu. The STAT screen is an
example. To view the STAT TEST SELECTION
screen, press the STAT key.
1.2.3 Keyboard Description
The keyboard is used to call up CRT screens and to
enter information. The keyboard is divided into five
functional parts:
Analyzer Control Keys
Job Menu Selection Keys
Screen Navigation Keys
Data Entry Keys
Printer Control Keys
Figure 1-5 on page 1-9 shows the 911 keyboard layout.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
1.2 Control System
1. INTRODUCTION
1 5
Figure 1-3: 911 Job Menu Keys
911 Job Menu Keys
1 6
NOTES
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
1 7
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
911 Software Flow Chart
Figure 1-4: Software Flowchart
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reagent Status
Calibration Test Selection
Patient Test Selection
Start Conditions
Real Time Data Monitor
Data Review
Rerun Samples
Status Setting
Routine Job Menu
QC Job Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Real Time QC
Individual QC Monitor
Individual QC List
Individual QC Chart
Cumulative QC Monitor
Cumulative QC List
Cumulative QC Chart
Data Monitor Job Menu
1
2
3
4
5
Parameter Job Menu
Reaction Monitor
Calibration Trace
Calibration List
ISE Calibration Monitor
Working Curve
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Chemistry Parameters
Profiling
Calculated Tests
Print Order
Report Format
Control Test Selection
Control Value Setting
Special Wash Programming
System Parameters
Channel Assignment
Maintenance Job Menu
Operation Monitor
STAT
1
2
3
4
Analyzer Maintenance
Mechanisms Check
Support Function
Working Information
1
STAT Reception
STAT Test Selection
1 8
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
NOTES
1.2 Control System
1. INTRODUCTION
1 9
Figure 1-5: 911 Keyboard Layout
911 Keyboard Layout 1 Analyzer Control Keys:
Start: Press this key to begin processing
samples.
Sampling Stop: Press this key to stop sampling,
but continue processing any samples already
dispensed.
Stop: Press this key to terminate sample
processing, maintenance, or test functions.
2 Job Menu Selection Keys:
Press these keys to display the different job
menus. These menus are shown in Figure 1-3.
STAT
Operation Monitor
Routine Job
QC Job
Data Monitor Job
Parameter Job
Maintenance Job
3 Screen Navigation Keys:
Guidance: Press this key to display the second
page of certain screens.
Page Continue: Press this key to display the rest
of a list of information contained on a screen.
Page Back: Press this key to move to the previous
screen in the job menu.
Page Forward: Press this key to move to the next
screen in the job menu.
4 Cursor Control: Press these keys to move from
field to field within a screen.
Data Entry Keys:
5 Alpha: Use these keys to enter data and make
test selections.
6 Numeric: Use these keys to enter numeric data
and make profile selections.
7 Enter: Press this key to enter data that has been
typed into the computer.
8 Cancel: Press this key to cancel data entry errors.
Printer Control Keys:
9 Copy: Press this key to copy the CRT screen
display.
10 Buzzer Off Key:
Press this key to silence the audible alarm. Press
the key a second time to clear any alarm
messages listed on the OPERATION MONITOR
display.
1 10
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
NOTES
1 11
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
1.2.4 Analyzer Control Keys
The analyzer control keys enable you to start and stop
the analyzer.
Start Key
Press START to place the instrument into the
Operate mode. Always check operating conditions
on the START CONDITIONS screen before pressing
START. The green light above the START key
illuminates when the key is pressed.
Sampling Stop Key
Press SAMPLING STOP to instruct the instrument to
stop sampling at the end of the current instrument
sampling cycle. When this key is pressed, only the
sampling function stops. All other functions related to
processing tests continue until results print out. The
SAMPLING STOP key is used during some
maintenance functions to move various mechanical
components to different positions. When the
instrument is in the S. Stop mode, the yellow light
above the SAMPLING STOP key is illuminated.
Stop Key
The STOP key performs four functions:
stops all test processing functions at the end of the
current mechanical cycle
ends test program functions
terminates batch transfer of results to the host
computer from the DATA REVIEW screen
termi nates probe adj ustments from the
MECHANISMS CHECK screen.
When the STOP key is pressed, the red light above the
STOP key is illuminated.
1.2.5 Job Menu Selection Keys
Job menu selection keys enable you to view each job
menu. The keys are marked with job-specific icons
and the key name is written on the keyboard directly
above the key.
STAT Key
Press the STAT key to display the STAT TEST
SELECTION screen. This screen is used for entering
Stat sample information. The STAT TEST
SELECTION screen can be accessed from any
operational mode.
Operation Monitor Key
Press the OPERATION MONITOR key to display the
OPERATION MONITOR screen. No entries are made
from this screen. It is used to monitor the following
information:
analyzer status
mode selected for routine and stat reruns
print mode selected
host communication status
incubator bath temperature
sample number and ID number of specimen
currently being sampled
START STOP
SAMPLING
STOP
1 12
sampling status of specimens on sample disk
alarm status.
Routine Job Menu Key
Press the ROUTINE key to display the ROUTINE JOB
MENU screen. The ROUTINE JOB MENU allows you
to select screens to:
verify remaining reagent volumes, expiration dates,
and position on disk
request patient test selection
view calibration time-out status and program
calibrations
request rerun sample test selection
specify analyzer starting conditions prior to
sample processing
execute sleep mode, automatic wake-up time, and
Stat Reception mode.
QC Job Menu Key
Press the QC key to display the QC JOB MENU. The
QC JOB MENU allows you to select screens that
show:
control data evaluated with operator-defined multi-
rule Shewhart analysis
daily QC data for a specified control performed for
a specified test
daily QC data listed for a specified control
daily QC data graphed for a specified controlon a
specified test
cumulative QC data for a specified control
performed for a specified test
cumulative QC data listed for a specified control
cumulative QC data graphed for a specified control
on a specified test
edit control files.
Data Monitor Job Menu Key
Press the MONITOR key to display the DATA
MONITOR JOB MENU. The DATA MONITOR JOB
MENU enables you to select screens to:
view absorbance changes vs. time for recent
reactions
edit patient files
view calibration data for photometric chemistries
view calibration curves for multipoint linear and
photometric non-linear chemistries and ISEs
monitor the 30 most recent calibrations for each
test
view ISE calibration data.
Parameter Job Menu Key
Press the PARAM. key to display the PARAMETER
JOB MENU. The PARAMETER JOB MENU enables
you to select screens to:
manually define test names
manually assign photometric and ISE test
parameters
manually assign short test names
define testing profiles
define calculated and compensated test
parameters
define result print orders
customize patient report formats
program probe and cell wash functions
read the Parameter disk into memory and assign
chemistries to test keys
request control test selections
define control value settings
program analyzer default settings.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
1 13
Maintenance Job Menu Key
Press the MAINTE. key to di spl ay the
MAINTENANCE JOB MENU. The MAINTENANCE
JOB MENU enables you to select screens to:
perform various maintenance functions as listed on
the menu
copy or format floppy disks
perform precision checks of the instrument
diagnose mechanical malfunctions
perform correlation analysis.
1.2.6 Screen Navigation Keys
Screen Navigation keys are used to move between job
menu screens, change pages within a screen, get
additional information within a screen, and move the
cursor from field to field.
Guidance Key
Press GUIDANCE to display the second page of
information for a particular screen such as REAGENT
STATUS or CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS. The light
above the GUIDANCE key illuminates when
additional information may be displayed. In addition,
the guidance icon ( )appears in the upper right-
hand corner of the CRT when the Guidance key is
active.
Page Continue Key
The PAGE CONTINUE key is used to scroll through a
list of information too large to be displayed on one
screen. Some examples include CALIBRATION
TEST SELECTION and RERUN SAMPLES. The light
above the PAGE CONTINUE key illuminates when
additional information may be displayed. In addition,
the page continue icon ( )appears in the upper right-
hand corner of the CRT when the PAGE CONTINUE
key is active.
When the SHIFT key is pressed along with PAGE
CONTINUE, the cap locks light illuminates. This takes
you to the end of the list. Pressing PAGE CONTINUE
while the cap locks light is on scrolls you through the
list from end to beginning. The page continue icon ( )
appears as a double arrow when this feature is
available for a screen.
Page Forward and Page Back Keys
Press the PAGE FORWARD key to:
move to the next CRT screen within a job
For example, after checking the reagent volumes
on REAGENT STATUS, press the PAGE
FORWARD key to enter patient test selections on
the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen.
select the first screen from a job menu.
For example, press PAGE FORWARD to select
the REAGENT STATUS screen from the ROUTINE
JOB MENU.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
1 14
Press the PAGE BACK key to:
go back to the previous CRT screen within a job
For example, press PAGE BACK to return to the
REAGENT STATUS screen from the
CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen.
select the last screen from a job menu.
For example, press PAGE BACK to display
START CONDITIONS from the ROUTINE JOB
MENU.
Cursor Control Keys
The Cursor Control keys are used to move the cursor
from one entry field to another within a screen. The
Cursor Control keys can move the cursor to the right
and left or up and down.
1.2.7 Data Entry Keys
The alphabet and number keys are the primary data
entry keys. They enable you to enter data into entry
fields.
Alphabet Keypad
The alphabet keypad has two different functions:
entering alpha characters and programming tests by
test key.
Press the appropriate alphabet keys to enter data.
The alphabet keys enter lowercase letters when used
alone. When the SHIFT key is pressed, these keys
enter uppercase letters. The CAPS LOCK light
illuminates when SHIFT is pressed.
The alphabet keys have a test key number printed on
the front edge of each key. This number corresponds
to the test key assignment made on the CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT screen for a specific test.
When tests are selected for a patient sample on the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen, the numbered
alphabet key corresponding to the desired test is
pressed. The selected test is highlighted on the
keyboard matrix that appears on the lower portion of
the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen. Pressing the
numbered alphabet key a second time deselects the
test, and removes the appropriate highlighting
from the keyboard matrix.
Press the BACKSPACE key to delete entries from a
field, character by character.
Number Keypad
The number keypad has two different functions:
entering numerical data and selecting test profiles.
The number keys allow you to enter numerical data, as
well as mathematical operators and decimals. The
SHIFT key has no affect on the number keys.
The number keys have a letter printed on the front edge
of each key. This letter corresponds to a test profile
assigned on the PROFILING SCREEN.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
1 15
When a profile is selected for a patient sample on the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen, the number key
corresponding to the desired profile is pressed. The
selected profile test are highlighted on the keyboard
matrix that appears on the lower portion of the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen. Pressing the
number key a second time deselects the profile tests
and removes the highlighting from the keyboard
matrix.
Enter Key
Pressing either ENTER key indicates the end of your
data entry, and registers the data with the control unit
and analytical unit for calculations or operations.
Cancel Key
When unacceptable information has been entered, an
error prompt is issued at the bottom of the CRT screen.
No other entry may be performed until the CANCEL
key is pressed to clear the input error.
The CANCEL key is used to clear one of three types
of input errors:
when incorrect information has been typed, but the
ENTER key has not yet been pressed, the
CANCEL key deletes the current entry.
when incorrect information has been typed, and the
ENTER key has been pressed, the CANCEL key
clears the error prompt and moves the cursor back
to the previous entry field.
when correct information has been typed, the
ENTER key has been pressed, but the requested
task cannot be performed until the analyzer is in
Stand-by mode, the CANCEL key clears the error
prompt.
If incorrect information is entered and accepted, it can
be corrected by moving the cursor back to the
specified field and entering the correct information.
The following input mesage alarms will appear
throughout the software to explain why an entry is not
accepted:
Stand-by Status Required for Entry
Data Entered is not in Specified Limit
Input Error
Password Required for Data Entry:Enter
Password
Data Processing
Calculation in Process
1.2.8 Printer Control Key
The printer control key is used to print hard copy
versions of CRT screens.
Copy Key
Press COPY to print a copy of the display currently
shown on the CRT.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
ENTER
C
1 16
1.2.9 Buz. Off Key
Buz. Off Key (Buzzer Off)
1 An audible alarm sounds to alert you of the alarm
condition. Press BUZ. OFF once to silence the
audible alarm.
2 Press the BUZZER OFF key twice to clear
instrument alarms from the OPERATION
MONITOR screen.
1.2.10 Central Processing Unit
The central processing unit (CPU) monitors all
analyzer functions and operation modes, calculates
results from raw absorbance data, and stores
information. Two floppy disk drives are used.
Generally, drive 1 is used for system program and
parameter storage, drive 2 for data storage. The CPU
is located in the analytical unit.
1.2.11 Floppy Disks
The system disk contains all necessary programming
information for the instrument to function as a
chemistry analyzer. When the instrument ON/OFF
switch is turned ON, all instrument operating
parameters are automatically read from the system
disk into computer memory.
The data disk records test results for a maximum of
800 routine samples, 800 routine rerun samples, and
200 stat rerun samples. When this disk becomes full,
it can be removed from the instrument and saved to
maintain a record of test results. If this type of record
is not desired, the disk can be cleared of all data and
reused.
The application disk contains the chemistry
parameter information for each Boehringer Mannheim
reagent. This information is read into instrument
memory and then written onto the system disk. The
parameter disk eliminates the need for
manual entry of chemistry parameters.
1.2.12 Printer
The instrument uses an 80-column, graphics-capable,
dot matrix printer. Patient results can be printed in 8-
1/2 11 inch report format or short format, which uses
less paper.
1.2.13 Host Interface
The instrument can be bidirectionally interfaced with a
host computer.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
1 17
1.2.14 Data Storage
The table below outlines where different types of data
are stored in the 911 system.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.2 Control System
DATA STORAGE
Information Storage Location
Tests Results
Routine
Stat
(800 samples)
(200 samples)
Data Disk
Data Disk
Test Selection C-RAM
Individual QC C-RAM
Cumulative QC C-RAM
Reaction Monitor
Routine/STAT
Calibration
QC
(360 tests)
(80 tests)
(80 tests)
RAM
RAM
RAM
Alarms C-RAM
Host Communication C-RAM
Calibration Results System Disk
Chemistry Parameters System Disk
Calibration Trace C-RAM
Cell Blank Results C-RAM
Passwords C-RAM
1 18
1.3 Sampling System
1.3.1 Introduction
The Sampling System consists of a sample disk,
sample pipettor, sample probe, and a sample
probe rinse station. The sample probe is mounted
on a robotic sample probe arm that moves the probe
from its home position to its aspirate and dispense
positions. Each of these components is explained in
detail in the following sections.
1.3.2 Sample Disk
The sample disk (shown in Figure 1-6) sits on a motor-
driven turntable. Three concentric rings of sample
positions are arranged as follows:
Outer Ring: 50 positions for ROUTINE samples
and barcoded Stats
Middle Ring: 3 positions for WASH solution
(W1-W3)
20 positions for STAT samples
(E51-E71)
17 positions for room temperature
CALIBRATORS (S1-S17)
Inner Ring: 17 posi ti ons for refri gerated
CALIBRATORS (S18-S34)
8 posi ti ons for refri gerated
CONTROLS (C1-C8)
The middle and outer rings form the outer portion of the
sample disk and are removable. The inner ring is
seated in a refrigerated compartment. This ring is
covered to ensure the refrigerated compartment
temperature is maintained. The inner ring can also be
removed. Blank, calibrator, and control materials are
placed in dedicated positions on the inner disk rings.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.3 Sampling System
Routine and stat patient samples are placed in
positions on the middle and outer rings as defined
when making test selections.
The sample disk rotates to bring the desired sample
cup into position next to the sample probe (the
sampling station) for specimen sampling.
Figure 1-6: Sample Disk
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
4
5
2
0
4
4
1
9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2
7
2
2
6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
S
30
S
29
S
2
8
S
2
7
S
2
6
S
2
5
S
2
4
S
2
3
S
2
2
S
2
1
S 2
0
S 1 9
S
1 8
C
8
C
7
C
6
C
5
C
4
C
3
C
2
C
1
S
3
4
S
3
3
S32
S
31
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6
3
S
1
3
E
6
2
S
1
2
E
6
1
S
1
1
E
6
0
S
1
0
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6
S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
5
2
S
2
E
5
1
S
1
W
3
E
7
0
W
2
E 6
9
W1
S 6 8
S
17
S
6 7
1 19
1.3.3 Sample Probe
The sample probe (shown in Photograph 1-1) carries
sample from the sample disk to a reaction cell or ISE
dilution vessel. The sample probe is mounted on the
sample probe arm and also acts as the liquid-level
sensor. Sensing the level of the liquid reduces
exposure of the outer probe walls to specimen and
also alerts you to insufficient sample volumes. This,
along with the internal and external probe wash,
minimizes any chance of cross contamination
between samples.
1.3.4 Sample Probe Arm
The motor-driven sample probe arm moves the
sample probe from its home position to the aspiration
position at the sample disk, and then lowers the probe
into the sample. Once the sample probe detects
sample via liquid level detection (capacitance),
the sample probe arm stops, and sample is aspirated.
After sample has been aspirated, the probe is moved
to the reaction disk or the ISE dilution vessel. The
sample probe arm lowers the probe into the reaction
cell or ISE dilution vessel at the sample dispense
position. Sample is dispensed while the beveled
sample probe tip is in contact with the bottom of the
reaction cell or dilution vessel. This ensures that a
precise volume of sample is deposited into the bottom
of the cell or dilution vessel even when using a low
dispense volume. The sample probe is spring-
mounted on the arm to avoid damage to the probe,
reaction cell, or dilution vessel.
Photograph 1-1: Sample Probe
1. INTRODUCTION
1.3 Sampling System
1 20
1.3.5 Sample Pipettor
The sample pipettor, shown in Photograph 1-2, is a
positive-displacement pipettor, positioned behind the
left front cover of the instrument. The pipettor, and the
plastic tubing that connects it to the sample probe,
are filled with degassed, deionized water.
The pipettor motor retracts the plunger within the
chamber of the pipettor, and sample is aspirated into
the tip of the sample probe.
1.3.6 Sample Probe Rinse Station
The sample probe rinse station is located between the
sample disk and reaction disk. When sampling is
completed for a particular sample, the sample probe
arm moves back into position above the rinse station.
Water is flushed inside the probe and onto the outer
surface of the probe tip before aspirating the next
sample. This rinse removes excess sample adhering
to the inside or outside of the probe.
1.3.7 Sampling System Flowpath
Figure 1-7 diagrams the sampling system flowpath.
Figure 1-7: Sampling System Flowpath Diagram
Photograph 1-2: Sample Pipettor
1. INTRODUCTION
1.3 Sampling System
DI water tank
Pump
Degasser
Filter
Solenoid
valve
Sample syringe
Sample
Sample probe
(also serving as liquid
level sensor)
S.V
1 21
1.3.8 Sample Container Sizes
The table below lists the various size sample
containers that can be used on the 911 system. The
different tube sizes can be used in the same run.
Sample and micro cups can be used in the same run.
Standard 2.0 mL Hitachi Sample Cup
Micro 1.5 mL Hitachi Sample Cup
Standard 2.0 mL Hitachi Sample Cup on Primary
Sample Tube
Micro Hitachi Sample Cup on Primary Sample
Tube
16 mm x 100 mm Primary Sample Tube
1. INTRODUCTION
1.3 Sampling System
1 22
1.4 Reagent System
1.4.1 Introduction
The Reagent System consists of two reagent disks,
two reagent pipettors that aspirate reagent into
corresponding reagent probes, and two reagent
probe rinse stations.
1.4.2 Reagent Disks
Reagent containers are stored on the instrument in
two identical reagent disks, labelled R1 and R2. As
shown in Figure 1-8, each reagent disk contains 33
positions. Position 33 on each disk is used for the
reaction bath detergent, Hitergent. This allows for 32
reagents on each disk. The reagent compartments
are refrigerated.
Each reagent disk has a locking cover that helps
prevent evaporation of reagents. A cutaway section in
each cover allows the reagent probe access to
aspirate reagent.
When the instrument is ready to add reagent to a
reaction cell, the appropriate reagent disk rotates,
bringing the required reagent container into position at
the reagent aspiration station.
Figure 1-8: Reagent Disk
1. INTRODUCTION
1.4 Reagent System
16
15
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3
1
3
0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
1
8
17
1 23
1.4.3 Reagent Probes
The reagent probes (R1 and R2) carry reagent from the
reagent disks to the reaction cells. The reagent
probes are mounted to reagent probe arms. The
reagent probes also act as liquid level sensors,
signaling the computer when the reagent probe tip is
immersed in reagent (or if no reagent is present). The
second reagent probe is used to add additional
reagent to the reaction cell at various dispense times,
depending on the reaction.
1.4.4 Reagent Probe Arms
The reagent probes are mounted on motor-driven
reagent probe arms. After the reagent container is in
position at the reagent aspiration station, the reagent
probe arm moves the reagent probe from its home
position to the reagent disk and lowers the probe into
the reagent container. After the reagent probe detects
reagent, the instrument stops lowering the probe, and
reagent is aspirated.
After reagent has been aspirated, the probe moves
from the reagent container to the reaction disk, where
reagent is dispensed into a reaction cell containing
patient sample. Unlike the sample probe, the reagent
probes are not lowered into the reaction cell. Reagent
is dispensed from the top of the reaction cell.
Photograph 1-3: Reagent Probes
Photograph 1-4: Reagent Needles
1. INTRODUCTION
1.4 Reagent System
1 24
1.4.5 Reagent Pipettors
The reagent pipettors (shown in Photograph 1-5) are
positive-displacement pipettors, positioned behind
the left front cover of the instrument. The pipettors, and
the plastic tubing connecting them to the reagent
probes, are filled with degassed, deionized water.
When the reagent probe tips are immersed in reagent,
the reagent pipettor motors retract the plungers within
the chamber of the pi pettors,
and reagent is aspirated into the reagent probes.
After the reagent probes are in position above the
reaction disk, the pipettor motors are reversed, and
reagent is dispensed into the reaction cell. Following
reagent dispense, the reagent probes are moved to the
reagent probe rinse stations.
1.4.6 Reagent Probe Rinse Stations
Reagent probe rinse stations are located between the
reaction disk and the reagent disks. After each
reagent dispense, water is flushed through the probes
and onto their outside surfaces.
1.4.7 Stirring Units
The stirring units (shown in Photograph 1-6) consist
of two slender stirring paddles, the motors that spin
the paddles, and the motor that moves the stirring
paddles to and from the reaction disk.
Following the addition of each reagent to a reaction
cell, the reaction disk pauses with that reaction cell in
position next to the stirring units. The stirring units
move from their home position to the reaction disk,
and the stirring paddles are lowered into the reaction
cells. After the paddles are fully lowered into the cells,
the stirring motors are briefly activated to mix the
contents of the reaction cells. The stirring units then
are lifted from the reaction cells, and returned to their
original positions where they are thoroughly rinsed
with deionized water.
Photograph 1-5: Reagent Pipettors
Photograph 1-6: Stirring Units
1. INTRODUCTION
1.4 Reagent System
1 25
1.4.8 Reagent Flowpath
Figure 1-9 diagrams the reagent system flowpath.
Figure 1-9: Reagent System Flowpath Diagram
1. INTRODUCTION
1.4 Reagent System
DI water tank
Pump
Degasser
Filter
Solenoid
valve
Reagent pipetting syringe
Sample probe
(also serving as liquid
level sensor)
S.V
Reagent bottle
1 26
1.5 Photometric Measuring
System
1.5.1 Introduction
All photometric tests are measured by the
photometer. The photometer is located adjacent to
the reaction disk. The photometric measuring
system detects color or turbidity change produced by
chemical reactions between reagents and the analyte
of interest in the sample while in the reaction cells.
The photometric measuring system is capable of
bichromatic photometry of endpoint, kinetic,
ultraviolet, and visible light chemistry determinations.
Figure 1-10: Photometric Measuring System
1 Sample Probe
2 Reagent Probes
3 Stirring Units
1.5.2 Reaction Disk
The reaction disk is a large rotatable disk holding 120
reusable plastic reaction cells (cuvettes) upright
around the outside perimeter of the disk. These cells
are immersed in an incubated reaction bath. This
maintains the cells at 37 C, an optimal temperature
for the chemical reactions occurring in the cells. The
reaction disk rotates to transport the cells to all
reaction processing stations including the photometer
lightpath.
The components listed below in Figure 1-10 are
positioned around the reaction disk and are necessary
for photometric reaction processing:
4 Photometer
5 Cell Rinse Unit
1. INTRODUCTION
1.5 Photometric Measuring System
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
^
^
'
1 27
1.5.3 Reaction Bath
The circular reaction bath, positioned beneath the
reaction disk, maintains the reaction mixtures in the
reaction cells at a temperature of 37 C. Water in the
reaction bath is circulated by a pump through a
refrigeration unit and heater where it is cooled or
heated, as necessary, to maintain temperature ( 0.1
C). The DI water storage tank contains water that is
heated to the temperature of the reaction bath. This
ensures a consistent supply of heated water for the
rinsing processes.
Two glass windows (inner and outer) are positioned in
opposite walls of the incubation bath. These windows
permit light from the photometer lamp to pass through
the reaction bath water, and through the reaction cells
in the bath. The light beam emerges from the outer
window of the reaction bath and enters the instrument
photometer.
Figure 1-11: Reaction Bath
A liquid level sensor detects the water level of the bath.
Deionized water is automatically added to the reaction
bath, as determined by the liquid level sensor, to
compensate for evaporation. This occurs even in
Stand-by. In addition, the entire incubation bath water
volume is automatically replaced with fresh deionized
water each time the instrument is powered up and
during Wake-Up
TM
.
Figure 1-11 shows a cutaway view of the reaction bath
unit:
1. INTRODUCTION
Photometer
Cooling Unit
Pump
Solenoid
Valve
Cooling Tube
Windows
Reaction Cells
Reaction Disk
Reaction Bath
Lamp
Heater
1 28
1.5.4 Hitergent
Hitergent is a non-ionic, bacteriostatic detergent
automatically added to the reaction bath by the
reagent probes whenever the water is exchanged. It
acts as a surfactant to minimize the formation of
bubbles that could potentially interfere with the
photometer readings.
1.5.5 Photometer
The photometer is positioned so that absorbance
readings of each reaction cell are taken as the reaction
disk is turning. This arrangement enables the
instrument to read the absorbance of each reaction
cell as frequently as once every 20 seconds.
The photometer lamp is positioned beneath the center
of the reaction disk, within the ring of the reaction
bath, as shown in Photograph 1-7. The lamp is
encased in a constant-temperature water jacket ,
which helps to maintain a constant energy output from
the lamp, and also extends the lamp life.
After the reaction mixture is stirred and incubated, the
absorbance of the reaction mixture is measured by
the photometer, and the results are calculated from
those readings.
Photograph 1-7: Photometer Position
1. INTRODUCTION
1 29
Instrument parameter information for each assay is
programmed into the instrument computer. The
computer uses the parameter i nformati on
programmed to select the wavelengths and the times
at which a reaction mixtures absorbance is read and
to calculate results.
The instrument computer keeps track of which test is
being performed in each reaction cell. It also knows
when each reaction cell passes through the
photometer light path. The computer uses this
tracking ability and the programmed read instructions
to obtain test results.
1. INTRODUCTION
Boehringer Mannheim/Hitachi Photometric System
The light from the photometer lamp passes through the
following structures in sequence:
1) Inner reaction bath window
2) Reaction bath water
3) Reaction cell and its contents
4) Reaction bath water
5) Outer reaction bath window
6) Photometer.
When the light beam enters the photometer, it strikes
a diffraction grating. This separates the light into its
constituent wavelengths, and reflects them onto a
fixed array of 12 photodetectors. Each photodetector
is permanently positioned to detect light at a different
wavelength. Figure 1-12 shows a cutaway of the
photometer light path.
Figure 1-12: Photomer Light Path
The above system has no moving parts; thus,
accuracy and precision are improved.
Monochromatic
Wavelenghts
of Light
Cuvette
Lens Lens
Polychromatic Light
Photometer
Lamp
(Water cooled -
increases
stability and life)
Polychromatic Light
Less Percentage
Absorbed
Diffraction
Grating
Array of
Photodetectors
(3 of 12 for clarity)
Wavelengths
focused onto
seperate
photodetectors.
Ability to measure
simultaneously
at several
wavelenghts.
(e.g. Bichromatics)
1 30
1.6 Cell Rinse System
1.6.1 Cell Rinse Unit
As shown in Photograph 1-8, the reaction cell rinse
unit consists of a series of nozzles mounted above one
side of the reaction disk. The nozzles are connected
to vacuum lines and deionized water supply lines. The
reaction cell rinse unit performs the following
functions:
removes reaction mixture waste from reaction cells
rinses reaction cells with Multiclean
rinses reaction cells with DI water
aspirates rinse water from reaction cells
dispenses deionized water into reaction cells for
photometric cell blanking
aspirates water from reaction cells after
photometric cell blanking
dries inside walls of reaction cells prior to sample
dispense.
These functions occur as part of the instruments
routine operation. Each reaction cell is thoroughly
cleaned after final absorbance measurement of a
reaction mixture. The reaction cell integrity is
checked prior to reusing the cell for additional patient
samples.
1.6.2 Water Supply
The reaction cell rinse unit, shown in Photograph
1-8, uses the deionized water supply and the internal
vacuum system. The deionized water supply system
consists of the deionized water reservoir, located in
the rear of the analyzer, and a series of pumps and
electronic valves. Water is supplied to the reaction cell
rinse unit directly from the deionized water reservoir.
Water is automatically added to the reservoir when
necessary.
Water from this source is also supplied to the probe
and stirring unit rinse baths and to the reaction bath.
Photograph 1-8: Cell Rinse Unit
1.6.3 Vaccum System
The vacuum system consists of a vacuum pump,
vacuum reservoir, and sample waste container. The
vacuum system is used by the reaction cell rinse unit
to aspirate reaction mixture waste and reaction cell
rinse water. Reaction mixture waste drains into the
reaction waste container. Reaction cell rinse water is
removed from the instrument through the main drain
line. The vacuum system is located in the rear of the
analyzer and should be accessed only by your
Boehringer Mannheim representative.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.6 Cell Rinse System
1 31
1.7 ISE System
1.7.1 Introduction
Figure 1-13: ISE Flowpath
1. INTRODUCTION
1.7 ISE System
Dilution
Vessel
SIP
Syringe
IS
Syringe
DIL
Syringe
Drain
Drain
Sipper
Degasser
Ref K Na Cl
Pinch
Valve
LS2 LS1
IS
(600 mL)
DIL
(300 mL)
REF
(300 mL)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
I
S
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
D
I
L
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
R
E
F
)
Vacuum
37 C Water
For
Preheat
ISE Unit
0
6
O O O
O O
O
1 32
The ISE (Ion Selective Electrode) System provides
the instrument with an electronic method for assaying
sodium, potassium, and chloride samples. As shown
in Figure 1-13, the ISE unit consists of: a sample
dilution vessel positioned above and to the left of the
sample disk (1); three pipettors (diluent dispense (2)),
internal reference dispense (3), and sipper (4); a
temperature controlled measuring assembly (three
measuring cartridges (5), and a reference cartridge
(6)); a vacuum system (to remove waste) (7); and a
degasser for KCl reagent and diluent (8). ISE reagents
are stored on top of the analyzer, to the rear of the
reaction disk.
1.7.2 ISE Calibration
Electrolyte calibration is based on a 3-point
measurement. This establishes that an acceptable
slope is generated when known samples (aqueous
standards) are analyzed with a serum-based
calibrator to compensate for aqueous-protein matrix
differences.
1.7.3 ISE Sample Aspiration
When electrolytes are requested, sample (15 L) is
aspirated by the sample probe, and the probe moves
to the ISE dilution vessel.
1.7.4 Sample Dispense and Dilution
Sample is dispensed, then ISE diluent (450 L) is
pipetted into the ISE dilution vessel. The ISE unit
dilutes the sample 1:31. The diluted sample flows
through the K
+
, Na
+
, and Cl
-
cartridges and stops so
that an electrical voltage can be measured. The
diluted sample is transported through the ISE
measuring cartridges by the "sipper" syringe or
pipettor.
1.7.5 ISE Measurement Flowpath
The diluted sample stops inside the three (sodium,
potassium, and chloride) measuring cartridges. After
equilibration, the electrical potential in the cartridges
is measured. This potential is compared to the
potential generated in a reference cartridge and the
signals are sent to a computer for calculation and
conversion to the result units indicative of the amount
of electrolyte in the sample. After measurement, the
diluted sample is drawn from the cartridges through
the sipper syringe to the waste container.
1.7.6 Rinse
After the residual sample is aspirated through the
vacuum nozzle, the inside of the dilution vessel is
rinsed with the internal reference solution.
1.7.7 Internal Reference Solution
Before each sample measurement, the internal
reference solution is aspirated into the measurement
flowpath and a single-point calibration is performed. If
this calibration does not compare to the previous
calibration within certain specifications, an alarm is
issued.
1. INTRODUCTION
1.7 ISE System
1 33
1.8 Operational Modes
1.8.1 Introduction
While the instrument is ON, it is in one of several
operational states, or modes. The current operational
mode appears at the upper left corner of the CRT, and
it reflects instrument activity. It is important to
consider the operational mode of the instrument
because certain functions may only be performed
while the instrument is in a specific mode. For
example, while the instrument is in the Operate mode,
maintenance functions cannot be requested.
An overview of the functions occurring in each mode is
provided in the following sections.
1.8.2 Initialization
The Initialization mode begins when the instrument is
powered ON. During this period, system parameter
information is automatically read into computer
memory from the System disk, and various
mechanisms are synchronized and readied to perform
functions as instructed by the operator. During
Initialization:
incubation bath water is exchanged
Hitergent is added to the bath
an air purge is performed
reagent registration takes place.
Computer-directed functions cannot be requested
during the Initialization mode.
When instrument parameters have been read into
instrument memory, the prompt JOB STATUS KEY?
appears on the CRT display, the instrument
completes the initialization process and enters the
Stand-by mode.
1.8.3 Stand-by
Stand-by is defined as a waiting mode; the instrument
is ready to perform functions, as requested. This is the
usual mode of the instrument, when not in Operate.
1.8.4 Parameter Check
Parameter Check is a momentary state which occurs
when the START key is pressed to place the
instrument into Operate. During this time, the
instrument computer checks internal parameters to
ensure that no abnormal conditions exist.
1.8.5 Reset
Immediately following Parameter Check, the
instrument enters Reset, during which it resets all
mechanisms to verify proper alignment and
synchronization prior to entering Operate. This state
is transitional and lasts less than one minute.
1.8.6 Operate
The Operate mode the state during which the
instrument processes samples. This includes the
time after the instrument has passed through
Parameter Check and Reset, when the instrument is
preparing reaction cells for sample dispense. After the
instrument has sampled and dispensed all specimens
programmed by the operator, it automatically leaves
the Operate mode and enters the Sampling Stop
mode.
1. INTRODUCTION
1 34
1.8.7 Sampling Stop
Sampling Stop is the time period after the instrument
has sampled and dispensed all specimens
programmed, and before all reaction processing is
completed. When the instrument enters this mode, a
NO MORE SAMPLES TO PROCESS alarm is issued.
You may instruct the instrument to enter this state by
pressing the SAMPLING STOP key. This can be
done to stop sampling without terminating the reaction
processing already in progress.
The Sampling Stop mode is terminated after all results
have been printed and all reaction cells have been
cleaned by the cell rinse unit. At that time, the
instrument enters the Probe Wash mode.
1.8.8 Probe Wash
While the analyzer is performing the probe wash
following the end of a run, the status line displays
Probe Wash. The analyzer goes immediately to the
Stop mode after the probe wash is completed.
1.8.9 Stop
When the instrument completes all sample
processing and cell cleaning, it enters the Stop mode.
This mode is transitional, and remains in effect for
less than one minute. Following the Stop mode, the
instrument enters Stand-by.
1.8.10 Sleep
The instrument is put in the Sleep mode from the
STATUS SETTING screen. This mode is similar to
power OFFexcept that the CPU remains on.
1.8.11 Wake Up
When the time programmed from the STATUS
SETTING screen for the instrument to resume daily
activities or "wake up" arrives, the instrument enters
the Wake Up mode. In this mode the instrument
performs the same functions as during Initialization
(except program loading from the system disk) and
then enters Stand-by.
1.8.12 Stat Stand-by
When the Stat Reception Mode is requested from the
STATUS SETTING screen, the analyzer prepares 12
pre-blanked reaction cells so that they are ready for
immediate use. The analyzer automatically updates
the ISE calibration by running the internal standard
once every 10 minutes. In this way the analyzer can
process stat samples without the time delay
associated with the reset that occurs prior to routine
sample processing. After Stat Reception has been
requested, the analyzer remains in the Stat Stand-by
mode until a stat sample run is initiated. The analyzer
then returns to Stat Stand-by when the stat sample
run is completed. The analyzer remains in Stat
Stand-by until Stat Reception is cancelled, it is
placed in the Sleep mode, or is powered OFF.
1.8.13 Stat Operation
The analyzer enters this mode after a stat sample is
requested from the Stat Stand-by mode. When
processing is complete, the analyzer returns to the
Stat Stand-by mode.
1.8.14 Check
This mode indicates that a maintenance function is
being performed.
1. INTRODUCTION
1 35
1.9 Operational Flow
1.9.1 Daily Check
The Daily Check entails procedures performed before
applying power to the instrument. If the instrument is
used 24 hours a day, these procedures should be
performed once every day, preferably before the bulk
of daily processing.
Has bath exchange been performed?
Is the water supply on (from external supply)?
Is the Hitergent supply sufficient?
Is the Multiclean supply sufficient?
Are the system and data disks in drives?
Is paper supply adequate?
Is sample waste container empty?
1.9.2 Power Up/Start Up
If not already ON, place on/off switch in "on"
position
Check the REAGENT STATUS screen for
sufficient reagent volume and outdated reagents
Perform data clear (if desired)
Perform patient test selection clear (if desired)
1.9.3 Calibrators and Controls
Print calibration load list
Select additional tests to be calibrated, if desired
Select additional controls, if desired (Note:
controls are automatically performed following
calibration)
Load calibrators and controls on sample disk
Load System Cleaning Solution in "W1" and "W2"
positions on sample disk
1.9.4 Patient Test Selection
Select tests if they are not downloaded from a host
computer
Load patient samples onto sample disk
1.9.5 Start Conditions Screen
Specify start sample number
Request Start-up calibration, if desired
Verify operating conditions in remaining fields
1.9.6 Begin Operation
OPERATION MONITOR screen: no alarm
messages
Press START key
1.9.7 Results
Results are test dependent due to variable
incubation times and available when completed by
viewing the REAL TIME DATA MONITOR screen.
Results are printed and transferred to host when all
tests for that sample are completed.
1.9.8 Additional Runs
Samples may be added anytime during the run.
Additional runs may be performed, as necessary.
1. INTRODUCTION
1 36
1.9.9 Daily Maintenance
Daily maintenance should be performed once every
24 hours. For procedural instructions, refer to
Chapter 3, Maintenance.
1. INTRODUCTION
1 37
1.10 Instrument Specifications
1.10.1 Introduction
The following specifications apply to the Boehringer
Mannheim/Hitachi 911 Analyzer.
1.10.2 Dimensions
1.10.3 Electrical
100/115/127/220/230/240 V AC 10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption: 2kVA max. (actual: 1,9 kVA)
Heat Generated: 6700 Btu/hour; 1670 Kcal/h
Rush Current: 420 A for 10 msec max.
Leakage Current: 0,5 mA max. (actual: 0,06 mA)
1.10.4 Interface
ASCII, serial, asynchronous, EIA/RS 232C
compatible, bidirectional (standard)
1.10.5 Test Modes
Monochromatic
Bichromatic
Endpoint
Endpoint with sample blanking
Kinetic
Kinetic with sample blanking
Simultaneous endpoint and kinetic
Simultaneous double endpoint and double kinetic
1.10.6 Control System
Central Processing Unit (CPU):
68A09 8 Bit Microprocessor
Floppy Disk:
3.5 inch
Drive 1 (bottom): System Program
Drive 2 (top): Data Storage, Application disk
1.10.7 ISE System
Sample volume:
15 L
Throughput:
180 samples/hour (ISE only)
Measurement range (Serum):
Sodium: 80 - 180 mmol/L
Potassium: 1.5 - 10.0 mmol/L
Chloride: 60 - 140 mmol/L
1. INTRODUCTION
Analyzer Unit Control Unit
Weight 310 kg
50 kg
Width 102 cm 48 cm
Depth 77 cm 65 cm
Height 117 cm 126 cm
1 38
1.10.8 Sampling System
Sample volume per test:
3 to 50 L (2 to 50 L with predilution)
Sampling rate:
Once every 10 seconds for photometric chemistries;
once every 20 seconds for ISEs
Throughput rate:
Tests/hour
- photometric 360
- ISEs included 720
Bar Code Reader Formats:
Codabar, Interleaf 2 of 5, Code 39, Code 128
1.10.9 Reagent System
Total reaction volume/test:
250 to 500 L
Reagent dispense volume:
25 to 350 L per reagent (in 1 L increments)
Reagent storage:
Two compartments (12
C or less) 32 positions each,

for reagent. Each reagent compartment has an
additional position #33 for Hitergent.
1.10.10 Measuring System
(photometric)
Light source:
Tungsten-halogen lamp
Detector:
Gradient photometer with discrete photodiodes in
fixed array
Wavelengths:12 fixed; 340 2 nm, 376, 415, 450,
480, 505, 546, 570, 600, 660, 700, and 800 nm 5 nm
Lightpath:
0.6 cm 0.02 cm
Photometric linearity:
2.500 absorbance at all wavelengths
1.10.11 Miscellaneous
Water Requirement:
20 - 30 liters of bacteria-free water per hour during
operation.
Minimum resistance: 1.5 megohm
Flow: 80 - 100 liters per hour
Pressure: 15 - 25 psi
Incubation Bath:
Circulating incubation bath 37
C 0.1
C
Reaction Cells (cuvettes):
120 semi-disposable cuvettes
WARNING
The sealed refrigeration system contains CFC 12
which is believed to be an ozone damaging substance.
Refer all work on cooling system to a suitable qualified
engineer.
1. INTRODUCTION
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2. OPERATIONS
PART A - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
2.1 Daily Operating Check ............................................................................... 2 1
2.1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 2 1
2.1.2 Check Hitergent Supply ...................................................................................................... 2 1
2.1.3 Check Waste Solution Reservoir........................................................................................ 2 2
2.1.4 Check Detergent Bottle ....................................................................................................... 2 2
2.1.5 Check Paper Supply ........................................................................................................... 2 2
2.1.6 Check Floppy Disk Placement............................................................................................ 2 3
2.1.7 Check Water Supply ........................................................................................................... 2 3
2.1.8 Main Circuit Breaker ........................................................................................................... 2 3
2.1.9 Power ON............................................................................................................................. 2 4
2.2 Daily Start-Up .............................................................................................. 2 5
2.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 2 5
2.2.2 Operational Precautions..................................................................................................... 2 5
2.2.3 Initialization Mode .............................................................................................................. 2 5
2.2.4 Reconstitute Calibrators and Controls ............................................................................... 2 6
2.2.5 Reagent Status Check......................................................................................................... 2 6
2.2.6 Photometer Check............................................................................................................... 2 7
2.2.7 Test Specific Information.................................................................................................... 2 8
2.2.8 Demographic Considerations ............................................................................................. 2 8
2.3 Calibration................................................................................................... 2 9
2.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................................. 2 9
2.3.2 Calibration Procedure ........................................................................................................ 2 9
2.4 Control Test Selection.............................................................................. 2 11
2.4.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 11
2.4.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 11
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 13
2.5.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 13
2.5.3 Example of Requisition List ............................................................................................... 2 14
2.6 Routine Patient Test Selection With Bar Code Reader .......................... 2 15
2.6.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 15
2.6.2 Manual Entry....................................................................................................................... 2 15
2.6.3 Real Time Downloading From Host Computer ................................................................ 2 16
2.7 Initiate Run ................................................................................................ 2 17
2.7.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 17
2.7.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 17
2.8.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 20
2.8.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 20
2.9 Measurement of Additional Routine Samples ........................................ 2 22
2.9.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 22
2.9.2 Procedure without Bar Code Reader ............................................................................... 2 22
2.9.3 Procedure with Bar Code Reader ..................................................................................... 2 22
2.10 Rerun Sample Processing ....................................................................... 2 24
2.10.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 24
2.10.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 24
2.5 Routine Patient Test Selection Without Bar Code Reader .................... 2 13
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.11 Within-Run Recalibration ......................................................................... 2 27
2.11.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 27
2.11.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 27
2.11.3 Rerun Calibration ............................................................................................................... 2 27
2.12 Data Editing............................................................................................... 2 28
2.12.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 28
2.12.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 28
2.13 Quality Control Procedures ..................................................................... 2 29
2.13.1 Daily QC Results ................................................................................................................. 2 29
2.14 QC File Maintenance................................................................................. 2 30
2.14.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 30
2.14.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 2 30
2.15 Patient Reports ......................................................................................... 2 32
2.15.1 Real Time Printout of Patient Results............................................................................... 2 32
2.15.2 Edit Patient Reports ...........................................................................................................2 32
PART B - CRT SCREEN DISPLAYS
2.16 Overview.................................................................................................... 2 33
2.16.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 33
2.16.2 Entry Fields ......................................................................................................................... 2 33
2.16.3 Field and Prompt Explanations ........................................................................................ 2 33
2.16.4 Entry Prompts ..................................................................................................................... 2 33
2.16.5 How to Clear Entry Errors .................................................................................................. 2 33
2.16.6 Screen Configuration ......................................................................................................... 2 34
2.16.7 Initialization Screen........................................................................................................... 2 35
2.17 Operation Monitor ..................................................................................... 2 36
2.17.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 36
2.17.2 Displaying OPERATION MONITOR - - Page 1 ................................................................... 2 36
2.17.3 Example of OPERATION MONITOR - - Page 1.................................................................. 2 36
2.17.4 OPERATION MONITOR Fields and Prompts - - Page 1 .................................................... 2 36
2.17.5 Displaying OPERATION MONITOR - - Page 2 ................................................................... 2 38
2.17.6 Example of OPERATION MONITOR - - Page 2.................................................................. 2 38
2.17.7 OPERATION MONITOR Fields and Prompts - - Page 2 .................................................... 2 39
2.18 Routine Job - - Menu ................................................................................ 2 40
2.18.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 40
2.18.2 Displaying the ROUTINE JOB MENU ................................................................................. 2 40
2.18.3 Example of the ROUTINE JOB MENU ................................................................................ 2 40
2.18.4 ROUTINE JOB MENU Fields and Prompts ......................................................................... 2 40
2.19 Routine Job - - Reagent Status................................................................ 2 41
2.19.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 41
2.19.2 Displaying the REAGENT STATUS Screen - - Page 1 ...................................................... 2 41
2.19.3 Example of the REAGENT STATUS Screen - - Page 1..................................................... 2 41
2.19.4 REAGENT STATUS Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1.............................................. 2 42
2.19.5 Displaying the REAGENT STATUS Screen - - Page 2 ...................................................... 2 45
2.19.6 Example of the REAGENT STATUS Screen - - Page 2..................................................... 2 45
2.19.7 REAGENT STATUS Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2.............................................. 2 45
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.20 Routine Job - - Calibration Test Selection .............................................. 2 49
2.20.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 49
2.20.2 Displaying the CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 1 ............................... 2 49
2.20.3 Example of the CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 1.............................. 2 49
2.20.4 CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1....................... 2 50
2.20.5 Displaying the CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 2 ............................... 2 51
2.20.6 Example of the CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 2.............................. 2 51
2.20.7 CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2....................... 2 51
2.21 Routine Job - - Patient Test Selection Without Bar Code Reader ........ 2 53
2.21.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 53
2.21.2 Displaying the PATIENT TEST SELECTION Screen Without Bar Code Reader ............. 2 53
2.21.3 Example of the PATIENT TEST SELECTION Screen Without Bar Code Reader ........... 2 53
2.21.4 PATIENT TEST SELECTION Without Bar Code Reader Fields and Prompts ................. 2 53
2.22 Routine Job - - Patient Test Selection With Bar Code Reader .............. 2 58
2.22.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 58
2.22.2 Displaying the PATIENT TEST SELECTION Sreen With Bar Code Reader .................... 2 58
2.22.3 Example of the PATIENT TEST SELECTION Screen With Bar Code Reader ................. 2 58
2.22.4 PATIENT TEST SELECTION With Bar Code Reader Fields and Prompts....................... 2 58
2.23 Routine Job - - Start Conditions .............................................................. 2 62
2.23.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 62
2.23.2 Displaying the START CONDITIONS Screen .................................................................... 2 62
2.23.3 Example of the START CONDITIONS Screen................................................................... 2 62
2.23.4 START CONDITIONS Screen Fields and Prompts............................................................ 2 63
2.24 Routine Job - - Real Time Data Monitor .................................................. 2 68
2.24.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 68
2.24.2 Displaying the REAL TIME DATA MONITOR Screen ........................................................ 2 68
2.24.3 Example of the REAL TIME DATA MONITOR Screen....................................................... 2 68
2.24.4 REAL TIME DATA MONITOR Screen Fields and Prompts................................................ 2 68
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.25 Routine Job - - Data Review .................................................................... 2 70
2.25.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 70
2.25.2 Displaying the DATA REVIEW Screen - - Page 1 ............................................................. 2 70
2.25.3 Example of the DATA REVIEW Screen - - Page 1 ............................................................ 2 70
2.25.4 DATA REVIEW Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1 ..................................................... 2 71
2.25.5 Displaying the DATA REVIEW Screen - - Page 2 ............................................................. 2 71
2.25.6 Example of the DATA REVIEW Screen - - Page 2 ............................................................ 2 72
2.25.7 DATA REVIEW Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2 ..................................................... 2 72
2.26 Routine Job - - Rerun Samples................................................................ 2 76
2.26.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 76
2.26.2 Displaying the RERUN SAMPLES Screen - - Page 1 ........................................................ 2 76
2.26.3 Example of the RERUN SAMPLES Screen - - Page 1 ...................................................... 2 76
2.26.4 RERUN SAMPLES Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1 ............................................... 2 77
2.26.5 Displaying the RERUN SAMPLES Screen - - Page 2 ........................................................ 2 78
2.26.6 Example of the RERUN SAMPLES Screen - - Page 2 ...................................................... 2 78
2.26.7 RERUN SAMPLES Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2 ............................................... 2 79
2.27 Routine Job - - Status Setting .................................................................. 2 80
2.27.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 80
2.27.2 Displaying the STATUS SETTING Screen......................................................................... 2 80
2.27.3 Example of the STATUS SETTING Screen ....................................................................... 2 80
2.27.4 STATUS SETTING Screen Fields and Prompts ................................................................ 2 80
2.28 Stat Reception .......................................................................................... 2 83
2.28.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 83
2.28.2 Displaying the STAT RECEPTION Screen......................................................................... 2 83
2.28.3 Example of the STAT RECEPTION Screen ....................................................................... 2 83
2.28.4 Explanation of the STAT RECEPTION Screen.................................................................. 2 83
2.29.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 84
2.29.2 Displaying the STAT TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 1 .............................................. 2 84
2.29.3 Example of the STAT TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 1 ............................................ 2 84
2.29.4 STAT TEST SELECTION Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1 ..................................... 2 85
2.29.5 Displaying the STAT TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 2 .............................................. 2 86
2.29.6 Example of the STAT TEST SELECTION Screen - - Page 2 ............................................ 2 87
2.29.7 STAT TEST SELECTION Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2 ..................................... 2 87
2.30 Quality Control Job - - Menu .................................................................... 2 89
2.30.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 89
2.30.2 Displaying the QC JOB MENU............................................................................................ 2 89
2.30.3 Example of the QC JOB MENU .......................................................................................... 2 89
2.30.4 QC JOB MENU Fields and Prompts ................................................................................... 2 89
2.31 Quality Control Job - - Real Time QC....................................................... 2 90
2.31.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 90
2.31.2 Displaying the REAL TIME QC Screen .............................................................................. 2 90
2.31.3 Example of the REAL TIME QC Screen ............................................................................ 2 90
2.31.4 REAL TIME QC Screen Fields and Prompts ..................................................................... 2 91
2.32 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC Monitor ......................................... 2 93
2.32.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 93
2.32.2 Displaying the INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR Screen ........................................................... 2 93
2.32.3 Example of the INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR Screen.......................................................... 2 93
2.32.4 INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR Screen Fields and Prompts................................................... 2 93
2.33 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC List ................................................ 2 96
2.33.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 96
2.33.2 Displaying the INDIVIDUAL QC LIST Screen.................................................................... 2 96
2.33.3 Example of the INDIVIDUAL QC LIST Screen .................................................................. 2 96
2.33.4 INDIVIDUAL QC LIST Screen Fields and Prompts ........................................................... 2 96
2.34 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC Chart............................................. 2 99
2.34.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 2 99
2.34.2 Displaying the INDIVIDUAL QC CHART Screen ................................................................ 2 99
2.34.3 Example of the INDIVIDUAL QC CHART Screen .............................................................. 2 99
2.34.4 INDIVIDUAL QC CHART Screen Fields and Prompts ....................................................... 2 99
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.35 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC Monitor .................................... 2 101
2.35.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 101
2.35.2 Displaying the CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR Screen....................................................... 2 101
2.35.3 Example of the CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR Screen ..................................................... 2 101
2.35.4 CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR Screen Fields and Prompts .............................................. 2 101
2.36 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC List ........................................... 2 104
2.36.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 104
2.36.2 Displaying the CUMULATIVE QC LIST Screen ............................................................... 2 104
2.36.3 Example of the CUMULATIVE QC LIST Screen.............................................................. 2 104
2.36.4 CUMULATIVE QC LIST Screen Fields and Prompts....................................................... 2 104
2.37 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC Chart ........................................ 2 106
2.37.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 106
2.37.2 Displaying the CUMULATIVE QC CHART Screen ........................................................... 2 106
2.37.3 Example of the CUMULATIVE QC CHART Screen.......................................................... 2 106
2.37.4 CUMULATIVE QC CHART Screen Fields and Prompts................................................... 2 106
2.38 Data Monitor Job - - Menu ...................................................................... 2 108
2.38.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 108
2.38.2 Displaying the DATA MONITOR JOB MENU .................................................................... 2 108
2.38.3 Example of the DATA MONITOR JOB MENU .................................................................. 2 108
2.38.4 DATA MONITOR JOB MENU Fields and Prompts ........................................................... 2 108
2.39 Data Monitor Job - - Reaction Monitor .................................................. 2 109
2.39.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 109
2.39.2 Displaying the REACTION MONITOR Screen.................................................................. 2 109
2.39.3 Example of the REACTION MONITOR Screen ................................................................ 2 110
2.39.4 REACTION MONITOR Screen Fields and Prompts ......................................................... 2 110
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.40 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration Trace .................................................. 2 112
2.40.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 112
2.40.2 Displaying the CALIBRATION TRACE Screen ................................................................ 2 112
2.40.3 Example of the CALIBRATION TRACE Screen ............................................................... 2 112
2.40.4 CALIBRATION TRACE Screen Fields and Prompts ........................................................ 2 112
2.41 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration List ...................................................... 2 114
2.41.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 114
2.41.2 Displaying the CALIBRATION LIST Screen .................................................................... 2 114
2.41.3 Example of the CALIBRATION LIST Screen................................................................... 2 114
2.41.4 CALIBRATION LIST Screen Fields and Prompts............................................................ 2 114
2.42 Data Monitor Job - - ISE Calibration Monitor ........................................ 2 116
2.42.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 116
2.42.2 Displaying the ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR Screen ..................................................... 2 116
2.42.3 Example of the ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR Screen ................................................... 2 116
2.42.4 ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR Screen Fields and Prompts ............................................ 2 116
2.43 Data Monitor Job - - Working Curve ...................................................... 2 118
2.43.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 118
2.43.2 Displaying the WORKING CURVE Screen....................................................................... 2 118
2.43.3 Example of the WORKING CURVE Screen ..................................................................... 2 118
2.43.4 WORKING CURVE Screen Fields and Prompts .............................................................. 2 118
2.44 Parameter Job - - Menu .......................................................................... 2 120
2.44.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 120
2.44.2 Displaying the PARAMETER JOB MENU ......................................................................... 2 120
2.44.3 Example of the PARAMETER JOB MENU........................................................................ 2 120
2.44.4 PARAMETER JOB MENU Fields and Prompts................................................................. 2 120
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.45 Parameter Job - - Chemistry Parameters .............................................. 2 121
2.45.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 121
2.45.2 Displaying the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 1....................................... 2 121
2.45.3 Example of the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 1 ..................................... 2 122
2.45.4 CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1 .............................. 2 122
2.45.5 Displaying the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 2....................................... 2 127
2.45.6 Example of the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 2 ..................................... 2 128
2.45.7 CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2 .............................. 2 128
2.46 Parameter Job - - Profiling ..................................................................... 2 136
2.46.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 136
2.46.2 Displaying the PROFILING Screen.................................................................................. 2 136
2.46.3 Example of the PROFILING Screen ................................................................................ 2 136
2.46.4 PROFILING Screen Fields and Prompts ......................................................................... 2 136
2.47 Parameter Job - - Calculated Test ......................................................... 2 138
2.47.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 138
2.47.2 Displaying the CALCULATED TEST Screen .................................................................... 2 138
2.47.3 Example of the CALCULATED TEST Screen .................................................................. 2 138
2.47.4 CALCULATED TEST Screen Fields and Prompts ........................................................... 2 138
2.48 Parameter Job - - Print Order ................................................................. 2 143
2.48.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 143
2.48.2 Displaying the PRINT ORDER Screen ............................................................................. 2 143
2.48.3 Example of the PRINT ORDER Screen ........................................................................... 2 143
2.48.4 PRINT ORDER Screen Fields and Prompts..................................................................... 2 143
2.49 Parameter Job - - Report Format ........................................................... 2 145
2.49.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 145
2.49.2 Displaying the REPORT FORMAT Screen....................................................................... 2 145
2.49.3 Example of the REPORT FORMAT Screen ..................................................................... 2 145
2.49.4 REPORT FORMAT Screen Fields and Prompts .............................................................. 2 145
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.50 Parameter Job - - Control Test Selection .............................................. 2 151
2.50.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 151
2.50.2 Displaying the CONTROL TEST SELECTION Screen ..................................................... 2 151
2.50.3 Example of the CONTROL TEST SELECTION Screen.................................................... 2 151
2.50.4 CONTROL TEST SELECTION Screen Fields and Prompts............................................. 2 151
2.51 Parameter Job - - Control Value Setting ............................................... 2 153
2.51.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 153
2.51.2 Displaying the CONTROL VALUE SETTING Screen ....................................................... 2 153
2.51.3 Example of the CONTROL VALUE SETTING Screen...................................................... 2 153
2.51.4 CONTROL VALUE SETTING Screen Fields and Prompts............................................... 2 153
2.52 Parameter Job - - Special Wash Programming .................................... 2 155
2.52.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 155
2.52.2 Displaying the SPECIAL WASH PROGRAMMING Screen.............................................. 2 155
2.52.3 Example of the SPECIAL WASH PROGRAMMING Screen ............................................ 2 155
2.52.4 SPECIAL WASH PROGRAMMING Screen Fields and Prompts ..................................... 2 155
2.53 Parameter Job - - System Parameters................................................... 2 159
2.53.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 159
2.53.2 Displaying the SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 1 ............................................ 2 159
2.53.3 Example of the SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 1........................................... 2 159
2.53.4 SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1.................................... 2 160
2.53.5 Displaying the SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 2 ............................................ 2 163
2.53.6 Example of the SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen - - Page 2........................................... 2 163
2.53.7 SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2.................................... 2 164
2.54 Parameter Job - - Channel Assignment ................................................ 2 167
2.54.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 167
2.54.2 Displaying the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen - - Page 1 ........................................... 2 167
2.54.3 Example of the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen - - Page 1 ......................................... 2 167
2.54.4 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 1 .................................. 2 168
2.54.5 Displaying the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen - - Page 2 ........................................... 2 168
2.54.6 Example of the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen - - Page 2 ......................................... 2 169
2.54.7 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT Screen Fields and Prompts - - Page 2 .................................. 2 169
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.55 Maintenance Job - - Menu ...................................................................... 2 170
2.55.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 170
2.55.2 Displaying the MAINTENANCE JOB MENU...................................................................... 2 170
2.55.3 Example of the MAINTENANCE JOB MENU .................................................................... 2 170
2.55.4 MAINTENANCE JOB MENU Fields and Prompts ............................................................. 2 170
2.56 Maintenance Job - - Analyzer Maintenance .......................................... 2 171
2.56.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 171
2.56.2 Displaying the ANALYZER MAINTENANCE Screen......................................................... 2 171
2.56.3 Example of the ANALYZER MAINTENANCE Screen ....................................................... 2 171
2.56.4 ANALYZER MAINTENANCE Screen Fields and Prompts ................................................ 2 172
2.57 Maintenance Job - - Mechanisms Check .............................................. 2 175
2.57.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 175
2.57.2 Displaying the MECHANISMS CHECK Screen ................................................................ 2 175
2.57.3 Example of the MECHANISMS CHECK Screen............................................................... 2 175
2.57.4 MECHANISMS CHECK Screen Fields and Prompts........................................................ 2 176
2.58 Maintenance Job - - Support Functions ............................................... 2 178
2.58.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 178
2.58.2 Displaying the SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Screen............................................................... 2 178
2.58.3 Example of the SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Screen ............................................................. 2 178
2.58.4 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Screen Fields and Prompts ...................................................... 2 179
2.59 Maintenance Job - - Working Information............................................. 2 181
2.59.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 181
2.59.2 Displaying the WORKING INFORMATION Screen .......................................................... 2 181
2.59.3 Example of the WORKING INFORMATION Screen ........................................................ 2 181
2.59.4 WORKING INFORMATION Screen Fields and Prompts ................................................. 2 181
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
PART C - REPORTS
2.60 Overview.................................................................................................. 2 185
2.60.1 Section Contents .............................................................................................................. 2 185
2.60.2 Report Table ..................................................................................................................... 2 185
2.61 Reagent Status ....................................................................................... 2 186
2.61.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 186
2.61.2 Printing the Reagent Status Report ................................................................................ 2 186
2.61.3 Example of the Reagent Status Report .......................................................................... 2 186
2.61.4 Explanation of the Reagent Status Report ..................................................................... 2 187
2.62 Requisition List - - Without Bar Code Reader....................................... 2 188
2.62.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 188
2.62.2 Printing the Requisition List - - Without Bar Code Reader ........................................... 2 188
2.62.3 Example of the Requisition List - - Without Bar Code Reader ..................................... 2 188
2.62.4 Explanation of the Requisition List - - Without Bar Code Reader ................................ 2 189
2.63 Requisition List - - With Bar Code Reader ............................................ 2 190
2.63.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 190
2.63.2 Printing the Requisition List - - With Bar Code Reader................................................. 2 190
2.63.3 Example of the Requisition List - - With Bar Code Reader ........................................... 2 190
2.63.4 Explanation of the Requisition List - - With Bar Code Reader ..................................... 2 191
2.64 Calibrator Load List ................................................................................ 2 192
2.64.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 192
2.64.2 Printing the Calibrator Load List..................................................................................... 2 192
2.64.3 Example of the Calibrator Load List............................................................................... 2 192
2.64.4 Explanation of the Calibrator Load List ......................................................................... 2 192
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.65 Rerun List ................................................................................................ 2 194
2.65.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 194
2.65.2 Printing the Rerun List ..................................................................................................... 2 194
2.65.3 Example of the Rerun List ............................................................................................... 2 194
2.65.4 Explanation of the Rerun List .......................................................................................... 2 194
2.66 Calibration Monitor ................................................................................. 2 196
2.66.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 196
2.66.2 Printing the Calibration Monitor Report ......................................................................... 2 196
2.66.3 Example of the Calibration Monitor Report ................................................................... 2 196
2.66.4 Explanation of the Calibration Monitor Report .............................................................. 2 196
2.67 Individual QC Monitor ............................................................................. 2 199
2.67.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 199
2.67.2 Printing the Individual QC Monitor Report ..................................................................... 2 199
2.67.3 Example of the Individual QC Monitor Report ............................................................... 2 199
2.67.4 Explanation of the Individual QC Monitor Report .......................................................... 2 199
2.68 Individual QC List .................................................................................... 2 201
2.68.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 201
2.68.2 Printing the Individual QC List Report ............................................................................ 2 201
2.68.3 Example of the Individual QC List Report ...................................................................... 2 201
2.68.4 Explanation of the Individual QC List Report ................................................................ 2 201
2.69 Cumulative QC Monitor .......................................................................... 2 203
2.69.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 203
2.69.2 Printing the Cumulative QC Monitor Report .................................................................. 2 203
2.69.3 Example of the Cumulative QC Monitor Report ............................................................ 2 203
2.69.4 Explanation of the Cumulative QC Monitor Report ....................................................... 2 203
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.70 Cumulative QC List ................................................................................. 2 205
2.70.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 205
2.70.2 Printing the Cumulative QC List Report ......................................................................... 2 205
2.70.3 Example of the Cumulative QC List Report ................................................................... 2 205
2.70.4 Explanation of the Cumulative QC List Report .............................................................. 2 205
2.71 Reaction Monitor .................................................................................... 2 207
2.71.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 207
2.71.2 Printing the Reaction Monitor Report ............................................................................. 2 207
2.71.3 Example of the Reaction Monitor Report ....................................................................... 2 207
2.71.4 Explanation of the Reaction Monitor Report.................................................................. 2 207
2.72 Patient Reports - - Report Format.......................................................... 2 210
2.72.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 210
2.72.2 Printing the Patient Reports - - Report Format .............................................................. 2 210
2.72.3 Example of the Patient Reports - - Report Format ........................................................ 2 210
2.72.4 Explanation of the Patient Reports - - Report Format ................................................... 2 211
2.73 Patient Reports - - Short Format ............................................................ 2 213
2.73.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 213
2.73.2 Printing the Patient Reports - - Short Format ................................................................ 2 213
2.73.3 Example of the Patient Reports - - Short Format........................................................... 2 213
2.73.4 Explanation of the Patient Reports - - Short Format ..................................................... 2 214
2.74 Calibration Trace .................................................................................... 2 215
2.74.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 215
2.74.2 Printing the Calibration Trace Report ............................................................................ 2 215
2.74.3 Example of the Calibration Trace Report ...................................................................... 2 215
2.74.4 Explanation of the Calibration Trace Report ................................................................. 2 215
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.75 Profiling List ............................................................................................ 2 217
2.75.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 217
2.75.2 Printing the Profiling List Report .................................................................................... 2 217
2.75.3 Example of the Profiling List Report .............................................................................. 2 217
2.75.4 Explanation of the Profiling List Report ......................................................................... 2 217
2.76 Photometer Check.................................................................................. 2 219
2.76.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 219
2.76.2 Printing the Photometer Check Report .......................................................................... 2 219
2.76.3 Example of the Photometer Check Report..................................................................... 2 219
2.76.4 Explanation of the Photometer Check Report ............................................................... 2 219
2.77 Cell Blank ................................................................................................ 2 221
2.77.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 221
2.77.2 Printing the Cell Blank Report ........................................................................................ 2 221
2.77.3 Example of the Cell Blank Report .................................................................................. 2 221
2.77.4 Explanation of the Cell Blank Report ............................................................................. 2 222
2.78 Bar Code Reader Check ........................................................................ 2 223
2.78.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 223
2.78.2 Printing the Bar Code Reader Check Report ................................................................. 2 223
2.78.3 Example of the Bar Code Reader Check Report ........................................................... 2 223
2.78.4 Explanation of the Bar Code Reader Check Report ...................................................... 2 223
2.79 ISE Check................................................................................................ 2 225
2.79.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 225
2.79.2 Printing the ISE Check Report ......................................................................................... 2 225
2.79.3 Example of the ISE Check Report ................................................................................... 2 225
2.79.4 Explanation of the ISE Check Report ............................................................................. 2 225
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.80 Printer Check .......................................................................................... 2 227
2.80.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 227
2.80.2 Printing the Printer Check Report ................................................................................... 2 227
2.80.3 Example of the Printer Check Report ............................................................................. 2 227
2.80.4 Explanation of the Printer Check Report ....................................................................... 2 227
2.81 Daily Alarm Trace.................................................................................... 2 228
2.81.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 228
2.81.2 Printing the Daily Alarm Trace Report ........................................................................... 2 228
2.81.3 Example of the Daily Alarm Trace Report ..................................................................... 2 228
2.81.4 Explanation of the Daily Alarm Trace Report ................................................................ 2 228
2.82 Cumulative Alarm Trace ......................................................................... 2 230
2.82.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 230
2.82.2 Printing the Cumulative Alarm Trace Report ................................................................ 2 230
2.82.3 Example of the Cumulative Alarm Trace Report........................................................... 2 230
2.82.4 Explanation of the Cumulative Alarm Trace Report ..................................................... 2 230
2.83 Host Communication Log...................................................................... 2 232
2.83.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 232
2.83.2 Printing the Host Communication Log Report ............................................................... 2 232
2.83.3 Example of the Host Communication Log Report ......................................................... 2 232
2.83.4 Explanation of the Host Communication Log Report .................................................... 2 232
2.84 Floppy Disk Check ................................................................................. 2 233
2.84.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 233
2.84.2 Printing the Floppy Disk Check Report ........................................................................... 2 233
2.84.3 Example of the Floppy Disk Check Report ..................................................................... 2 233
2.84.4 Explanation of the Floppy Disk Check Report ............................................................... 2 233
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2.85 Memory Check ........................................................................................ 2 234
2.85.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 234
2.85.2 Printing the Memory Check Report ................................................................................. 2 234
2.85.3 Example of the Memory Check Report ........................................................................... 2 234
2.85.4 Explanation of the Memory Check Report ..................................................................... 2 234
2.86 Precision Check...................................................................................... 2 235
2.86.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 235
2.86.2 Printing the Precision Check Report .............................................................................. 2 235
2.86.3 Example of the Precision Check Report ......................................................................... 2 235
2.86.4 Explanation of the Precision Check Report ................................................................... 2 235
2.87 Maintenance Report ............................................................................... 2 237
2.87.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 237
2.87.2 Printing the Maintenance Report .................................................................................... 2 237
2.87.3 Example of the Maintenance Report .............................................................................. 2 237
2.87.4 Explanation of the Maintenance Report ......................................................................... 2 237
2.88 Cumulative Operations Report .............................................................. 2 238
2.88.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 238
2.88.2 Printing the Cumulative Operations Report ................................................................... 2 238
2.88.3 Example of the Cumulative Operations Report ............................................................. 2 238
2.88.4 Explanation of the Cumulative Operations Report ........................................................ 2 238
2.89 Original Absorbance............................................................................... 2 240
2.89.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 2 240
2.89.2 Printing the Original Absorbance Report ....................................................................... 2 240
2.89.3 Example of the Original Absorbance Report ................................................................. 2 240
2.89.4 Explanation of the Original Absorbance Report ............................................................ 2 240
2. OPERATIONS
Contents
2 1
2.1 Daily Operating Check
2.1.1 Introduction
The following procedures are performed before the
instrument is powered ON. If the instrument is already
ON, these procedures can be performed any time
during a 24-hour period. These procedures are most
effective, however, when performed before the first
major run of the day.
2.1.2 Check Hitergent Supply
Hitergent is located in position 33 on each reaction
disk, as shown in Photograph 2-1. The reagent probes
automatically dispense a total of 6 mL of Hitergent into
the incubation bath during a bath exchange.
Hitergent helps to:
prevent air bubbles from adhering to the reaction
cells
improve electrical conductivity to make detection
of incubation bath water level easier
reduce bacteria development.
The alarm Replace Low Hitergent is issued when the
bottle needs to be replaced.
2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Photograph 2-1:
Hitergent Supply
PART A
2 2
2.1.3 Check Waste Solution
Reservoir
The waste solution reservoir is located in the rear of the
analytical unit, as shown in Photograph 2-2. This five
liter bottle collects concentrated waste. The analyzer
issues the alarm Empty Waste Reservoir when the
waste solution reaches a predetermined level. If this
waste solution reservoir is full, dispose of contents
according to your facilitys protocol for biohazardous
waste disposal.
It is not necessary to check the waste solution
reservoir when a waste drain connection is provided.
2.1.4 Check Detergent Bottle
The NaOH detergent bottle is located in the front of the
instrument, as shown in Photograph 2-3. This
detergent, Multiclean, is used for rinsing reaction
cells. The bottle contains enough detergent for about
one week of operation, depending on your laboratorys
throughput.
No instrument alarm is issued when the detergent
bottle is empty.
2.1.5 Check Paper Supply
Check remaining paper in the instrument printer and
replace, if necessary. Make sure the printer power
switch is turned ON.
If your instrument is used on an around-the-clock
basis and is already powered ON, proceed to Section
2.2, Daily Start-Up. If the instrument has not been
powered ON, continue with the Check Floppy Disk
Placement procedure below.
Photograph 2-2:
Waste Solution Reservoir
Photograph 2-3:
Multiclean
2 3
2.1.6 Check Floppy Disk
Placement
The system disk and the data disk must be fully
inserted in the appropriate disk drives prior to
powering ON the instrument. The system disk should
be in the bottom drive (#1), which is located behind the
right front panel. The data disk should be in the top
drive (#2). Under normal conditions, it is not
necessary to remove either disk from its respective
disk drive, even when the instrument is OFF. If the
floppy disks are not in their drives, insert each into its
respective drive and push on the disk, as shown in
Photograph 2-4. If the disks need to be removed,
press in on the release button located on the bottom
right of each drive.
2.1.7 Check Water Supply
Make sure that the external water supply valve is
turned ON.
2.1.8 Main Circuit Breaker
The main circuit breaker, shown in Photograph 2-5, is
positioned on the right side instrument cover. This
breaker, which controls power supplied to the reagent
refrigerator, must be in the ON position whenever
reagents are stored on the instrument.
Photograph 2-4:
Floppy Disk Drives
Photograph 2-5:
Main Circuit Breaker
2 4
2.1.9 Power ON
The ON/OFF SWITCH is positioned to the right of the
top floppy, disk drive 2, as shown in Photograph 2-6.
Place this switch in the ON position to supply power
to the instrument systems. Even with the power OFF,
the refrigeration units remain on for reagent storage.
Photograph 2-6:
ON/OFF Switch
2 5
2.2 Daily Start-Up
2.2.1 Introduction
The automated activation procedures require minimal
operator involvement. The following paragraphs
present these procedures in the most time-efficient
sequence. Do not omit any of the described
procedures from your daily routine.
2.2.2 Operational Precautions
While the analyzer is in operation, make sure these
precautions are followed:
Keep the top cover of the analyzer closed.
Do not replace samples while the sample disk is
rotating.
Avoid touching the sample probe, reagent probes,
stirring paddles, and other moving parts.
Do not remove or replace the cover over the sample
disk inner ring.
Do not remove or replace the reagent disk covers.
Do not place reagent or sample containers on the
cover of the analyzer.
2.2.3 Initialization Mode
The Initialization mode is indicated by the status line
displayed at the top of the CRT. During Initialization,
several functions occur automatically. These
functions are as follows:
Reads information from the system disk into
memory
Reaction bath water exchange
Air Purge of sample and reagent pipettor pathway
Mechanical reset
ISE prime
Reagent bar code registration.
While these procedures are being performed
automatically by the instrument, calibrators and
control products can be prepared. A brief explanation
of the above procedures is given below.
Reads System Disk
Information from the floppy system disk is read into
instrument memory.
Reaction Bath Water Exchange
The reaction bath water is exchanged during the
Initialization mode. Hitergent (6 mL) is added
automatically to the water bath when it fills. This
exchange replenishes evaporated water and brings
the concentration of Hitergent to a specified level. The
bath exchange also minimizes contamination of the
optimally-heated water.
2.2 Daily Start-Up
2 6
Air Purge (Sample and Reagent Pipettor)
This procedure ensures that no air is in the tubing
between the probes and their respective pipettors. Air
in the pipettor lines can result in imprecise pipetting.
This procedure replaces the water in the line with
freshly degassed water and takes approximately one
minute to complete. This procedure does not purge
the ISE System pipettors.
Reagent Bar Code Registration
All Boehringer Mannheim reagent bottles used with
the Boehringer Mannheim/Hitachi 911 Analyzer are
labeled with a bar code that contains information
concerning the reagent. All reagent bar codes from
bottles on both reagent disks are read during the
Initialization mode. Information on up to 200 bottles is
stored in CRAM and accessed through the REAGENT
STATUS screen.
Mechanical Reset
All mechanical parts including the sample probe,
reagent probes, sample disk, reagent disks, reaction
disk and stirrers are reset to their home positions.
ISE Prime
An ISE prime is performed. This clears the air from the
ISE pipetting system.
2.2.4 Reconstitute Calibrators and
Controls
Reconstitute all calibrator and control materials
according to the instructions provided with each box
of materials. Required calibration or control materials
can be obtained from Boehringer Mannheim.
Additional controls may be run at the discretion of the
operator. The instrument computer can track up to
eight different quality control materials.
Quality control products are used to verify calibration
as well as the precision and accuracy of the
instrument. Controls should be performed after every
calibration, or at least once every 24 hours, whichever
comes first. Additional control runs should be
established by your laboratory, based upon your own
needs.
2.2.5 Reagent Status Check
1 If the instrument has just been turned ON, proceed
when the analyzer status line reaches Stand-by.
2 Press ROUTINE to display the ROUTINE JOB
MENU. Press 1 ENTER to display the REAGENT
STATUS screen shown in Figure 2-1.
3 Reagent bar codes are read automatically during
the Initialization mode, and REAGENT STATUS
screen updates accordingly. This is called reagent
registration. As Figure 2-1 illustrates, a forward
slash through a reagent test key on the CRTs
keyboard matrix indicates that not all reagents are
on board the analyzer for that test. A back slash
indicates that the test has been masked on the
START CONDITIONS screen.
2.2 Daily Start-Up
Not all reagents
on board
Masked from
START CONDITIONS
2 7
Figure 2-1: REAGENT STATUS
Screen - - Keyboard Matrix
4 Press the GUIDANCE key to view page 2 of the
REAGENT STATUS screen. Bottle-specific
information for each reagent on board the analyzer
is listed on this page, as shown in Figure 2-2, and
includes the number of tests available for each
reagent. This number is calculated from the
volumes remaining in each reagent container.
Determine whether sufficient reagent is available
for the number of tests in the chemistry calibration
and the scheduled run. Press the PAGE
CONTINUE key to view a complete list of
reagents. (Press the SHIFT key and PAGE
CONTINUE to go to the end of the list.) For Diluent
and Washsolution the remaining volume in ml is
indicated.
Figure 2-2: REAGENT STATUS Screen - - List
5 To print a copy of the Reagent Status report, move
the cursor to the Print field. Press 1 ENTER to
print the report. Proceed to Photometer Check,
Section 2.2.6.
NOTE
When the analyzer is in Stand-by and the lid is
removed and replaced on the reagent disks, the
analyzer automatically performs a reagent registration
to verify current reagent placements.
2.2.6 Photometer Check
A photometer check procedure verifies that the
photometer lamp output remains at an acceptable
level. This procedure assumes that the following have
been performed correctly:
reaction cells replaced every month
reaction bath windows cleaned monthly
2.2 Daily Start-Up
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Reagent Status
Choose 1:Read Reagent Barcodes 2:Read Barcodes & Check Level : ENTER
Registration
Manual Set
Cancel
Print
Hitergent Disk 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
CK LD AST ALT ALP A GGT AMYL T.BIL D.BIL BUN GLU CO2
CA TRIG UA ALB/P TP PHOS CREA CHOL MG
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
ISE Int. Ref.
ISE Dil
ISE KCl
2
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
Y e s
Y e s
3 7 0
2 3 0
2 7 0
THEO
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Reagent Status
Registration
Manual Set
Cancel
Print
Hitergent Disk 1
ISE Int. Ref.
ISE Dil
ISE KCl
2
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
Y e s
Y e s
3 7 0
2 3 0
2 7 0
Assay Type Pos. Tests Size Stab. Exp.W Lot No. App Code
00311
00074
00074
00115
00115
00115
00115
00311
00036
00036
00311
00018
00018
049902
051986
051986
070151
070151
070151
070151
049902
070148
048796
049902
048795
070147
L
M
S
L
L
S
S
L
L
L
L
L
L
Dil
R1
R3
R1
R1
R3
R3
Dil
R1
R3
Dil
R1
R3
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
7
20
5
17
31
26
32
7
3
3
7
27
8
93/52
93/43
93/43
94/38
94/38
94/38
94/38
93/52
94/17
93/21
93/52
92/25
93/12
6
6
13
13
6
6
27
27
CK
LD
AST
ALT
79
120
130
340
70
79
210
990
79
240
990
mL
mL
mL
* Manual Setting ! Over-Ride Manual Setting ? App Code Not Found
2 8
Hitergent supply maintained
proper reaction bath water level.
To perform a photometer check:
1 Press MAINTENANCE to di spl ay the
MAINTENANCE JOB menu.
2 Press 1 ENTER to display the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
3 Move the cursor to the Photometer Check field.
4 Press 1 (Start) ENTER to initiate a photometer
check.
During this procedure, the instrument computer
performs a check of the photometer and light path,
which takes approximately one minute. Take this time
to prepare calibrators, controls, or reagents, as
needed.
Figure 2-3: Photometer Check Report
2.2 Daily Start-Up
Compare the current data values, as shown in Figure
2-3, with the previous data values. These values
should show a consistent, gradual increase. Based
upon this gradual increase, when any photometer
check value exceeds 13000, the photometer lamp
must be replaced. A sudden increase from one day to
the next may indicate something other than a
photometer lamp problem (example: no Hitergent in
bath).
2.2.7 Test Specific Information
Information specific to a particular chemistry test can
be found in the BM chemistry application sheet for
that method.
2.2.8 Demographic Considerations
Expected values or patient reference intervals are
affected by age, sex, diet, geographical location, and
other factors. Each laboratory should establish its
own ranges for each method based upon the specific
patient population of the area.
PHOTOMETER CHECK 01/06/93 14:39
----------PREVIOUS DATA---------- ----------CURRENT DATA----------
2ND WL PRIM. WL 2ND WL PRIM. WL
340
376
415
450
480
505
546
570
600
660
700
800
340
376
415
450
480
505
546
570
600
660
700
800
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
8824
8703
8742
8658
8619
8617
8668
8634
8604
8603
8599
8684
8824
8703
8743
8657
8620
8619
8667
8633
8604
8603
8599
8685
8890
8739
8754
8669
8638
8627
8668
8622
8583
8575
8562
8612
8893
8741
8756
8670
8641
8628
8670
8625
8585
8578
8564
8614
2 9
2.3 Calibration
2.3.1 Overview
To ensure proper operation of your 911 analyzer, each
Boehringer Mannheim assay must be calibrated at
the interval specified on its application sheet. For
most BM chemistries, these calibration intervals are
programmed as part of the Chemistry Parameters.
The 911 automatically updates calibrations at the
required time when the proper calibrators are placed
on the sample disk. In addition, you may program
tests to be calibrated in a Start Up or Repeat
calibration mode.
For most BM chemistries, calibrations necessary
due to a bottle change or lot change of reagent are
carried out automatically when the proper calibrators
are placed on the sample disk.
2.3.2 Calibration Procedure
Press ROUTINE, followed by 2 ENTER, to display the
CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen shown in
Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4: CALIBRATION TEST
SELECTION - - page 1
Press the GUIDANCE key to view the calibration Time
Out Status information.
Figure 2-5: CALIBRATION TEST
SELECTION - - page 2
To print the calibrator load list:
1 Move the cursor to the second entry of the
Calibration List field.
2 Enter the time interval (in hours) for which you want
a time out calibrator load list printed. Return the
cursor to the first entry of the Calibration List field
and press 3 ENTER. The load list of all calibrators
needed for scheduled calibrations during the
specified time interval prints out.
3 Use this list to verify that all needed calibrators are
on board the analyzer in the proper positions.
2.3 Calibration
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Calibration Test Selection
Choose 1:Start Up 2:Repeat Calibration : ENTER
Mode
Type
Tests
Calibrator List
:Blank
:2 Point
:Span
:Full
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
[ ] [ 8] Hour
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Mode
Type
Tests
Calibrator List
:Blank
:2 Point
:Span
:Full
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
[ ] [ 8] Hour
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
Blank 2 point Full Span
Time Out Status (Hour)
0/
0/
145/
0/
973/
0/
3
24
168
24
999
24
1/
0/
24
24
2 10
To manually program test selections for calibration,
follow the procedure below:
1 Move the cursor to the Mode field and press 1
ENTER to specify START UP Calibration.
2 Move the cursor to the Type field and select the
calibration type for each test.
Press 1 ENTER for BLANK calibration.
Press 2 ENTER for SPAN calibration.
Press 3 ENTER for 2 POINT calibration.
Press 4 ENTER for FULL calibration.
3 Move the cursor to the Tests field. Press the
appropriate test selection key for each test that is
to be calibrated with the selected calibration type.
The test key highlights in reverse video when
selected. If a selection is made inadvertently,
press the test selection key again to deselect the
test. After all tests for a particular calibration type
are selected, press ENTER.
4 The analyzer automatically increments to the next
calibration type and is ready for test selections to
be entered. After the tests for each calibration
type are selected, the appropriate icon appears in
the lower right corner of each test key image.
5 Move the cursor to the second entry of the
Calibration List field and enter the time out
interval. Press 1 (Start Up) or 2 (Repeat) ENTER
to obtain a calibrator load list. This printout lists all
programmed calibrators, plus any calibrations
scheduled to time out within the specified interval.
This printout also indicates the proper sample disk
position for each calibrator.
2.3 Calibration
2 11
2.4 Control Test Selection
2.4.1 Introduction
Controls must be run at least once during each 24-hour
time period and following calibration. If a channel is
calibrated more frequently than every 24 hours,
controls must be run at least once after each
calibration.
NOTE
The BM/Hitachi 911 System automatically runs
controls selected from the CONTROL TEST
SELECTION screen immediately following a
calibration. Control tests are normally programmed
during parameter set-up of the instrument and do not
need to be selected each day. The remainder of this
section outlines the control test selection procedure.
2.4.2 Procedure
1 Press PARAMETER, followed by 6 ENTER, to
display the CONTROL TEST SELECTION screen.
2 Move the cursor to the Control field and press 1
(Input control no. 1 - 8) ENTER. This displays test
selections for the first control level. If previous test
selections for the selected control level are stored
in memory, those tests are highlighted in reverse
video (white) on the keyboard matrix.
3 Move the cursor to the Tests field. Press the
appropriate test or profile keys to assign tests to
the control selected in the field above, then press
ENTER. Test selections can be checked on the
keyboard matrix. All selected tests are
highlighted in reverse video. The control listed in
the Control field automatically increments by one
when ENTER is pressed.
Controls and control intervals are selected
individually for each test.
Figure 2-6: CONTROL TEST SELECTION
4 Repeat test selection in step 3 for each control in
use (up to eight levels).
If an operator programmed calibration is desired:
Proceed to step 5 for Start up calibration and proceed
to Section 2.11 for a Repeat calibration.
5 To initiate a Start Up Calibration, press ROUTINE,
followed by 4 ENTER to display the START
CONDITIONS screen. Move the cursor to the
Start Up Calibration field.
6 Press 1 (On) ENTER to request a Start Up
calibration. The analyzer defaults to Off in this field
if you do not make a selection.
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
6 Control Test Selection
Select Tests via Keyboard (A -L) : ENTER
Control
Tests
S.Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
[ PTN-81 ]
[ - ]
Serum
2 12
After these control test selections are entered, the
appropriate controls are run when the analyzer
executes an automatic calibration, assuming a
control interval > 0 has been assigned in chemistry
parameters for all applicable tests. Stat tests are
included when counting down the control interval. QC
test selections are stored in CRAM.
Figure 2-7: START CONDITIONS
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Start Conditions
Input Sample No. 1 to 800 : ENTER ( Have you cleared data ? )
Start Sample No.
Start Up Calibration
Repeat Calibration
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Manual Masking
Host Communication
ISE Maintenance
Print Format
Calibration Print
Clear Results
Default Sample Cup
[ ] : [ 0] [ 1]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] : [ ] - [ ]
[STD Cup ]
1
Off
Off
Off
Automatic
-
Off
Report
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
2 13
2.5 Routine Patient Test Selection
Without Bar Code Reader
2.5.1 Introduction
Routine patient test selections can be made when the
instrument is in Stand-by, Stop, Operate, or Sample
Stop. An example of the PATIENT TEST SELECTION
screen is shown in Figure 2-8. As the tests are
selected, the test key for each test highlights in
reverse video on the keyboard matrix. When the
sample number of a patient with previously defined
tests is entered, the test selections are highlighted on
the keyboard matrix.
Use the following procedure to enter routine patient
test selections when a bar code reader is not used.
2.5.2 Procedure
1 Press ROUTINE, then 3 ENTER to display the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen.
2 Previous test selections are stored in C-RAM and
are not automatically clearedeven if the analyzer
is powered OFF and back ON. Clearing the
previous test selections from the internal memory
ensures no test selection errors occur by mixing
previously selected tests with currently selected
tests.
Move the cursor to the Clear field. Press 1 ENTER.
The prompt Are You Sure? appears. Press 1
Continue ENTER.
Figure 2-8: PATIENT TEST SELECTION - - without Bar
Code Reader
3 The cursor advances to the Sample No. field. If
you want to change the Run Type or Sample Cup
fields from the default settings, move the cursor to
the appropriate field. Select the proper run type
and press ENTER. Select the proper sample cup
and press ENTER.
4 With the cursor in the Sample No. field, enter the
first sequence number (sample number), sample
disk number, and sample position number. For
example:
press 1 ENTER (sequence number for storage
on the data disk)
press 0 ENTER (sample disk number)
press 1 ENTER (sample position number on the
sample tray).
NOTE
DO NOT use the same sequence number twice on one
data disk. ALWAYS use the next available sequence
number.
2.5 Routine Patient Test Selection Without Bar Code Reader
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
3 Patient Test Selection
Select Tests via Keyboard : ENTER
Run Type
Sample Cup
Sample No.
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Repeat Function
Display Sample No.
Print List
Clear
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ]
Draw Date/Time
Sex/Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD Cup
16142
Normal
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
RECORD SPACE : 785
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
12 01 92 12 20
F 67 Y
WILMOTH, M.
O.P.
SMITH, J. B.
102-23-5656
MJM
2 14
5 The cursor advances to the ID Number field. Type
the patient ID number, if required, and press
ENTER. If a patient ID number is not required, move
the cursor to the Sample Vol. field.
6 With the cursor in the Sample Vol. field, specify
a volume level (normal volume, decreased volume,
or increased volume), then press ENTER.
7 With the cursor in the Tests field, select the
required tests for the sample. Press the test and/
or profile keys that correspond to desired test
items. The corresponding test key shown on the
keyboard matrix highlights in reverse video when a
selection is made. An arrow indicating increased
or decreased sample volume appears in
appropriate test keys on the keyboard matrix. If
demographic information is desired, proceed to
step 8. If no demographic information is needed,
proceed to step 9.
8 Draw Date/Time:
Sex/Age:
Name:
Location:
Physician:
Patient ID:
Drawn By:
Use these fields to enter demographic information
about each sample. The Name, Location,
Physician, Patient ID, and Drawn By fields are
all comment fields with user-definable titles. Your
analyzer may display different titles for these
fields. Refer to Section 2.53 to assign names to
these fields.
9 After all tests are selected and needed
demographic information is programmed, press
ENTER. The sequence number (sample number)
increments automatically.
10 The Repeat function for batch programming. It is
available only after test selections are made for the
first sample in the batch.
11 To view a visual check of programming, enter the
sequence number in the Display Sample No.
field.
2.5 Routine Patient Test Selection Without Bar Code Reader
12 Advance the cursor to Print List. Type the
sequence number of the first specimen in the run
(first sample number entered), then press ENTER.
13 Type the sequence number of the last specimen in
the run (last sequence number entered), then
press ENTER. The Requisition List, as shown in
Section 2.5.3 on the following page, prints. This list
shows the tests selected for each specimen and
the total number of times each test has been
selected.
14 After the instrument enters Stand-by or Sample
Stop, proceed to Section 2.7, Initiate Run.
2.5.3 Example of Requistion List
An example of the Requisition List is shown below.
Figure 2-9: Requisition List
REQUISITION LIST 09/25/91 12:20
S.NO. POS. ID 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
N001*
N002
N003
N004
N005
N006
N007
N008
N009
N010
N011
N012
N013
N014
0-01
0-02
0-03
0-04
0-05
0-06
0-07
0-08
0-09
0-10
0-11
0-12
0-13
0-14
1234567890123
1234567890346
7475843725647
2347809872348
4758943627846
3478390128375
4758932703598
7082345798487
4558709502893
0983409094078
3820938704745
8374092850470
7029831490434
7039842798234
TEST COUNT
CHANNEL TEST COUNT CHANNEL TEST COUNT CHANNEL TEST COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP
GGT
AMYL
T.BIL
D.BIL
BUN
GLU
BICAR
CA
TRIG
URIC
ALB
TP
11
0
11
13
13
8
13
1
7
4
1
10
4
5
1
0
0
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PHOS
CREAT
CHOL
MG
1
1
0
0
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
ISE
S.IND
LIPAS
CK-MB
HDL
NA
K
CL
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
*--**+-*-I-+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*--**+-*---+-----+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
--*-*+-*-**+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-**I+-*D-*+-*I--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
--***+*--ID+-I***+---I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*-I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*-D-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-**-+-*--D+-*-I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**-*-+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
---**+**-I-+-*-D-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**-**+**---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
LEGEND
* - normal sample volume
I - increased sample volume
D - decreased sample volume
2 15
2.6 Routine Patient Test Selection
With Bar Code Reader
2.6.1 Introduction
With the bar code reader in use, patient test
selections can be either entered manually or
downloaded from a host computer. An example of the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen is shown in
Figure 2-10. As tests are selected, the corresponding
test key is highlighted in reverse video on the
keyboard matrix. After the sample number of a patient
with previously defined tests is entered, the test
selection is highlighted on the keyboard matrix.
Use the following procedure to manually enter patient
test selections.
2.6.2 Manual Entry
1 Press ROUTINE, then 3 ENTER to display the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen as shown in
Figure 2-10.
2 Previous test selections are stored in C-RAM and
are not automatically clearedeven if the analyzer
is powered OFF and back ON. Clearing the
previous test selections from the internal memory
ensures no test selection errors occur by mixing
previously selected tests with currently selected
tests.
Move the cursor to the Clear field. Press 1 ENTER.
The prompt Are You Sure? appears. Press 1
(Continue) ENTER.
Figure 2-10: PATIENT TEST SELECTIONSwith Bar
Code Reader
3 To change the Run Type or Sample Cup fields
from the default settings, move the cursor to the
appropriate field. Select either the run type or the
sample cup and press ENTER.
4 Move the cursor to the ID Number field and type
the bar code label ID number; then press ENTER.
5 With the cursor in the Sample Volume field,
specify a volume level, (normal volume, decreased
volume, or increased volume); then press ENTER.
6 With the cursor in the Tests field, select the
required tests for the sample. Press the test and/
or profile keys that correspond to the desired test
items. The corresponding test key shown on the
keyboard matrix is highlighted in reverse video
when a selection is made. An arrow indicating
increased or decreased sample volume appears in
the appropriate test keys on the keyboard matrix.
Refer to Section 2.19 for details about keyboard
matrix highlighting. If demographic information is
desired, proceed to step 7. If no demographic
information is needed, proceed to step 8.
7 Draw Date/Time:
Sex/Age:
2.6 Routine Patient Test Selection With Bar Code Reader
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Input Sample ID Number (Maximum 13 Characters) : ENTER
Run Type
Sample Cup
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Display ID No.
Print List
Clear
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ]
Draw Date/Time
Sex/Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD on Tube
16142
Normal
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
12 01 92 12 20
F 67 Y
WILMOTH, M.
O.P.
SMITH, J. B.
102-23-5656
MJM
2 16
2.6 Routine Patient Test Selection With Bar Code Reader
Name:
Location:
Physician:
Patient ID:
Drawn By:
Use these fi el ds to enter demographi c
information about each sample. The Name,
Location, Physician, Patient ID and Drawn By
fields are all comment fields with user-definable
titles. Your analyzer may display different titles
for these fields.
8 After all tests are selected and the necessary
demographic information is entered, press
ENTER.
9 To test additional samples, repeat steps 3
through 8.
2.6.3 Real Time Downloading from
Host Computer
No entries are necessary on this screen when in real
time bi-directional communication with a host
computer.
To initiate real time communication, press ROUTINE,
followed by 4 ENTER, to display the START
CONDITIONS screen. Move the cursor to the Host
Communication field. Press 1 ENTER to turn on host
communication. On the OPERATION MONITOR
screen, the Communication field indicates whether
the analyzer is on-line or off-line with the host. Please
refer to the 911 Host Interface document for details on
the communication protocol.
2 17
2.7 Initate Run
2.7.1 Introduction
This section describes how to initiate a run. Press
ROUTINE, 4 ENTER to display the START
CONDITIONS screen, as shown in Figure 2-11. This
enables you to check operating conditions prior to
beginning the run.
Figure 2-11: START CONDITIONS
2.7.2 Procedure
Any of the entry fields described below may already
contain the desired information. If so, advance the
cursor to the next field that requires an entry.
1 Start Sample No.: Enter the sequence number of
the specimen to be sampled first. The first sample
number (sequence number) may be 1 to 800, as
indicated by the prompt at the bottom of the
screen.
Before setting the Start Sample Number to a
lower number you must clear existing data from
the data disk. The instrument must be in Stand-
by or Sampling Stop to change the Start Sample
Number to a lower number. If you store the
patient data on a data disk, you must replace the
data disk with a new data disk when the disk is full.
Refer to step 10 of this procedure to check data
disk storage.
2 Start Up Calibration: Automatic calibration will
occur no matter what is specified in this field. If you
want the scheduled run to begin with a start up
calibration, press 1 and ENTER. After start up
calibration is completed, this field automatically
defaults back to Off. The analyzer must be in
Stand-by to make entries in this field.
To begin a scheduled run without a start up
calibration, press 0 ENTER.
3 Repeat Calibration: To begin the scheduled run
with Repeat Calibration, press 1 (ON) ENTER.
After Repeat Calibration is completed, this field
automatically defaults back to Off. The analyzer
can be in any mode to make entries in this field.
4 Routine Rerun Mode: To automatically process
reruns at the end of the run, press 1 (Perform
Automatic Rerun) ENTER. If reruns are not to be
processed automatically, press 0 (No Reruns)
ENTER.
5 Stat Rerun Mode: If Stat reruns are to be
processed automatically press 1 (Perform
Automatic Rerun) ENTER. Stat reruns are
processed immediately, not at the end of the run.
If Stat reruns are not to be processed
automatically, press 0 (No Reruns) ENTER.
2.7 Initate Run
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Start Conditions
Start Sample No.
Repeat Calibration
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Manual Masking
Host Communication
ISE Maintenance
Print Format
Calibration Print
Clear Results
Default Sample Cup
[ ] : [ 0] [ 1]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] : [ ] - [ ]
[STD Cup ]
1
Off
Off
Off
Automatic
-
Off
Report
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
2 18
remains inactivated until you unmask it through
this field. Masked channels are indicated by a
back slash through the test key on the keyboard
matrix as illustrated in Figure 2-11 on the previous
page.
When a test is masked, it does not calibrate, run
controls or patient samples. You can mask a test
from any mode.
7 Host Communication: Use this field to select
communication with a host computer. Press 1
ENTER to turn on host communication or 0 ENTER
to turn OFF host communication. The analyzer
must be in Stand-by to make entries in this field.
8 ISE Maintenance: This field defaults to Off. To
initiate end of run ISE maintenance, make sure
system cleaning solution is in the W2 cup
position on the sample disk. Press 1 (ON) ENTER.
You can be in any mode to initiate ISE
maintenance.
9 Print Format: Press 1 ENTER to print out the
report in the Short format. To print out reports in the
REPORT format, press 2 ENTER. If you do not
want reports to print out automatically, press 0
ENTER. In this case, the results can be printed out
collectively from the ROUTINE JOB, DATA
REVIEW screen.
10 Calibration Print: Press 1 ENTER to print out the
calibration report automatically. If you do not want
a printed calibration report, press 0 ENTER. BM
recommends leaving this field Yes at all times.
You cannot reprint a calibration report.
Before You Start the Analysis:
If you store all specimen results on the data
disk for later retrieval, you must ensure that
each sequence number is used only once on
any data disk. To ensure this, replace the data
disk when the sequence number reaches 800.
If you do not want to retrieve results, you may
clear the data disk. In this case, you must
ensure that no more than 800 routine
specimens are run.
WARNING
When the STAT sequence number reaches 200, clear
all STAT results from the data disk before you request
more STATs. This prevents an accidental merge of the
old data on the data disk with the new data.
11 Clear Results: This procedure clears all routine,
and Stat results, as well as all daily QC results. If
you do not want to clear your daily QC, clear the
routine, and STAT results individually.
To clear the data disk, advance the cursor to Clear
Results, then:
Press 4 ENTER (All). (Or press the key that
corresponds to the type of data to be cleared:
1: Routine 2: Stat, 3: Control.)
When you clear all results, the start sample
number of Stat and control samples are reset
to 1. You also may select a range of sample
data to clear. Type in the beginning sample
number and press ENTER. Type in the ending
sample number and press ENTER. Ranges for
routine samples are 1-800, Stat samples are 1-
200, and control samples are 1-8.
The CRT displays the message "Are You
Sure?".
Press 1 (Continue) ENTER.
2.7 Initate Run
IF...
THEN...
you want to mask a
channel
press the combination of
test and profile keys that
reflects the channel that
you want to inactivate;
then press ENTER.
you want to unmask
a channel
press the corresponding
test key ; then press
ENTER.
2 19
2.7 Initate Run
12 Place all patient samples, controls, and calibrators
in their appropriate positions on the sample disk.
(Refer to the Calibration Load List and Requisition
List for positions.) Place sample cups that contain
System Cleaning Solution in the W1 and W2
positions on the sample disk.
13 Press OPERATION MONITOR. If any alarms are
listed, correct the alarm condition before
continuing. Verify incubation temperature (37 C
0.1 C).
14 Press START.
2 20
2.8 Stat Test Selection
2.8.1 Introduction
Use the procedure outlined below to place Stat
samples on the analyzer for processing when the
analyzer is in the OPERATE mode. If the analyzer is
in any other mode, refer to Section 2.29 for the
processing of Stat samples. Stat tests are included
when counting down the control interval.
2.8.2 Procedure
1 Press STAT to display the STAT TEST
SELECTION screen, as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12: STAT TEST SELECTION - - page 1
Figure 2-13: STAT TEST SELECTION - - page 2
2 Check the Pos. Status matrix on the screen for
any position not highlighted in red. Positions not
highlighted in red are currently available for STAT
processing. Positions 51 through 70 on the middle
track are reserved for dedicated use of STAT
samples when the bar code reader is not in use.
Positions 1-50 are always highlighted in red when
the bar code reader is not in use. When the bar
code reader is on, all 70 positions may be used for
STAT samples.
3 Run Type: This field defaults to the chosen
setting, usually SERUM. If another sample class
is used, specify the appropriate class and press
ENTER.
4 Sample Cup: This field defaults to STD Cup. If
another sample cup size is used, specify the
appropriate size and press ENTER.
5 Sample Pos.: Enter the position number
corresponding to the STAT sample and press
ENTER.
6 ID Number: Type in the ID number, if required, and
press ENTER.
37.0 Stand-by 3/18/93 12:20
Stat Test Selection
Run Type
Sample Cup
Sample Pos.
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Pos. Status
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD Cup
61
Normal
THEO
C-18 C-12
LIVER HEART
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
1. Put the Sample on the Sample Disk.
3. Press START Key.
2. Input S. Position and Select Tests.
1
26
51
2
27
52
3
28
53
4
29
54
5
30
55
6
31
56
7
32
57
8
33
58
9
34
59
10
35
60
11
36
61
12
37
62
13
38
63
14
39
64
15
40
65
16
41
66
17
42
67
18
43
68
19
44
69
20
45
70
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
0 0 Occupied
37.0 Stand-by 3/18/93 12:20
Stat Test Selection
Run Type
Sample Cup
Sample Pos.
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Pos. Status
Draw Date / Time
Sex / Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
[ 03 ] / [ 18 ] / [ 93 ] [11] : [50]
[M] [ 63 ] [ Y ]
[Smith, John ]
[ER-9 ]
[GRAHAM, J D ]
[405-12-8162 ]
[DJB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD Cup
61
Normal
THEO
C-18 C-12
LIVER HEART
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
3. Press START Key.
1
26
51
2
27
52
3
28
53
4
29
54
5
30
55
6
31
56
7
32
57
8
33
58
9
34
59
10
35
60
11
36
61
12
37
62
13
38
63
14
39
64
15
40
65
16
41
66
17
42
67
18
43
68
19
44
69
20
45
70
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
0 0 Occupied
2 21
7 Sample Volume: Sample Volume defaults to
Normal. If an increase or decrease in Sample
Volume is desired, specify the appropriate entry
and press ENTER.
8 Tests: Press the test or profile keys to make test
selections. Selected tests are highlighted in
reverse video in the keyboard matrix on the screen.
If demographic information must be entered,
proceed to step 8. Press ENTER after all test
selections are made. Check the keyboard matrix
for masked tests or tests with insufficient reagent
on board.
9 If demographic data for the sample must be
entered, press GUIDANCE and make the
appropriate entries for the following fields:
Draw Date/Time:
Sex/Age:
Name:
Location:
Physician:
Patient ID:
Drawn By:
After test selections are entered, the cursor remains
in the Tests entry field. Move the cursor to the Sample
Pos. entry field and follow step 5 to enter the next
STAT sample request.
Return to the OPERATION MONITOR screen after all
entries are complete. The analyzer interrupts routine
samples and processes STATs at its earliest
convenience (2 cycles or 20 seconds later). Routine
sample measurements are automatically continued
when Stat sampling is completed.
2 22
2.9 Measurement of Additional
Samples
2.9.1 Introduction
The procedure for measuring additional routine sample
varies, depending on whether you are using the
sample bar code reader.
2.9.2 Procedure without Bar Code
Reader
1 When the analyzer is in the Operation mode,
press ROUTINE 3 ENTER to display the PATIENT
TEST SELECTION screen. If the next sample
number is not known, use the Display Sample
No. field to determine the correct number. Type in
a number that is close to the last sample number
entered and press ENTER repeatedly until the
sample number with position 0 and no test
selections is found. Use this sample number to
begin processing additional samples.
2 Run Type:
Sample Cup:
Select the correct sample class and cup size, if
different from the defaults, and press ENTER.
3 Sample No.: Type in the next sequence number
and press ENTER. Type in the correct disk number
and press ENTER. Type in the position number
and press ENTER.
4 ID Number: Type in the ID number, if necessary,
and press ENTER.
5 Sample Volume: Select the desired sample
volume and press ENTER.
6 Tests: Press the TEST or PROFILE key that
corresponds to the required tests and press
ENTER. If demographic information is desired,
move the cursor to the comment fields before
pressing ENTER. The sampl e number
automatically increments by one to enable you to
program several samples. You may also use the
Repeat function for test selection.
7 Place the additional samples in the proper
positions on the sample disk.
8 Return to the OPERATION MONITOR screen.
If the analyzer is in either the S. Stop, Stop, or Stand-
by modes, follow these steps to process additional
samples:
1 Check START CONDITIONS for the next available
sample number.
2 Follow steps 1 through 7 listed above.
3 Press OPERATION MONITOR.
4 Press START.
2.9.3 Procedure with Bar Code
Reader
1 When the analyzer is in the Operation mode,
press ROUTINE 3 ENTER to select the PATIENT
TEST SELECTION screen.
2 Run Type:
Sample Cup:
Select the correct sample class and cup size, if
different from the defaults, and press ENTER.
3 ID Number: Type in the ID number and press
ENTER.
4 Sample Volume: Select the desired sample
volume and press ENTER.
2.9 Measurement of Additional Samples
2 23
5 Tests: Press the TEST or PROFILE key that
corresponds to the required tests and press
ENTER. To enter demographic information, move
the cursor to the comment fields and enter the
appropriate information prior to pressing ENTER.
6 Place the additional samples on the sample disk in
positions that have not passed the sample bar
code reader. If the analyzer has already registered
a zero bar code, you must wait for Sampling Stop
to process additional samples. Once the analyzer
is in the Sampling Stop mode you can place
additional samples and proceed with step 7.
7 Return to the OPERATION MONITOR screen.
If the analyzer is in either the S. Stop, Stop, or Stand-
by modes, follow these steps to process additional
samples:
1 Follow steps 1 through 6 listed above.
2 Press ROUTINE JOB 4 ENTER to call up the
START CONDITIONS screen. Type in the correct
start sample number in the Start Sample No.
field.
4 Press START.
2.9 Measurement of Additional Samples
2 24
2.10 Rerun Sample Processing
2.10.1 Introduction
Selecting Automatic in the RERUN MODE field on the
START CONDITIONS screen processes reruns
automatically. If automatic rerun is not selected and
you want to process reruns, or if you want to edit the
rerun list, use the following procedure. This procedure
is performed after a routine run is completed. You do
not need to rearrange the sample positions for rerun
measurement. Occurrence of a data alarm
automatically places the relevant test item on the
rerun list.
2.10.2 Procedure
1 Press ROUTINE 7 ENTER to view the first page
of the RERUN SAMPLES screen. This screen is
shown in Figure 2-14.
2 Rerun List: Type in the first sample number and
press ENTER. This displays a list of all samples
scheduled for rerun. Press PAGE CONTINUE to
view additional rerun samples on the CRT.
3 Print: Type in the first and last sample numbers
representing the rerun range from the displayed
sample list. To make this entry, type the first
sample number and press ENTER, then type the
last sample number and press ENTER. Use the
printed list to check the rerun sample numbers,
decreased or increased sample volume, and other
information. Press GUIDANCE to view individual
rerun sample information.
4 The second page of the RERUN SAMPLES
screen (see Figure 2-15 on the following page)
displays individual rerun sample information. Type
in the number of the sample you want to view in the
Sample NO. field. Press ENTER to display the
results for the first run and automatic rerun, if
selected. The original tests requested that have a
data flag are highlighted in reverse video in the
keyboard matrix on the screen. An up or down
arrow on the test key indicates selection of
increased or decreased sample volume.
5 ID Number:
Sample Cup:
S. Type: These three fields are automatically filled
in with the information entered for the selected
sample number during Patient Test Selection. The
S. Type field cannot be edited.
6 Name:
Location:
Physician:
Patient ID:
Drawn By: These fields are automatically filled in
with the information entered for the selected
sample number during Patient Test Selection. All
fields may be edited.
7 Sample Vol.: Specify decreased or increased
sample volume, if needed, then press ENTER.
8 Tests: To delete or add a rerun test selection,
select or deselect the appropriate test key.
Selected rerun tests are highlighted in reverse
video in the keyboard matrix on the screen.
2 25
Figure 2-14: RERUN SAMPLES - - page 1
Figure 2-15: RERUN SAMPLES - - page 2
9 Press GUIDANCE to return to the previous screen.
You can view the edited rerun list or request a
printed list of the edited rerun samples at this time.
10 Press ROUTINE 4 ENTER to display the START
Routine Rerun Mode field and press 2 ENTER to
select rerun only. After the rerun processing is
completed, this field defaults back to Off.
11 Move the cursor to the Start Sample No. field and
enter the first rerun sample number.
12 Press OPERATION MONITOR followed by
START to initiate rerun processing.
After the samples listed on the RERUN SAMPLES
screen are rerun and this screen is recalled, enter the
first sample number from the original run in the Rerun
List entry field to display rerun samples again.
Within-range samples are displayed in reverse video
at the bottom of the screen. Out-of-range samples are
displayed in regular type, preceded by a question
mark, indicating further action is needed by the
operator.
1 To clear rerun test selection information, move the
cursor to the Clear field, then:
Press 1 ENTER to remove all rerun test
selection information.
Press 2 ENTER to remove only test selection
information that did not generate a data flag
upon rerun (those samples displayed in reverse
video).
2 Before you attempt to rerun these samples again,
check the cause of the data alarm and take the
appropriate troubleshooting steps.
37.0 Sample Stop 12/01/92 12:20
7 Rerun Samples
Input Sample No. 1 to 800 : ENTER
Rerun List
Clear
Print
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
S.No. Pos. ID No. Date Time Name LOCATION
ICU-12
ICU-8
O.P.
O.P.
OUTPATIENT
S317-2
ICU-7
7:21
7:22
7:15
7:28
8:23
6:30
5:45
0- 1
0- 2
0- 3
0- 6
0- 7
0- 8
0-10
059910
16142
1284
1355
01008
26962
8053
DOBBINS, K
SMITH, J
JAMES, B
VOGT, MILDRED
WILMOTH, M
HOBBS, J
PULAKSI, WM
1
2
3
6
7
8
10
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
Routine Alarm
1 059910
nnn Rerun Finished
nnn Rerun Failed ?
?
?
?
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
7 Rerun Samples
Sample No.
ID Number
Sample Cup
Sample Vol.
Tests
S.Type
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
Serum
Alarm
DOBBINS, K
ICU-12
GRAHAM , J D
123-56-9847
DJB
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
1st Rerun 1st Rerun 1st Rerun
8
10
11
13
19
TBILI
BUN
GLU
CA
10.3
143.8
466$
10.7
47
48
49
56
Na
K
CL
UN / CR
138.0
4.70
105.0
14
1
059910
STD on Tube
Normal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
2 26
Both the first run result and the rerun result are stored
on the data disk. Upon completion of a successful
rerun, replace the first run result with the rerun result.
IF... THEN...
you do not want to
make changes and the
samples are in their
original position on the
sample disk
no other entries are
necessary on this
screen.
you want to place only
rerun samples on the
sample disk (for
instruments with bar
code reader)
no other entries are
necessary. Simply
remove the rerun
samples from their
original positions and
reposition them for
batch processing.
you want to place only
rerun samples on the
sample disk (for
instruments without bar
code reader)
place samples in new
positions on sample
disk. Move the cursor
to the SAMPLE NO.
entry field and enter the
sequence number. The
original tray number
and cup position are
displayed. Enter the
correct tray number and
cup position.
2 27
2.11 Within-Run Recalibration
2.11.1 Introduction
If any test fails calibration, or if the controls run
following calibration are out of range, the test can be
recalibrated while the instrument is in the Operate
mode.
When an assay calibration fails, subsequent patient
and QC results are calculated from the last
successful calibration for that assay. All of these
patient results are flagged. The patient report will have
a CALIB! alarm and the DATA REVIEW and REAL
TIME DATA MONITOR screens will display ! to flag
the results until a successful calibration is
completed.
Do not confuse this alarm with the CALIB alert on the
Calibration Monitor report. The CALIB on the
Calibration Monitor report indicates that the last
calibration was different from the previous calibration.
As long as the QC results calculated from the
calibration with the CALIB alert on the Calibration
Monitor report are within range, then the calibration is
fine.
2.11.2 Procedure
Within-run recalibration is performed as follows:
1 Before requesting recalibration, determine why
the original calibration failed for the specified test.
If necessary, consult Chapter 4, Troubleshooting,
to determine the nature of the problem.
2 After the situation responsible for the failed
calibration is corrected, press ROUTINE, then 2
ENTER to display the CALIBRATION TEST
SELECTION screen.
3 Mode: Press 2 (Repeat Calib.) ENTER. Verify
that the 911 has automatically programmed the
test for a Repeat Calibration. If the test is not
programmed, proceed with step 4. If the test is
programmed, proceed with step 6.
4 Type: Select the necessary calibration method
(Blank, 2 Point, Full, or Span).
5 Tests: Press the test selection key to select the
appropriate tests. Selected tests are highlighted in
reverse video.
6 Make certain that sample cups containing
sufficient quantities of the required calibrators and
controls are in their assigned positions on the
sample disk.
7 Press ROUTINE 4 ENTER to call up the START
CONDITIONS screen.
8 Repeat Calibration: Press 1 (On) ENTER. The
calibrators are sampled immediately following the
specimen for which the instrument is currently
blanking cells.
2.11.3 Rerun Calibration
If a rerun calibration is requested, controls are run
immediately following for those tests that were
recalibrated, provided the appropriate control test
selections are made and the control interval on
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS is > 0.
2.11 Within-Run Recalibration
2 28
2.12 Data Editing
2.12.1 Introduction
Use the following procedure to add, edit, or delete
results via the DATA REVIEW screen.
2.12.2 Procedure
1 Press ROUTINE 6 ENTER to display page 1 of the
DATA REVIEW screen, as shown in Figure 2-16.
This page displays a list of the samples according
to type and either sample number or ID number,
depending on whether the bar code reader is used.
2 Move the cursor to the Run field and press 1
ENTER for routine samples or 2 ENTER for Stat
samples.
3 Move the cursor to the List field and enter the
desired sequence number.
4 Press GUIDANCE to display page 2 of the DATA
REVIEW screen, as shown in Figure 2-17.
5 Move the cursor to the Edit Result field. Press 1
ENTER to edit a first run result. Press 2 ENTER to
edit a rerun result. Press the test key that
corresponds to the test to be edited. Enter the
correct result, or press the space bar to delete the
existing result.
6 When all editing is complete, move the cursor to
the fourth entry of this field. Press 1 ENTER to save
the previously edited data to the data disk. Press
2 ENTER to replace all original results with the
rerun results and save to the data disk. The prompt
line displays Are You Sure?. Press 1 (Continue)
ENTER.
2.12 Data Editing
37.0 Operation 12/01/92 12:20
6 Data Review
Run
List Print
Data Transfer
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
ICU-12
ICU-9
O.P.
PACU-10
O.P.
O.P.
OUTPATIENT
S317-2
S323-1
ICU-7
T412-1
OUTPATIENT
N403-4
OUTPATIENT
8:27
8:28
8:30
8:31
8:33
8:34
8:34
8:35
8:37
8:38
8:41
8:43
8:43
8:44
0-01
0-02
0-03
0-04
0-05
0-06
0-07
0-08
0-09
0-10
0-11
0-12
0-13
0-14
059910
16142
1284
25313
01057
1355
01008
26962
07194
8053
690
6334
00196
16858
DOBBINS, K
SMITH, J
JAMES, B
TOLBERT, U
KNIGHT, R
VOGT, MILDRED
WILMOTH, M
HOBBS, J
FRICKENSCHMIDT, O
PULAKSI, WM
DONAGHUE, P
JOHNSON, P
HOLLINGSWORTH, M
KOVAK, K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
Routine
Rtn.
1 0599910
Figure 2-16: DATA REVIEW - - page 1
37.0 Washing Probe 12/01/92 12:20
6 Data Review
Run
List
S. Type Serum
Draw Date / Time
Sex / Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
Edit Result
Print
Data Transfer
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
Routine
Rtn.
1 059910
Alarm
12 01 92 11 50
M 36 Y
DOBBINS, K
ICU-12
GRAHAM , J D
123-56-9847
DJB
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP / A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB / P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
MG
REF
10.3
143.8
466$
10.7
10.2
Figure 2-17: DATA REVIEW - - page 2
2 29
2.13 Quality Control
Procedures
2.13.1 Daily QC Results
Daily quality control results can be viewed through the
REAL TIME QC, INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR,
INDIVIDUAL QC LIST, AND INDIVIDUAL QC CHART
screens.
During routine operation, the instrument compares
paired (X) and (Y) control values against the mean and
SD entered for each control on the REAL TIME QC
screen. The instrument uses specific guidelines
(modified Westgard Rules or Multi-Rule Shewhart)
selected by the operator (explained in Section 5.34) to
evaluate each set of control results.
Each set of control results is either acceptable or
exhibits a random, system, or indeterminate error. If
a random, systematic, or indeterminate alarm is
issued, an alarm message appears on the
OPERATION MONITOR screen, and the appropriate
data alarm appears next to the affected test on the
result printout and on the INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR
screen.
The REAL TIME QC screen judges quality control
results by a multi-rule Shewhart method. Random,
systematic, or indeterminate QC errors are flagged on
the REAL TIME QC screen. In addition, an audible
alarm is issued when an error of this type is detected.
Consult these screens during a chemistry run to
ensure that patient results are properly controlled.
2.13 Quality Control Procedures
2 30
2.14 QC File Maintenance
2.14.1 Introduction
Daily and cumulative values for a maximum of eight
levels of controls can be stored in the instrument by
performing the following steps:
1 Evaluate daily QC values for all tests and delete
those that are to be excluded from cumulative QC.
Daily QC values should not be deleted without a
valid reason. You can delete daily QC values in
one of four ways:
QC Job, REAL TIME QC screen, Data Reject
field. See Section 2.31
QC Job, INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR screen,
Delete field. See Section 2.32
QC Job, INDIVIDUAL QC LIST screen, Result
Edit field. See Section 2.33
Routine Job, START CONDITIONS screen,
Clear Results field. See Section 2.23
2 Accumulate daily values into cumulative QC, using
the Individual QC List.
2.14.2 Procedure
To delete daily QC values using the REAL TIME QC
screen and the Data Reject field, as well as
accumulate daily QC values, perform the following
steps:
1 Press QC, followed by ENTER, to display the
REAL TIME QC screen, as shown in Figure 2-18.
2 Move the cursor to the Test field. Type the channel
number or press the test key for the test to be
viewed.
3 Move the cursor to the Data Reject field. Press 1
to delete random errors, 2 to delete systematic
errors, or 3 to delete QC errors, followed by ENTER.
This deletes all random, system or QC errors. You
cannot selectively delete points here.
4 Repeat steps 2 - 4 for all tests.
5 Press QC, followed by 3 ENTER, to display the
INDIVIDUAL QC LIST screen, as shown in Figure
2-19.
6 Move the cursor to the Control field and press 1
ENTER to accumulate values for control level 1.
7 Move the cursor to the Accumulate field and press
1 ENTER. The message "Are You Sure?" is
displayed. Press 1 (Continue) ENTER.
8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for the remainder of the
controls. In step 6, enter the number (2-8) that
represents the l evel of control you are
accumulating.
When the data is accumulated, the REAL TIME
QC and INDIVIDUAL QC LIST are cleared. The QC
data on INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR appears in
reverse video to indicate it has been accumulated.
Data points on INDIVIDUAL QC CHART appears
as "#" to indicate it has been accumulated.
2 31
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
1
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
@, #, + Data Reject [ ]
Rules Enabled [ ] - [ 1]
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
*
#
Figure 2-18: REAL TIME QC
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
3 Individual QC List
Input Control No. 1 to 8 : ENTER
Control
S.Type
Accumulate
Print
Delete
Reprint QC Report
Transfer to Host
[ ]
Serum
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
3.2
1.9
0.4
0.6
0.00
1.09
2.4
1.67
0.33
0.10
0.19
0.32
0.11
0.05
12.4
5.17
0.234
0.42
2.57
5.49
1.68
1.34
0.00
5.31
3.17
5.35
3.93
2.70
4.03
4.27
4.37
3.01
6.13
3.43
3.79
0.39
7
5
1
1
0.0
2.4
6
4.3
0.7
0.2
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.1
25
11.1
0.50
0.6
124.6
34.6
23.8
44.7
1.30
20.54
75.6
31.24
8.40
3.70
4.72
7.50
2.52
1.66
202.4
150.58
6.168
108.20
106.0-
30.0-
20.0-
34.0-
1.01-
17.7-
71.0-
25.0-
7.40-
3.30-
4.1-
6.8-
2.30-
1.56-
184.0-
143.9-
5.82-
106.2-
148.0
42.0
28.0
50.0
1.41
23.7
85.0
33.0
8.80
4.30
4.9
7.6
2.90
1.96
214.0
155.9
6.62
120.2
2
3
4
7
8
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
47
48
49
5
5
5
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
LD
AST
ALT
AMYL
TBILI
BUN
GLU
CO"
CA
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
PTN-81
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
Ch Test N Mean 2SD Limits SD CV(%) Range
Na
K
Cl
Figure 2-19: INDIVIDUAL QC LIST
2 32
2.15 Patient Reports
2.15.1 Real Time Printout of Patient
Results
You can direct the instrument to print or not to print
patient results as they become available. Real Time
printing of patient results is controlled through the
START CONDITIONS screen. If you request that
results be printed, the instrument can be directed to
print results in report format (chartable report) or short
format (condensed report).
The report format is defined by the operator through the
REPORT FORMAT screen, which is located in the
PARAMETER JOB.
All test results are stored on the data disk. If the
instrument is directed not to print results in real time,
you can print patient reports at a later time through the
DATA REVIEW screen.
You can edit rerun test results into the original patient
file and print the complete report through the DATA
REVIEW screen.
You can edit test results obtained on a separate
instrument into the patient file and print the complete
report through the DATA REVIEW screen.
2.15.2 Edit Patient Reports
Use the DATA REVIEW screen to edit patient
reports.
2.15 Patient Reports
2 33
2.16 Overview
2.16.1 Introduction
Part B of Chapter 2 outlines the CRT screens on your
analyzer. An example and a brief description of each
screen are included. For screens used to process
routine samples, operating procedures are found in
Part A of this chapter, Operating Instructions. Non-
routine procedures, or procedures required for initial
analyzer set-up, are included in Part B.
Before discussing specific screens and how to use
them, some general instructions are necessary.
These instructions apply to all 911 Analyzer CRT
screens. The screen representations shown in this
chapter and throughout this manual are for illustrative
purposes only. The data shown may not accuratly
reflect normal, day-to-day operation of the analyzer.
2.16.2 Entry Fields
Entry fields are areas where you enter information. An
entry field is active when the cursor is shown in the field
(in reverse video), and the appropriate entry prompts
are displayed. Some data may not reflect normal day-
to-day operation of the analyzer. You can move the
cursor to activate the entry fields by pressing the arrow
keys, which are the four keys located to the left of the
numeric keypad.
2.16.3 Field and Prompt Explanations
Throughout the remainder of this chapter each entry
field and related screen prompts are listed in the
following format:
Entry Field Name [ ] Highlighted
area indicates
Related Screen Prompts position of
cursor.
2.16.4 Entry Prompts
At the bottom of each screen is an entry prompt. In
this area, the software instructs you as to what type
of information to enter, and what format to use when
entering that information. This information is specific
to the entry field where the cursor is positioned. As
you type your entry, it appears in the entry field.
Before you press ENTER, look at the entry to be sure
it is correct. NOTE: ENTER must be pressed after the
entry is completed to process each keyboard entry.
If the message INPUT ERROR appears at the bottom
of the screen, an entry error has occurred.
2.16.5 How to Clear Entry Errors
There are two types of entry errors:
Input errors occur when the instrument status does
not permit the desired entry. (Example: trying to
enter 7 when only 1 - 6 is allowed.)
To correct input errors:
1 Press the CANCEL key to clear.
2 Re-enter the appropriate information after the
instrument has reached the appropriate status.
2.16 Overview
2. CRT SCREEN DISPLAY
PART B
2 34
Typing errors are not recognized by the instrument
unless they also result in an input format error. They
may be corrected by the following procedure:
1 Move the cursor to the field containing the error and
press C to cancel the error.
2 Enter (type) the correct information, according to
the entry prompt.
3 Press ENTER.
2.16.6 Screen Configuration
Figure 2-20 is an example of the 911 screen
configuration.
Figure 2-20: 911 CRT Screen Configuration
2.16 Overview
Alarm Status
(Highlighted in
yellow)
Alarm 37 Operation 06/25/92 12:20
Input Number From List to Access Desired Function : ENTER
Routine
Processing Status Date Time
Incubation Bath
Temperature
Operational Mode
Guidance and Page Continue Icon Prompt Line
Contents of
Screen
Item Description
Alarm Status notifies the operator of an
instrument alarm condition.
Incubation Bath indicates temperature of
the incubation bath water.
Operational Mode
(all modes are defined
in Section 1.8)
indicates the operational
mode of the instrument.
These modes include:
Initialization, Stand-by,
Parameter Check, Reset,
Operation, Sampling Stop,
Stop, Sleep, Wake-Up,
Stat Stand-by, Check, and
Probe Wash.
Processing Status indicates the processing
status of the instrument.
These include: Routine,
Stat, and Name of
Maintenance Function
being performed.
Date indicates the current date.
Time indicates the current time.
Guidance and Page
Continue Icons
indicate the Guidance or
Page Continue keys are
active.
Contents of Screen contain information to
perform the function.
Prompt Line lists all possible selections
for entry field where the
cursor is located.
2 35
2.16.7 Initialization Screen
After the ON switch is in the ON position, the analyzer
enters the Initialization mode and the following screen
appears. Press any job selection key to begin
operation. Figure 2-21 is an example of the
INITIALIZATION screen.
Figure 2-21: Initialization Screen
NOTE
For reference only. Screen may not appear exactly as
shown.
2.16 Overview
Initialization 06/25/92 12:20
HITACHI AUTOMATIC ANALYZER
COPYRIGHT (C) HITACHI, LTD, 1991, 1992
SYSTEM FD VERSION : 7076020-04-08
DATA FD VERSION : 7076001-00-01
Press Any Job Selection Key ?
2 36
2.17 Operation Monitor
2.17.1 Introduction
Use the OPERATION MONITOR screen to view
information about current instrument conditions. The
OPERATION MONITOR screen has two pages. A
sampling grid displays the processing status of each
sample in the outer and middle rings of the sample
disk on page 1. Alarms are also listed on page 1.
Page 2 displays additional operating information. The
operator cannot make any keyboard entries from
either page of the OPERATION MONITOR screen.
2.17.2 Displaying OPERATION
MONITOR - - Page 1
Press the OPERATION MONITOR key to display
page 1 of the OPERATION MONITOR screen.
2.17.3 Example of OPERATION
MONITOR - - Page 1
Figure 2-22 is an example of page 1 of the
OPERATION MONITOR screen.
Figure 2-22: OPERATION MONITOR Screen - - Page 1
2.17.4 OPERATION MONITOR Fields
and Prompts - - Page 1
Each OPERATION MONITOR screen - - Page1 field
and prompt is explained below.
SAMPLING GRID
The sampling grid displays the status of each sample
in the outer and middle rings of the sample disk. The
contents in these spaces are cleared when the disk
is changed or when START is pressed from Stand-by
to begin a new run.
Different letters and highlighting appear in the
numbered boxes of the grid to indicate sampling
status. The legend on the screen provides an
explanation. A description of the legend is given in the
table below.
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Operation Monitor
Alarm Message
Stirrer 2:Execute Mech. Check
Level
STOP
Code
02-006
Time
10:20
51 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5
70
E E E E E
R:R. Finished
E:S. Finished
R:Routine
E:Stat
R:R. Finished
E:S. Finished
R:N. Rerun
E:S. Rerun
26 7 8 9 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 40
10 20
50
R R R R R R R R R R
Currently Sampling
Outer
Ring
Middle
Ring
S.No.
R52
Pos.
42
ID
1234567890123
Test
AMYL
2 37
Currently Sampling
When the analyzer is in the Operate mode, this line
displays information about the test currently being
sampled. When the analyzer is in the Stand-by or
Sampling Stop mode, information about the last
sample processed is displayed.
When sampling is complete, the No More Samples to
Process alarm is issued and sounds the buzzer until
you press the BUZZ. OFF key. The status line
displays Sampling Stop. After all data has printed out
and the automatic wash functions are complete, the
status line briefly changes to Stop and then returns to
Stand-by.
S. No.
This field displays the current sample number. On
this line, the current sample number is preceded by a
letter indicating the type of sample.
R = Routine Sample (followed by
sample number 1 - 800)
RR = Routine Sample Rerun (followed
by sample number 1 - 800)
E = Stat Sample (followed by sample
number 1 - 200)
ER = Stat Sample Rerun (followed by
sample number 1 - 200)
C = Quality Control number (1 - 8)
followed by sequence number (1 - 30)
S = Calibrator number (1 - 6)
followed by times run (1 - 3)
Pos.
This field displays the position of the test currently
being sampled.The first number indicates the disk
number; the second number indicates the disk
position.
ID
This field displays the ID number of the sample being
tested.
Test
This field displays the name of the test currently being
sampled. Only one test name is displayed in the 1-
test mode. For serum-indexed samples without other
tests selected, S. IND is displayed. For ISE
sampling, ISE is displayed.
Sampling Grid Legend
R = Routine Routine (normal) sampling in
process (no highlighting)
R = R. finished Routine sampling without
rerun test selections complete; results
printed (white highlighting)
R = R. Rerun Routine sampling complete
with rerun test selections; results
printed or sampling of routine rerun in
process (yellow highlighting)
R = R. Rerun finished Routine rerun
sampling complete; results printed
(gray highlighting)
E = Stat Stat (emergency) sampling in
process (no highlighting)
E = Stat finished Stat sampling without
rerun test selections complete; results
printed (white highlighting)
E = S. Rerun Stat sampling complete with
rerun test selections; results printed or
sampling of Stat rerun sample in
process (yellow highlighting)
E = S. Rerun finished Stat rerun sample
complete; results printed (gray
highlighting)
2 38
Alarm Message
The descriptive names of instrument alarms that have
occurred since powering ON the instrument, starting
a chemistry run, or clearing the alarm display are
displayed here. The 10 most recent alarms are
displayed (first in, first out). To clear the alarm
messages, press the BUZ. OFF key twice. Refer to
Chapter 4, Troubleshooting, for more information on
each alarm.
NOTE
After the condition causing the alarm is corrected, the
alarm listed is cleared from the screen when the BUZ.
OFF key is pressed twice, the START key is pressed,
or power to the instrument is interrupted. Alarms can
be retrieved from the Alarm Log (Cumulative or Daily)
Reports.
Level
The alarm level (Warning, Sampling Stop, Stop,
Emergency Stop) for each alarm is displayed in this
column.
Code
The Class and Code numbers for each alarm are listed
in these columns to assist in looking up alarm
remedies in the operators manual.
Time
The time each alarm occurred is listed in this column.
2.17.5 Displaying OPERATION
MONITOR - - Page 2
To view page 2 of the OPERATION MONITOR screen,
press OPERATION MONITOR fol l owed by
GUIDANCE.
2.17.6 Example of OPERATION
MONITOR - - Page 2
OPERATION MONITOR screen.
Figure 2-23: OPERATION MONITOR Screen - - Page 2
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Operation Monitor
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Print Mode
Host Communication
Routine
: Off
: Automatic
: Report
: Off-Line
2 39
2.17.7 OPERATION MONITOR Fields
Each OPERATION MONITOR screen - - Page 2 field
and prompt is explained below.
Routine Rerun Mode
This field displays the mode selected for reruns of
routine samples. Mode options such as Automatic,
Rerun Only, or No. are displayed.
Stat Rerun Mode
This field displays the selected mode for reruns of Stat
samples. One of two mode options is displayed: Auto
Rerun or No.
Print Mode
This field displays the print format chosen for printing
patient results. One of these format choices is
displayed: Short, Report, or No Print.
Host Communication
This field displays the current host communication
status, which is either Offline or Online.
2 40
2.18 Routine Job - - Menu
2.18.1 Introduction
Use the ROUTINE JOB MENU to access screens that
are used during routine sample processing.
Procedures for the initial set-up of the displays are
given in the following sections. Procedures for routine
display programming are given in Section A of this
chapter, Operating Instructions.
2.18.2 Displaying the Routine Job
Menu
MENU.
2.18.3 Example of the Routine JOB
MENU
Figure 2-24 is an example of the ROUTINE JOB
MENU.
Figure 2-24: ROUTINE JOB MENU
2.18.4 ROUTINE JOB MENUFields and
Prompts
Each Routine Job Menu field and prompt is explained
below.
Function No. [ ]
Input Number From List to Access Desired Function:
ENTER
To choose a screen from the menu, enter the screen
number and press ENTER. The selected screen
appears on the CRT.
2.18 Routine Job - - Menu
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Routine Job Menu
Input Number from List to Access Desired Function : ENTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Reagent Status
Calibration Test Selection
Patient Test Selection
Start Conditions
Real Time Data Monitor
Data Review
Rerun Samples
Status Setting
Function No. [ ]
2 41
2.19 Routine Job - - Reagent
Status
2.19.1 Introduction
The REAGENT STATUS screen allows the operator to
see what information was obtained by the analyzer
when the reagent bar codes were last registered
(reagent registration). This screen has real-time
display capabilities and updates each time a reagent
registration is performed.
The REAGENT STATUS screen has two pages. Page
1 has a keyboard matrix on the lower portion of the
screen. Page 2 lists all of the reagents registered by
the reagent bar code reader.
2.19.2 Displaying the REAGENT
STATUS Screen - - Page 1
Press ROUTINE to display the ROUTINE JOB MENU.
Press 1 ENTER to display page 1 of the REAGENT
STATUS screen.
2.19.3 Example of the REAGENT
Figure 2-25 is an example of page 1 of the REAGENT
STATUS screen.
Figure 2-25: REAGENT STATUS Screen - - Page 1
2.19 Routine Job - - Reagent Status
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Reagent Status
Registration
Manual Set
Cancel
Print
Hitergent Disk 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
ISE Int. Ref.
ISE Dil
ISE KCl
2
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
Y e s
Y e s
3 7 0
2 3 0
2 7 0
THEO
2 42
When a required reagent or diluent for a specific
chemistry or wash solution (for a probe wash) is not
present on the analyzer, the corresponding test key on
the keyboard matrix is highlighted with a slash.
NOTE
The keyboard matrix indicator for an operator initiated
masking is a reverse slash, as shown:
The test key is highlighted with a slash when:
the reagent bottle is not present on the analyzer
the reagent bar code reader cannot read the bar
code
less than 10 tests remain in the bottle at the
beginning of a run.
When the test key is highlighted with a slash, the
analyzer automatically masks that chemistry and will
not process any tests selected for that chemistry.
2.19.4 REAGENT STATUS Screen
Fields and Prompts - - Page 1
Each REAGENT STATUS screen field and prompt is
explained below.
Registration [ ]
Choose 1: Read Reagent Barcodes 2: Read Barcodes
& Check Level : ENTER
Use this field to specify the type of reagent
registration carried out by the analyzer. A bar code
registration occurs automatically when: the reagent
disk lid is removed and replaced, the analyzer is
powered ON, or the analyzer performs Wake-Up
TM
.
Choosing 1: Read Reagent Barcodes instructs the
analyzer to read the reagent bottle bar codes only.
This takes 1.5 minutes. Choosing 2: Read Barcodes
& Check Level registers both the contents of the bar
code and the reagent volume. This takes 2.5 minute.
The reagent volume is measured by the reagent probe
through liquid level detection. The analyzer
automatically updates the reagent level when the
reagent probe enters the bottle for the first time. Enter
the proper choice and press ENTER.
Manual Set [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Use the manual set fields to manually enter
information from a reagent bar code. This may be
used in the event that a bar code cannot be registered
by the bar code reader or a minimal bar code must be
entered.
Three types of reagent bar code labels may be entered
manually:
Full bar codeContains all 21 digits of the bar code
information.
Partial bar codeContains partial bar code
information.
Minimal bar codeContains no information about
the reagent, but allows the bottle to be placed on
the analyzer (for open system applications).
Depending on the type of bar code label, different
manual set fields are used to enter the information.
Fields 1, 2, and 3 are entered for full or partial bar
codes. All fields, with the exception of Field 3, are
used for minimal bar codes. (Remember to physically
place the reagent bottle in the same position on the
analyzer that is programmed during manual entry.)
2 43
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Disk No. 1 or 2 of Reagent : ENTER
Use this field to specify the reagent disk number (1 or
2) where the manually-entered reagent bottle is
located. Use this field when entering information for
full, partial, and minimal bar-coded reagents. Enter
the appropriate disk number and press ENTER.
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Position No. 1 to 32 of Reagent : ENTER
Use this field to specify the position number (1 - 32)
on the reagent disk where the manually-entered
reagent bottle is located. Use this field when entering
information for full, partial, and minimal bar-coded
reagents. Enter the appropriate disk position and
press ENTER.
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Input 21 digit Barcode Number : ENTER
Use this field to specify the reagent bottle bar code (up
to 21 numeric characters) for the manually-entered
reagent. Use this field when entering information for
full or partial bar code entries. This field is not used
for minimal bar code entries. Enter the bar code digits
and press ENTER.
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Bottle Code No. 00001 to 00400 : ENTER
Use this field to specify the bottle code (00001 -
00400) for the manually-entered reagent. The bottle
code links the reagent bottle to the test parameters
and corresponds to the application code. Use this
field when entering information for minimal bar code
entries. This field is not used for full or partial bar code
labels. Enter the bottle code and press ENTER.
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose Reagent Type 1:R1 2:R2 3:R3 4:R4
5:Diluent 6:Wash : ENTER
Use this field to specify the reagent type of the
manually-entered reagent, and when entering
information for minimal bar-coded reagents. This
field is not used for full or partial bar code labels. Valid
reagent types include: R1, R2, R3, R4, Diluent, and
Wash. R1 indicates that the reagent is dispensed 10
seconds after sample dispense. R2 indicates that the
reagent is dispensed 1.5 minutes after sample
dispense. R3 indicates that the reagent is dispensed
5 minutes after sample dispense. R4 indicates that
the reagent is dispensed 10 seconds after sample
dispense. Enter the number corresponding to the
appropriate reagent type, as shown above, and press
ENTER.
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose Bottle Size 1:Small (20mL) 2:Medium (50mL)
3:Large (100mL) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the bottle size (S, M, or L) of
the manually-entered reagent. Use this field when
entering information for minimal bar code entries. This
field is not used for full or partial bar code labels. Enter
the number corresponding to the correct bottle size,
as shown above, and press ENTER.
Cancel [ ] [ ]
Use this field to cancel manually-entered reagent
information. Manually-entered information is
automatically cancelled when a full bar coded reagent
bottle is placed on the reagent disk in the position
specified during the manual entry. A previously-
entered manual registration must be deleted before
using the same disk and position number for another
manual registration entry.
2 44
Hitergent Disk 1 [ ]
2 [ ]
Input 1:Activate 0:Inactivate : ENTER
Press 1 ENTER to request Hitergent bar code
registration for reagent disk 2. The remaining volume
in the Hitergent bottle on reagent disk 2 is shown to
the right of this field. Press 2 ENTER to cancel
Hitergent bar code registration for reagent disk 2.
ISE Int. Ref. [ ]
Input Total Volume of Reagents (mL) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the volume of the ISE internal
standard solution (0 - 999). When a new bottle is
placed on the analyzer, enter the volume in mL and
press ENTER. This volume is automatically counted
down as the solution is used during primes or
operation.
ISE Dil. [ ]
Use this field to enter the volume of the ISE diluent
solution (0 - 999). When a new bottle is placed on the
analyzer, enter the volume in mL and press ENTER.
This volume is automatically counted down as the
solution is used during primes or operation.
ISE KCl [ ]
Use this field to enter the volume of the ISE KCL
solution (0 - 999). When a new bottle is placed on the
analyzer, enter the volume in mL and press ENTER.
This volume is automatically counted down as the
solution is used during primes or operation.
Cancel [ ] [ ]
Input Disk No 1 or 2 of Reagent : ENTER
Use this field to select the reagent disk (1 - 2) from
which the manual entry is deleted. Enter the disk
number and press ENTER.
Cancel Reagent [ ] [ ]
Input Position No. 1 to 32 of Reagent : ENTER
Use this field to select the reagent disk position
number (1 - 32) from which the manual entry is deleted.
Enter the position number and press ENTER.
Print [ ]
Input 1:To Print Report : ENTER
Use this field to print the REAGENT STATUS report
from Stand-by. Press 1 ENTER to request a printed
copy.
2 [ ]
Use these fields to instruct the analyzer to register the
Hitergent bar code in position 33 on either reagent
disk during reagent bar code registration.
2 [ ]
Input 1:Activate 0:Inactivate : ENTER
Press 1 ENTER to request Hitergent bar code
registration for reagent disk 1. The remaining volume
in the Hitergent bottle on reagent disk 1 is shown to
the right of this field. Press 0 ENTER to cancel
Hitergent bar code registration for reagent disk 1.
2 45
2.19.5 Displaying the REAGENT
On page 2 of the REAGENT STATUS screen, a list of
all of the reagents registered by the reagent bar code
readers replaces the keyboard matrix. Different
characters and colors are used to highlight this
display and give additional information.
Press 1 ENTER to display page 1 of the REAGENT
STATUS screen. Press GUIDANCE to display page
2 of the REAGENT STATUS screen.
Press PAGE CONTINUE to scroll through additional
information on page 2.
Press SHIFT and PAGE CONTINUE to move to the
end of the list of information on page 2. The Cap Lock
light stays lit. Press PAGE CONTINUE to scroll
through the list from the end to beginning.
2.19.6 Example of the REAGENT
Figure 2-26 is an example of page 2 of the REAGENT
STATUS screen.
Figure 2-26: REAGENT STATUS Screen - - Page 2
2.19.7 REAGENT STATUS Screen
The following information is listed on page 2 of the
REAGENT STATUS screen, replacing the keyboard
matrix. These fields do not allow any entries by the
operator. The entry fields at the top of the screen
remain the same as those on page 1 of the REAGENT
STATUS screen.
Assay
This column displays the short name of the test
reagents currently in the reagent disks. The names
are displayed in channel order. Question marks (?)
appear in this field in the following instances:
When a reagent bar code is registered by the bar
code reader and no parameters have been entered
for that reagent.
1
ENTER
SHIFT
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Reagent Status
Registration
Manual Set
Cancel
Print
Hitergent Disk 1
ISE Int. Ref.
ISE Dil
ISE KCl
2
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
Y e s
Y e s
3 7 0
2 3 0
2 7 0
Assay Type Pos. Tests Size Stab. Exp.W Lot No. App Code
00311
00074
00074
00115
00115
00115
00115
00311
00036
00036
00311
00018
00018
049902
051986
051986
070151
070151
070151
070151
049902
070148
048796
049902
048795
070147
L
M
S
L
L
S
S
L
L
L
L
L
L
Dil
R1
R3
R1
R1
R3
R3
Dil
R1
R3
Dil
R1
R3
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
7
20
5
17
31
26
32
7
3
3
7
27
8
93/52
93/43
93/43
94/38
94/38
94/38
94/38
93/52
94/17
93/21
93/52
92/25
93/12
6
6
13
13
6
6
27
27
CK
LD
AST
ALT
79
120
130
340
70
79
210
990
79
240
990
mL
mL
mL
* Manual Setting ! Over-Ride Manual Setting ? App Code Not Found
2 46
When a minimal bar code is located on a reagent
disk and no information has been manually
entered.
When a minimal bar code is located on a reagent
disk in a posi ti on that has ful l bar code
information manually entered.
Type
This column displays the type of reagent in the bottles
on the reagent disks. There are six reagent types:
DIL, R1, R2, R3, R4, and W. R1 indicates that the
reagent is dispensed 10 seconds after sample
dispense. R2 indicates that the reagent is dispensed
1.5 minutes after sample dispense. R3 indicates that
the reagent is dispensed 5 minutes after sample
dispense. T4 indicates that the reagent is dispensed
10 minutes after sample dispense. The reagent type is
highlighted with yellow when there are fewer tests
remaining in the reagent bottle than are specified in the
Reagent Check Level field on the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen. The reagent type is
highlighted in red when there are fewer than 10 tests
remaining in the bottle. For a diluent or wash, the type
is highlighted in yellow when > 10 mL of reagent
remain, red when < 1 mL of reagent remains. If a
reagent is not physically in the reagent disk or if the bar
code fails to register, only Type is displayed and the
subsequent items are blank. If either of these
situations occur, the analyzer automatically masks
the test. The keyboard matrix on page 1 of the
REAGENT STATUS screen is highlighted with a slash
for that test.
NOTE
Changing the Data Mode field on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen from On Board to Manual will
delete the test from this list. Only active channels are
displayed.
Pos.
This column displays the disk number and the disk
position number where each reagent is located. The
first digit indicates the disk number and the second
two digits indicate the position number. An asterisk (*)
following the position column indicates bar code
information has been manually entered. An
exclamation point (!) following the position column
indicates full bar code information registered by the
reagent bar code reader has replaced manually-
entered reagent information. The manually-entered
test is automatically masked in this case because the
analyzer does not know where the reagent
is located.
When multiple bottles of reagent are registered for any
type, the disk number for the smallest position number
is displayed first. Disk numbers and position numbers
are displayed in numerical order for each type. If the
reagent type has not been placed in the appropriate
reagent disk, the reagent disk number is highlighted in
yellow and the Check (R1 or R2) Position and App
Code alarms appear on the OPERATION MONITOR
screen.
Tests
This column displays the number of tests remaining
for each reagent. If the bar code is not registered, the
column remains blank until a level registration is
performed or the bottle is used for the first time. When
the number of remaining tests is less than 10, the test
is highlighted in red. If the number of tests remaining
is greater than 1000, then 990 will be displayed. The
number is truncated to the lowest ten. If the number
of tests remaining is 29, for example, then the number
displayed will be 20. If the number of remaining tests
falls below 10 during a run, the analyzer continues to
perform that test, but the test is masked at the
beginning of the next run if the number of tests
remaining reaches zero and a second bottle of
reagent is not on board. If a second bottle of reagent
is on board, automatic changeover occures. The
Tests column is highlighted in red when the bottle is
empty.
2 47
NOTE
If the type of reagent is DIL or W, the Tests column
displays the mL of diluent or wash solution remaining,
not number of tests remaining.
Size
This column displays the bottle size for each reagent:
S (20 mL), M (50 mL), or L (100 mL). This information
appears for all bar code types.
Stab.
This column displays the remaining working solution
stability in days for each reagent as programmed on
the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. When a full
bar code label is used, the working solution stability
is displayed. If partial bar code information or minimal
bar code information is entered, the space remains
blank. The working solution stability is counted down
by the analyzers internal clock. When the working
solution stability is zero (0), the Stab. column is
highlighted in red. Working solution stability is
tracked only when a bottle number is assigned to the
reagent bottle. If CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS is
programmed as 0, then the display remains blank.
Exp. Wk
This column displays the expiration week for the lot of
reagent. The first two digits indicate the year of
expiration and the second two digits indicate the week
of expiration (93 - 52). When the reagent has expired,
the date is highlighted in red.
Lot No.
This column displays the lot number for each reagent.
This information appears for partial and full bar codes
only.
App Code
This column displays the application code for each
reagent. For all BM reagents, the bottle code
corresponds to the application code for the reagent.
This code links the reagent to the chemistry
parameters needed to perform the test and calculate
results. For a complete list of all BM assigned
application codes, refer to the BM/Hitachi 911
Application Sheets.
NOTE
The analyzer does not automatically mask a test when
the reagent expires. All information on the REAGENT
STATUS screen is stored in C-RAM.
NOTE
ISE reagents are flagged for Reagent Volume Short
alarms. The names are highlighted in red or yellow
according to the amount of reagent remaining. The
Reagent Check Level field on page 2 of the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen must be set to Yes
for this highlighting to occur.
Reagent Yellow Red
ISE Internal Standard < 50 mL 0 mL
ISE Diluent < 30 mL 0 mL
ISE KCL < 30 mL 0 mL
2 48
Reagent Status Screen Legend
IF... THEN...
TYPE is yellow prepare more reagent and place
on 911 (tests remaining < Rgt
Check Level)
TYPE is red prepare more reagent and place
on 911 (tests remaining < 10)
POS is yellow place highlighted reagent into
proper disk (R1 DISK = R1, R4,
DIL, WASH; R2 DISK = R2, R3,
WASH; channel will remain
masked until problem corrected)
POS is * verify that reagent marked with *
is in designated position (this
indicates a manual set reagent -
for details refer to page 16)
POS is ! verify that the manual set
reagent is not required for this
run (! indicates that a full label
reagent has been placed in a
position previously assigned to a
manually set reagent)
EXP.WK is red prepare fresh reagent and place
in proper disk on 911, as reagent
is expired
STAB is red perpare fresh reagent and place
in proper disk on 911, as working
reagent has expired
TESTS is ? verify proper reagent,
parameters, and channel
assignment (? indicates reagent
bottle label was read by bar code
read, but no test is assigned to
this bottle)
2 49
2.20 Routine Job - - Calibration
Test Selection
2.20.1 Introduction
The CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen is
used to designate which tests are to be calibrated
during start-up or repeat calibration. Automatic
calibration, or time out, is carried out according to the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS, no matter what is
selected on this screen.
The CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen has
two pages. Page 1 is used to enter calibration test
selections. Page 2 lists the Time-Out calibration
status and request the Calibrator Load List.
The time out calibration internal clock for a specific
assay is automatically reset when a successful
calibration is performed. The time out calibration
internal clock of any assay is not reset when a
calibration fails. As a result, failed calibrations will
automatically be reinitiated at the beginning of the
next run when the run is started for the Stand-by
mode. In the event of a failed calibration, the analyzer
reverts to the last succesful calibration to evaluate
patient data.
2.20.2 Displaying the CALIBRATION
TEST SELECTION Screen Page 1
Press ROUTINE to display the ROUTINE JOB
MENU. Press 2 ENTER to display page 1 of
the CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen.
2.20.3 Example of the CALIBRATION
TEST SELECTION Screen - -
Page 1
Figure 2-27 is an example of the CALIBRATION TEST
SELECTION screen, page 1.
Each CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION field and
prompt is explained below.
Figure 2-27: CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION
Screen - - Page 1
2.20 Routine Job - - Calibration Test Selection
2
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Mode
Type
Tests
Calibrator List
:Blank
:2 Point
:Span
:Full
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
[ ] [ 8] Hour
2 50
2.20.4 CALIBRATION TEST
SELECTION Screen Fields and
Prompts - - Page 1
Mode [ ]
Choose 1: Start Up 2: Repeat Calibration : ENTER
Use this field to select the mode of calibration for which
you want to make test selections. Two modes of
calibration can be selected.
Press 1 Start up ENTER to select a start-up
calibration.
Start-Up Calibration: Test selections for this
calibration are stored in C-RAM. The tests remain
programmed until you de-select them. A Start-Up
calibration is initiated from Stand-by only. All QC
test selections are performed following a Start-Up
calibration. Selecting prior to stat or routine
sampling a Start-Up calibration from Start
Conditions with no tests selected will initiate
processing of controls.
Press 2 Repeat Calibration ENTER to select a repeat
calibration.
Repeat Calibration: Initiate this mode for
immediate calibration or recalibration of a test
while the instrument is in any operational mode.
QC test selections are performed for only those
tests that were calibrated. A test is automatically
programmed for repeat calibration when a
calibration fails and is removed from the repeat
calibration list once a successful calibration is
performed.
Type [ ]
Choose Calibration Type 1 : Blank 2 : Span 3 : 2Point
4 : Full : ENTER
Use this field to select the calibration type. For all BM
chemistries, the recommended calibration type or
method is included as part of the chemistry
parameters. There are four calibration types:
BLANK uses the blank (STD (1)) only. For ISEs,
this runs the compensator.
2 POINT uses the blank calibrator and the span
calibrator. For ISEs, this runs the low and high
calibrators only.
FULL uses all programmed calibrators including
the blank. Because three standards can be
used, this type is for multipoint calibrations. Full
calibration must be selected to run the
compensator, low, and high ISE calibration.
SPAN uses one specified calibrator other than the
blank. Span calibration cannot be selected for
ISEs.
Chemistry calibration may require a blank only
(generally fixed K-factor assays), blank and calibrator
(mostly endpoint assays), or blank and multiple
standards (generally nonlinear assays). Select the
appropriate calibration type and press ENTER.
Tests [ ]
Use this field to select the tests to be calibrated with
the specified calibration type. Press the appropriate
test or profile key, followed by ENTER. The keyboard
matrix will highlight the selected keys in reverse
video. An icon designating the type of calibration
selected also appears in the highlighted test keys.
2 51
TEST SELECTION Screen - Page 2
On page 2 of the CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION
screen, a list of the tests and their time out
calibrations is displayed. Up to 10 tests can be
displayed at one time.
Press 2 ENTER to display page 1 of the CALIBRATION
TEST SELECTION screen. Press GUIDANCE to
display page 2 of the screen.
Press PAGE CONTINUE to view additional tests that
are scheduled for automatic calibration.
light stays on. Press the PAGE CONTINUE key to
scroll through the list from the end to the beginning.
TEST SELECTION Screen - Page 2
Figure 2-28 is an example of the CALIBRATION
TEST SELECTION screen, page 2.
Figure 2-28: CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION
Screen - - Page 2
2.20.7 CALIBRATION TEST
SELECTION Screen Fields and
Prompts - - Page 2
Calibrator List
[ ] [ ] Hour
Use these fields to obtain a list of the calibrators
needed for the specified calibration mode. The
calibrator list also gives the sample disk position each
calibrator should occupy. The first field selects the
calibration mode; the second field specifies the time
interval in hours for which the list is printed.
2
ENTER
SHIFT
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Mode
Type
Tests
Calibrator List
:Blank
:2 Point
:Span
:Full
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
[ ] [ 8] Hour
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
Blank 2 point Full Span
0/
0/
145/
0/
973/
0/
3
24
168
24
999
24
1/
0/
24
24
2 52
Calibrator List
[ ] [ ] Hour
Choose 1 : Start Up 2 : Repeat 3 : Time Out 4 : Master
List : ENTER
Separate lists for start up, repeat, or time out
calibration can be selected. Press 1 ENTER for a
start-up calibration list, 2 ENTER for a repeat
calibration list, and 3 ENTER for a time out calibration
list. Time out calibrations do not appear on the screen
when a start-up calibration is selected, but will print on
the load list.
Press 4 ENTER to request a master calibration load
list. This list shows placement of all calibrators that
have chemistry parameters programmed in the
analyzer, regardless of the test selection or time out
status specified on this screen.
Calibrator List
[ ] [ ] Hour
Input Time Interval 0 To 24 Hours : ENTER
Use this field to specify the time interval, in hours, for
which the load list is active. If a load list is requested
for the next eight hours, for example, the
list will include all calibrators required by the analyzer
in that time period.
If a repeat calibration load list is requested for the next
eight hours, the calibrators appearing on the list are
those needed for the next eight hours, including tests
whose calibration will time out within eight hours. In
addition, those repeat calibrations that were either
manually entered by the operator, or automatically
programmed by the analyzer due to a failed Automatic
or Start-up Calibration appear on the list.
The following information is listed on page 2 of the
CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen. These
fields do not allow any entries by the operator. The
entry fields to the left of the screen remain the same
as those on page 1 of the screen.
Blank 2 Point Full Span
1Test name xx/xx xx/xx xx/xx xx/
xx
The name of each test is listed along with each
calibration type. Information is present in a column
when that calibration type has been specified on the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETER screen.
The first number in each column displays the number
of hours remaining until the calibration times out. The
second number in each column displays the
calibration frequency.
The first number is shaded yellow if less than one hour
remain before calibration time-out. The first number is
shaded red at time out. The test will be calibrated the
next time the analyzer is started or during the corrent
run.
Most BM chemistries have parameters that define
when auto calibration should occur based on time out,
bottle change, or lot change. This information is
included on the parameter disk.
2 53
2.21 Routine Job Patient Test
Selection Without Bar
Code Reader
2.21.1 Introduction
The PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen is used to
program test selections and demographic data for
routine sample analysis. Test selection are stored in
C-RAM. If previous test selection information appears
on the screen, clear the previous test selections.
This screen is not routinely used if you are interfaced
to a host computer that downloads patient test
selections. The PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen
varies slightly, depending on whether you are using
the sample bar code reader. This section discusses
using the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen
without the bar code reader.
2.21.2 Displaying PATIENT TEST
SELECTION Without Bar Code
Reader
Press 3 ENTER to display the PATIENT TEST
SELECTION Screen.
2.21.3 Example of the PATIENT TEST
SELECTION Screen Without
Bar Code Reader
Figure 2-29 is an example of the PATIENT TEST
SELECTION screen.
Figure 2-29: PATIENT TEST SELECTION Screen
2.21.4 PATIENT TEST SELECTION
Without Bar Code Reader Fields
and Prompts
Run Type [ ]
Choose 1:Serum/Plasma 2 :Urine 3 :Other : ENTER
Use this field to select the type of sample. Enter the
number that corresponds to the sample type and
press ENTER. The different sample types are operator
defined from the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
The CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen will indicate
whether choice 1 is S or U.
2.21 Routine Job - - Patient Test Selection Without Bar Code
Reader
3
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Run Type
Sample Cup
Sample No.
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Repeat Function
Display Sample No.
Print List
Clear
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ]
Draw Date/Time
Sex/Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD Cup
16142
Normal
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
RECORD SPACE : 785
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
12 01 92 12 20
F 67 Y
WILMOTH, M.
O.P.
SMITH, J. B.
102-23-5656
MJM
2 54
Sample Cup [ ]
Choose 1 :STD Cup 2 :Micro 3 :STD on Tube 4 :Micro
on Tube 5 :Tube : ENTER
Use this field to select the size of the sample cup
being used. Five different sample cup selections can
be made. Press 1 STD Cup ENTER for a normal
sample cup. Press 2 Micro ENTER for a micro sample
cup. Press 3 STD on Tube ENTER for a normal
sample cup on a primary collection tube. Press 4
Micro on Tube ENTER for a micro sample cup on a
primary collection tube. Press 5 Tube ENTER for a
primary collection tube.
Sample No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to specify the Sequence Number,
Sample Disk Number and Sample Disk Position
Number for each sample.
Sample No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use this field to enter the sequence number for the
sample. All routine specimens are analyzed in
numerical order, by sequence number. Results are
stored on the data disk by sequence number. Tests
can be selected, and results can be stored for a
maximum of 800 routine patients on one data disk.
When a sequence number is entered, information
stored in memory for that sequence number appears
on the CRT, and stored test selection information is
highlighted on the keyboard matrix at the bottom of the
display. Enter the appropriate sequence number and
press ENTER.
Sample No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Disk No. 0 to 9 : ENTER
Use this field to enter the sample disk number where
the sample is located. Up to 10 sample disks,
numbered 0 through 9, can be recognized by the
instrument. The number entered in this field identifies
the disk where the sample is located. One sample
disk can be used for both sample cup sizes, primary
collection tubes, or sample cups on primary
collection tubes. Enter the appropriate sample disk
Sample No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Position No. 1 to 50 (0 : Initiates Sampling
Stop) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the sample disk position
number where the sample is located. The number
entered in this field tells the instrument where to find
the specimen on the sample disk. Each sample disk
has 50 routine sample positions.
Entering a sample position number of zero instructs
the analyzer to stop sampling when the sequence
number is reached.
WARNING
If more than 800 specimens are run in sequence
without clearing or replacing the data disk, the
instrument will write over old patient files. If the data
disk is used to store patient results, the same
sequence number should never be re-used on the
same data disk.
Reader
2 55
The following precautions must be observed:
ID Number. [ ]
Input Sampl e ID Number (Maxi mum 13
Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to assign an alphanumeric identification
number of up to 13 characters for each specimen.
This entry is not necessary with the bar code reader
turned off and the field may be skipped.
Sample Vol. [ ]
Choose 1 :Normal 2 :Decreased 3 :Increased Sample
Volume : ENTER
Use this field to select sample volume size. Normal,
Decreased, or Increased may be selected. This field
defaults to normal sample volume. Choose the
appropriate sample size and press ENTER.
More than one sample size may be selected for
different tests on the same sample. Specify the
sample size in this field. Specify the tests for that
sample size in the Tests field and press ENTER. The
sample number will increment by one. Move the
cursor back to the Sample No. field and re-enter the
sample number. Select another sample size and
make test selections for the second sample size.
Press ENTER. Repeat if a third sample size is
required.
Tests [ ]
Use this field to select tests or profiles to be
performed on the sample. It is best to enter all
demographic information before making test
selections. Demographic information can be
entered later. When the cursor is in this field, the test
and profile selection keys are active. When one of
these keys is pressed, the key that corresponds to
the selected test is highlighted in reverse video on
the keyboard matrix. If the key is pressed a second
time, the test is deselected and the highlighting turns
off.
The profile selection keys are the numeric keys
located to the right of the test selection keys. When
a profile selection key is pressed, the key is
highlighted in reverse video on the keyboard matrix and
all tests assigned to that profile also are highlighted.
When the key is pressed a second time, the
highlighting turns off and the tests are no longer
selected.
Press all test selection and/or profile selection keys
for the sample and ENTER. The sample number
increments by one automatically following each entry.
After tests are selected, the keyboard matrix
highlights the appropriate keys. If an increased
sample volume was chosen, an up arrow ( ) is
displayed in the highlighted key. If a decreased
sample volume was chosen, a down arrow ( ) is
displayed in the highlighted key.
Reader
IF... THEN...
the Data Disk is used to
store patient results
use each sequence
number once on a
Data Disk replace the
Data Disk after
exceeding 800 patient
files.
the Data Disk is not
used to store patient
results
use each sequence
number once on a
Data Disk clear the
Data Disk after
exceeding 800 files.
or
use each sequence
number once per day
clear the Data Disk at
the beginning of each
day.
2 56
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Use these fields to identify the date and time the
sample was drawn. If a Draw Date/Time is not
entered, this field defaults to the date and time the
sample number was entered. The order of these fields
is defined from the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Input Month (1 to 12) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the month the sample was taken.
Enter the month and press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Input Day (1 to 31) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the day the sample was taken.
Enter the day; press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Input Year (0 to 99) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the year the sample was taken.
Enter the year; press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Input Hour (0 to 23) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the hour the sample was taken.
Enter the hour and press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Input Minute (0 to 59) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the minute the sample was
taken. Enter the minute and press ENTER.
Reader
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to identify the sex and age of the
patient from which the sample was taken for normal
ranges that are specific to sex and age.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose 1:Male 2:Female : ENTER
Use this field to enter the sex of the patient from which
the sample was taken. Press 1 Male or 2 Female;
press ENTER.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Number : ENTER
Use this field to indicate the numerical age of the
patient. Enter the numerical age and press ENTER.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose Age Interval 1:Days 2:Months 3:Years :
ENTER
Use this field to indicate the age interval in days,
months or years. Enter the correct interval and press
ENTER.
Name [ ]
Input Maximum of 30 Characters : ENTER
Location [ ]
Physician [ ]
Patient ID [ ]
Drawn By [ ]
2 57
concerning the patient sample. These field names are
user definable on the SYSTEM PARAMETERS
screen. You can remove the demographic input
fields from the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen
using the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
Repeat Function [ ]
Use this field to assign the same test selections to
several samples run in sequence. Follow this
procedure:
Enter test selections for the first sample.
Move the cursor to the Sample No. field and re-
enter the sequence number for which test
selections have been made.
Move the cursor to the Repeat Function field.
Enter the sequence number of the last sample ran
with these test selections, then press ENTER.
Identical test selections are programmed for all
sequence numbers between the original sequence
number and the sequence number entered in the
Repeat Function field, inclusive.
Display Sample No. [ ]
Use this field for visual verification of programming or
to retrieve information on a patient sample. Enter the
sequence number, then press ENTER. The sequence
number, disk number, and position number and all
demographic data appear on the screen. Test
selections are highlighted on the bottom of the
screen. To increment by one through sequence
numbers, press ENTER.
Print List [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to enter the range of sequence
numbers you would like printed on the Requisition List.
The Requisition List gives the sequence number, disk
number, and position number, along with test
selections, for all requested samples. Enter the first
sequence number, press ENTER. Enter the last
sequence number, press ENTER.
Clear [ ]
Input 1:To Clear : ENTER (Have you cleared data?)
Are You Sure? 1:Continue 0:Cancel : ENTER
Use this field to clear all test selection information from
C-RAM at least once per day, if beginning each day
with sequence number 1.
Press 1 To Clear ENTER
The CRT prompt line displays: Are You Sure?
Press 1 Continue ENTER or 0 Cancel ENTER.
Wait until completion of the clear function before
attempting the next keyboard entry.
Reader
2 58
2.22 Routine Job Patient Test
Selection With Bar Code
Reader
2.22.1 Introduction
The PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen is used to
program test selections and demographic data for
routine sample analysis. Test selection are stored in
C-RAM. If previous test selection information appears
on the screen, clear previous test selections.
This screen is not routinely used if you are interfaced
to a host computer that downloads patient test
selections. Keyboard test selections will override
selections downloaded from the host computer. The
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen varies slightly,
depending on whether you are using the sample bar
code reader. This section discusses the PATIENT
TEST SELECTION screen using the sample bar code
reader.
2.22.2 Displaying PATIENT TEST
SELECTION With Bar Code
Reader
Press ROUTINE 3 ENTER to display the PATIENT
2.22.3 Example of the PATIENT TEST
SELECTION Screen With Bar
Code Reader
Figure 2-30 is an example of the PATIENT TEST
SELECTION screen.
Figure 2-30: PATIENT TEST SELECTION Screen
2.22.4 PATIENT TEST SELECTION
With Bar Code Reader Fields
and Prompts
Run Type [ ]
Choose 1 :Serum/Plasma 2 :Urine 3 :Other : ENTER
Use this field to select the type of sample. Enter the
press ENTER. The different sample types are operator
defined from the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
The CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen will indicate
whether choice 1 is S or R.
2.22 Routine Job - - Patient Test Selection With Bar Code Reader
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Input Sample ID Number (Maximum 13 Characters) : ENTER
Run Type
Sample Cup
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Display ID No.
Print List
Clear
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ]
Draw Date/Time
Sex/Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD on Tube
16142
Normal
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
12 01 92 12 20
F 67 Y
WILMOTH, M.
O.P.
SMITH, J. B.
102-23-5656
MJM
RECORD SPACE : 785
2 59
Tests [ ]
Use this field to select tests or profiles to be performed
on the sample. It is best to enter all demographic
i nformati on before maki ng test sel ecti ons.
Demographic information can be entered prior to
printing results. When the cursor is in this field, the
test and profile selection keys are active. When one
of these keys is pressed, the key that corresponds to
the selected test is highlighted in reverse video on the
keyboard matrix. If the key is pressed a second time,
the test is deselected and the highlighting turns off.
The profile selection keys are the numeric keys,
a profile selection key is pressed, the key is
highlighted in reverse video in the keyboard matrix and
all of the tests assigned to that profile also are
highlighted. When the key is pressed a second time,
the highlighting turns off and the tests are no longer
selected.
for the sample and press ENTER.
highlights the appropriate keys. If an increased
sample volume was chosen, an up arrow () is
sample volume was chosen, a down arrow () is
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
sample was drawn. If a Draw Date/Time is not entered,
the date and time the ID number was entered is
displayed. The order of these fields is defined from the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
Sample Cup [ ]
Choose 1 :STD Cup 2 :Micro 3 :STD on Tube 4 :Micro
on Tube 5 :Tube : ENTER
ID Number. [ ]
Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to assign a bar code identification
number of up to 13 characters for each specimen, if it
is not downloaded from a host computer. Enter the ID
Sample Vol. [ ]
Choose 1 :Normal 2 :Decreased 3 :Increased Sample
Volume : ENTER
Decreased, or Increased may be selected. This field
sample size in this field. Specify the tests for that
sample size in the Tests field and press ENTER. Move
the cursor back to the ID Number field and re-enter the
sample number. Select another sample size and
make test selections for the second sample size.
Press ENTER. Repeat if a third sample size is
required.
2 60
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Enter the day and press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Enter the year and press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
patient from which the sample was taken for normal
ranges that are specific to sex and age.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 :Male 2 :Female : ENTER
the sample was taken. Press 1 Male or 2 Female
ENTER.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
ENTER
months or years. Enter the correct interval and press
ENTER.
Name [ ]
Location [ ]
Physician [ ]
Patient ID [ ]
Drawn By [ ]
screen. You can remove the demographic input fields
from the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen using
the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
2 61
Display ID No. [ ]
Input Sample ID Number (Maximum 13 Characters) :
ENTER
Use this field to retrieve information on a patient
sample. Enter the ID number, then press ENTER. The
ID number and all demographic data appear on the
screen. Test selections are highlighted on the bottom
of the screen. To increment to the next ID numbers,
press ENTER. Enter 0 to display the first bar code
programmed.
Input Sample ID No. (Maximum 13 Characters) :
ENTER
Use these fields to enter the range of ID numbers you
would like printed on the Requisition List. The
Requisition List gives the ID number along with test
selections for all requested samples. Enter the first
ID number, then press ENTER. Enter the last number
of samples to be included on the list, then press
ENTER. An example of the Requisition List report is
shown in Section 2.63.
WARNING
If more than 800 specimens are run in sequence
without clearing or replacing the data disk, the
instrument will write over old patient files. If the data
disk is used to store patient results, the same
sequence number should never be re-used on the
same data disk.
Clear [ ]
Input 1:To Clear : ENTER (Have you cleared data?)
Use this field to clear all test selection information from
C-RAM. Clear all test selection information at least
once per day.
Press 1 To Clear ENTER.
The CRT prompt line displays: Are You Sure?
Wait until completion of the clear function before
2 62
2.23.3 Example of the START
CONDITIONS Screen
There are three different configurations of the Start
Sample No. field on the START CONDITIONS
screen. The configuration depends on the status of the
sample bar code reader and host computer
communication. Figure 2-31 shows the START
CONDITIONS screen as it appears under the following
conditions:
Without Bar Code Reader and Without Host
Communication
Without Bar Code Reader and With Host
Communication specified as Results Only
Figure 2-31: START CONDITIONS Screen
2.23 Routine Job - - Start Conditions
2.23 Routine Job - - Start
Conditions
2.23.1 Introduction
Use this screen to establish run conditions at the start
of analysis and to implement ISE Maintenance.
Always verify that the correct information is listed on
START CONDITIONS before pressing START. The
Start Sample No. configuration on this screen
depends on the status of the bar code reader and host
communi cati on. Exampl es of the START
CONDITIONS display with different Start Sample No.
configurations are illustrated in this section.
2.23.2 Displaying the START
CONDITIONS Screen
Press ROUTINE 4 ENTER to di spl ay the
START CONDITIONS screen.
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Start Conditions
Start Sample No.
Repeat Calibration
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Manual Masking
Host Communication
ISE Maintenance
Print Format
Calibration Print
Clear Results
Default Sample Cup
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] : [ ] - [ ]
[STD Cup ]
1
Off
Off
Off
Automatic
-
Off
Off
Report
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
2 63
Figure 2-32 shows the START CONDITIONS screen
as it appears under the following conditions:
With Bar Code Reader and With or Without Host
Communication
Wi th Bar Code Reader and Wi th Host
Communication specified as Results Only
Figure 2-33 shows the START CONDITIONS screen
as it appears under the following conditions:
Without Bar Code Reader and With Host
Communication
2.23.4 START CONDITIONS Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each START CONDITIONS field and prompt is
explained below.
Start Sample No. [ ] : [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ]
Use this field to enter the sequence number of the first
routine specimen to be sampled after START is
pressed. Up to five entries can be made in this field,
depending on your systems configuration. When the
instrument is in Stand-by, the number that appears in
this field is the next available sequence number for
test selection.
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Start Conditions
Start Sample No.
Repeat Calibration
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Manual Masking
Host Communication
ISE Maintenance
Print Format
Calibration Print
Clear Results
Default Sample Cup
[ ] : [ 0] [ 1]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] : [ ] - [ ]
[STD Cup ]
1
Off
Off
Off
Automatic
-
Off
Off
Report
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Start Conditions
Start Sample No.
Repeat Calibration
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Manual Masking
Host Communication
ISE Maintenance
Print Format
Calibration Print
Clear Results
Default Sample Cup
[ ] : [ 0] [ 1] - [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] : [ ] - [ ]
[STD Cup ]
1
Off
Off
Off
Automatic
-
Off
Off
Report
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
2 64
Start Sample No. [ ]
Input Sample No. 1 to 800 : ENTER (Have you cleared
data?)
This field is displayed for instruments that are not
connected to a host computer and not equipped with
a bar code reader. Refer to Figure 2-31.
Enter the sequence number of the first specimen, then
press ENTER. (The remaining fields under START
SAMPLE NO. are not shown unless the instrument is
connected to a host computer.)
Start Sample No. [ ] : [ ] [ ]
Input Sample No. 1 To 800 : ENTER (Have You Cleared
Data?)
Input Disk No. 0 To 9 : ENTER
Input Position No. 1 To 50 : ENTER
This field is displayed for instruments that are
connected or not connected to a host computer and
equipped with a bar code reader. Refer to
Figure 2-32.
Enter the sequence number of the first specimen in
field 1, then press ENTER.
Enter the number of the first sample disk in field 2,
then press ENTER.
Enter the position number of the first specimen in
Start Sample No. [ ] : [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ]
Input Sample No. 1 To 800 : ENTER (Have you cleared
data?)
Input Disk No. 0 To 9 : ENTER
This field is displayed for instruments that are
connected to a host computer with two-way
communication and not equipped with a bar code
reader. Refer to Figure 2-33. Five fields must be
entered:
Enter the sequence number of the first specimen in
Enter the number of the first sample disk in field 2,
then press ENTER.
Enter the position number of the first specimen in
Enter the number of the last sample disk in field 4,
then press ENTER.
Enter the position number of the last specimen in
For example, if the specimens to be sampled begin
with sequence number 1, on sample disk number 1,
sample position number 2, and end with sample disk
number 9, sample position number 50, the Start
Sample No. will read:
[ 1] : [1] [ 2] - [9] [50]
NOTE
An INPUT ERROR alarm is issued if the start disk
number/position is not equal to or less than the stop
disk number/position number.
2 65
Routine Rerun Mode[ ]
Choose 1 :Perform Automatic Rerun 2 :Initiate Rerun
Only 0 :No Reruns : ENTER
Use this field to determine how routine rerun samples
are processed. The analyzer must be in Stand-by to
make a selection in this field. Press 1 Perform
Automatic Rerun ENTER to request that rerun
samples be automatically rerun at the end of a routine
run.
When automatic rerun is requested, the analyzer does
not go into the Sampling Stop mode after the samples
have been pipetted. The analyzer goes into the Rerun
mode until all results have been calculated. After the
last result has been printed, the analyzer remains in
Sampling Stop if no reruns are required. If any reruns
are required, they are initiated at the end of the original
run. If more than 50 samples are included in a single
run, the automatic rerun is performed on the current
sample disk before continuing to the next disk.
Press 2 Initiate Rerun Only ENTER to request a run
consisting of only rerun samples from a previous
routine run. Only those samples listed on the Rerun
Samples display will be run. You must set the Start
Sample No. back to the sample number the rerun will
begin with. Press 0 No Rerun ENTER to request no
rerun samples be performed in the current run.
Stat Rerun Mode [ ]
Choose 1 :Perform Automatic Rerun 0 :No
Reruns : ENTER
Use this field to determine how Stat rerun samples are
processed. The analyzer must be in Stand-by to make
a selection in this field. Press 1 Perform Automatic
Rerun ENTER to request that rerun samples be
automatically rerun. Press 0 No Reruns to request
that no stats be rerun.
Start Up Calibration [ ]
Choose 1 :On 0 :Off : ENTER
Use this field to instruct the instrument to begin the
scheduled run with a start up calibration. Press 1 On
ENTER to initiate a start up calibration in addition to
the automatic calibrations. This entry is made in
Stand-by only. After the calibration is completed, this
field defaults back to Off.
Every time the instrument performs a start up
calibration all controls programmed on the CONTROL
TEST SELECTION screen also are performed. Unless
the control interval on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen is set to zero with a zero
control interval, the control will not be run. After
sampling for controls, the instrument samples the first
specimen displayed in the Start Sample No. field.
When operating the analyzer with automatic
calibration programmed correctly, a start up
calibration is only necessary for tests using partial or
minimal reagent bar codes.
Repeat Calibration [ ]
Use this field to initiate a repeat calibration. Repeat
calibration can be initiated from any operational mode.
Specify which test(s) need to be calibrated from the
CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen.
Press 1 On ENTER to initiate the repeat calibration.
After the repeat calibration is complete, the field
defaults to Off. Controls are run only on the
recalibrated tests.
NOTE
The control interval affects only the repeat calibraton.
2 66
Print Format [ ]
Choose 1:Short Format 2:Report Format 0:Cancel
Real Time Print : ENTER
Use this field to choose the format for printing patient
results. Results can be printed in a short format or
report (long) format. The instrument can also be
instructed to store results on the data disk without
printing them by selecting 0 Cancel Real Time Print
ENTER.
Calibration Print [ ]
Choose 1:On 0:Off : ENTER
Use this field to instruct the analyzer to print
calibration results. Press 1 On ENTER to print
calibration results in real time. Press 0 Off ENTER to
cancel printing. If you choose not to print results in this
field, you will not get a hard copy of the calibration
report. CALIBRATION RESULTS CANNOT BE
REPRINTED LATER.
Clear Results [ ] : [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to clear any type of results from the
data disk and QC stored in C RAM. This field is used
to clear results only and not test selections.
Choose 1:Clear Routine Sample Results 2:Stats
3:Controls 4:All : ENTER
Use this field to specify which type of results you want
cleared from the data disk. Press the appropriate
type of sample followed by ENTER to clear results.
Input Sample No. to Clear : Routine 1-800/
Stat 1-200/Control 1-8 : ENTER
Use this field to enter the first result number to be
cleared. Enter the sample number and press ENTER.
Manual Masking [ ]
Use this field to mask, or turn off, specific chemistry
channels. Any channel that is masked remains
inactive until it is unmasked or turned on through this
field. Press the test selection key(s) that corresponds
to the tests to be masked, and press ENTER. You
cannot use a profile key to mask tests. After a test is
selected to be masked, a back slash appears through
the key that corresponds to that test on the keyboard
matrix at the bottom of the START CONDITIONS
screen.
Host Communication [ ]
Use this field to specify communication with a host
computer. Press 1 On ENTER to open
communication with the host computer. Press 0 Off
ENTER to close communication with the host
computer.
ISE Maintenance [ ]
Choose 1:Initiate ISE Maintenance at end of Run 0:No
: ENTER
Use this field to specify washing of the ISE Sample
Flowpath. Press 1 (Yes) ENTER. Choosing this wash
instructs the analyzer to pipette NaOH from the W2
cup on the sample disk to the ISE port 15 times. This
will occur at the end of the run before the instrument
goes into Stand-by and adds approximately five
minutes to the cycle time. You should calibrate prior
to running patient samples, at least once every 24
hours.
2 67
Input Sample No. to Clear: Routine 1-800/
Stat 1-200/Control 1-8 : ENTER
Use this field to enter the last result number to be
cleared. Valid data clearing ranges for each type of
results are listed below:
When data is cleared within a specified range, the
sequence number for stat samples is reset to the first
sequence number specified in the data clear. The
sequence number of control samples is reset to 1
only when the full range of 1 - 8 is selected. When
data is cleared with ALL specified, the sequence
number of stat and control samples is reset to 1.
Enter the sample number and press ENTER. The
CRT prompt line displays Are You Sure?. Press 1
ENTER.
Default Sample Cup [ ]
Choose 1:STD Cup 2:Micro 3:Std. on Tube 4:Micro
on Tube 5:Tube : ENTER
being used as default in Patient Test Selection.
SAMPLE TYPE INPUT RANGE
(sequence number)
NORMAL 1-800
Stat 1-200
CONTROL 1-8
2 68
2.24 Routine Job - - Real Time
Data Monitor
2.24.1 Introduction
REAL TIME DATA MONITOR enables you to view
results from samples currently being processed.
Routine, stat, and rerun and controls sample data can
be viewed. When all results are finished, all
information is printed and is accessible through the
DATA REVIEW screen, the REAL TIME DATA
MONITOR screen clears.
2.24.2 Displaying REAL TIME DATA
MONITOR
Press 5 ENTER to display the REAL TIME DATA
MONITOR screen.
2.24.3 Example of the REAL TIME
DATA MONITOR Screen
Figure 2-34 is an example of the REAL TIME DATA
MONITOR screen.
Figure 2-34: REAL TIME DATA MONITOR Screen
2.24.4 REAL TIME DATA MONITOR
Fields and Prompts
Each REAL TIME DATA MONITOR screen field and
Sample [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to identity the sample for which you
want to monitor results. The remainder of the
information on this screen does not allow operator
entry.
2.24 Routine Job - - Real Time Data Monitor
5
ENTER
37.0 Operation 12/01/92 12:20
5 Real Time Data Monitor
Input Position No. 1 to 70 , 71 to 78 for Controls : ENTER
Sample
S.No.
Pos.
ID
S.Type
[ ] - [ ]
Alarm Routine
Draw Date / Time
Sex / Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
12 / 01 /92 11:45
M 38 Y
DOE, JOHN
ER-10
GETTLE, D
DJB
Test Data Test Data Test Data Test Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
THEO
Na
K
Cl
LIP
HEMO
ICTER
403
78.8
476
11.2
5.3
5.0
152.5
5.42
111.3
11
0-20
18019
Serum
Stat 20
$
2 69
Sample [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 :Routine 2 :Routine Rerun 3 :Stat 4 :Stat
Rerun 5 :Control : ENTER
Use this field to select the sample type you want
displayed. Press the number that corresponds to the
sample type and ENTER.
Enter the position number in the second field and
press ENTER. (See chart below.) For routine or
routine rerun samples, enter 1 to 50. For control
samples, enter 1-8. For stat or stat rerun samples,
enter 51 to 70. If your analyzer is using the sample bar
code reader, enter 1 to 50 and addionally 51-70 for
samples without barcodelabel. After the sample type
and position number have been entered, the
demographic information is displayed. As test results
are calculated, the results appear on the screen.
This screen clears when all results have been
calculated. If only one test is ordered on a sample, it
will not appear on this display.
2.24 Routine Job - - Real Time Data Monitor
Type of Sample Enter
Routine 1-50
R. Rerun 1-50
Stat 1-70,
71-78 for controls - -
positions 1-8 on disk
Stat Rerun 1-70,
71-78 for controls - -
positions 1-8 on disk
Control 1-8
2 70
2.25 Routine Job - Data Review
2.25.1 Introduction
Use DATA REVIEW to delete, edit, print, or batch
upload patient results to a host computer. The
analyzer does not have to be in Stand-by to edit or
reprint results. The DATA REVIEW screen varies
slightly, depending on whether you are using the
sample bar code reader.
The DATA REVIEW screen has two pages. Page 1
lists up to 15 samples at a time, giving overview
information. Page 2 lists all test results for a specific
sample.
2.25.2 Displaying the DATA REVIEW
Screen - - Page 1
MENU. Press 6 ENTER to display page 1 of the DATA
REVIEW screen.
Press PAGE CONTINUE to scroll through information
for additional samples.
end of the list of samples on the page. The Cap Lock
light stays on. Press the PAGE CONTINUE key to
scroll through the list of samples from the end to the
beginning.
2.25.3 Example of the DATA REVIEW
Screen - - Page 1
Figure 2-35 is an example of page 1 of the DATA
REVIEW screen.
Figure 2-35: DATA REVIEW - - Page 1
2.25 Routine Job - - Data Review
6
SHIFT
ENTER
37.0 Operation 12/01/92 12:20
6 Data Review
Run
List Print
Data Transfer
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
ICU-12
ICU-9
O.P.
PACU-10
O.P.
O.P.
OUTPATIENT
S317-2
S323-1
ICU-7
T412-1
OUTPATIENT
N403-4
OUTPATIENT
8:27
8:28
8:30
8:31
8:33
8:34
8:34
8:35
8:37
8:38
8:41
8:43
8:43
8:44
0-01
0-02
0-03
0-04
0-05
0-06
0-07
0-08
0-09
0-10
0-11
0-12
0-13
0-14
059910
16142
1284
25313
01057
1355
01008
26962
07194
8053
690
6334
00196
16858
DOBBINS, K
SMITH, J
JAMES, B
TOLBERT, U
KNIGHT, R
VOGT, MILDRED
WILMOTH, M
HOBBS, J
FRICKENSCHMIDT, O
PULAKSI, WM
DONAGHUE, P
JOHNSON, P
HOLLINGSWORTH, M
KOVAK, K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
Routine
Rtn.
1 0599910
2 71
2.25.4 DATA REVIEW Screen Fields
Each DATA REVIEW screen field and prompt is
explained below.
Run [ ]
Choose 1:Routine Samples 2:Stats : ENTER
Use this field to select the run type to be edited. Press
1 ENTER to edit routine results or 2 ENTER to edit Stat
results.
List [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to identify the first sample to be
listed. Analyzers that are not using the sample bar
code reader display only Field 1. Analyzers that are
using the bar code reader display Field 1 and Field 2.
List [ ] [ ]
Use this field to enter the sample number of the first
sample to be listed. Use the following ranges for the
different sample types.
List [ ] [ ]
Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the sample ID number of the first
sample to be listed. Up to 13 characters can be used
(only when the bar code reader is on.)
The Sample List displays the following information
for 15 samples starting with the sample number
specified: S. No., Pos., ID No., Date, Time, and the
first two comment lines, which are specified in
System Parameters, on the lower portion of the
display. Press PAGE CONTINUE to display
additional samples. Note: The demographic
information displayed is for the sample number
entered in the List field.
2.25.5 Displaying the DATA REVIEW
Screen - - Page 2
Press 6 ENTER to display page 1 of the DATA
REVIEW screen. Press GUIDANCE to display page
2 of the DATA REVIEW screen.
information on page 2.
light remains on. Press PAGE CONTINUE to scroll
through the list from the end to the beginning.
(sequence number)
ROUTINE 1-800
Stat 1-200
6
ENTER
SHIFT
2 72
2.25.6 Example the of DATA REVIEW
Screen - - Page 2
Figure 2-36 is an example of page 2 of the DATA
REVIEW screen.
Figure 2-36: DATA REVIEW - - Page 2
LEGEND
* = Edited result
Data Flags are highlighted in red.
2.25.7 DATA REVIEW Screen Fields
Run [ ]
Choose 1 :Routine Sample 2 :Stat : ENTER
Use this field to select the run type to be edited. Press
1 ENTER to edit routine results or 2 ENTER to edit stat
results.
Data [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to identify the first sample to be listed.
Analyzers that are not using the sample bar code
reader display Field 1. Analyzers that are using the
bar code reader display Field 1 and Field 2. After a
selection is made in one of these fields, the
demographic information for that sample is displayed.
The bottom of the screen displays the first 30 tests
and results run on this sample. Press PAGE
CONTINUE to display the remainder of the tests and
results run on the sample. This list gives the test
name, first run result, and rerun result. Any data flags
present will be displayed immediately following the
result using a symbol.
Data [ ] [ ]
sample to be listed. Use the following ranges for the
different sample types. Enter the sample number and
press ENTER.
Data [ ] [ ]
Characters) : ENTER
(only if the bar code reader is on.) You can search for
both routine and stat samples by ID number.
(sequence number)
ROUTINE 1-800
Stat 1-200
37.0 Washing Probe 12/01/92 12:20
6 Data Review
Run
List
S. Type Serum
Draw Date / Time
Sex / Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
Edit Result
Print
Data Transfer
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
Routine
Rtn.
1 059910
Alarm
12 01 92 11 50
M 36 Y
DOBBINS, K
ICU-12
GRAHAM , J D
123-56-9847
DJB
[ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP / A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB / P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
MG
REF
10.3
143.8
466$
10.7
10.2
2 73
This field automatically displays the sample type
entered on the PATIENT TEST SELECTIONS
screen.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
These fields automatically display the information
entered or downloaded to the PATIENT TEST
SELECTIONS screen for the sample requested in the
Data S. No. field. All five of these fields may be edited
from this screen.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
The month the sample was drawn appears in this
field.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
The day the sample was drawn appears in this field.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
The year the sample was drawn appears in this field.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
The hour the sample was drawn appears in this field.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
The minute the sample was drawn appears in this
field.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
entered or downloaded to PATIENT TEST
Data S. No. field. All three of these fields may be
edited from this screen.
Edit Result [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
When one or several tests of a given sample have been
rerun, the rerun results may be incorporated into the
original results for that sequence number. Test
results also can be edited in this entry field.
You have the option of marking data that has been
edited on the DATA REVIEW screen. A new field,
Edited Flag, is available on page 2 of the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen. If this option is activiated,
edited data will be marked with an "*" both on the DATA
REVIEW screen and when downloaded to a host. In
addition, the word EDITED will print along with any
edited results on reports printed in the short format.
Precision check and correlation calculations for edited
The following information is displayed:
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
The sex of the patient appears in this field.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
The numerical age of the patient appears in this field.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
The age interval of the patient in days, months, or
years appears in this field.
Name [ ]
Comment [ ]
Physician [ ]
Patient ID [ ]
Location [ ]
entered or downloaded to the PATIENT TEST
Data field. All five of these fields may be edited from
this screen. Your analyzer may not display all
comment fields, depending on how the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS are set up.
2 74
items will not be performed. These items will be
treated as results marked with a data alarm.
Edit Result [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 :Edit 1st Result 2 :Edit Rerun Result :
ENTER
Use this field to choose whether you are editing a first
run result or a rerun result. Press 1 Edit 1st Result
ENTER to edit a first run result for the sample number
selected in the Data S. No. field.
Edit Result [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Enter the number of the appropriate test code. To
select the test by pressing the test key only, the test
must be displayed on the list at the bottom of the
screen. If the test is one of the 30 displayed on the
screen, press the appropriate test key. If the test is
shown on the screen, press PAGE CONTINUE to
display the remaining tests. You then can press the
test key.
Edit Result [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input New Data or Space bar to Delete : ENTER
Enter the edited result in this field and press ENTER.
To delete the result entirely, press the SPACE BAR
followed by ENTER. You will see the result in the first
column or rerun column, depending on which result
you chose to edit, on the bottom of the display
changed to the edited result. The cursor
automatically moves back to the second field to allow
additional edits to the same sample. When editing of
a specific sample is complete, advance the cursor to
field 4. If you do not go to field 4 and save the changes
made in this field, the changes will not be written to
your data disk.
Edit Result [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 :To Save 1st Result to Disk 2 :To Replace
1st Result & Save : ENTER
Are You Sure? 1 :Continue 0 :Cancel : ENTER
Use this field to save edits made to the first run
results. Press 1 To Save 1st Result to Disk ENTER
to save the results listed in the first column on this
screen. This saves edited results to the data disk.
Press 2 To Replace 1st Result and Save ENTER. The
prompt line reads Are You Sure?. Press 1 Continue
ENTER to replace all of the results in the first column
with the corresponding results in the rerun column.
This also saves the edited results to the data disk.
You will see the first columns results replaced with
the rerun columns results on the screen. No entries
are needed in the first three fields when this is chosen.
Print [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to print test results stored on the data
disk. You must select the run type in the Run field
prior to entering printing information.
Print [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Choose 1 :Short Format 2 :Report Format : ENTER
Use this field to specify the printout format. Choose the
proper format and press ENTER.
Print [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Choose 1 :Print All 2 :Print Edited List : ENTER
Use this field to select which reports to print. Press 1
Print All ENTER to print all patient reports. Press 1
Print Edited List ENTER to print only those patient
reports that have been edited.
2 75
Print [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use this field to enter the sample number for the first
report in the range you want to print. Enter the correct
sample number and press ENTER.
Print [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use this field to enter the sample number for the last
report in the range you want to print. Enter the correct
sample number and press ENTER.
Wait until the requested operation is complete before
Data Transfer [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to send patient files to a host
computer in the batch mode. To make an entry in this
field, Yes must be specified in the Host
Communication Field on the START
CONDITIONS screen and the analyzer must be in
Stand-by. If Real Time data transfer is selected on the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen, no input is needed
in this field unless the host crashes and then can
send. You must select a run type in the Run field prior
to transferring data.
Choose 1 :Transfer All 2 :Transfer Edited Reports
0 :Cancel : ENTER
Use this field to select which results to send to the host
computer. Press 1 Transfer All ENTER to send all
results to the host computer. Press 2 Transfer Edited
Reports ENTER to send all results to the host
computer. Press 0 Cancel ENTER to cancel transfer
of results to the host computer.
Use this field to enter the sample number for the first
results in the range you want to transfer to the host
computer. Enter the correct sample number and
press ENTER.
Use this field to enter the sample number for the last
results in the range you want to transfer to the host
computer. Enter the correct sample number and
press ENTER.
NOTE
Only data stored on the data disk in the first column will
be batch uploaded to the host. Results in the rerun
column are not updated.
2 76
2.26 Routine Job - - Rerun
Samples
2.26.1 Introduction
The RERUN SAMPLES screen enables you to view
and edit the rerun list. Tests with data flags are
automatically placed on the rerun list. The RERUN
SAMPLES screen varies slightly, depending on
whether you are using the sample bar code reader. If
a test is not run due to masking of the reagent, this
test is not automatically put on the rerun list.
The RERUN SAMPLES screen has two pages. Page
1 lists up to 15 samples at a time that have been placed
on the rerun list. Page 2 lists all of the first run and
rerun test results for an individual sample.
2.26.2 Displaying the RERUN
SAMPLES Screen - - Page 1
Press 7 ENTER to display page 1 of the RERUN
SAMPLES screen.
samples on the rerun list.
2.26.3 Example of the RERUN
Figure 2-37 is an example of page 1 of the RERUN
SAMPLES screen.
Figure 2-37: RERUN SAMPLES - - Page 1
2.26 Routine Job - - Rerun Samples
7
ENTER
37.0 Sample Stop 12/01/92 12:20
7 Rerun Samples
Rerun List
Clear
Print
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
ICU-12
ICU-8
O.P.
O.P.
OUTPATIENT
S317-2
ICU-7
7:21
7:22
7:15
7:28
8:23
6:30
5:45
0- 1
0- 2
0- 3
0- 6
0- 7
0- 8
0-10
059910
16142
1284
1355
01008
26962
8053
DOBBINS, K
SMITH, J
JAMES, B
VOGT, MILDRED
WILMOTH, M
HOBBS, J
PULAKSI, WM
1
2
3
6
7
8
10
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
12/01
Routine Alarm
1 059910
nnn Rerun Finished
nnn Rerun Failed ?
?
?
?
2 77
2.26.4 RERUN SAMPLES Screen
Fields and Prompt - - Page 1
Each RERUN SAMPLES field and prompt is
explained below.
Rerun List [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to identify the first sample to be listed
on the rerun list. Analyzers that are not using the
sample bar code reader display Field 1. Analyzers
that are using the bar code reader display Field 1 and
Field 2.
Any samples that were flagged with DATA flags (other
than H or L) on a specific test will be displayed on the
lower portion of the screen. Only 15 samples can be
displayed at a time. Press PAGE CONTINUE to
display additional rerun samples.
The rerun list includes the Sample Number, Position,
ID number, Date and Time the sample was processed
and the first two lines of demographic information. If
the rerun result did not contain a data flag, then the
sample number column will be highlighted in reverse
video. Any rerun results that still contain a data flag
after the rerun tests have been performed are flagged
with a question mark (?) before the sample number.
Rerun List [ ] [ ]
Input First Sample No. 1 to 800 : ENTER
sample to be listed. Only routine rerun samples are
automatically placed on this rerun list.
Rerun List [ ] [ ]
Characters) : ENTER
(only if the bar code reader is on.) Only routine rerun
samples are automatically placed on this rerun list.
Clear [ ]
Choose 1 :Clear All Reruns 2 :Clear Shaded Rerun
Results Only : ENTER
Use this field to clear samples from the rerun list.
Executing the clear function removes rerun test
selection information only. It does not remove rerun
results (data) stored on the data disk. Press 1 ENTER
to clear all samples from the rerun list. Press 2
ENTER to clear only samples that did not contain a
data flag following the rerun. These are samples that
are highlighted in reverse video on the rerun list. The
Rerun List is also cleared when doing a Patient Test
Selection clear.
Use these fields to enter the sample numbers for the
range of samples you want to print on the Rerun List.
Use this field to enter the sequence number for the first
sample in the range you want to print. Enter the
correct sequence number and press ENTER.
Use this field to enter the sequence number for the last
sample in the range you want to print. Enter the
correct sequence number and press ENTER.
2 78
2.26.5 Displaying the RERUN
MENU. Press 7 ENTER to display page 1 of the
RERUN SAMPLES screen. Press the GUIDANCE
key to display page 2 of the RERUN SAMPLES
screen. The second screen displays the tests to be
rerun for the specific sample number indicated in
reverse video. Test results also are shown. This
screen allows you to add or delete tests to the rerun
list for a specific sample and change the sample
volume for a rerun sample. Patients can be edited onto
the rerun list as long as the sample has already been
run once.
Press PAGE CONTINUE to view additional results for
the sample being viewed.
2.26.6 Example of the RERUN
An example of page 2 of the RERUN SAMPLES
screen is shown in Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38: RERUN SAMPLES - - Page 2
LEGEND
Data flags.......................................... red
Decreased SV...................................
Increased SV ....................................
Masked - - no reagent .......................
Masked - - from SC...........................
Test selected for rerun....................... reverse video
7
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
7 Rerun Samples
Sample No.
ID Number
Sample Cup
Sample Vol.
Tests
S.Type
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
Serum
Alarm
DOBBINS, K
ICU-12
GRAHAM , J D
123-56-9847
DJB
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
8
10
11
13
19
TBILI
BUN
GLU
CA
10.3
143.8
466$
10.7
47
48
49
56
Na
K
CL
UN / CR
138.0
4.70
105.0
14
1
059910
STD on Tube
Normal
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
2 79
2.26.7 RERUN SAMPLES Screen
Sample. No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to identify the first sample to be
edited. Analyzers that are not using the sample bar
code reader display and use fields 1, 2, and 3 to
search for samples. Analyzers that are using the bar
code reader display and use Field 1 only or the ID field
only to search for samples. After a selection is made
in one of these fields, the demographic information for
that sample is displayed.
In addition, the bottom of the screen displays the first
15 tests run on this sample. Press PAGE CONTINUE
to display the remainder of the tests run on the sample.
This list gives the test name, first run results and rerun
results. Any data flags present will be displayed
immediately following the result using a symbol.
Sample. No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use this field to enter the sequence number to be
edited. Only routine rerun samples may be edited from
this screen. Enter the sequence number and press
ENTER. You must use this field if you are not using
the sample bar code reader. You may use this field if
you are using the sample bar code reader.
Sample. No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use this field to enter the sample disk number of the
first sample to be edited. Enter the sample disk
number and press ENTER. You must use this field if
you are not using the sample bar code reader.
Sample. No. [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Position No. 1 to 50 (0 :Initiates Sampling
Stop) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the sample disk position
number of the first sample to be edited. Enter the
sample disk number and press ENTER. You must
use this field if you are not using the sample bar code
reader.
ID Number [ ]
Input Sample ID Number (Max 13 Characters) :
ENTER
Use this field to enter the sample ID number for the
first sample to be edited. Enter the ID number and
press ENTER. You must use this field (or the first
Sample No. field) if you are using the sample bar code
reader.
After the information for the sample number has
been entered, the remaining fields will display the
information entered for that sample during patient
test selection.
Sample Cup Name
Sample Volume Location
Tests Physician
S. Type Patient ID
Drawn by
All of the fields listed above, excluding S. Type, may
be edited from this screen. Use the Tests field to edit
test selections for reruns. The first run results and
rerun results are displayed for up to 15 tests. Press
PAGE CONTINUE to view additional results. The
selected rerun tests will highlight in reverse video on
the keyboard matrix. Increased or decreased sample
volume is selected via the Sample Volume field.
2 80
2.27 Routine Job Status Setting
2.27.1 Introduction
The STATUS SETTING screen enables you to select
the automatic Wake-Up
TM
function. The automatic
Wake-Up function instructs the analyzer to go through
the same procedures as the Initialization Mode
(except program loading from the system disk) at a
specified time. This reduces start-up time. During
Wake-Up execution, the lamp turns on, the monitor
screen brightens, and all mechanical parts reset. In
addition, reagent registration, water bath exchange,
ISE prime, and an air purge are automatically
performed. Upon completion of the Wake-Up function,
the instrument goes to Stand-by and remains on the
STATUS SETTING screen. You also can select Stat
reception execution from this screen.
2.27.2 Displaying the STATUS
SETTING Screen
Press the ROUTINE key followed by 8 ENTER to
display previously entered information.
2.27.3 Example of the STATUS
SETTING Screen
Figure 2-39 is an example of the STATUS SETTING
screen.
Figure 2-39: STATUS SETTING
2.27.4 STATUS SETTING ScreenFields
and Prompts
Each STATUS SETTING field and prompt is explained
below.
Sleep Mode Wake-Up[ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Use these fields to specify the date and time you want
the analyzer to wake up.
Sleep Mode Wake-Up[ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Input Month (1 To 12) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the month you want the
analyzer to wake up. Enter the month (1-12) and press
ENTER.
2.27 Routine Job - - Status Setting
8
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
8 Status Setting
Sleep Mode STAT Reception
Wake-Up
Execute
[12] / [02] [07] : [00]
[ Off ]
Execute [ No ]
2 81
Sleep Mode Wake-Up [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Input Day (1 To 31) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the day you want the analyzer
to wake up. Enter the day (1 - 31) and press ENTER.
Input Hour (0 To 23) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the hour you want the
analyzer to wake up. Enter the hour (0-23) and press
ENTER.
Input Minute (0 To 59) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the minute you want the
analyzer to wake up. Enter the minute (0-59) and
press ENTER.
Sleep Mode Execute [ ]
Use this field to request the automatic Wake-Up
function be performed at the time specified in the
Wake Up field. The analyzer must be put into the
Sleep mode in order to perform the Wake-Up function.
Press 1 Execute Sleep Function ENTER. The CRT
prompt line displays Are You Sure?. Press 1
Continue ENTER to put the analyzer in Sleep mode.
Input in this field is allowed during the following
maintenance operations initiated from ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE: Wash Cells, Wash ISE, Wash All,
Cell Blank, or ISE Prime.
When the analyzer is in the Sleep mode the CPU
remains on. The lamp goes off, the monitor dims, and
all mechanisms turn off. This saves lamp life, time
reading the System disk and life of mechanical parts.
The power ON to Stand-by time is reduced from 10 to
6 minutes. All other functions revert to a power off
status. An example of the STATUS SETTING screen
as it appears when the analyzer is in the Sleep mode
is shown in Figure 2-40.
The analyzer remains in the Sleep mode until it is time
to perform the Wake-Up function.
Figure 2-40: STATUS SETTING - - Sleep Mode
To wake up the analyzer, move the cursor to the
Sleep Mode Execute field and press 0 Off.
Stat Reception
Execute [ ]
Choose 1 :Stat Reception Mode 0 :Cancel : ENTER
Use this field to select the Stat Reception mode. This
is an alternative to running in routine operation. This
mode minimizes the user time for processing
stat samples. In the Stat Reception mode, the
37.0 Sleeping 12/01/92 12:20
8 Status Setting
Alarm Message Level Code Time
Sleep Mode
Wake-Up
Execute
[12] / [02] [07] : [00]
[On]
STAT Reception
Execute [No ]
Z . . . Z . . . Z . . . Z
Input Month ( 1 to 12 ) : ENTER
2 82
analyzer blanks 12 reaction cells so that they are
ready for immediate use. The ISE calibration is
automatically updated by running the Internal
Standard periodically. Every 10 minutes the analyzer
performs a one point calibration. It also limits
operation to Stat samples only. If samples are
requested on the ROUTINE PATIENT SCREEN From
the Stat Reception mode, routine samples will not be
performed.
Press 1 Stat Reception Mode ENTER. The CRT
prompt line will display Are You Sure?. Press 1
Continue ENTER. The analyzer will be in the Stat
Reception mode in 4.5 minutes. To take the analyzer
out of the Stat Reception mode, press 0 Cancel
ENTER. The CRT prompt line will display Are You
Sure?. Press 1 Continue ENTER.
NOTE
From the Stat Reception mode, you:
1. cannot perform maintenance.
2. cannot do Start Up or Repeat Calibration.
3. cannot perform QC during auto calibration.
4. cannot run routines.
5. have room only for 200 stats on the data disk.
2 83
2.28 Stat Reception
2.28 Stat Reception
2.28.1 Introduction
The STAT RECEPTION display indicates that the
analyzer is ready to process stat samples.
2.28.2 Displaying the STAT
RECEPTION Screen
This screen appears 4.5 minutes after Yes is entered
in the Stat Reception field on the STATUS SETTING
screen.
2.28.3 Example of the STAT
RECEPTION Screen
Figure 2-41 is an example of the STAT RECEPTION
screen.
Figure 2-41: STAT RECEPTION Screen
2.28.4 Explanation of the STAT
RECEPTION Screen
There are no active fields on the STAT RECEPTION
screen. Press the STAT key to display the STAT
37.0 Stat Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Stat Reception
Alarm Message Level Code Time
Ready For Stat
Press Stat Key
Routine Samples can not be Performed
in The Stat Reception Mode.
2 84
2.29.1 Introduction
The STAT TEST SELECTION screen enables you to
enter Stat test selections. The analyzer does not
have to be in Stand-by to make Stat test selections.
The STAT TEST SELECTION screen has two pages.
Page 1 is used to make test selections and page 2 is
used to add demographic information.
2.29.2 Displaying the STAT TEST
SELECTION Screen - - Page 1
Press the STAT key to display the STAT TEST
SELECTION screen.
2.29.3 Example of the STAT TEST
SELECTION Screen Page 1
Figure 2-42 is an example of page 1 of the STAT TEST
SELECTION screen.
Figure 2-42: STAT TEST SELECTION
Screen - - Page 1
37.0 Stand-by 3/18/93 12:20
Stat Test Selection
Run Type
Sample Cup
Sample Pos.
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Pos. Status
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD Cup
61
Normal
THEO
C-18 C-12
LIVER HEART
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
3. Press START Key.
1
26
51
2
27
52
3
28
53
4
29
54
5
30
55
6
31
56
7
32
57
8
33
58
9
34
59
10
35
60
11
36
61
12
37
62
13
38
63
14
39
64
15
40
65
16
41
66
17
42
67
18
43
68
19
44
69
20
45
70
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
0 0 Occupied
2 85
2.29.4 STAT TEST SELECTION Screen
Fields and Prompts Page 1
Each STAT TEST SELECTION field and prompt is
explained below.
CAUTION
If a stat was programmed to a specific position, but not
actually run, press GUIDANCE to view the
demographic information. If demographic information
was entered for the sample that was not processed,
this information must be cleared before the position
number can be used again.
Run Type [ ]
Choose 1 :Serum/Plasma 2 :Urine 3 :Other : ENTER
Use this field to select the type of sample. Choose the
press ENTER. The cl asses are defi ned
on the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen. This field
defaults to Serum/Plasma.
Sample Cup [ ]
Choose 1 :STD Cup 2 :Micro 3 :STD on tube 4 :Micro
on tube 5 :Tube : ENTER
Sample Pos. [ ]
Input Position No. 51 to 70 for STATS : ENTER
Input Position No. 71 to 78 for Controls : ENTER
Use this field to assign a sample disk position
number. For analyzers that are not using the sample
bar code reader, positions 51 through 70 may be
used. For analyzers that are using the sample bar
code reader, positions 1 through 70 may be used.
The Position Status grid on the screen will highlight a
position number in red if a sample is already occupying
that position. Choose a position number that is not
highlighted in red. For controls, 71-78 correspond to
disk positions C1-C8. QC that is ran as a stat will not
be included in the QC data.
Enter the position number and press ENTER.
ID Number [ ]
Input ID Number (Maximum 13 Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to assign a bar code identification
number of up to 13 characters for each specimen, if it
is not downloaded from a host computer. Enter the ID
number and press ENTER. Entry in this field is not
necessary if you are not using the sample bar code
reader. If you place the sample in the outer ring with
the bar code reader in use, the analyzer reads the bar
code reader.
Sample Vol. [ ]
Choose 1 : Normal 2 : Decreased 3 : Increased Sample
Volume : ENTER
decreased, or increased may be selected. This field
sample size in the Sample Vol. field. Specify the
tests for that sample size in the Tests field and press
2 86
ENTER. The sample number will increment by one.
Move the cursor back to the Sample No. field and re-
enter the sample number. Select another sample
size and make test selections for the second sample
size. Press ENTER. Repeat if a third sample size is
required.
Tests [ ]
Use this field to select tests or profiles to be performed
on the sample. It is best to enter all demographic
i nformati on before maki ng test sel ecti ons.
Demographic information can be entered prior to
printing the results. When the cursor is in this field,
the test and profile selection keys are active. When
one of these keys is pressed, the key that
corresponds to the selected test is highlighted in
reverse video on the keyboard matrix. If the key is
pressed a second time, the test is deselected and the
highlighting turns off.
The profile selection keys are the numeric keys
a profile selection key is pressed the key is highlighted
in reverse video on the keyboard matrix and all of the
tests assigned to that profile also are highlighted.
When the key is pressed a second time, the
highlighting turns off and the tests are no longer
selected.
for the sample and press ENTER. The sample position
number increments by one automatically following
each entry.
highlights the appropriate keys. If an Increased
sample volume was chosen, an up arrow ( ) is
sample volume was chosen, a down arrow ( ) is
Continue with additional stat test selections. Press
the START key after all of the stat samples have been
positioned on the sample disk. Use page 2 of the
STAT TEST SELECTION screen to enter
demographic information for each stat sample. Refer
to the following section.
NOTE
If you are interfaced to the host and have Active
selected for Com. Config. in the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen, the stat samples can be
placed in the outer ring. The 911 reads the bar code
informations and queries the host for the test
selection. The operator needs only to enter a sample
position number.
2.29.5 Displaying the STAT TEST
SELECTION Screen Page 2
Press STAT to display page 1 of the STAT TEST
SELECTION screen. Press GUIDANCE to display
page 2 of the STAT TEST SELECTION screen. The
fields for entering demographic information for stat
samples will appear.
2 87
2.29.6 Example of the STAT TEST
SELECTION Screen - - Page 2
Figure 2-43 is an example of page 2 of the STAT TEST
SELECTION screen.
Figure 2-43: STAT TEST SELECTION
Screen - - Page 2
2.29.7 STAT TEST SELECTION Screen
Use the following fields to enter demographic
information for stat samples. To display the test
selection information before entering the demographic
information, move the cursor to the Position field and
enter the sample disk position number.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
sample was drawn. The order of these fields is defined
from the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Enter the day and press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Enter the year and press ENTER.
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
Draw Date/Time [ ] / [ ] / [ ] [ ] : [ ]
If a Draw Date/Time is not entered, the date and time
the sample position number is entered is displayed.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
patient from which the sample was taken.
37.0 Stand-by 3/18/93 12:20
Stat Test Selection
Run Type
Sample Cup
Sample Pos.
ID Number
Sample Vol.
Tests
Pos. Status
Draw Date / Time
Sex / Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
[ 03 ] / [ 18 ] / [ 93 ] [11] : [50]
[M] [ 63 ] [ Y ]
[Smith, John ]
[ER-9 ]
[GRAHAM, J D ]
[405-12-8162 ]
[DJB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Serum
STD Cup
61
Normal
THEO
C-18 C-12
LIVER HEART
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ - ]
3. Press START Key.
1
26
51
2
27
52
3
28
53
4
29
54
5
30
55
6
31
56
7
32
57
8
33
58
9
34
59
10
35
60
11
36
61
12
37
62
13
38
63
14
39
64
15
40
65
16
41
66
17
42
67
18
43
68
19
44
69
20
45
70
21
46
22
47
23
48
24
49
25
50
0 0 Occupied
2 88
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 : Male 2 : Female : ENTER
the sample was taken. Press 1 Male or 2 Female
ENTER.
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Sex/Age [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose Age Interval 1 : Days 2 : Months 3 : Years :
ENTER
months, or years. Enter the correct interval and press
ENTER.
Name [ ]
Location [ ]
Physician [ ]
Patient ID [ ]
Drawn by: [ ]
screen. You can remove the demographic input fields
from the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen using
the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
Stat sequence numbers range from 1 to 200. When
200 is exceeded, the next Stat sequence number is
1 and new information will be written over old files. For
this reason, stats should be cleared daily (Data
Clear, START CONDITIONS), or when 200 samples
are processed.
2 89
2.30 Quality Control Job Menu
2.30.1 Introduction
Use the QUALITY CONTROL (QC) JOB MENU to
access screens that are used to view, evaluate, and
print out daily and cumulative QC results. Procedures
for the initial set-up of these screens are given in the
following sections.
2.30.2 Displaying the QC JOB MENU
Press QC to display the QC JOB MENU.
2.30.3 Example of the QC JOB MENU
Figure 2-44 is an example of the QC JOB MENU.
Figure 2-44: Quality Control Job Menu
2.30.4 QC JOB MENU Fields and
Prompts
Function No. [ ]
Input Number From List To Access Desired
Function : ENTER
appears on the CRT.
2.30 Quality Control Job - - Menu
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
QC Job Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Real Time QC
Individual QC List
Individual QC Chart
Cumulative QC List
Cumulative QC Chart
Function No. [ ]
2 90
2.31 Quality Control Job Real
Time QC
2.31.1 Introduction
REAL TIME QC displays a twin plot graph of daily
qual i ty control data. Al l QC data
are checked by a multi-rule Shewhart method. When
a random, systematic, or indeterminate QC error is
detected, an alarm is issued. Using this display
enables you to demonstrate that all reported results
are properly controlled. All daily QC results are stored
in C-RAM.
The REAL TIME QC display must be programmed with
two controls for each chemistry assay. Each time
these controls are run, the results are compared
against their respective mean (X) and standard
deviation (SD) as programmed from the CONTROL
VALUE SETTING screen. Refer to Section 2.51 for
more information.
Each pair of control values (X) and (Y) is plotted on the
REAL TIME QC graph. You must select the rules for
judging QC results. If no rules are selected in the Rule
Select Entry field, no Random, Systematic, or
Indeterminate errors are displayed.
2.31.2 Displaying the REAL TIME QC
Screen
Press QC to display the QC JOB MENU. Press
1 ENTER to display the REAL TIME QC screen.
2.31.3 Example of the REAL TIME QC
Screen
Figure 2-45 is an example of the REAL TIME QC
screen.
Figure 2-45: Real Time QC Screen
2.31 Quality Control Job - - Real Time QC
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
1
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
*
#
2 91
2.31.4 REAL TIME QC Screen Fields
and Prompts
Each REAL TIME QC field and prompt is explained
below.
NOTE
Use the COPY key for a graphical printout of this
screen.
Test [ ]
Enter the test code (1 - 49) of the test for which you
want to view controls, then press ENTER. If controls
have been defined previously for the requested test,
these control results will automatically be plotted on
the graph. To define controls or change controls for
viewing, move the cursor to the Control (X) or Control
(Y) field and enter the appropriate information.
Control (X) [ ]
Input Control No. 1 To 8 : ENTER
Enter the ID No. (1 - 8) of the control to be plotted on
the X axis and press ENTER.
The class, target mean, and target SD values are
automatically displayed. These values are specified
on the CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen.
Control (Y) [ ]
Input Control No. 1 To 8 : ENTER
Enter the ID No. (1-8) of the control to be plotted on the
Y axis and press ENTER. Control Y must be a different
ID No. (1-8) than Control X.
The class, target mean, and t arget SD values are
automatically displayed. These values are specified
on the CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen.
Normal Data (*)
This field lists the number of data points that have no
QC errors. This field is for display only. No operator
entry is permitted.
Random Err. Data (@)
This field lists the number of data points that have
random errors. This field is for display only. No
operator entry is permitted.
System Err. Data (#)
This field lists the number of data points that have
system errors. This field is for display only. No
operator entry is permitted.
QC Err. Data (+)
This field lists the number of data points that have QC
errors. This field is for display only. No operator entry
is permitted.
NOTE
Results with any data alarms other than system,
random, or QC errors will not be plotted.
Select Points to be Rejected 1 : Random 2 : System
3 : QC 4 : All Points : ENTER
Are You Sure? 1 : Continue 0 : Cancel : ENTER
Use this field to clear random, system, and/or QC error
data from the displayed graph:
Press: 1 ENTER to clear random error data.
Press: 2 ENTER to clear system error data.
Press: 3 ENTER to clear QC error data.
Press: 4 ENTER to clear all error data.
Are You Sure? is displayed on the prompt line. Press
1 Continue ENTER to clear the data. This procedure
clears the results for both Control (X) and Control (Y).
2 92
Rules Enabled [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to select the rules used for QC
evaluation.
Select Rule: 1 : 1-2S 2 : 1-3S 3 : 2-2S 4 : R-4S
5 : 4-1S 6 : 10X 7 : 1-2.5S : ENTER
REAL TIME QC is evaluated by a multi-rule Shewhart-
type method using the Westgard algorithm. This
algorithm applies the set of rules selected above. A
pair of controls for each chemistry being processed is
compared against a known SD and mean. In some
cases, only one of the controls (X or Y) may fail the
test applied by the rule. When a control sample fails
a test, a data alarm is issued and the graph displays
a symbol that corresponds to the type of QC error
detected.
Enter the number that corresponds to the rule selected
and press ENTER. Repeat for additional rules.
Input Run size 1 to 10 for R-4S Rule : ENTER
Use this field to specify the number of sequential QC
values to be used by the R-4S Rule. Enter the run size
and press ENTER.
2 93
2.32 Quality Control Job - -
2.32.1 Introduction
The INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR screen displays a
historical listing of the last 30 sequence numbers of
measured control values for each test. This screen
also is used to edit non-accumulated control data.
Both real time control values and control values that
have already been accumulated are displayed. When
the Sample Number is highlighted in reverse video,
thi s i ndi cates the data have al ready been
accumulated. This display retains the last 30 values,
whether Real Time or Accumulated, (first in, first out).
2.32.2 Displaying the INDIVIDUAL QC
MONITOR Screen
Press the QC key to display the QC JOB MENU.
Press 2 ENTER to display the INDIVIDUAL
QC MONITOR.
Data for up to 20 points (sequence numbers) can be
viewed at one time. Press PAGE CONTINUE to
display the remaining data.
2.32.3 Example of the INDIVIDUAL QC
MONITOR Screen
Figure 2-46 is an example of the INDIVIDUAL QC
MONITOR screen.
Figure 2-46: INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR Screen
2.32.4 INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR
Screen Fields and Prompts
Each INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR screen field and
Control [ ]
Use this field to select the level of control for which
data is displayed. Enter the control (ID) number
(1 - 8) and ENTER.
S. Type
This automatically displays the sample type defined
for this control on the CONTROL VALUE SETTING
screen. No operator entry is permitted.
2.32 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC Monitor
2
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Individual QC Monitor
-5.3
-4.7
-4.7
-5.1
-0.1
-4.5
0.2
1.4
-3.1
1.3
0.7
4.8
-0.2
2.5
-4.68
-4.15
-4.15
-4.51
-0.09
-3.98
0.18
1.24
-2.74
1.15
0.62
4.24
-0.18
2.21
15:11
8:04
23:04
15:11
8:04
22:11
15:04
9:19
14:01
8:19
8:04
10:26
9:47
14:23
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
111
108
106
105
104
103
102
11/24
11/24
11/23
11/23
11/23
11/22
11/22
11/22
11/18
11/18
11/18
11/17
11/17
11/16
107.9
108.5
108.5
108.1
113.1
108.7
113.4
114.5
110.1
114.5
113.9
118.0
113.0
115.7
Control
S.Type
Test
Result Editing
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Print [ ]
Target Mean
Target SD
[ ]
Serum
[ C1 ]
PTN-81
S.No. Date Time Result Deviation %Error
113.2
3.5
S.No. Accumulated
Dev. >2SD
#
+
2 94
Test [ ]
Select Tests via keyboard : ENTER
Use this field to select the test for which data is
displayed. Enter the number that corresponds to the
test (1 - 49) and press ENTER. Data for up to 20
sequence numbers may be displayed at one time. To
view additional data, press PAGE CONTINUE.
The QC data displayed contains six columns with the
information listed below. None of these columns
permit operator entry.
S.No.
This column displays the sequence number of each
control data point.
Date
This column displays the date the control was
performed.
Time
This column displays the time the control was
performed.
Result
This column displays the measured value for that
control run.
Deviation
This column displays the deviation from the mean
value. The deviation is displayed in reverse video if it
is > 2 SD.
Deviation is calculated by:
measured value - preset mean value = deviation
% Error
This column displays the percent error.
Percent error is calculated by:
deviation x 100 = percent error
preset mean value
If a QC data alarm has occurred, it is listed
immediately following the result value using a symbol.
Result Editing [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these three fields to edit non-accumulated control
data.
Input Sample No. to be Edited : ENTER
Use this field to specify the control sequence number
you want to edit. Enter the control sequence number
(101 - 830) and press ENTER.
Input New Data or Spacebar to Delete : ENTER
Use this field to input the new data or delete data.
Enter the new data (up to six digits) and press ENTER.
Press the SPACE BAR followed by ENTER to delete
data.
Input 1 : To Save Changes : ENTER
Use this field to save the changes previously made to
the control data or changes will not be stored. Press
1 To Save Changes ENTER. The CRT will display Are
you Sure?. Press 1 Continue ENTER. Press 0
Cancel ENTER to cancel the changes.
2 95
Print [ ]
Choose 1 : Print All Reports 2 : Print only
Unaccumulated Reports : ENTER
Use this field to print a copy of the individual QC
monitor data. Press 1 ENTER to request a printout.
Press 2 ENTER to print only unaccumulated reports.
An example of the printout is shown in Section 2.67.
Target Mean
This field displays the target mean entered on the
CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen for the selected
control level. No operator entry is permitted in this
field.
Target SD
This field displays the target SD entered on the
field.
NOTE
Individual QC data is stored in C-RAM. To clear this
display at the start or end of any day, the delete (all)
function may be used. Accumulating automatically
clears individual QC.
2 96
Individual QC List
2.33.1 Introduction
INDIVIDUAL QC LIST displays information on control
data for a selected control level that has not been
accumulated. This screen also is used to accumulate
control data.
Data that were displayed with any data flag other than
High, Low, Random error, System error, or QC error
alarm are not included in statistical calculations such
as standard deviation and percent coefficient of
variation.
LIST Screen
Press 3 ENTER to display the INDIVIDUAL QC LIST
screen.
Up to 20 tests can be viewed at one time. Press PAGE
CONTINUE to view additional tests.
LIST Screen
LIST screen.
Figure 2-47: INDIVIDUAL QC LIST Screen
2.33.4 INDIVIDUAL QC LIST Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each INDIVIDUAL QC LIST screen field and prompt is
explained below.
Control [ ]
Use this field to select the level of control for which data
is displayed. Enter the control (ID) number (1 - 8)
ENTER. The daily results of all measured tests for the
control level selected are displayed.
The QC data displayed contains eight columns with
the information listed below. None of these columns
2.33 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC List
3
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
3 Individual QC List
Control
S.Type
Accumulate
Print
Delete
Reprint QC Report
Transfer to Host
[ ]
Serum
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
3.2
1.9
0.4
0.6
0.00
1.09
2.4
1.67
0.33
0.10
0.19
0.32
0.11
0.05
12.4
5.17
0.234
0.42
2.57
5.49
1.68
1.34
0.00
5.31
3.17
5.35
3.93
2.70
4.03
4.27
4.37
3.01
6.13
3.43
3.79
0.39
7
5
1
1
0.0
2.4
6
4.3
0.7
0.2
0.5
0.7
0.3
0.1
25
11.1
0.50
0.6
124.6
34.6
23.8
44.7
1.30
20.54
75.6
31.24
8.40
3.70
4.72
7.50
2.52
1.66
202.4
150.58
6.168
108.20
106.0-
30.0-
20.0-
34.0-
1.01-
17.7-
71.0-
25.0-
7.40-
3.30-
4.1-
6.8-
2.30-
1.56-
184.0-
143.9-
5.82-
106.2-
148.0
42.0
28.0
50.0
1.41
23.7
85.0
33.0
8.80
4.30
4.9
7.6
2.90
1.96
214.0
155.9
6.62
120.2
2
3
4
7
8
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
47
48
49
5
5
5
3
3
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
LD
AST
ALT
AMYL
TBILI
BUN
GLU
CO"
CA
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
PTN-81
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
Ch Test N Mean 2SD Limits SD CV(%) Range
Na
K
Cl
2 97
CH
This column displays the channel number. The
channel number corresponds to the test key assigned
to a specific test.
Test
This column displays the short test name. This name
is assigned on the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen.
N
The measurement count is the number of control runs
that have occurred since the data was accumulated
the last time. A maximum of 30 runs is allowable.
Mean
The mean is the calculated average of measurement
result values for each test item.
2SD Limits
The 2SD limit is the preset mean value 2X the preset
SD value.
SD
The SD is the measured result calculated from N
observations for each test item.
CV (%)
The CV % is calculated from the mean and SD for each
test item.
Range
The range is the maximum measured value minus the
minimum measured value.
S. Type
This field automatically displays the class defined for
this control on the CONTROL VALUE SETTING
Accumulate [ ]
Use this field to transfer the individual QC data
displayed into the cumulative QC file. Accumulation
is possible in two ways: by accumulating the
individual QC data (M-R) or by accumulating a chosen
specific measured data point (X-R). Use the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen to select the method of data
accumulation. The analyzer must be in Stand-by.
M-R transfers a mean value. This can be a weighted
mean, according to the number of points used to
calculate the mean, or it can be a non-weighted mean.
Use the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen to specify
the type of mean used in accumulation.
X-R transfers only one data point. This can be a non-
weighted mean value of all individual data points or one
individual data point.
Accumulate [ ]
Input 1 : To Accumulate : ENTER
When mean accumulation is specified, press 1
ENTER. The CRT will display Are You Sure?. Press
1 Continue ENTER. Press 0 Cancel ENTER to cancel
accumulation.
Accumulate [ ]
Input No. 1 to 30 (or 99 : Accumulate Mean of Individual
Points) : ENTER
When individual data point accumulation is specified,
enter the sequence number (1 - 30 or 99 for the mean)
and press ENTER. The CRT will display Are You
Sure?. Press 1 Continue ENTER. Press 0 Cancel
ENTER to cancel accumulation.
Delete [ ]
2 98
Select Test No. (or 99 : All Tests) via Keyboard 1
to 49 : ENTER
This field specifies control data to be excluded from
data accumulation. A test must be displayed on the
screen to be able to delete data. If a test that is not
displayed on the screen is selected, an input error
occurs. Press PAGE CONTINUE to display additional
tests. Enter the test key selections to be deleted (or
99 for all tests) and press ENTER. Following
accumulation, all QC data is automatically deleted
from this display.
Print [ ]
Input 1:Print List: ENTER
Use this field to print the individual QC list for all
measured tests from Stand-by. Press 1 Print List
ENTER.
NOTE
To reprint or transfer results, the control level must be
defined in the Control field.
Reprint QC Reports
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to reprint QC reports, either
individually, in batch, or on a control-by-control basis.
Reprint QC Reports
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Choose 1 : Short Format 2 : Report Format : ENTER
Use this field to specify the format for data printout of
the individual QC data. Select the appropriate format
and press ENTER.
Reprint QC Reports
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Sequence No. (1 to 30) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the first sequence number to
be printed. Enter the sequence number and press
ENTER.
Reprint QC Reports
[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use this field to specify the last sequence number to
be printed. Enter the sequence number and press
ENTER.
Transfer to Host [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to transfer QC data to a host computer
from Stand-by.
Use this field to specify the first sequence number be
transferred to a host computer. Enter the number and
press ENTER. Entering 0 in this field will cancel any
data transfer in progress.
Use this field to specify the last sequence number be
transferred to a host computer. Enter the number and
press ENTER.
2 99
CHART Screen
CHART screen.
Figure 2-48: INDIVIDUAL QC CHART Screen
2.34.4 INDIVIDUAL QC CHART Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each INDIVIDUAL QC CHART screen field and prompt
is explained below.
NOTE
Use the COPY key for a graphical printout of this
screen.
Test [ ]
test (1 - 49) and press ENTER.
2.34 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC Chart
Individual QC Chart
2.34.1 Introduction
The INDIVIDUAL QC CHART screen graphically
displays the control data measured in the previous 30
measurements. Data points marked with a pound sign
(#) indicate the individual data has already been
accumulated to the cumulative QC data. Data points
marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the individual data
has not yet been accumulated.
CHART Screen
Press QC to display the QC JOB MENU. Press 4
ENTER to display the INDIVIDUAL QC CHART
screen.
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Individual QC Chart
Test [ C1 ]
Control [ PTN-81 ] Serum
Target Mean
Target SD
N
Mean
SD
CV %
Range
113.2
3.5
2
108.20
0.42
0.39
0.6
95.6
3.0
2
90.10
1.27
1.41
1.8
Target Mean
Target SD
N
Mean
SD
CV %
Range
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
* Not Yet Accumulated # Accumulated
123.7
120.2
113.2
106.2
102.7
104.6
101.6
95.6
89.6
86.6
#
#
#
##
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
*
*
#
#
#
#
#
#
# #
#
#
#
#
*
*
2 100
NOTE
On the graph that is displayed, the outer lines
represent 3 SD control line, the inner lines represent
2 SD control line, and the central line represents the
mean value that was entered.
Control [ ]
Use this field to select the control that is plotted on the
first graph. Enter the control number and press
ENTER. The first graph will be displayed. Up to 30
values may be displayed. If a test was not run or was
deleted from a control sequence number, there will be
a gap in the chart. You may want to use a different
control for tests that have controls run less frequently.
The statistical data displayed in the table to the left of
the charts pertains only to the non-accumulated data
points.
Control [ ]
second graph. Enter the control number and press
ENTER. The second graph will be displayed. Up to 30
values may be displayed. If a test was not run or was
deleted from a control sequence number, there will be
a gap in the chart. You may want to use a different
control for tests that have controls run less frequently.
The statistical data displayed in the table to the left of
the charts pertains only to the non-accumulated data
points.
All additional fields are displayed for both controls.
The target mean and target SD are entered on the
CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen. The remaining
values are calculated by the instrument from the QC
data. No operator entry is permitted in these fields.
Target Mean
field.
Target SD
field.
N
The measurement count is the number of control runs
that have occurred since the data was accumulated
the last time.
Mean
The mean is the calculated average of measurement
result values for each test item.
SD
observations for each test item.
CV (%)
test item.
Range
The range is the maximum measured value minus the
minimum measured value.
2.34 Quality Control Job - - Individual QC Chart
2 101
2.35.1 Introduction
The CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR screen displays the
accumulated data of measured control values for each
test. Thi s screen al so i s used to del ete
control data.
2.35.2 Displaying the CUMULATIVE
QC MONITOR Screen
Press 5 ENTER to display the CUMULATIVE QC
MONITOR.
Up to 20 accumulations can be viewed at one
time. Press PAGE CONTINUE to display the
remaining data.
2.35.3 Example of the CUMULATIVE
QC MONITOR Screen
Figure 2-49 is an example of the CUMULATIVE QC
MONITOR screen.
Figure 2-49: CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR Screen
2.35.4 CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR
Each CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR screen field and
Control [ ]
Use this field to select the level of control for which
data is displayed. Enter the control (ID) number
S. Type
2.35 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC Monitor
5
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
5 Cumulative QC Monitor
Control
S.Type
Test
Print
Delete
Target Mean
Target SD
[ ]
Serum
[GLU ]
[ ]
[ ]
Dev. >2SD
102
5
-1
0
1
-2
-2
-2
-1
1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
-2
-2
-1
-2
1
-0.49
0.78
1.47
11.76
2.06
1.08
0.59
-1.32
-0.79
-0.66
1.32
1.32
-1.58
-0.56
-1.32
-2.63
-2.63
-0.66
-2.63
1.71
75.3
76.0
77.0
74.0
74.5
75.5
76.5
75.0
75.4
75.5
77.0
77.0
74.8
75.5
75.0
74.0
74.0
75.5
74.0
77.3
3
3
6
6
6
3
3
1
5
2
1
1
5
2
1
2
4
2
3
4
3
2
4
3
3
2
3
0
3
1
0
0
5
1
0
4
4
1
2
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
12:50
17:50
17:32
17:55
17:25
17:45
17:45
17:00
16:33
16:18
16:32
16:24
16:30
16:55
16:02
13:57
16:16
15:54
15:05
15:19
11/24
10/21
10/19
10/16
10/14
10/06
10/05
10/02
09/30
09/01
08/31
08/27
08/26
08/11
08/10
08/07
08/05
07/27
07/22
07/14
PTN-81 Date Time Result N Range Deviation %Error
2 102
Test [ ]
test (1 - 49) and press ENTER. Up to 20 sets of values
may be displayed at one time. Up to a maximum of
31 accumulations are available (first in, first out). To
view additional sets of values, press PAGE
CONTINUE.
The QC data is displayed in seven columns with the
information listed below. None of these columns
Date
This column displays the date the control was
accumulated.
Time
This column displays the time the control was
accumulated.
Result
This column displays the accumulated value for that
control.
N
This column displays the number of control values that
were accumulated. A maximum of 31 control values
are available.
Range
This column displays the range between the
maximum value and the minimum value in that
accumulation.
Deviation
This column displays the deviation from the mean
value. This column is highlighted if the deviation is
greater than 2SD.
Deviation is calculated by:
accumulated value - preset mean value = deviation
% Error
This column displays the percent error.
Percent error is calculated by:
deviation x 100 = percent error
preset mean value
If a QC data alarm has occurred, it is listed
immediately following the result value, using a symbol.
Delete [ ]
Input Sequence No. 1 To 31 (or 99 : Delete All
Data) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the control sequence number
you want to delete. Enter the control sequence
number (1 - 31) and press ENTER. Press 99 Delete All
Data ENTER to delete data for all of the sequence
numbers at one time. The CRT prompt line displays
Are You Sure? . Press 1 Continue ENTER to delete the
selected data. Press 0 Cancel ENTER to stop the
deletion of the selected data.
Print [ ]
Input 1 : To Print Report : ENTER
Use this field to print a copy of the CUMULATIVE QC
MONITOR data from Stand-by. Press 1 To Print List
ENTER to request a printout.
2 103
Target Mean
field.
Target SD
field.
2 104
QC LIST Screen
LIST screen.
Figure 2-50: CUMULATIVE QC LIST Screen
2.36.4 CUMULATIVE QC LIST Screen
Fields and Prompts
Control [ ]
Use this field to select the level of control for which data
is displayed. Enter the control (ID) number (1 - 8) and
press ENTER. The daily results of all measured tests
for the control level selected are displayed.
The QC data displayed contains eight columns with
the information listed below. None of these columns
CH
2.36 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC List
6
ENTER
Cumulative QC List
2.36.1 Introduction
CUMULATIVE QC LIST displays information on
control data for a selected control level that have been
accumulated. This screen also is used to delete
accumulated control data.
QC LIST Screen
Press QC to display the QC JOB MENU.
Press 6 ENTER to display the CUMULATIVE
QC LIST screen.
Up to 20 tests can be viewed at one time. Press PAGE
CONTINUE to view additional tests.
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
6 Cumulative QC List
Control
S.Type
Print
Delete
[ ]
Serum
[ ]
[ ]
3.9
2.2
1.3
1.02
2.1
1.27
0.20
4.6
0.14
0.09
0.15
0.05
6.3
3.64
0.255
3.00
2.77
1.67
3.61
4.96
2.72
4.25
2.50
5.02
3.80
1.93
2.06
2.89
3.20
2.42
4.06
2.68
141.8
129.9
35.4
20.50
76.3
29.79
8.17
92.1
3.74
4.55
7.35
1.67
197.4
150.51
6.279
111.89
119.0-
106.0-
30.0-
17.7-
71.0-
25.0-
7.40-
78.0-
3.30-
4.1-
6.8-
1.56-
184.0-
143.9-
5.82-
106.2-
169.0
148.0
42.0
23.7
85.0
33.0
8.80
108.0
4.30
4.9
7.6
1.96
214.0
155.9
6.62
120.2
1
2
3
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
47
48
49
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
CK
LD
AST
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
CREA
CHOL
PTN-81
Ch Test N Mean 2SD Limits SD CV(%)
Na
K
Cl
2 105
This column displays the channel number. The
channel number corresponds to the test key assigned
to a specific test.
Test
This column displays the short test name. This name
is assigned on the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen.
N
The measurement count i s the number of
accumulations for each test. The maximum number
of accumulations allowable is 31.
Mean
The mean is the average value of the accumulated
values for each test. The calculation of the mean
depends on the sel ecti on made on the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen.
2SD Limits
The 2SD limit is the preset mean value 2X the preset
SD value.
SD
accumulations for each test item.
CV (%)
test item.
S. Type
Delete [ ]
Select Tests via Keyboard (or 99 : All Tests) : ENTER
Are You Sure? 1 : Continue 0 : Cancel
This field specifies accumulated control data to be
deleted. A test must be displayed on the screen to be
able to delete data. If a test that is not displayed on
the screen is selected, an input error occurs. Press
PAGE CONTINUE to display additional tests. Enter
the test key selections to be deleted (or 99 for all
tests) and press ENTER.
Print [ ]
Input 1 : To Print Report : ENTER
Use this field to print from Stand-by the CUMULATIVE
QC LIST for all measured tests. Press 1 Print List
ENTER.
2.36 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC List
2 106
Cumulative QC Chart
2.37.1 Introduction
The CUMULATIVE QC CHART screen graphically
displays the control data measured in the previous 31
accumulations for a specified test.
Two graphs are displayed for each control level. On the
upper graph, the outer lines represent 3 SD, the inner
lines represent 2 SD, and the center line represents
the target mean value. This reflects the accuracy of
the 911 analyzer.
The lower graph shows the range on individual results
in each accumulation. The bottom line represents
zero, or no deviation. The center line is 3X the target
and the top line is 6X the target SD. This reflects the
precision of the 911 analyzer.
QC CHART Screen
Press QC to display the QC JOB MENU. Press
7 ENTER to display the CUMULATIVE QC
CHART screen.
QC CHART Screen
CHART screen.
Figure 2-51: Cumulative QC Chart Screen
2.37.4 CUMULATIVE QC CHART
Each CUMULATIVE QC CHART screen field and
Test [ ]
test (1 - 49) and press ENTER.
2.37 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC Chart
7
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
7 Cumulative QC Chart
Test [ GLU ]
Date
Target Mean
Target SD
N
Mean
SD
CV %
76.0
3.5
21
75.2
0.6
1.62
301.0
10.0
21
311.5
1.1
4.42
Date
Target Mean
Target SD
N
Mean
SD
CV %
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
86.5
83.0
76.0
69.0
65.5
331.0
321.0
301.0
281.0
271.0
07/08 - 11/24
07/08 - 11/24
21.0
10.5
0.0
60.0
30.0
0.0
*
*
*
*
**
*
*
*
* *
***
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
**
*
*
*
* **
*
*
* *
*
*
* * *
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
* *
*
* *
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
2 107
Control [ ]
first graph. Enter the control number and press
ENTER. The first graph will be displayed. Up to 31
accumulations may be displayed.
Control [ ]
second graph. Enter the control number and press
ENTER. The second graph will be displayed. Up to 31
accumulations may be displayed.
All additional fields are displayed for both controls.
The target mean and target SD are entered on the
CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen. The remaining
values are calculated by the instrument from the
accumulated QC data. No operator entry is permitted
in these fields.
Target Mean
field.
Target SD
field.
N
The measurement count i s the number of
accumulations.
Mean
The mean is the calculated average of the
accumul ated val ues for each test.
The calculation of the mean depends on the selection
made on the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen.
SD
accumulations for each test item.
CV (%)
test item.
NOTE
The range graph can be removed from the screen by
choosing Off in the Range Plot field on the second
page of the SYSTEM PARAMETERS Screen.
2.37 Quality Control Job - - Cumulative QC Chart
2 108
2.38 Data Monitor Job - - Menu
2.38.1 Introduction
Use the DATA MONITOR JOB MENU to access
screens that display graphs of the most recent
photometric reactions. Other screens on this menu
are used to view calibration factors; view calibration
curves and monitor calibrations.
2.38.2 Displaying the DATA MONITOR
JOB MENU
Press the MONITOR key to display the DATA
MONITOR JOB MENU.
2.38.3 Example of the DATA MONITOR
JOB MENU
Figure 2-52 is an example of the DATA MONITOR JOB
MENU screen.
Figure 2-52: DATA MONITOR JOB MENU Screen
2.38.4 DATA MONITOR JOB MENU
Fields and Prompts
Function No. [ ]
Input Number From List to Access Desired
Function : ENTER
appears on the CRT.
2.38 Data Monitor Job - - Menu
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Data Monitor Job Menu
1
2
3
4
5
Reaction Monitor
Calibration Trace
Calibration List
ISE Calibration Monitor
Working Curve
Function No. [ ]
2 109
2.39 Data Monitor Job - -
Reaction Monitor
2.39.1 Introduction
The REACTION MONITOR display enables you to
view (in graph form) photometric absorbance vs. time
for the 360 most recent photometric tests, as well as
the 80 most recent standards and the 80 most recent
QC tests.
Absorbance (as Abs x 10
4
) is displayed on the ordinate
(Y-axis) and measure points for the time of reaction is
displayed on the abscissa (X-axis). The scale of the
X-axis depends on the reaction time. If the absorbance
data is higher than the upper limit specified, it is plotted
at the upper limit. If it is lower than the lower limit
specified (0 on the example below), it is plotted at the
lower limit. The data at measurement point number
one are plotted on the Y-axis.
Reaction monitor information is stored in non-battery
backed CRAM and is cleared when the instrument is
powered down. The number of read points displayed
on the reaction monitor graph is related to the
information programmed in CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS.
2.39.2 Displaying the REACTION
MONITOR Screen
Press MONITOR to display the MONITOR JOB
MENU. Press 1 ENTER to display the REACTION
MONITOR screen.
Press PAGE CONTINUE to view previous results,
such as those of patients run more than once with
same sequence number, if applicable.
2.39 Data Monitor Job - - Reaction Monitor
1
ENTER
2 110
2.39.3 Example of the REACTION
MONITOR Screen
Figure 2-53 is an example of the REACTION
MONITOR screen.
Figure 2-53: REACTION MONITOR Screen
2.39.4 REACTION MONITOR
Each REACTION MONITOR field and prompt is
explained below.
Sample [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to select the sample to be displayed.
Sample [ ] - [ ]
Choose 1 : Routine 2 : Routine Rerun 3 : Stat 4 : Stat
Rerun 5 : Control 6 : STD : ENTER
Use this field to select the type of sample to be
displayed. Enter the sample type and press ENTER.
Sample [ ] - [ ]
Input Sample No. 101 to 830 for Controls : ENTER
Input Sample No.11, 12, 21, 22, 31, 32, 41, 42, 51, 52,
61, 62 for Standards : ENTER
Enter the sequence number for the sample type
selected in the first field (as listed below) and press
ENTER:
(sequence
number)
ROUTINE ................................................... 1 - 800
ROUTINE RERUN...................................... 1 - 800
STAT.......................................................... 1 - 200
STAT RERUN ............................................ 1 - 200
CONTROL
LEVEL 1 ............................................ 101 - 130
LEVEL 2 ............................................ 201 - 230
LEVEL 3 ............................................ 301 - 330
LEVEL 4 ............................................ 401 - 430
LEVEL 5 ............................................ 501 - 530
LEVEL 6 ............................................ 601 - 630
LEVEL 7 ............................................ 701 - 730
LEVEL 8 ............................................ 801 - 830
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Reaction Monitor
Choose 1:Routine 2:Routine Rerun 3:Stat Rerun 5:Control 6:STD : ENTER
Sample
Scale
Cell
Result
7
460
[ Routine ] - [ 1] Test [ GLU ] Print [ ]
[ 0 ] - [ 12000 ]
$
3000
6000
9000
12000
0
3 6 9 12 15
2 111
(sequence
number)
STANDARD
STD 1 .................................................... 11, 12
STD 2 .................................................... 21, 22
STD 3 .................................................... 31, 32
STD 4 .................................................... 41, 42
STD 5 .................................................... 51, 52
STD 6 .................................................... 61, 62
Test
Use this field to select the test to be viewed. Enter the
test key number or press the test key itself, then
press ENTER.
The graph displayed is the latest reaction for the
specified sequence number and test. Press PAGE
CONTINUE to view previous reaction monitors such as
calibrations since the analyzer was powered on or
previous patient runs with this sequence number.
Cell
This field displays the reaction cell where the reaction
took place.
Result
This field displays the final result for patient samples
and controls and the absorbance reading for
standards. If a data flag was issued, the data flag also
is displayed.
Scale [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to set the absorbance range that is
plotted on the Y- axis. The limits are -10,000 to 40,000
X 10
4
. These fields default to the previous entries.
Changing these settings can improve the resolution of
the graph.
Scale [ ] - [ ]
Input Minimum Level ABS (-10000 to 40000) :
ENTER
Use this field to enter the minimum absorbance x 10
4
.
Enter the absorbance and press ENTER.
Scale [ ] - [ ]
Input Maximum Level ABS (-10000 to 40000) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the maximum absorbance x 10
4
.
Enter the absorbance and press ENTER.
Print [ ]
Input 1 : To Print : ENTER (Use COPY KEY for Graph)
Use this field to print cell blank values and raw
absorbance data for the displayed graph. Press 1
ENTER. Absorbance data can be printed only in
Stand-by. Absorbance data is stored for 360 normal
samples, 80 control tests, and 80 calibrations.
Press the COPY key to print the graph as shown on the
REACTION MONITOR screen.
2 112
Calibration Trace
2.40.1 Introduction
The CALIBRATION TRACE screen graphically
displays the 30 most recent successful calibrations
for each photometric test (including CALIB alarms)
and the 30 most recent calibrations for each ISE test
(including failed alarms). For non-linear calibrations,
the span point is plotted with an X. For all other
photometric calibrations, the highest calibrator is
plotted with an X.
TRACE Screen
Press MONITOR to display the Monitor Job Menu.
Press 2 ENTER to display the CALIBRATION TRACE
screen.
TRACE Screen
Figure 2-54 is an example of the CALIBRATION
TRACE screen. The scale plots STD 1 values for
photometric tests and Precical values for ISEs. The
X scale plots the span values for non-linear
photometric tests, the highest standard values for all
other photometric tests and the slope values for ISEs.
Figure 2-54: CALIBRATION TRACE Screen
2.40.4 CALIBRATION TRACE
Each CALIBRATION TRACE field and prompt are
explained below.
Test [ ]
Use this field to select the test to be displayed. Enter
the test code and press ENTER. For manually set
reagents, the test name and scale value are displayed,
but no graph is drawn.
2.40 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration Trace
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Calibration Trace
Test
Print
Scale
Scale
( ) [ ] - [ ]
( ) [ ] - [ ]
0 8000
X 0 8000
[ GLU ]
[ ]
Alarm
: STD ( 1) 06 /16 11 / 19 X : STD ( 2 ) - ( 6 )
5 10 15 20 25 30
0 0
0
2000 2000
4000 4000
6000 6000
8000 8000

2 113
SCALE (X) [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to specify the minimum and
maximum absorbance range for the span or high
standard.
SCALE (X) [ ] - [ ]
Input Low Value : ENTER
For test codes 1-46:
Enter minimum ABS (input range: -40,000 - 40,000) of
STD 2-6.
Enter minimum slope (input range: 0 - 999999) of the
low and high ISE calibrators.
SCALE (X) [ ] - [ ]
Input High Value : ENTER
Enter maximum ABS (input range: -40,000 - 40,000)
of STD 2-6.
Enter maximum slope (input range: 0 - 999999) of the
low and high ISE calibrators.
2.40 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration Trace
Print [ ]
Input 1 : To Print : ENTER (Use COPY KEY for Graph)
Use this field to print the results of the 30 most recent
calibrations. Press 1 ENTER to print the results. The
analyzer must be in Stand-by to request a printout.
Press COPY to get a printout of the graph displayed on
the CALIBRATION TRACE screen.
SCALE ( ) [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to specify the minimum and
maximum absorbance range for standard 1.
SCALE ( ) [ ] - [ ]
For test codes 1 - 46:
Enter the minimum ABS (input range: -40,000 -
40,000) of STD 1.
For test codes 47 - 49:
Enter the minimum concentration (input range:
0 - 999999) of the calibrator (ISE 3).
SCALE ( ) [ ] - [ ]
Enter maximum ABS (input range: -40,000 - 40,000)
of STD 1.
Enter maximum concentration (input range:
0 - 999999) of the calibrator (ISE 3).
2 114
Calibration List
2.41.1 Introduction
Use the CALIBRATION LIST screen to view
calibration data for all programmed tests. This screen
is password protected and is not used by the operator
during routine operation. BM does not recommend
that you change any values on this screen unless
instructed to do so by a BM representative.
LIST Screen
MENU. Press 3 ENTER to display the CALIBRATION
LIST screen.
Up to 20 tests are listed on the screen in ascending
order of test codes. Press PAGE CONTINUE to
display to the remaining tests in memory.
LIST Screen
Figure 2-55 is an example of the CALIBRATION LIST
screen.
Figure 2-55: CALIBRATION LIST Screen
2.41.4 CALIBRATION LIST Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each CALIBRATION LIST field and prompt is
explained below.
S1 ABS
Input ABS. x 10000 : ENTER
Absorbance (x10
4
) of the Standard (1). A (positive or
negative) signed number of up to six characters can
be viewed. This number is updated following each
successful or CALIB flagged calibration. For an
endpoint assay, the absorbance value of the reagent
blank is shown. For a rate assay, the absorbance
change per minute of the reagent blank is shown. For
Serum Indexes, the reagent blank at each of the three
wavelength pairs is displayed.
2.41 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration List
2
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
3 Calibration List
Input ABS. X 10000 : ENTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
Test S1 ABS K A B C
Alarm
-2
-6
-1
-1
0
0
2
18
0
-9
1211
-3854
3621
348
123
7080
-507
3313
7
289
11455
9413
-7414
-7414
2904
6873
5814
1220
251
-6230
513
-762
174
770
235
83
464
244
1883
585
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
2 115
K
Input K Factor : ENTER
For the K factor, a signed (positive or negative) number
of up to six characters may be viewed. This display
shows the K factor, which is updated after each
successful or CALIB flagged calibration, for
chemistries using other calibration methods.
A
Input A Factor : ENTER
Non-linear coefficient A. A signed (positive or
negative) number of six characters may be viewed.
B
Input B Factor : ENTER
Non-linear coefficient B. A signed (positive or
C
Input C Factor : ENTER
Non-linear coefficient C. A signed (positive or
For more details concerning the CALIBRATION LIST
screen information, see the chemistry section of
Chapter 5, Theory.
2.41 Data Monitor Job - - Calibration List
2 116
2.42 Data Monitor Job - - ISE
Calibration Monitor
2.42.1 Introduction
The ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR screen shows the
results from the most recent successful ISE
calibration. This screen is password protected.
Boehringer Mannheim does not recommended that
you change the compensated values.
2.42.2 Displaying the ISE CALIBRATION
MONITOR Screen
MENU. Press 4 ENTER to display the ISE
CALIBRATION MONITOR screen.
2.42.3Example of the ISE CALIBRATION
MONITOR Screen
Figure 2-56 is an example of the ISE CALIBRATION
MONITOR screen.
Figure 2-56: ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR Screen
2.42.4 ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR
Each ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR field and prompt
is explained below.
INT. Ref. EMF.
Thi s fi el d di spl ays the el ectri cal potenti al
(electromotive force) of the internal reference solution
in millivolts (mV) for Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
. No operator entry
is allowed in this field.
2.42 Data Monitor Job - - ISE Calibration Monitor
4
ENTER
37.0 Operation 12/01/92 12:20
4 ISE Calibration Monitor
Input Concentration : ENTER
Int. Ref. EMF.
STD(1) Low EMF.
STD(2) High EMF.
STD(3) Calib. EMF.
Slope
Int. Ref. Conc.
STD(3) Conc.
Compensated Values
-30.9
-35.8
-28.9
-32.1
55.2
147.5
140.4
-1.4
-33.5
-46.5
-26.6
-34.2
53.5
5.20
5.04
-0.04
125.9
130.7
123.2
126.3
-42.6
103.9
101.6
-1.2
Routine
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Na K Cl
2 117
STD (1) Low EMF.
(electromotive force) of ISE 1 (LOW standard) for Na
+
,
K
+
, and Cl
-
. No operator entry is allowed in this field.
STD (2) High EMF.
(electromotive force) of ISE 2 (HIGH standard) for Na
+
,
K
+
, and Cl
-
STD (3) Calib. EMF.
(electromotive force) of ISE 3 (calibrator) for Na
+
, K
+
,
and Cl
-
Slope
This field displays the response (sensitivity) of each
electrode cartridge for Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
. No operator
entry is allowed in this field.
Int. Ref. Conc.
This field displays the concentration of the internal
reference solution as determined during calibration for
Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
. No operator entry is allowed in this
field.
STD (3) Conc.
This field displays the measured concentration of the
calibrator (ISE 3) as determined during calibration for
Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
. No operator entry is allowed in this
field.
Compensated Values [ ] [ ] [ ]
This field is used to enter the calculated compensation
value. The compensation value is the difference
between the expected ISE 3 value and the measured
ISE 3 value. This compensate value is added to all
measured controls and patient values to obtain the
reported result. Refer to the ISE application sheet for
an explanation of how this value is used. Field 1 is
used for Na
+
, Field 2 for K
+
, and Field 3 for Cl
-
.
These fields are updated automatically during
calibration. The compensated value is -99999 to
999999.
2.42 Data Monitor Job - - ISE Calibration Monitor
2 118
Working Curve
2.43.1 Introduction
The WORKING CURVE screen is used to display the
calibration curve for any photometric assay other than
those using the linear 1-point calibration method.
Absorbance is plotted on the ordinate (Y-axis). The
log of concentration, based on the standards, is
plotted on the abscissa (X-axis).
2.43.2 Displaying the WORKING
CURVE Screen
MENU. Press 5 ENTER to display the WORKING
CURVE screen.
2.43.3 Example of the WORKING
CURVE Screen
Figure 2-57 is an example of the WORKING CURVE
screen.
Figure 2-57: WORKING CURVE Screen
2.43.4 WORKING CURVE Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each WORKING CURVE field and prompt is
explained below.
Test [ ]
Use this field to select the test to be displayed. Enter
the test code and press ENTER.
2.43 Data Monitor Job - - Working Curve
5
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
5 Working Curve
Input Tests via Keyboard : ENTER (Use COPY KEY for Graph)
Test
Scale
[ ]
[ ] - [ 9000 ]
U/CSF
0
1020 40 80 200
0
1800
3600
5400
7200
9000
2 119
Scale [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to set the absorbance range x 10
4
that is plotted on the Y axis. The limits are -10,000
to 40,000. The scale adjusts automatically based
on the reaction time for each test.
If a CAL? or SENS alarm was issued for the specified
test, the calibration curve is not updated and the last
successful calibration curve is displayed.
Scale [ ] - [ ]
Input Mi ni mum Level ABS (-10000 to
40000) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the minimum absorbance. Enter
the absorbance x 10
4
and press ENTER.
Scale [ ] - [ ]
Input Maxi mum Level ABS (-10000 to
40000) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the maximum absorbance.
Enter the absorbance x 10
4
and press ENTER.
Press the COPY key to print a copy of the graph as
it is displayed on the WORKING CURVE screen.
2.43 Data Monitor Job - - Working Curve
2 120
2.44 Parameter Job - - Menu
2.44.1 Introduction
Use the PARAMETER JOB MENU to access screens
that are used to program the instrument to run
chemistry assays. Procedures for initial set up of
these screens are given in the following sections.
Procedures for routine screen programming are given
in Section A of this chapter.
2.44.2 Displaying the PARAMETER
JOB MENU
Press PARAMETER to display the PARAMETER
JOB MENU screen.
2.44.3 Example of the PARAMETER
JOB MENU
Figure 2-58 is an example of the PARAMETER JOB
MENU screen.
Figure 2-58: PARAMETER JOB MENU Screen
2.44.4 PARAMETER JOB MENU Fields
and Prompts
Function No. [ ]
Function : ENTER
appears on the CRT.
2.44 Parameter Job - - Menu
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Parameter Job Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Chemistry Parameters
Profiling
Calculated Tests
Print Order
Report Format
Control Test Selection
Control Value Setting
Special Wash Programming
System Parameters
Channel Assignment
Function No. [ ]
2 121
2.45 Parameter Job Chemistry
Parameters
2.45.1 Introduction
The CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS display enables
you to view parameters for each chemistry
programmed on the analyzer. You may modify some
of these parameters. The screen has two pages that
may be viewed alternately by pressing the GUIDANCE
key.
Page 1 of the display contains user-definable
parameters such as Test Name and Expected
Values. Page 2 contains test-specific parameters
such as Wavelengths and Reagent volumes. Page 1
parameters may be entered for all available
chemistries, test (application) codes 1 - 400. Most
page 2 parameters may be entered for test codes 301
- 400 only, which correspond to non-BM methods.
Automatic calibration information may be changed for
application codes 1 - 300 only.
For test codes 1 - 300, all photometric chemistry
parameters are read from a parameter disk through the
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen. (ISE parameters
are entered manually during your analyzer
installation.) Individual entries for each field are found
on the application sheets for each chemistry.
Set points for calibrator materials are found on the
package inserts and are entered on this screen.
2.45.2 Displaying the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS Screen -- Page 1
JOB MENU. Press 1 ENTER to display page 1 of the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen.
Press PAGE CONTINUE to view parameters for
additional tests.
2.45 Parameter Job - - Chemistry Parameters
1
ENTER
2 122
2.45.3 Example of the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS Screen -- Page 1
Figure 2-59: Chemistry Parameters ScreenPage 1
2.45.4 CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
Screen Fields andPrompts
Page 1
Informati on read from the parameter di sk
automatically fills most of the fields on both pages of
the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. The
explanation of the fields and prompts is most helpful for
entering information on reagents that do not have
parameters on the parameter disk.
Test [ ] [ ]
Use this field to select the test for which you want to
view the chemistry parameters.
Test [ ] [ ]
Use this field to enter the test key number. Press the
test selection key or enter the test key number (1 - 52)
of the desired test, then press ENTER. If parameters
are already in memory for the entered test code, from
either manual entry or reading the parameter disk,
they will appear on the screen.
Test [ ] [ ]
Input Application Code No. 00301 to 64999 : ENTER
Use this field to view the application code. If
parameters are stored in memory, this code appears
automatically. This field may not be changed.
Test Name [ ]
Input Name (Maximum of 5 Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to define the short test name. Enter the
short test name and press ENTER. A maximum of five
characters can be used in the short test name. This
test name appears on the keyboard matrix and CRT
screens. This short test name is printed on short
format reports.
Unit [ ]
Use this field to define the unit of measure for the test.
Enter the unit of measure and press ENTER. A
maximum of six characters may be entered.
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Chemistry Parameters
Test
Data Mode
Control Interval
Expected Value < Serum >
Test Name
Report Name
Instrument Factor ( Y= aX + b)
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Alarm
Expected Value < Urine >
BUN 00053
On Board
20
[ BUN ] Unit [mg/dL]
[ Urea Nitrogen ]
a [ 1.0 ]
b [ 0 ]
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
Technical Limit < Serum > < Urine >
STD Conc. Pos. Sample Pre. Dil. Calib. Lot No. Qualitative [No ]
1 Y 4 19 4 19
12 Y 5 18 5 18
6 19 6 19
0 150 10 150
1200 2000
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ 0]
[ 0]
[ 0]
[ 0]
[ 0]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
18
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
501
504
999
999
999
999
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
W
W
W
W
0.0
50.9
0
0
0
0
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
000000
052143
000000
000000
000000
000000
2 123
Data Mode [ ]
Choose 1 : On Board 0 : Inactive : ENTER
Use this field to specify whether a test is performed
on board the analyzer or performed manually with
the results entered into the patient report later. In the
case of ISEs, on-board status is the only status
allowed. Selection of the inactive data mode for ISEs
results in an input error. Press 1 On Board ENTER for
all tests that are performed on the analyzer. Press 0
Inactive ENTER for all tests that are performed
manually. This field enables you to print results from
a manually-performed test directly on the patient
report.
Report Name [ ]
Input Report Name (Maximum of 22 Characters) :
ENTER
Use this field to specify the long test name that will
appear on the Report Format reports. Enter the test
name and press ENTER. A maximum of 22 characters
may be entered.
Control Interval [ ]
Input Interval in Increments of 10 Samples (10, 20,
30,...1000) 0 : Cancel : ENTER
Use this field to select the interval at which controls
are run. Input must be made in multiples of 10. Any
other entry will result in an input error. In the case of
the ISEs, the same control interval will be used for
Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
. Enter the appropriate control interval
(10 - 1000) and press ENTER. This can be varied for
each method. If you select 0 Cancel ENTER, then
controls will not be run.
Instrument Factor (Y=aX+b) a [ ] b [ ]
The instrument recalculates all values obtained for
this chemistry by using the values entered here in the
equation y = ax + b. These can be used to
compensate for a manual dilution factor, to allow
temperature conversion for enzymes, to obtain
correlation with other methodologies or to convert to
other units of concentration.
Input Slope Value (a) : ENTER
Instrument Factor (a) is a slope factor. Enter the
factor (-99999 to 999999) by which the test results
are to be modified, then press ENTER. If no factoring
is desired, enter 1.0 for factor a.
Input Intercept Value (b) : ENTER
Instrument Factor (b) is a blank factor (y intercept).
Enter the factor (-99999 to 999999) by which the test
results are to be modified, then press ENTER. If no
factoring is desired, enter 0.0 for factor b.
Expected Value <Serum>
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to enter the expected values range for
serum samples of this assay. Values for both males
and females in three different age groups can be
specified.
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use this field to enter the numerical age for this range
of expected values. Enter the appropriate number
2 124
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Choose Age Interval 1 : Days 2 : Months
3 : Years : ENTER
Use this field to select the age interval (days, months,
or years) for this range of expected values. Enter the
number that corresponds to the selected interval and
press ENTER.
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to enter the lower limit and upper limit
of the expected value for serum samples. Enter the
expected value lower limit for males in the specified
age group (-99999 to 999999) and press ENTER.
Repeat for the expected value upper limit.
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
expected value lower limit for females in the specified
Repeat for the expected value upper limit.
Expected Value <Urine>
[ ] - [ ]
These fields are used to enter the lower limit and
upper limit of the expected value for urine samples.
Enter the expected value lower limit (-99999 to
999999) and press ENTER. Repeat for the expected
value upper limit.
NOTE
Any result outside of the expected value limits for any
class or age group will be flagged with H or L on the
printout next to the result.
Technical Limit <Serum>
[ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to set the technical limits for each
assay. Any result outside the limits specified here is
flagged with a LIM. L or LIM. H data flag. If the
automatic rerun function is selected on the START
CONDITIONS display, results exceeding the defined
upper limit are automatically rerun with the reduced
sample volume or as a pre-diluted sample as specified
on the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. Results
below the defined lower limit are rerun with the
increased sample volume as specified on the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. The technical
limit from the application sheet reflects the linearity of
the chemistry. Technical limits are based on the
normal sample volume.
[ ] - [ ]
Use this field to specify the lower technical limit for the
serum samples of this assay. Enter the lower value
for the test (-99999 to 999999) and press ENTER.
2 125
[ ] - [ ]
Use this field to specify the upper technical limit for
the serum samples of this assay. Enter the upper
value for the test (-99999 to 999999) and press
ENTER.
Technical Limit <Urine>
[ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to set the technical limits for each
urine sample of this assay. Technical limits are
based on the relationship between the serum and
urine normal sample volumes.
[ ] - [ ]
Use this field to specify the lower technical limit for
the urine samples of this assay. Enter the lower
ENTER.
[ ] - [ ]
Use this field to specify the upper technical limit for
the urine samples of this assay. Enter the upper
ENTER.
These fields are used to define parameters for the
standards used in calibration of the assay. The STD
col umn di spl ays the standard number.
Use the first field to enter the standard concentration.
The second field displays the position the standard
occupies on the sample disk, entered on the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen. No entry is allowed in this
column. Use the third field to specify the standard
volume. Use the fourth field to define the pre-diluted
standard volume. Use the fifth field to define the
volume of diluent used for pre-dilution. Use the sixth
field to define the standard code.
Each of these entries are repeated for up to six
standards. Each field is described in more detail
below.
NOTE
In the case of endpoint chemistries, STD (1) is
general l y set up to represent the BLANK
CALIBRATOR (usually non-buffered physiological
saline). STD (2) generally represents the calibrator
for any test that uses a blank and a single standard or
calibrator.
Input 0 to 999999 for Serum Indexes : ENTER
Use this field to define the concentration of each
standard. For photometric chemistries and ISEs, the
concentration is entered. For serum indexes, the
factor for calculation of the serum index (L, H, or I) is
entered. Refer to Section 5.33 for additional
information on serum indexes.
Enter the concentration of the specified standard or
the factor for serum index calculation (0 - 999999),
then press ENTER. Decimal placement in the STD
1 Conc. field determines decimal placement in
printed results.
STD Conc. Pos. Sample Pre. Dil. Calib. Lot No.
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(2) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 0000
(3) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 0000
(4) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 0000
(5) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 0000
(6) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] 0000
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
2 126
This field displays the position of each standard on
the sample disk. Positions 1 - 17 are room
temperature; positions 18 - 34 are refrigerated. This
information is entered in the Calibrator ID field of the
SYSTEM PARAMETER screen.
Input Sample Volume:1 to 50 L : ENTER
Use this field to define the normal standard volume.
Enter the normal standard volume in microliters for the
specified chemistry (range: 1 - 50), then press
ENTER. This is the standard volume used for
regular test processing. It is also the volume that is
diluted when pre-dilution is chosen.
Input Di l uted Sampl e Vol ume:1 to 10 L
(0 : Inactive) : ENTER
Use this field to define the volume of diluted standard
dispensed for calibration. Enter the volume of diluted
standard in microliters for the specified chemistry
(range: 0 - 10). Then press ENTER. If you choose not
to use the pre-dilution feature, enter 0 in this field.
Input Diluent Volume : 25 to 350 L (0 : Cancel) :
ENTER
Use this field to define the volume of diluent dispensed
for pre-dilution. Enter the volume of diluent (range:
25 - 350) and press ENTER. If you choose not to use
the pre-dilution feature, enter 0 in this field.
Example:
The above entries could be made into the Sample,
Pre., and Dil. fields. In this case, 10 L of standard
is aspirated from the sample cup and diluted with 90
L of diluent. 5 L of this dilution is resampled for use
in the calibration. The total volume must be a
minimum of 150 L.
Input Calibrator Code : Code 001 to 999
(000 : Inactivate, 999 : Water) : ENTER
Use this field to define the code for each standard.
Enter the appropriate calibrator code for the specific
standard (001 - 999) and press ENTER.
The Lot column displays the lot number of the
standard. No operator entry is allowed in this field.
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to report results in the qualitative
mode. When qualitative is selected, the analyzer will
report results using characters defined in these fields.
Numerical results can also be reported.
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(1) [ ] [10] [5] [90] [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
2 127
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Choose 1:Serum/Plasma 2:Urine 3:Serum/Plasma
& Urine 0:Inactivate : ENTER
Use this field to specify the class of the test using the
qualitative display. Enter the number that
corresponds to the selected class and press ENTER.
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Input Quantitative Value -99999 To 999999 : ENTER
Use this field to specify the upper limit of the
measured concentration for qualitative display. Enter
the upper limit (-99999 to 999999) and press ENTER.
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Use this field to specify the characters that will print on
the patient report. Up to six characters, such as
and ++, or Slight, Mod, and Gross, can be entered.
Enter the appropriate character(s) and press ENTER.
Leaving this field blank by pressing SPACEBAR
ENTER results in the numeric result printing instead of
a test message.
1
ENTER
2.45.5 Displaying the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS Screen - Page 2
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. Press
GUIDANCE to display page 2 of the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
Press PAGE CONTINUE to view parameters for
additional tests.
2 128
2.45.6 Example of the CHEMISTRY
Figure 2-60: CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS Screen - -
Page 2
2.45.7 CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
Screen Fields and Prompts - -
Page 2
Test [ ]
Use this field to select the test for which you want to
display parameters. If you have pressed the
GUIDANCE key after selecting a test on page 1 of the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen, the parameters
for that test are automatically displayed. Enter the
test key code and press ENTER.
NOTE
The following fields (except the automatic calibration
fields) are user programmable for application codes
301 - 400 only.
Assay Code [ ] [ ] [ ]
These fields display the assay code or type of the
selected test. The reaction time also is specified in
these fields.
Choose 1 : 1 Point 2 : 2 Point Rate 3 : 2 Point 4 :
3 Point 5 : 1 Point & Rate 6 : Rate A 7 : Rate B :
ENTER
Use this field to select the appropriate assay type.
Press: 1 1 Point ENTER (endpoint assay)
2 2 Point Rate ENTER (fixed time rate
or endpiont assay)
3 2 Point ENTER (sample-blanked
endpoint assay)
4 3 Point ENTER (two endpoint assays)
5 1 Point and Rate ENTER (endpoint
and rate assays)
6 Rate A ENTER (rate A assay )
7 Rate B ENTER (two rate assays)
Input the Reacti on Ti me: 3, 4, 5, 10, or
15 min. : ENTER
Use this field to enter the length of the reaction in
minutes. Enter the reaction time and press ENTER.
The time entered in this field indicates the time span
results can be viewed on the REACTION MONITOR
screen.
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Select Test via Keyboard : ENTER
Test
Assay Code
Assay Point
S. Vol. (Normal)
S. Vol. (Decrease)
S. Vol. (Increase )
ABS. Limit
Prozone Limit
Reagent
Calibration Type
R1
R2
R3
R4
Wavelength (2nd / Primary)
Diluent / Rgt. Stability
Auto Time Out
Auto Change
Blank
Span
2 Point
Full
Lot
Bottle
SD Limit
Duplicate Limit
Sensitivity Limit
S1 ABS Limit
Compensated Limit
[ BUN ]
[ Rate-A ] [ 4] [ ]
[ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
< Serum > < Urine >
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ]
[ ] / [ ] 4 12 0 0
4
2
8
15
5
4
0
0
0
4
4
0
0
0
0
135
145
0
5000 5000 Decrease
0 0 Lower
320
80
0
0
0
0
0
0
21
21
0
0
00053
00053
00053
00053
LINEAR 2 2 0
0
0
24
0
0.1
50
0
10000 25000
2 Point
2 Point
376 340
W 0
2 129
Input Tests via Keyboard (0:Cancel) : ENTER
For channels 1 to 46, use this field to specify the
second test to be performed in the same reaction cell
for simultaneous measurement tests such as GOT/
GPT. TG/CHOL Twin tests.
For serum indexes, use this field to specify the test
selected to use during measurement of serum
indexes. Press the test key of the selected test and
ENTER. Press 0 Cancel ENTER in this field to cancel
any entry.
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
Input First Measure Point 1 to 49 : ENTER
Use these fields to specify the measure points for the
reaction. Up to four different measure points may be
entered. The number of measure points depends on
the assay type of the reaction. Enter the appropriate
measure point and press ENTER. Repeat for the other
three measure points.
Wavelength (2nd/Primary) [ ] / [ ]
Use these fields to specify the wavelengths at which
absorbance readings will be taken for both
monochromatic and bichromatic measurements.
Twelve wavelengths are available for entry: 340, 376,
415, 450, 480, 505, 546, 570, 600, 660, 700, and 800
nm.
Choose:340, 376, 415, 450, 480, 505, 546, 570, 600,
660, 700, 800 nm (0:Monochromatic) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the secondary (sub) wavelength
for the specified assay. Enter the appropriate
wavelength and press ENTER. When monochromatic
analysis is desired, enter 0 for the secondary
wavelength entry.
Choose:340, 376, 415, 450, 480, 505, 546, 570, 600,
660, 700, 800 nm : ENTER
Use this field to enter the primary (main) wavelength for
the specified assay. Enter the appropriate wavelength
and press ENTER.
Diluent/Rgt. Stability[ ] [ ]
Use these fields to specify information about the
diluent used in sample or standard pre-dilution for this
assay.
Diluent/Rgt. Stability[ ] [ ]
Input Bottl e Code No. 00001 to 00400
(0:Water) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the bottle code of the diluent
to be used in sample or standard pre-dilution. Enter
the appropriate diluent bottle code and press ENTER.
Press 0 ENTER to use water as the diluent.
Diluent [ ] [ ]
Input Working Stability: 1 to 99 Days (0:Inactive) :
ENTER
Use this field to specify the working stability of the
diluent. Enter the number of days until the expiration
of the diluent and press ENTER. Press 0 ENTER to
inactivate this field.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Normal) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to specify normal sample volumes for
serum or urine samples. Volumes for the sample, pre-
diluted sample, and diluent used in pre-dilution are
specified for each class.
2 130
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Normal) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Sample Volume 1 to 50 L : ENTER
Use these fields to enter the sample volume
aspirated from the sample cup for either a normal
sample or a pre-diluted sample. This volume is
dispensed into the reaction cell. Enter the sample
volume in microliters and press ENTER. Use the first
fields in both serum and urine to enter the sample
volume. Press 0 ENTER to inactivate this field. The
minimum total volume of sample and diluent for pre-
dilution must be 150 L.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Normal) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Di l uted Sampl e Vol ume 1 to 10 L
(0:Inactive) : ENTER
Use these fields to enter the volume of diluted sample
aspirated from one reaction cell and dispensed into a
second reaction cell. Enter the volume of pre-diluted
sample to be used in the reaction and press ENTER.
If you choose not to use sample pre-dilution, press 0
ENTER.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Normal) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Di l uent Vol ume 25 to 350 L
(0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the volume of diluent added to
a reaction cell containing sample for sample pre-
dilution. Enter the volume of diluent and press ENTER.
Press 0 ENTER if you choose not to use normal
sample pre-dilution. The minimum total volume of
sample and diluent must be 150 L.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Decrease) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [
]
Use these fields to specify decreased sample volumes
for serum or urine samples. This volume would be
used for auto rerun of results greater than the
Technical Limit. Volumes for the sample, pre-diluted
sample, and diluent used in pre-dilution are specified
for each class.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Decrease) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [
]
Use these fields to enter the decreased sample
volume aspirated from the sample cup for either a
dispensed into the reaction cell. Use the first fields in
both serum and urine to enter the sample volume.
Press 0 ENTER to inactivate this field. The minimum
total volume of sample and diluent for pre-dilution must
be 150 L.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Decrease) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [
]
Input Diluted Sample Volume 1 to 10 L (0:Inactive) :
ENTER
If you choose not to use decreased sample pre-
dilution, press 0 ENTER.
2 131
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Decrease) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [
]
Input Diluent Volume 25 to 350 L(0:Cancel) : ENTER
a reaction cell containing sample for decreased
sample pre-dilution. Enter the volume of diluent and
press ENTER. Press 0 ENTER if you choose not to
use decreased sample pre-dilution. The minimum
total volume of sample and diluent must be 150 L.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Increase) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to specify increased sample volumes
for serum or urine samples. This volume would be
used for auto rerun of results less than the technical
limit. Volumes for the sample, pre-diluted sample,
and diluent used in pre-dilution are specified for each
class.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Increase) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to enter the increased sample
volume aspirated from the sample cup for either a
dispensed into the reaction cell. Enter the sample
volume in microliters and press ENTER. Use the first
fields in both serum and urine are to enter the sample
volume. Enter the sample volume in microliters and
press ENTER. Press 0 ENTER to inactivate this
field. The minimum total volume of sample and
diluent for pre-dilution must be 150 L.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Increase) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Di l uted Sampl e Vol ume 1 to 10 L
(0:Inactive) : ENTER
If you choose not to use increased sample pre-
dilution, press 0 ENTER.
<Serum> <Urine>
S. Vol. (Increase) [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Di l uent Vol ume 25 to 350 L
(0:Cancel) : ENTER
a reaction cell containing sample for increased sample
pre-dilution. Enter the volume of diluent and press
ENTER. Press 0 ENTER if you choose not to use
increased sample pre-dilution. The minimum total
volume of sample and diluent must be 150 L.
<Serum> <Urine>
Abs. Limit [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to specify the absorbance limits for
serum or urine and whether the absorbance change is
increasing or decreasing. For rate chemistries, this
is the absorbance limit at which substrate depletion is
detected and the LIM. 1, LIM.2 and LIM.3 flags are
issued.
<Serum> <Urine>
Abs. Limit [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input 0 To 32000 (ABS x 10000) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the absorbance limit for a
serum rate chemistry. Enter the absorbance limit (X
10
4
) and press ENTER.
2 132
<Serum> <Urine>
Abs. Limit [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input 0 To 32000 (ABS x 10000) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the absorbance limit for a
urine rate chemistry. Enter the absorbance limit (X
10
4
) and press ENTER.
<Serum> <Urine>
Abs. Limit [ ] [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 : Decreasing ABS Change 2 : Increasing
ABS Change : ENTER
Use this field to specify an increasing or decreasing
absorbance. Press 1 ENTER to specify a decreasing
absorbance kinetic assay. Press 2 ENTER to specify
an increasing absorbance kinetic assay.
<Serum> <Urine>
Prozone Limit [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to specify the saturation limit of an
antigen-antibody reaction.
<Serum> <Urine>
Input -32000 to 32000 (ABS x 10000) [1Point] (%)
[2Point] : ENTER
Use this field to specify the prozone limit for a serum
chemistry. Enter the prozone limit (-32000 to 32000),
then press ENTER.
<Serum> <Urine>
Input -32000 To 32000 (ABS x 10000) [1Point] %
[2Point] : ENTER
Use this field to specify the prozone limit for a urine
chemistry. Enter the prozone limit (-32000 to 32000),
then press ENTER.
<Serum> <Urine>
Choose 1:Upper Limit 2:Lower Limit : ENTER
Use this field to specify whether the entered value is
an upper or lower limit. Press 1 ENTER to specify
upper limit or 2 ENTER to specify lower limit.
Reagent R1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
R2 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
R3 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
R4 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Each photometric test can have up to four different
reagent additions, occurring at different timing
intervals. A R1 reagent is added by the R1 probe 10
seconds after sample dispense. A R2 reagent is
added by the R2 probe 1.5 minutes after dispense of
the R1 reagent. A R3 reagent is added by the R2 probe
5.0 minutes after addition of the R1 reagent. A R4
reagent is added by the R1 probe 10.0 minutes after
dispense of the R1 reagent.
Use these fields to specify information for each of
these reagent additions. Each reagent addition
requires four entries, as they appear on the application
sheet. The four entries are: reagent volume, diluent
volume, bottle code, and working solution stability.
The four prompts are identical for each reagent
addition. Each individual entry for the first reagent
addition is explained below. Repeat the entries for the
other reagent additions.
Reagent R1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Volume 1 to 350 L (0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the volume of reagent to be
pipetted. Enter the volume of the selected reagent in
microliters (range 1 - 350, 0 Cancel), then press
ENTER.
2 133
Reagent R1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Volume 1 to 350 L(0:Cancel) : ENTER
Input Volume 1 to 250 L(0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to input the volume of diluent to be
pipetted. For R1 and R4, the range is 1 - 350
microliters. For R2 and R3, the range is 1 - 250
microliters. Enter the correct volume and press
ENTER. Press 0 Cancel ENTER to cancel entry in this
field.
Reagent R1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Bottle Code 00001 to 00400 : ENTER
Use this field to enter the bottle code for the reagent.
Enter the bottle code and press ENTER. For a
manually entered chemistry this field corresponds to
the bottle code entered on the REAGENT STATUS
screen.
Reagent R1 [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Worki ng Stabi l i ty 1 to 99 days
(0:Inactivate) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the reagent working solution
stability. Enter the available days and press ENTER.
This item is not tracked for minimal or partial bar coded
reagents.
Calibration Type [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to specify information about the
calibration of the assay. This information appears on
the application sheet for the chemistry.
Choose 1 : Linear 2 : (3P) 3 : (4P) 4 : (5P) 5 : EXPO
6 : Spline 7 : ISO. P 8 : ISO. Q : ENTER
Use this field to specify the appropriate calibration
type from the eight types available, as detailed below:
Press: 1 Linear ENTER (Linear)
2 (3P) ENTER (Logit-Log (3P))
3 (4P) ENTER (Logit -Log (4P))
4 (5P) ENTER (Logit-Log (5P))
5 EXPO ENTER (Exponential)
6 Spline ENTER (Spline)
7 ISO. P ENTER (Isozyme P)
8 ISO. Q ENTER (Isozyme Q)
Sel ect the Number of Cal i brati on Poi nts
1 to 6 : ENTER
Use this field to enter the number of standards used
for calibration. Enter the number of standard
solutions to be measured (range: 1 - 6), then press
ENTER. When Linear is selected as the calibration
type in Field 1 and 1 is specified as the number of
calibrators in Field 2, then a K factor calibration is
used for the assay.
Select Span Point 2 to 6 (0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the span calibration point
(standard to be measured in span calibration). Enter
the span point to be used when updating the
calibration curve (2 - 6) and press ENTER. You must
select a span point.
2 134
Input Weight 0,1,2 : ENTER
Use this field to set a weight to be applied to the
standard solution. Enter the appropriate weight (0, 1,
2) and press ENTER.
Input Tests via Keyboard (0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to specify a Q channel when entering
ISO. P for the calibration type. Enter the appropriate
channel selection (1 - 46, 0 Cancel) and press ENTER.
Auto Time Out Blank [ ]
Span [ ]
2 Point [ ]
Full [ ]
Auto Change Lot [ ]
Bottle [ ]
The fields included in the automatic calibration section
of this screen are used to view or enter parameters
required for executing automatic calibration. For BM
chemistries (test codes 1 - 300), recommended
intervals are on the parameter disk. Any adjustment
to the time out interval must be a shorter interval than
is recommended by BM. For non-BM chemistries
(test codes 301 - 400), no operator input is allowed.
Auto Time Out Blank [ ]
Input 1 To 999 Hours (0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to enter or view the duration between
automatic calibrations of STD (1).
Span [ ]
automatic calibration of the span calibrator.
2 Point [ ]
automatic calibrations using STD (1) and the span
calibrator.
Full [ ]
automatic calibrations of the full standard curve.
Auto Change Lot [ ]
Choose 1:Blank 2:Span 3:2 Point 4:Full 0:Not
Required : ENTER
Use this field to enter or view the method of lot-to-lot
calibration.
Bottle [ ]
Choose 1:Blank 2:Span 3:2 Point 4:Full 0:Not
Required : ENTER
Use this field to enter or view the method of bottle-to-
bottle calibration.
2 135
SD Limit [ ]
Input 0.1 to 999.9 (ABS. x 10000) : ENTER
When calibrating non-linear or multipoint linear
chemistries, the instrument compares the measured
absorbance of each calibrator against its ideal
absorbance and calculated SD. If the calculated SD
is not less than this SD limit, a SD LIM alarm is issued.
Enter the Standard Deviation (SD) limit (0.1 - 999.9
ABS X 10
4
) for non-linear calibration curve
acceptability, then press ENTER. Enter 0 to cancel.
Duplicate Limit [ ]
Input 0 to 32000 (ABS. x 10000) : ENTER
Enter the duplicate limit for calibrator acceptability
(0 - 32000), then press ENTER. All photometric
calibrators are run in duplicate; if the difference in
absorbance values of the duplicates exceeds this
duplicate limit, a DUP alarm is issued to indicate a
failed calibration.
Sensitivity Limit [ ]
Input 0 to 32000 (ABS. x 10000) : ENTER
Enter the calibration sensitivity limit (0 - 32000), then
press ENTER. This value specifies that a minimum
absorbance change must be detected between the
blank and span calibrator during calibration of
endpoint chemistries. If the difference in absorbance
between the blank and span calibrator is not greater
than the sensitivity limit, a SENS alarm is issued to
indicate a failed calibration.
S1 ABS Limit [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to enter the lower and upper limits for
the absorbance of the STD 1 during calibration. If the
STD1 absorbance is outside of this range, a S1ABS?
alarm is issued to indicate a failed calibration.
Input -32000 to 32000 (ABS x 10000) : ENTER
Enter the lower limit (-32000 to 32000) and press
ENTER.
Input -32000 to 32000 (ABS x 10000) : ENTER
Enter the upper limit (-32000 to 32000) and press
ENTER. For endpoint chemistries, this limit applies to
the bichromatic absorbance of STD 1. For rate
chemistries, this applies to the monochromatic
absorbance of STD 1.
Compensated Limit [ ]
Input Acceptable Deviation: 0.0 to 200.0% : ENTER
Use this field to enter the compensation limit value for
the ISE assays. Entry in this field causes an input
error for photometric chemistries. Enter the
compensated limit (0.0 - 200.0) and press ENTER. If
the difference between the current calibration and the
previous calibration is outside this limit, a CALIB alarm
is issued.
2 136
2.46 Parameter Job - - Profiling
2.46.1 Introduction
The PROFILING screen is used to define the tests
performed for each chemistry profile. Up to 12 profiles
can be defined. Perform a parameter write to store
changes to profiles on the system disk.
2.46.2 Displaying the PROFILING
Screen
JOB MENU. Press 2 ENTER to display the
PROFILING screen.
2.46.3 Example of the PROFILING
Screen
Figure 2-61 is an example of the PROFILING screen.
Figure 2-61: PROFILING Screen
2.46.4 PROFILING Screen Fields and
Prompts
Each PROFILING field and prompt is explained below.
Profile Definition
Profile Key [ ]
Tests [ ]
Name [ ]
Use these fields to define or delete profiles. There are
12 keys in the numerical keypad on the keyboard that
can be used for profiles. These keys are lettered A
through L on the front of the key.
Profile Definition
2
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Profiling
Input Profile Key ( A - L ) : ENTER
Profile Definition
Default Profile
Print
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
Profile Key
Tests
Name
[ - ]
[ - ]
[ HEART ]
[ On ] [CHEM7]
[ ]
THEO
2 137
Profile Key [ ]
Input Profile Key (A-L) : ENTER
Use this field to select the profile key. Press the
appropriate profile key (A - L) and press ENTER. The
profile key will highlight in reverse video on the
keyboard matrix. If test selections have previously
assigned to this profile key, the selections will
highlight in reverse video on the keyboard matrix.
Profile Definition
Tests [ ]
Use this field to assign individual tests to the selected
profile key. Press the appropriate test selection keys.
Selected tests will highlight in reverse video on the
keyboard matrix. To delete a test that has been
selected, press the test key again. The highlighting for
that test will disappear from the keyboard matrix.
When all appropriate test keys are highlighted in
reverse video, press ENTER.
Profile Definition
Name [ ]
Use this field to assign the name to the profile key.
Enter the desired name (five characters maximum)
and press ENTER. If the profile is the same as a default
profile, the selected name also appears in the Default
Profile field.
Default Profile [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to set up a default profile. The default
profile is used in the event of a sample being placed
on the sample disk and having no test selections
specified.
Use this field to request a default profile. Press 1
Activate ENTER to run a default profile when no test
selections are made for a sample. Press 0 Inactivate
ENTER to choose not to run a default profile.
Input Profile Key (A-L) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the profile to be run in the
default mode. To select the default profile you want to
use, press the profile key (A - L) and ENTER.
Print [ ]
Use this field to request a printout of the information
registered in profile key selections. Press 1 To Print
Report ENTER to request a printout. A copy of the
profiles that have test selections defined will be
printed.
2 138
2.47 Parameter Job Calculated
Test
2.47.1 Introduction
The CALCULATED TEST screen is used to define the
calculation formula and parameters for each
calculated test. This screen also is used to define the
calculation formula of each compensated test.
Perform a parameter write to store changes made to
the CALCULATED TEST screen.
2.47.2 Displaying the CALCULATED
TEST Screen
CALCULATED TEST screen.
2.47.3 Example of the CALCULATED
TEST Screen
Figure 2-62 is an example of the CALCULATED TEST
screen.
Figure 2-62: CALCULATED TEST Screen
2.47.4 CALCULATED TEST Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each CALCULATED TEST field and prompt is
explained below.
Mode [ ]
Choose 1:Calculated 2:Compensated : ENTER
Use this field to define whether the entry is a calculated
or compensated test. Press 1 Calculated ENTER to
choose a cal cul ated test. Press
2 Compensated ENTER to choose a compensated
test.
2.47 Parameter Job - - Calculated Test
3
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Mode
Test
S. Type
Formula
Expected Value < Serum >
Expected Value < Urine >
Test Name
Unit
Report Name
[ Calc. ]
[ A / G ] [ ]
[ Serum ]
[ <16> / (<17> - <16> ) ; ]
Alarm
Qualitative
[ A / G ]
[ ]
[ Albumin / Globulin Ratio ]
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ]
100 Y 1.1 1.8 1.1 1.8
100 Y 1.1 1.8 1.1 1.8
1.1 1.8 1.1 1.8
0.0 100.0
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
Serum A / G = ALB / (TP - ALB )
Serum UN / CR = BUN / CREA
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
[ ]
0
0
0
0
0
[ No ]
2 139
Test Name [ ]
This field is used to enter the name of the calculated
test. Enter the test name (maximum 5 characters)
and press ENTER.
Test [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to assign a test code for both
calculated and compensated tests. These fields also
are used to define the test to be compensated.
Test [ ] [ ]
Input Test No. 53 to 60 : ENTER
Use this field to assign a test code number to the
calculated test. Enter the test code number (53 - 60)
and press ENTER. The second entry in the Tests field
is not used for calculated tests.
Test [ ] [ ]
Input Program No. 1 to 8 : ENTER
Use this field to assign a number to the compensation
formula. Enter the formula number (1 - 8) and press
ENTER.
Test [ ] [ ]
Select Tests via Keyboard (0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the test to be compensated.
Enter the test key number (1 - 49) and press ENTER.
S. Type [ ]
Choose 1:Serum/Plasma 2:Urine : ENTER
Use this field to define the sample type. Enter the
appropriate class number (1 or 2) and press ENTER.
Formula [ ]
Input Formula Using: +, -, *, /, (,), <CH. NO.>,
Numeric, (End with;) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the calculation formula. A
maximum of 40 characters (operators, test codes,
numbers) can be entered.
Mathematical operators that may be used are: *
(multiply), / (divide), + (add), and - (subtract).
Test codes must be placed within less than and
greater than signs (<>) before being entered into a
bracket field. This distinguishes test codes from
numeric characters. The formula definition must end
with a semicolon (;). In our display example, Globulin
equals:
To clear any formula, enter a semicolon (;) at the first
entry position for that formula.
The formula entered is checked for the errors listed
below. If errors are found, the appropriate input error
alarm is issued.
Test Code
17 (TP)
Subtract Test Code
16 Albumin
Formula
End
[ <17>-<16>; ]
2 140
Unit [ ]
Use this field to enter the unit of measure for the
calculated test. The entry results in an error if the
compensated test mode is specified. Enter the units
(maximum of six characters) and press ENTER.
Report Name [ ]
Input Report Name (Maxi mum 22
Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to define the long name for the calculated
test that i s pri nted
on the report format. Enter the report name (22
characters maximum) and press ENTER. The entry
results in an error if the compensated test mode
is specified.
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to enter the expected serum values
ranges for this assay. Values for both males and
females in three different age groups can be specified.
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use this field to enter the numerical age for this range
of expected values. Enter the appropriate number (0
- 200) and press ENTER. The entry results in an error
if the compensated test mode is specified.
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
ENTER
Use this field to select the age interval (days, months
or years) for this assay. Enter the number that
corresponds to the selected interval and press
ENTER. The entry results in an error if the
compensated test mode is specified.
FORMULA INPUT ERRORS
1 Operators are specified consecutively: [* /]
2 Test codes are placed consecutively: [<1><2>]
3 Numbers are placed consecutively: [10 200]
4 Numeric value and test code are placed
consecutively: [8<10>]
5 A negative value following an operator is not
enclosed in parentheses: [<1> / -2]
6 Formula begins with an operator: [*10.0;]
7 Formula ends with an operator: [10 +;]
8 Left parenthesis follows a test code: [<40>(]
9 A channel number is given after a right
parenthesis: [)<26>]
10 An incomplete expression is enclosed in
parentheses: [(10 *)]
11 Brackets and parentheses are not used properly:
[ )( )( ]
12 Angle brackets are used improperly: [<9,12>]
13 Brackets or parentheses are not paired properly:
[(-12,0/<19>)]
2 141
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
expected value lower limit for males in the specified
age group (-99999 to 999999) and press ENTER. The
decimal placement of this entry determines the
decimal placement of the reported serum result.
Repeat for the expected value upper limit. The entry
results in an error if the compensated test mode is
specified.
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
expected value lower limit for females in the specified
Repeat for the expected value upper limit. The entry
results in an error if the compensated test mode is
specified.
Expected Value <Urine>
[ ] - [ ]
These fields are used to enter the lower limit and upper
limit of the expected value for urine samples. Enter the
expected value lower limit (-99999 to 999999) and
press ENTER. The decimal placement of this entry
determines the decimal placement of the reported
urine result. Repeat for the expected value upper limit.
The entry results in an error if the compensated test
mode is specified.
NOTE
Any result outside the expected value limits for any
class or age group will be flagged with H or L on the
printout next to the result.
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to report results in the qualitative
mode. When qualitative is selected, the analyzer
reports results using characters defined in these
fields. Numerical results also can be reported.
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 : Serum/Plasma 2 : Urine 3 : Serum/
Plasma & Urine 0 : Inactivate : ENTER
Use this field to specify the class of the test using the
qualitative display. Enter the number that
corresponds to the selected class and press ENTER.
mode is specified.
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Input Quantitative Value -99999 To 999999 : ENTER
Use this field to specify the upper limit of the
measured concentration for qualitative display. Enter
the upper limit (-99999 to 999999) and press ENTER.
mode is specified.
2 142
Qualitative [ ]
(1) [ ] [ ]
Use this field to specify the characters that will print on
the patient report. Up to six characters, such as
and ++, or Slight, Mod, and Gross, can be entered.
Enter the appropriate character(s) and press ENTER.
Leaving this field blank by pressing SPACEBAR
ENTER results in the numeric result printing instead of
a test message. The entry results in an error if the
compensated test mode is specified.
2 143
2.48 Parameter Job Print Order
2.48.1 Introduction
Use the PRINT ORDER display to assign the report
print priority for each test. This screen can be used
to custom design patient reports. If no entries are
made on this screen, the print order defaults to the
test key number. The test key numbers are displayed
in parentheses. Tests that have been assigned a test
key number are automatically displayed beside the
test key number. The assigned print order number is
displayed after the short test name. Perform a
parameter write following any changes to the PRINT
ORDER screen.
2.48.2 Displaying the PRINT
ORDER Screen
JOB MENU. Press 4 ENTER to display the PRINT
ORDER screen.
2.48.3 Example of the PRINT
ORDER Screen
Figure 2-63 is an example of the PRINT ORDER
screen.
Figure 2-63: PRINT ORDER Screen
2.48.4 PRINT ORDER Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each PRINT ORDER field and prompt is explained
below.
Test [ ]
Use this field to select the test to which you want to
assign a print order. Enter the test key number or
press the test key for the test (input range: 1-60 or
test key) and press ENTER.
2.48 Parameter Job - - Print Order
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Print Order
Test
Order
[ ]
[ ]
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
( 1)
( 2)
( 3)
( 4)
( 5)
( 6)
( 7)
( 8)
( 9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
THEO
(31)
(32)
(33)
(34)
(35)
(36)
(37)
(38)
(39)
(40)
(41)
(42)
(43)
(44)
(45)
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
(46)
(47)
(48)
(49)
(50)
(51)
(52)
(53)
(54)
(55)
(56)
(57)
(58)
(59)
(60)
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
Na
K
Cl
LIP
HEMO
ICTER
A/G
UN/CR
CAL05
CAL06
CAL07
CAL08
(16)
(17)
(18)
(19)
(20)
(21)
(22)
(23)
(24)
(25)
(26)
(27)
(28)
(29)
(30)
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
ALB
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
MG
REF
Alarm
2 144
Order [ ]
Specify Print Order: 1 to 72 (0: Do Not Print) : ENTER
Use this field to define the print order. Enter the print
order and press ENTER. To remove a test from the
print order, press 0 Do Not Print ENTER.
Each test must be assigned a position in the print
order if results for that test are to be printed. Also, if
two tests are assigned the same print order, results
will print only for the test with the higher test key
number.
NOTE
You may wish to assign a 0 print order to all unused
test codes to eliminate duplicates.
2.48 Parameter Job - - Print Order
2 145
2.49 Parameter Job - - Report
Format
2.49.1 Introduction
Use the REPORT FORMAT screen to customize the
format of the patient report printout. For examples of
patient reports, refer to Sections 2.72 and 2.73.
Perform a parameter write to save any changes made
on the REPORT FORMAT screen to the system disk.
2.49.2 Displaying the REPORT
FORMAT Screen
JOB MENU. Press 5 ENTER to display the REPORT
FORMAT screen.
2.49.3 Example of the REPORT
FORMAT Screen
Figure 2-64 is an example of the REPORT FORMAT
screen.
Figure 2-64: REPORT FORMAT Screen
2.49.4 REPORT FORMAT Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each REPORT FORMAT field and prompt is explained
below.
Reports/Page [ ]
Choose Number of Patient Reports per Page: 1:One
2:Two : ENTER
Use this field to define the number of reports printed
on one page. The printer can print one report per page
or two reports, side by side, per page. Press 1 ENTER
to print one report per page. Press 2 ENTER to print
two reports per page.
2.49 Parameter Job - - Report Format
5
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
5 Report Format
Choose Number of Patient Reports per Page: 1:One 2:Two : ENTER
Reports/Page
Page Length
Title
Print
Draw
Sample No.
Sample Type
ID
Test
Results
Unit of Measure
Exp. Value
Remarks
[ One ]
[ 66 ]
Title [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
BOEHRINGER MANNHEIM
Char Line Column Char Line Column
40
8
5
8
5
10
6
13
22
8
6
17
6
1
4
4
9
10
5
6
4
1
5
30
25
20
15
10
8
7
6
7
8
9
10
14
14
49
49
49
49
49
22
47
56
14
14
14
14
14
2
29
39
49
69
Sex
Age
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY :
Print Example [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
2 146
CAUTION
Prior to making changes to this screen, use the
COPY key to make a record of the entries.
Page Length [ ]
Input Number of Lines per Page:5 to 72 : ENTER
Use this field to enter the number of lines in each
report. Normal 8 1/2 by 11 inch paper is 66 lines. Enter
the length of the report (input range: 5 - 72), then press
ENTER.
Title [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Use this field to enter the title of the report. The report
title can be up to three lines with a maximum of 40
characters per line. Enter each line of the report title
and press ENTER.
NOTE
The maximum length of the character field (CHAR) is
set and cannot be edited. However, you do not have
to use the maximum characters available. The line
and column entries are user definable.
Line Column
Title [ ] [ ]
Input Line Number for Title: 1 to 72 : ENTER
Start Column:Single Reports 1 to 80, Two Reports 1 to
40 (0:Do Not Print) : ENTER
Use these fields to choose the line where the title will
print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the title will print and
press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the title will
begin printing and press ENTER. Press 0 No Print
ENTER to choose not to print the title.
Line Column
Print Date [ ] [ ]
Input Line Number: 1 to 72 : ENTER
Use these fields to choose the line where the report
print date will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the print date will
print and press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the print date
will begin printing and press ENTER. Press 0 No Print
ENTER to choose not to print the print date.
Line Column
Print Time [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the report
print time will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the print time will
Enter the number of the column where the print time
ENTER to choose not to print the print time.
2 147
Line Column
Draw Date [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the draw date
will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the draw date will
Enter the number of the column where the draw date
ENTER to choose not to print the draw date.
Line Column
Draw Time [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the draw time
Enter the number of the line where the draw time will
Enter the number of the column where the draw time
will begin printing; press ENTER. Press 0 No Print
ENTER to choose not to print the draw time.
Line Column
Sample No. [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the sample
number will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the sample number
will print and press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the sample
number will begin printing and press ENTER. Press 0
No Print ENTER to choose not to print the sample
number.
Line Column
Sample Type [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the sample
type will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the sample type will
Enter the number of the column where the sample
type will begin printing and press ENTER. Press 0 No
Print ENTER to choose not to print the sample type.
2 148
Line Column
ID [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the patient
ID number will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the patient ID
number will print and press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the patient ID
number will begin printing and press ENTER. Press 0
No Print ENTER to choose not to print the ID.
Line Column
Sex [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the patients
sex will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the patients sex will
Enter the number of the column where the patients
sex will begin printing and press ENTER. Press 0 No
Print ENTER to choose not to print the sex.
Line Column
Age [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the patients
age will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the patients age will
Enter the number of the column where the age will
ENTER to choose not to print the age.
NOTE
The next five fields are operator definable through the
SYSTEM PARAMETER screen and may appear
differently in your software.
Line Column
Name [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the name where the
comment will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the name will print
and press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the name will
ENTER to choose not to print the name.
2 149
Line Column
Location [ ] [ ]
location will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the patient location
will print and press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the location will
ENTER to choose not to print the patient location.
Line Column
Physician [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the
physicians name will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the physicians
name will print and press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the physician
ENTER to choose not to print the physicians name.
Line Column
Patient ID [ ] [ ]
ID will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the patient ID will
Enter the number of the column where the patient ID
will begin printing; press ENTER. Press 0 No Print
ENTER to choose not to print the patient ID.
Line Column
Drawn By: [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to choose the line where the drawn by
information will print on the report.
Enter the number of the line where the drawn by
information will print and press ENTER.
Enter the number of the column where the drawn by
information will begin printing and press ENTER.
Press 0 No Print ENTER to choose not to print the
drawn by information.
2 150
Column
Test [ ]
Use this field to choose the column where the test
name will print on the report.
Enter the number of the column where the test name
ENTER to choose not to print the test name.
Column
Results [ ]
Use this field to choose the column where the test
result will print on the report.
Enter the number of the column where the test result
ENTER to choose not to print the test result.
Column
Unit of Measure [ ]
Use this field to choose the column where the unit of
measure will print on the report.
Enter the number of the column where the unit of
measure will begin printing and press ENTER. Press
0 No Print ENTER to choose not to print the unit of
measure.
Column
Exp. Value [ ]
Use this field to choose the column where the
expected values will print on the report.
Enter the number of the column where the expected
values will begin printing and press ENTER. Press 0
No Print ENTER to choose not to print the expected
value.
Column
Remarks [ ]
Use this field to choose the column where the remarks
Enter the number of the column where the remarks will
ENTER to choose not to print the remarks.
Print Example [ ]
Input 1:To Print Example : ENTER
Use this field to print an example of your report format.
Press 1 To Print Example ENTER.
2 151
2.50 Parameter Job - - Control
Test Selection
2.50.1 Introduction
The CONTROL TEST SELECTION screen is used to
request and confirm test selections for each control
level. Information about masking is displayed in the
keyboard matrix on the lower portion of the screen.
Up to eight control levels can be defined.
2.50.2 Displaying the CONTROL
TEST SELECTION Screen
JOB MENU. Press 6 ENTER to display the CONTROL
2.50.3 Example of the CONTROL TEST
SELECTION Screen
Figure 2-65 is an example of the CONTROL TEST
SELECTION screen.
Figure 2-65: CONTROL TEST SELECTION Screen
2.50.4 CONTROL TEST SELECTION
Each CONTROL TEST SELECTION field and prompt
is explained below.
Control [ ]
Use this field to specify the control level for which you
want to make test selections. Enter the appropriate
control number (1 - 8) and press ENTER. The name
assigned to the specified control level on the
CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen will appear in the
field.
2.50 Parameter Job - - Control Test Selection
6
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
6 Control Test Selection
Select Tests via Keyboard (A - L) : ENTER
Control
Tests
S. Type
[ ]
[ - ]
PTN-81
Serum
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
CA TRIG UA ALB/P TP PHOS CREA CHOL
U/CSF
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
2 152
Tests [ ]
Use this field to enter test selections for the specified
control level. Press the appropriate test selection
key(s) or profile key(s). After a control test selection
is made, the corresponding key(s) will highlight in
reverse video on the keyboard matrix. Control test
selections are stored in battery backed C-RAM.
S. Type
This field displays the sample type assigned to this
control level on the CONTROL VALUE SETTING
screen. No operator entry is allowed in this field.
NOTE
In addition to controls automatically initiated by the
911 Analyzer, supplemental controls can be selected
at any time by programming the controls as Stat
samples. this is done by loading the control materials
in positions 71 through 78 on the sample disk. These
positions correspond to disk or control positions
labelled C1 through C8 (control levels 1 through 8) on
the sample disk. The control value check uses the
MEAN 2 SD rule. Acutal QC ranges print on the
report. (The Expected Values Default on page 1 of the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen must be set to Yes.)
Review the control data by entering the appropriate
Stat sequence number on the DATA REVIEW screen.
The results are not transferred to the 911 QC file, but
results are stored on the data disk as a Stat result and
transmitted to the host.
2.50 Parameter Job - - Control Test Selection
2 153
2.51 Parameter Job - - Control
Value Setting
2.51.1 Introduction
Use the CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen to input
the target mean and SD values for each test on a
selected control level. Each control sample type
registered for Controls 1 through 8 are displayed.
Perform a parameter write to record any changes to
the CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen on the
system disk.
2.51.2 Displaying the CONTROL
VALUE SETTING Screen
JOB MENU. Press 7 ENTER to display the CONTROL
VALUE SETTING screen.
The mean values and SD values can be displayed by
pressing the PAGE CONTINUE key.
2.51.3 Example of the CONTROL
VALUE SETTING Screen
Figure 2-66 is an example of the CONTROL VALUE
SETTING screen.
Figure 2-66: CONTROL VALUE SETTING Screen
2.51.4 CONTROL VALUE SETTING
Each CONTROL VALUE SETTING field and prompt is
explained below.
Control No. [ ]
Use this field to select the control level for which target
values are displayed or entered. Enter the appropriate
control number and press ENTER. If a name has been
previously assigned to the control, the name appears
in this field.
2.51 Parameter Job - - Control Value Setting
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
7 Control Value Setting
12.5
10.5
3.0
2.0
4.5
2.5
4.0
0.10
0.075
1.5
3.5
2.0
0.35
7.5
0.25
0.2
0.2
0.15
0.10
12.5
10.5
3.0
2.0
4.5
2.5
4.0
0.10
0.075
1.5
3.5
2.0
0.35
7.5
0.25
0.2
0.2
0.15
0.10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
144
127
36
24
59
29
42
1.21
0.40
20.7
78
29.0
8.1
93
3.8
4.5
7.2
2.6
1.76
144
127
36
24
59
29
42
1.21
0.40
20.7
78
29.0
8.1
93
3.8
4.5
7.2
2.6
1.76
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
Control
Name
S.Type
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
PTN-81
PTN-81
Serum
Individual / Real Time Cumulative
Mean SD Mean SD
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
No. Name Sample Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Serum
Serum
Serum
Serum
Serum
Serum
Serum
Serum
PTN-81
PTA-157
Control3
Control4
Control5
Control6
Control7
Control8
7
ENTER
2 154
Cumulative
Mean SD
1Test Name [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to enter the cumulative mean and one
SD value for each test.
Cumulative
Mean SD
1Test Name [ ] [ ]
Input Value : ENTER
Use this field to define the mean value for each
specific test within each control level. Enter the mean
value (maximum of seven digits including decimal)
and press ENTER.
Cumulative
Mean SD
1Test Name [ ] [ ]
Input Value : ENTER
This field is used to define the SD value for each
specific test within each control level. Enter the 1 SD
value (maximum of seven digits including decimal) and
press ENTER.
No. Name Sample Type
1 Control Serum
As each control level is defined in the fields above, the
information is displayed on this chart. Any previously
entered information will be displayed.
NOTE
It is necessary to enter a new lot of QC materials only
on this screen. The 911 automatically updates all of
the other QC screens with this information.
2.51 Parameter Job - - Control Value Setting
Name [ ]
Input Name (Maximum 8 Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to assign a name to the selected control
level. Enter the name (maximum of eight characters)
and press ENTER.
Sample Type [ ]
Choose 1:Serum/Plasma 2:Urine : ENTER
Use this field to define the class for a particular control
level. Press 1 or 2 ENTER.
Individual/Real Time
Mean SD
1Test Name [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to enter the individual mean and one
SD value for each test.
Mean SD
1Test Name [ ] [ ]
Input Value : ENTER
Use this field to define the mean value for each
specific test within each control level. Enter the mean
value (maximum of seven digits including decimal)
and press ENTER.
Mean SD
1Test Name [ ] [ ]
Input Value : ENTER
This field is used to define the SD value for each
specific test within each control level. Enter the 1 SD
value (maximum of seven digits including decimal) and
press ENTER.
2 155
2.52 Parameter Job - - Special
Wash Programming
2.52.1 Introduction
Use the SPECIAL WASH PROGRAMMING screen to
program cell and probe washes for prevention of
potential carryover between tests. Refer to the
Random Access Programming section of the
chemistry application sheet for specific information on
special wash programming. Perform a parameter
write to save changes made to the SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING screen on the system disk.
2.52.2 Displaying the SPECIAL
WASH PROGRAMMING Screen
JOB MENU. Press 8 ENTER to display the SPECIAL
WASH PROGRAMMING screen.
2.52.3 Example of the SPECIAL
WASH PROGRAMMING Screen
Figure 2-67 is an example of the SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING screen.
Figure 2-67: SPECIAL WASH PROGRAMMING Screen
2.52.4 SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING Screen Fields
and Prompts
Each SPECIAL WASH PROGRAMMING field and
promptis explained below.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
It is possible to program up to 16 different reagent
probe wash functions. There are eight entry fields for
each reagent probe wash.
2.52 Parameter Job - - Special Wash Programming
8
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
8 Special Wash Programming
Input Program No. 1 to 8 : ENTER
Reagent Probe Wash Cell Wash
Sample Probe Wash
[1] [1] [CHOL ] [R1] [LIP ] [R1] [00317] [350] [1] [CHOL ] [00317] [250] - [00317] [100]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[ ] [ ] [ ]
1 CHOL R1 LIP R1 00317 350 CHOL 00317 250 - 00317 100
2 156
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Probe Wash Program No. 1 to 16 : ENTER
Use this field to assign a probe wash number to the
entry. Enter the reagent probe wash number (1 - 16)
and press ENTER.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Reagent Probe No. 1 or 2 (0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to designate which reagent probe will be
washed. Enter the reagent probe number and press
ENTER. Press 0 Cancel ENTER to cancel a probe
wash program.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Tests via Keyboard (99:All Tests) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the test key number of the
chemistry that causes potential carryover. Enter the
test key number (1 - 46) and press ENTER. Enter 99
All and press ENTER to choose all chemistries.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Choose Test Type: 1:R1 2:R2 3:R3 4:R4 : ENTER
Use this field to specify which reagent type causes
potential carryover. Enter the reagent type (1 - 4) and
press ENTER.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Tests via Keyboard (99:All Tests) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the affected test. Enter the
test key number of the affected test (1 - 46 / Test Key;
99 All) and press ENTER.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Choose Test Type: 1:R1 2:R2 3:R3 4:R4 : ENTER
Use this field to specify which reagent type is affected
by carryover. Enter the reagent type (1 - 4) and press
ENTER.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Bottle Code No. 00001 to 00400/0:Water :
ENTER
Use this field to specify the wash solution used for the
probe wash. Enter the bottle code for the wash
solution (00001 - 64999) and press ENTER.
Reagent Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Wash Solution Volume: 1 to 350 l (0:Cancel
Wash) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the volume of wash solution
used for the probe wash. Enter the volume of wash
solution (1 - 350) and press ENTER. Press 0 Cancel
Wash ENTER to cancel this reagent probe wash
programming.
Cell Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] -[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use the Cell Wash fields to program up to eight
different cell wash functions. Six fields are used in cell
wash programming.
Cell Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] -[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Program No. 1 To 8 : ENTER
Use this field to assign a program number to the cell
wash. Enter the number of the cell wash (1 - 8) and
press ENTER.
2 157
Cell Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] -[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Tests via Keyboard (0:Cancel Wash) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the test that causes potential
cell carryover. Enter the test key number of the
causal test (1 - 46 / Test Key) and press ENTER.
Press 0 Cancel ENTER to cancel the test choice.
Cell Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] -[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Bottle Code No. 00001 to 00400 / 0:Water :
ENTER
Use this field to specify the wash solution used for T1
in the cell wash program. Enter the wash solution
bottle code and press ENTER.
Cell Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] -[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Wash) : ENTER
used for T1 in the cell wash program. Enter the wash
solution volume and press ENTER.
Cell Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] -[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Bottle Code No. 00001 to 00400 / 0:Water :
ENTER
Use this field to specify the wash solution used for T2
in the cell wash program. Enter the wash solution
bottle code and press ENTER.
Cell Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ] -[ ] [ ] - [ ]
Wash) : ENTER
used for T2 in the cell wash program. Enter the wash
solution volume and press ENTER.
Sample Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Sample Probe Wash is used to program up to eight
different sample probe washes. There are three
entries for sample probe wash.
Sample Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Program No. 1 To 8 : ENTER
Use this field to assign a program number to the
sample probe wash. Enter the number of the probe
wash (1 - 8) and press ENTER.
Sample Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Select Tests via Keyboard (99:All 0:Cancel Wash) :
ENTER
Use this field to specify the test requiring the sample
probe wash. Enter the test key number (1 - 46) and
press ENTER. Enter 99 All and press ENTER to select
a sample probe wash for all tests. Press 0 Cancel
ENTER to cancel the sample probe wash.
2 158
Sample Probe Wash
[ ] [ ] [ ]
Input Wash Cup Position No. 1 to 3 : ENTER
Use this field to specify which cup position on the
sample disk the sample probe will aspirate wash
solution from. Enter the sample disk position number
(1 - 3, corresponding to wash cup position 1, 2, or 3)
and press ENTER.
NOTE
Throughput on your analyzer is affected by the number
of chemistries programmed for extra cell and probe
washes. If you have more than one causal chemistry
that interferes with a particular chemistry, you must
program a probe wash for each of the causal
chemistries. For more details consult your local BM
representative.
When both the probe wash and cell wash functions are
utilized, the cell wash function takes priority over the
probe wash. If the cell wash function timing is such
that it occurs simultaneously with ISE sampling, the
cell wash function occurs before the ISE sampling
cycle begins.
2 159
2.53 Parameter Job - - System
Parameters
2.53.1 Introduction
Use the SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen to assign
the system operating parameters for the analyzer.
Previously programmed information is displayed when
this screen is selected.
The SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen has two pages.
Page 1 is used to define comment line configuration
and host communication. Page 2 is used to define QC
calculations and change passwords. Perform a
parameter write to save changes made to the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen to the system disk.
2.53.2 Displaying the SYSTEM
2.53.3 Example of the SYSTEM
Figure 2-68 is an example of page 1 of the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen.
Figure 2-68: SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Screen - - Page 1
2.53 Parameter Job - - System Parameters
9
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
9 System Parameters
Choose 1:Serum 2:Urine 3:Plasma 4:Spinal Fluid : ENTER
Sample Type Communication Configuration
Comments
Exp. Value Default [Cancel]
1 [ ]
2 [ ]
Paper Length
Type Size
Date Order
Set Date
Sex
Age
1 [ ] [ ]
2 [ ] [ ]
3 [ ] [ ]
4 [ ] [ ]
5 [ ] [ ]
Speed
Parity
Data Bits
Stop Bits
End Code
Text Size
Retry Count
Retry Time
Results Only
Auto Rerun T/S
Manual Rerun T/S
Stat T/S
Comm. Log
9600
Even
7
2
ETX+CS+CR
256
6
5
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
Cancel
Serum
Urine
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY:
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
M
30 Y
[ ]
[ ]
11
Large
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
M/D/Y
92 yr 12 mo 01 day
11 hr 20 min
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
2 160
2.53.4 SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Page 1
Each SYSTEM PARAMETERS field and prompt is
explained below.
Sample Type 1 [ ]
2 [ ]
Choose 1:Serum/Plasma 2:Urine 3:Spinal Fluid
4:Other : ENTER
Use these fields to define the sample types. In the
first field, enter the number that corresponds to the
sample type you want defined as sample type 1 and
press ENTER. In the second field, enter the number
that corresponds to the sample type you want defined
as sample type 2 and press ENTER.
Comments 1 [ ] [ ]
2 [ ] [ ]
3 [ ] [ ]
4 [ ] [ ]
5 [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to define the name for each of the five
comment lines that appear on several screens such
as PATIENT TEST SELECTIONS, STAT TEST
SELECTIONS, and DATA REVIEW. The first field
defines the name that will show on your screens for
each comment line. The second field enables you to
select whether or not the line will display on your
screens.
The first comment line allows operator entry for up to
30 characters. The second comment line allows entry
for up to 25 characters. The third comment line allows
entry for up to 20 characters. The fourth comment line
allows entry for up to 15 characters and the fifth
comment line allows entry for up to 10 characters.
Comments 1 [ ] [ ]
Use this field to name the comment line. Enter the
appropriate name (maximum of 12 characters) and
press ENTER. Move the cursor to the first field of the
remaining comment lines. Use the same procedure to
name the four remaining comment lines.
Comments 1 [ ] [ ]
Choose 1:Activate 0:Inactivate : ENTER
Use this field to define whether comment lines 1
through 5 appear on the screens and on the patient
report printouts. To display each comment line, press
1 Activate ENTER. To choose not to display a
comment line, press 0 Inactivate ENTER. Move the
cursor to the second field of the remaining comment
lines. Use the same procedure to display the
remaining comment lines.
Exp. Value Default [ ]
Sex [ ]
Age [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to define the default patient sex and
age for printing of normal ranges on the report format.
You also can cancel the use or default patient sex and
age normal ranges.
Sex [ ]
Age [ ] [ ]
Use this field to activate the default sex and age
values. Press 1 Activate ENTER to use the default
ranges when no values are entered on the PATIENT
TEST SELECTION or STAT TEST SELECTION
screen. Press 0 Inactivate ENTER to choose not to
use the default values. If this field is inactive, QC
values will not print on the report format.
2 161
Sex [ ]
Age [ ] [ ]
Choose 1:Male 2:Female : ENTER
Use this field to specify the default sex of the patient.
Press 1 Male or 2 Female ENTER.
Sex [ ]
Age [ ] [ ]
Use this field to specify the numerical default value for
age. Enter the age (0 - 200) and press ENTER.
Sex [ ]
Age [ ] [ ]
Input Age Interval 1:Days 2:Months 3:Years : ENTER
Use this field to specify the age interval default setting.
Enter the number that corresponds to the chosen
interval and press ENTER.
Paper Length [ ]
Choose Paper Length 1:11 Inches 2:12 Inches :
ENTER
Use this field to define the paper length. Choose the
correct paper length and press ENTER. Standard
paper size is 8 1/2 x 11 .
Type Size [ ]
Choose 1:Large Print 2:Small Print : ENTER
Use this field to set the size of the hard copies that
print when the COPY key is pressed. Press 1 ENTER
for large (normal) and 2 ENTER for small.
Date Order [ ]
Choose 1:Day/Month/Year 2:Month/Day/Year
3:Year/Day/Month 4:Year/Month/Day : ENTER
Use this field to specify the order of the date display.
Enter the number that corresponds to the desired
order and press ENTER.
Set Date [ ] yr [ ] mo [ ] day
[ ] hr [ ] min
Use these fields to define the correct date and time to
be displayed on the screen.
[ ] hr [ ] min
Input Year (0 To 99) : ENTER
Use this field to define the year. Enter the appropriate
year and press ENTER.
[ ] hr [ ] min
Input Month (1 To 12) : ENTER
Use this field to define the month. Enter the
appropriate month and press ENTER.
[ ] hr [ ] min
Input Day (1 To 31) : ENTER
Use this field to define the day. Enter the appropriate
day and press ENTER.
2 162
[ ] hr [ ] min
Input Hour (0 To 23) : ENTER
Use this field to define the hour. Enter the appropriate
hour and press ENTER.
[ ] hr [ ] min
Input Minute (0 To 59) : ENTER
Use this field to define the minute. Enter the
appropriate minute and press ENTER.
Communication Configuration
Use these fields to define the parameters for
communication with a host computer. Use the START
CONDITIONS screen to select communication with
the host computer. Prior to making changes in these
field, discuss any changes to these fields with your
service representative.
Speed [ ]
Choose Baud Rate (BPS) 1:4800 2:9600 : ENTER
Use this field to specify the Baud rate. Press 1 4800
or 2 9600 ENTER.
Parity [ ]
Choose Parity 1:Even 2:Odd 0:No Parity : ENTER
Use this field to specify the parity. Enter the number
that corresponds to your choice and press ENTER.
Data Bits [ ]
Choose Data Bits 1:7 Bits 2:8 Bits : ENTER
Use this field to specify data bits. Enter the number
Stop Bits [ ]
Choose Stop Bits 1:1 Bits 2:2 Bits : ENTER
Use this field to specify stop bits. Enter the number
End Code [ ]
Choose 1:ETX + BCC 2:CR + LF +ETX 3:ETX 4:ETX +
CR + LF 5:ETX + CS + CR : ENTER
Use this field to specify the end code. Enter the
number that corresponds to your choice and press
ENTER.
Text Size [ ]
Choose Text Size 1:256 2:512 : ENTER
Use this field to specify text size. Enter the number
Retry Count [ ]
Input Number of Retries 1 to 99 : ENTER
Use this field to specify the retry count. Enter the
number of retries and press ENTER.
Retry Time [ ]
Input Retry Time 1 to 99 (sec.) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the retry interval. Enter the
retry interval and press ENTER.
Results Only [ ]
Use this field to specify transmission of measured
data results only (mono directional interface). Press
1 Activate ENTER.
2 163
Auto Rerun T/S [ ]
Use this field to specify test selection inquiry to the
host when the 911 is in the Automatic Rerun mode.
Press 1 Activate ENTER.
Manual Rerun T/S [ ]
Use this field to specify test selection inquiry to the
host when the 911 is in the manual rerun mode. Press
1 Activate ENTER.
Stat T/S [ ]
Use this field to specify Stat test selection inquiry.
Press 1 Activate ENTER. When this field is activated,
the operator need only define a position on the STAT
Comm. Log [ ]
Use thi s fi el d to speci fy traci ng of host
communication. Press 1 Activate ENTER.
2.53.5 Displaying the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS Screen- - Page 2
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen. Press the
GUIDANCE key to display page 2 of the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen.
Figure 2-69 is an example of page 2 of the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen.
Figure 2-69: SYSTEM PARAMETERS - - Page 2
9
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
9 System Parameters
Input Calibrator Position No. 1 to 34 : ENTER
Linearity Limit
Calibrator ID
ISE
Barcode Reader
Mean-R or X-R
QC Calculation
Range Plot
Reagent Check Level
Machine Cycle Time
Original ABS.
Edited Flag
Password
[ Yes ]
[ Yes ]
[ M-R ]
[Weighted ]
[ On ]
[ 30 ] [ Yes ]
[ 10 ]
[ Off ]
[ Yes ]
[ ] [ ] Open [ ]
( 4 - 8 ) [ 0 ]
( 9 - ) [ 10 ]
[ 21 ] [ 504 ] [ PCAL-79 ]
2 164
PARAMETERS Screen Fields
Each field and prompt on page 2 of the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen is explained below.
ISE [ ]
Choose 1 : Activate 0 : Inactivate : ENTER
Use this field to specify that the analyzer contains the
ISE module. Press 1 Activate ENTER. The CRT
prompt line will display Are You Sure?. Press 1
Continue ENTER.
Barcode Reader [ ]
Clear Test Selections? 1 : Yes 0 : No : ENTER
Use this field to turn the sample bar code reader on
and off. Press 1 Activate ENTER to turn on the bar
code reader. Press 0 Inactivate ENTER to turn off the
bar code reader. The CRT prompt line will display
Changing Current Option Will Clear Test Selections.
Press 1 Yes ENTER.
Mean-R or X-R[ ]
Choose Method of Calculating QC 1 : Mean-R
2 : X-R : ENTER
Use this field to specify whether the analyzer will
accumulate control data using the mean of the daily
points or an individual point. Press 1 ENTER to specify
Mean-R or 2 ENTER to specify X-R (individual point.).
QC Calculation [ ]
Choose Method of Accumulating QC 1:Individual
Points 2:Weighted : ENTER
Use this field to specify whether the analyzer will
calculate the SD with an equal value for each
accumulated control result or a weighted value for
each accumulated control result. Press 1 Individual
Points ENTER to specify equal value calculation.
Press 2 Weighted ENTER to specify weighted
calculation. This field applies when Mean-R is chosen
as the method of calculation.
Range Plot [ ]
Choose 1 : On 0 : Off : ENTER
Use this field to display the range chart on the
CUMULATIVE QC CHART screen. Press 1 On or 0 Off
ENTER.
Reagent Check Level [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to set the parameters for the reagent
level flags.
Input Level to Flag Remaining Tests 30 to 500 Tests
(0:Cancel) : ENTER
Use this field to set the number of tests left that will
signal a reagent level alarm and show yellow
highlighting on the REAGENT STATUS display. Enter
the number of tests and press ENTER.
Choose 1 Activate 0:Inactivate : ENTER
Use this field to activate the reagent level check flags.
Press 1 Activate ENTER. If this field is not activated,
reagent flags do not occur.
2 165
Analyzer Cycle Time [ ]
Input Analyzer Cycle Time 10 to 99 seconds : ENTER
This field is for use by Boehringer Mannheim
personnel only.
Original ABS. [ ]
Choose 1 : On 0 : Off : ENTER
Use this field to print out original absorbance data.
Press 1 On ENTER to print original absorbance data.
If original absorbance is selected, results are not
written to the data disk and calibration is not allowed.
Edited Flag [ ]
Use this field to instruct the analyzer to flag edited
results on the patient report. Press 1 Activate ENTER.
Password [ ] [ ] Open [ ]
Use these fields to open and close your password or
make changes to your password. The word Open
appears between the last two fields when the
password is open. This word Open does not appear
if the password is closed. All information displayed on
the PARAMETER JOB screens, with the exception of
the CONTROL VALUE SETTING and CONTROL
TEST SELECTION screens, is password protected.
Choose 1 : Turn Password On 0 : Turn Password
Off : ENTER
Use this field to activate your password. Press 1 Turn
Password On ENTER to activate the password.
Press 0 Turn Password Off ENTER to deactivate your
password.
Input Current Password (Maximum 4 characters) :
ENTER
Use this field to enter your current password. Entering
the password allows you to access password
protected fields and screens. Enter the password and
press ENTER.
Change Password To? (Maximum 4 characters) :
ENTER
Use this field to change your password. Enter the new
password and press ENTER. The password must be
opened in the previous field prior to changing it. Be
sure to keep your password recorded in a safe
place for reference.
Linearity Limit (4 - 8 ) [ ]
(9 - ) [ ]
Input Linearity Limit 1 to 100% (0:Inactivate) : ENTER
Input Linearity Limit 1 to 100% (0:Inactivate) : ENTER
Use these fields to specify the linearity check limit
values. Use the first field to enter the linearity check
limit in the four to eight point range. Enter the correct
value (0 to 100%) and press ENTER.
Use the second field to enter the linearity check limit
for nine or more points. Enter the correct value (0 to
100%) and press ENTER.
Calibrator ID [ ] [ ] [ ]
Use these fields to enter calibrator information.
2 166
Input Calibrator Position No. 1 to 34 : ENTER
Use this field to specify the calibrator position on the
sample disk. Enter the position number (1 - 34) and
press ENTER.
Input Calibrator Code No. 001 to 999 : ENTER
Use this field to assign the calibrator code number.
Enter the code number (001 - 999) and press ENTER.
Input Name (Maximum 8 Characters) : ENTER
Use this field to specify the appropriate calibrator
name. Enter the name (maximum of eight characters)
and press ENTER. This is the name that appears on
the CALIBRATOR LOAD LIST.
NOTE
Boehringer Mannheim recommends that you keep a
written record of the correct system parameters for
your analyzer. After you have all of the parameters
programmed, make a hard copy of each page of the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen. Press COPY to
make a copy of page 1 of the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen. Press GUIDANCE followed
by COPY to make a copy of page 2.
2 167
2.54 Parameter Job - - Channel
Assignment
2.54.1 Introduction
Use the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen to read
chemistry and serum index parameters from the
parameter disk. This screen also is used to assign
these parameters to a test key number. The
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen has two pages.
Page 1 displays a selected parameter block
consisting of 20 application codes. Page 2 displays
all of the current test key assignments.
2.54.2 Displaying the CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT Screen - - Page 1
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen.
2.54.3 Example of the CHANNEL
Figure 2-70 is an example of page 1 of the CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT screen.
Figure 2-70: CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Screen - - Page 1
2.54 Parameter Job - - Channel Assignment
1 0
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
10 Channel Assignment
Parameter Read
Channel Assignment
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
No. Code Test Comment No. Code Test Comment
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00000
00012
00013
00000
00000
00016
00000
00018
00019
00020
450011
450051
123960
AMP
450017
450037
450034
ALB/G
ALB/P
ALC
ALP/A
ALT
ALT/P
NH3
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
1
2 168
2.54.4 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Page 1
Each CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT field and prompt is
explained below.
Parameter Read [ ]
Input Parameter Block to Read 1 to 50 : ENTER
This field is used by your BM representative to specify
the parameter block to be read from Parameter disk.
A BM library diskette is available for customer's own
use. Please clear with your local representative.
Enter the correct parameter block (1 - 50) and press
ENTER. Each block contains 20 test code numbers.
The information contained in the selected parameter
block appears on the screen. This information
includes the application code number, test name, and
comments.
Channel Assignment [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to assign the parameters to a test key
on the 911.
Use this field to select the application code for the
chemistry parameters you want to assign to a test
key. Enter the correct test code (00001 - 00999) and
press ENTER.
Input Channel Assignment 1 to 46 : ENTER
Clear Data, Check Host Communication, Are You
Sure? 1:Yes 0:No : ENTER
Use this field to choose the test key to assign the
appropriate chemistry parameters. Enter the correct
test key (1 - 46) and press ENTER. The CRT prompt
line will display Cl ear QC, Check Host
Communication, or Are You Sure?. This reminds you
that the key could already be assigned to another set
of parameters. If you change the key assignment, QC
must be documented and deleted. If you are
communicating with a host computer, the host must
be programmed with the channel assignment change.
Press 1 Continue ENTER.
2.54.5 Displaying the CHANNEL
JOB MENU. Press 10 ENTER to display page 1
of the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen. Press
GUIDANCE to display page 2 of the CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT screen.
2 169
2.54.6 Example of the CHANNEL
Figure 2-71 is an example of page 2 of the CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT screen.
Figure 2-71: CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Screen - - Page 2
2.54.7 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
Page 2
The entry fields and prompts remain the same on page
2 of the CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT screen.
The information displayed on the screen lists all of the
test that have been assigned to a test key. The screen
displays the test key number, short test name,
application code, and comment for each assigned
test. Do not assign the same chemistry to more
than one test key or a duplicate bottle code
instrument alarm will result.
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
10 Channel Assignment
Parameter Read
Channel Assignment
[ ]
[ ] - [ ]
Ch. Test Code Comment Ch. Test Code Comment Ch. Test Code Comment
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
MG
00074
00115
00036
00018
00016
00093
00031
00051
00052
00053
00095
00040
00059
00158
00160
00013
00155
00133
00077
00072
00119
00322
00323
00324
00325
00326
00327
00328
00329
00330
00331
00332
00333
00334
00335
00336
00337
00338
00339
00340
00341
00342
00343
00344
00345
00346
450025
450022
450018
450017
AMP
450027
EPS
450021
450015
450014
GABA
GPO
450013
450051
450023
450024
Jaffe
450026
804551
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
2 170
2.55 Maintenance Job - - Menu
2.55.1 Introduction
Use the MAINTENANCE JOB MENU to request
maintenance and instrument self-diagnostic
functions. These functions can be requested only
when the instrument is in Stand-by. Press STOP to
interrupt many of these functions. Specific
procedures for performing the functions are
referenced where appropriate. The analyzer must be
in Stand-by to perform maintenance procedures.
2.55.2 Displaying the MAINTENANCE
JOB MENU
Press MAINTENANCE to display the MAINTENANCE
JOB MENU.
2.55.3 Example of the MAINTENANCE
JOB MENU
Figure 2-72 is an example of the MAINTENANCE JOB
MENU.
Figure 2-72: MAINTENANCE JOB MENU
2.55.4 MAINTENANCE JOB MENU
Fields and Prompts
Function No. [ ]
Function : ENTER
appears on the screen.
2.55 Maintenance Job - - Menu
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Maintenance Job Menu
1
2
3
4
Mechanisms Check
Support Function
Working Information
Function No. [ ]
2 171
2.56 Maintenance Job - -
2.56.1 Introduction
The ANALYZER MAINTENANCE display is used to
execute various maintenance procedures. The
instrument must be in Stand-by to execute
maintenance functions.
2.56.2 Displaying the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE Screen
ANALYZER MAINTENANCE screen.
2.56.3 Example of the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE Screen
Figure 2-73 is an example of the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
Figure 2-73: ANALYZER MAINTENANCE Screen
2.56 Maintenance Job - - Analyzer Maintenance
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Analyzer Maintenance
Choose 1:Wash Cells 2:Wash ISE 3:Wash Cells + ISE : ENTER
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
Parameter Read/Write
T/S Read/Write
Calib. Transfer/Lot No.
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
2 172
2.56.4 ANALYZER MAINTENANCE
Each ANALYZER MAINTENANCE field and screen
Wash [ ]
Choose 1 : Wash Cells 2 : Wash ISE 3 : Wash
Cells + ISE : ENTER
Use this field to specify what instrument components
you want to wash. Enter the number that corresponds
to the required wash and press ENTER. Choosing
1:Wash Cells dispenses full strength Hitergent from
position 33 in the R1 and R2 disks into the reaction
cells. This is diluted with DI water to a 2% solution.
This wash takes 25 minutes. Choosing 2:Wash ISE
delivers 10 slugs of NaOH to the ISE system and
takes 5 minutes. Choosing 3: Wash Cells + ISE
performs both washes and takes 25 minutes. If
number 2 or 3 is selected make sure the ISEs are
calibrated prior to running patient samples.
Water Tank [ ]
Input 1:Start : ENTER
Use this field to perform heat sterilization of the water
tank. Press 1 Start ENTER. This procedure takes 15
minutes and cannot be interrupted by pressing the
STOP key.
Photometer Check [ ]
Whenever the reaction bath water is replaced, a
photometer check must be performed to measure the
absorbance of the light path. This procedure also is
used as a daily check of the photometer lamp energy
and is described in Section 2.2.6. Press 1 Start
ENTER to perform a photometer check. This
procedure takes 2 minutes. All numbers must be less
than 13,000.
ISE Prime [ ]
Choose 1:Int. Ref. 2:DIL 3:Int. Ref. + DIL 4:KCl 5:Prime
All : ENTER
This entry field is used to control priming functions for
the ISE unit. Five types of priming are available:
1:Int. Ref.: This prime is used to prime the
Internal Reference Solution
(IRS) onl y. Reagent
consumption: 22.5 mL Internal
Reference Solution.
2:DIL: This prime is used to prime the
di l uent onl y. Reagent
consumption: 10.8 mL diluent.
3:Int. Ref. + DIL: This prime is used to prime the
IRS and the Diluent. Reagent
consumption: 22.5 mL IRS and
10.8 mL diluent.
4:KCl: This prime is used to prime KCl
only. Reagent consumption:
12.7 mL KCl.
5:Prime All: This prime is used to prime the
IRS, diluent, and KCl. Reagent
consumption: 22.5 mL IRS, 10.8
mL diluent, and 12.7 mL KCl.
Enter the number that corresponds to the prime
chosen and press ENTER. This procedure takes 5
minutes and should be followed by an ISE calibration
if new reagent was placed on the analyzer. An ISE
prime is also required following ISE maintenance
such as replacing the seals, cartridges or pinch valve
tubing.
2 173
Cell Blank [ ]
Choose 1:Initiate & Print Cell Blank 2:Reprint Cell
Blank : ENTER
Use this field to initiate a cell blank. When the
photometer lamp or reaction cells are replaced, a cell
blank must be performed. A cell blank also is
performed during weekly maintenance. Section 3.7
reviews the cell blank procedure. Press 1 Initiate &
Print Cell Blank ENTER to perform the cell blank.
Press 2 Reprint Cell Blank ENTER to reprint the most
recent Cell Blank report. This procedure takes 15
minutes and the results are stored in CRAM.
Air Purge [ ]
Use this field to purge air from the reagent and sample
pipetting system degassed water lines. This
procedure should be performed whenever the
instrument has been inactive for eight or more hours.
An ai r purge occurs automati cal l y duri ng
initialization. Press 1 Start ENTER to initiate the air
purge. This procedure takes 1 minute. An air purge
should be performed following maintenance on the
sample and reagent pipettors.
Inc. Water Exchange [ ]
The incubation (reaction) bath water is automatically
replaced with fresh water when the instrument is
powered ON and during Wake-up. If the instrument
remains ON for more than 24 hours, an Execute Inc.
Water Exchange alarm is issued, requesting that the
reaction bath water be exchanged. This procedure
takes 2.5 minutes.
Press 1 Start ENTER to initiate a reaction bath water
exchange. This procedure replaces the bath water.
Hitergent (6 mLs) is added by the reagent probes.
Perform a photometer check after the bath exchange.
Reset [ ]
Use this field to reset all mechanical components to
their home positions. Press 1 Start ENTER to perform
a reset. Thi s occurs automati cal l y duri ng
Initialization, when the START key is pressed and
during Wake-up. The procedure takes 15 seconds.
FD Utility [ ]
Choose 1 : Format FD in Drive 2 2 : Copy FD Drive 1
to Drive 2 3 : Format & Copy
Use this field to format and copy floppy disks.
To format a floppy disk (takes 1 minute):
Place the disk that is being formatted in drive 2.
Press 1 ENTER.
The CRT displays Are You Sure? (1:Yes
0:Cancel).
Press 1 Yes ENTER or 0 Cancel ENTER.
To copy a disk (takes 2 minutes):
Place the disk that is being copied in drive 1; place
the formatted blank disk in drive 2.
Press 1 ENTER.
The CRT displays Are You Sure? (1:Yes
0:Cancel).
Press 1 Yes ENTER or 0 Cancel ENTER.
A 3.5 inch double-sided, high density disk is good for
100,000 accesses. An instrument alarm, Clean FDD
Head, Replace FD, occurs a power ON when the disk
needs to be replaced. Press 3 Format & Copy ENTER
to format and copy the disk with one command. This
takes 3 minutes.
2 174
FD Drive Cleaning [ ]
Choose 1 : Clean Drive 1 2 : Clean Drive 2 : ENTER
This field allows you to clean the disk drives. Enter the
number of the drive to be cleaned (1 or 2) and press
ENTER. The CRT displays Are You Sure?. Press 1
Continue ENTER.
For additional information on the floppy disk drive
cleaning procedure, please refer to Section 3.15.
Parameter Read/Write [ ]
Choose 1 : Read From FD 2 : Write to FD : ENTER
This field is used to read operating parameters from the
system disk into instrument memory, or to write
operating parameter changes made in instrument
memory to the system disk.
A Parameter Write should be performed when:
any changes are made to any of the PARAMETER
JOB displays
changes are made to masking, start sample
number, or rerun status on START CONDITIONS
any pre-set K factor is entered in CALIBRATION
LIST display of Monitor Job
you are incrementing sequence numbers from one
day to the next and powering the analyzer OFF
each day
any test received a CALIB and SD LIM alarm during
calibration and subsequent controls are within
range
1. Press 1 ENTER to read operating parameters from
the system disk into instrument memory. The CRT
displays Are You Sure?.
2. Press 2 ENTER to write operating parameters from
instrument memory onto the system disk. The
CRT displays Are You Sure?.
The cursor advances to the next entry field upon
completion. Wait until the requested function is
completed before attempting the next keyboard entry.
T/S Read/Write [ ]
Choose 1 : Read From FD 2 : Write to FD
Use this field to read or write patient test selections,
control, and calibrator test selections to a floppy disk.
2 175
2.57 Maintenance Job - -
Mechanisms Check
2.57.1 Introduction
Use the MECHANISMS CHECK screen to perform
checks on various mechanical parts of the analyzer.
2.57.2 Displaying the MECHANISMS
CHECK Screen
JOB MENU. Press 2 ENTER
to display the MECHANISMS CHECK screen.
2.57.3 Example of the MECHANISMS
CHECK Screen
Figure 2-74 is an example of the MECHANISMS
CHECK screen.
Figure 2-74: MECHANISMS CHECK Screen
2.57 Maintenance Job - - Mechanisms Check
2
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Mechanisms Check
Choose 1:S. Probe (Horiz. ) 2:S. Probe (Vert. ) 3:Reagent Probes 4:Stirrers : ENTER
Probe Adjust
Mechanism Check
Barcode Reader Check
ISE Check
Printer Check
Alarm Log
Host Communication Log
Program Check
[ ]
H1 : 84.6 H2 : 42.4
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
2 176
2.57.4 MECHANISMS CHECK Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each MECHANISMS CHECK field and screen prompt
is explained below.
Probe Adjust [ ]
Choose 1 : S. Probe(Horiz.) 2 : S. Probe (Vert.)
3 : Reagent Probes 4 : Stirrers : ENTER
The sample and reagent probes should be checked for
proper alignment. From this field, the instrument can
be instructed to move probes to their dispense
positions at the reaction disk. Follow the procedure
outlined for probe adjust in Section 3.8. before
attempting a probe adjust.
Press 1 ENTER to adjust the horizontal positioning of
the sample probe. Press 2 ENTER to adjust the
vertical decent of the sample probe. Press 3 ENTER to
adjust the horizontal positioning of the reagent probes.
Press 4 ENTER to adjust the horizontal positioning of
the stirring mechanism.
Mechanism Check [ ]
Select the Number of Repetitions 1 To 9999 : ENTER
Use this field to execute a mechanism check. The
analyzer will move through a complete mechanical
cycle without processing a sample. This may be used
during troubleshooting. Enter the number of times
that the requested operation is to be performed (enter
a minimum of 10 times), then press ENTER. Input
range: 1 - 9999.
Barcode Reader Check [ ]
Use this field to execute a bar code check. The
procedure checks the sample bar code reader and
both reagent bar code readers. This may be used
during troubleshooting. Enter the number of times
that the requested operation is to be performed (input
a minimum of 10 times), then press ENTER. Input
range: 1 - 9999. This number reflects the number of
sample tubes placed on the outer ring of the sample
disk. A report will print out following the bar code
reader check.
ISE Check [ ]
Use this field to check the ISE system. The
electromotive force (EMF) of the internal standard
through the measuring cartridge is measured and
these measurements are printed out. The EMF of the
KCL through the reference cartridge is measured.
Enter the number of times that the EMF is to be
measured, then press ENTER. Input range: 1-9999.
Printer Check [ ]
Input 1 : Start : ENTER
The printer check is a diagnostic procedure performed
to verify that the instrument can send a full page of
characters to the printer, and that the printer can print
them.
Press 1 ENTER to initiate a printer check.
Alarm Log [ ] [ ]
Information about the instrument alarms is stored in
CRAM. This information can be selectively printed by
using the Alarm Log fields. The daily alarm log shows
the last 200 alarms. The cumulative alarm log shows
alarms from the last 256 days.
2 177
Alarm Log [ ] [ ]
Choose 1:Daily Alarm Log 2:Cumulative Alarm Log :
ENTER
Use this field to choose between a daily alarm log or
a cumulative alarm log. Enter the log you want to print
or clear and press ENTER. Thi s fi el d
is be used by Boehringer Mannheim service
personnel during troubleshooting.
Alarm Log [ ] [ ]
Choose 1 : Print Log 2 : Clear Log : ENTER
Use this field to print or clear the selected alarm log.
This field is used by Boehringer Mannheim service
personnel during troubleshooting. Press 1 Print Log
ENTER to print a copy of the alarm log. The CRT
displays Are You Sure?. Press 1 Continue ENTER.
Press 2 Clear Alarm Log ENTER to clear the alarm log.
The CRT displays Are You Sure?. Press 1 Continue
ENTER. Wait until the function is completed before
attempting another keyboard entry.
Host Communication Log [ ]
Choose 1:Print Log 2:Clear Log : ENTER
Information about the internal operation of the
instrument is logged (stored) on the System Disk.
Information can be selectively printed by using the
Host Communication Log field. This entry field is
used by Boehringer Mannheim service personnel
during troubleshooting. Press 1 Print Log ENTER to
print a copy of the communication log. The CRT
displays Are You Sure?. Press 1 Continue ENTER.
Press 2 Clear ENTER to clear the communication log.
The CRT displays Are You Sure?. Press 1 Continue
ENTER. Wait until the requested function is complete
before attempting the next keyboard entry. The
Comm. Log field on SYSTEM PARAMETERS must
be set to active to store this information for printing.
Program Check [ ]
Choose 1 : FD Check (Dr. 1) 2 : FD Check (Dr. 2)
3 : FD Check 4 : Memory Check 5 : All : ENTER
Use this field to request printed checks on either
floppy disk or ROM (Read Only Memory). Enter the
number that corresponds to the floppy disk you want
to check and press ENTER.
The memory check is a diagnostic procedure that is
performed if it becomes necessary to verify the
contents of the instrument ROM. Press 4 ENTER to
print the checksum of the instrument ROM.
Wait until the memory check is complete before
2 178
2.58 Maintenance Job Support
Functions
2.58.1 Introduction
Use the SUPPORT FUNCTIONS screen to run
precision checks and calculate correlations between
tests. The precision check is automatically printed out
and the results of the correlation calculation are
displayed and plotted on a graph.
2.58.2 Displaying the SUPPORT
FUNCTIONS Screen
JOB MENU. Press 3 ENTER
to display the SUPPORT FUNCTIONS screen.
2.58.3 Example of the SUPPORT
FUNCTIONS Screen
Figure 2-75: SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Screen
2.58 Maintenance Job - - Support Functions
3
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
3 Support Function
Precision Check
Correlation Analysis
X
Y
Execute
N
R
a
b
Syx
Mean
=
=
=
=
=
(X)
(Y)
9
0.990
1.458
-18.8
10.9
232.0
319.4
[ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
AMYL 1 10 0 100
REF 1 10 0 100
Test S.No. Scale
[ ]
Sample No. [ ] - [ ]
25 50 75 100
100
25
50
75
100
*
*
*
*
*
*
**
*
2 179
2.58.4 SUPPORT FUNCTIONS Screen
Fields and Prompts
Each SUPPORT FUNCTION field and screen prompt
is explained below.
Precision Check
S.No. [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to enter the range of routine samples
for which you want precision data calculated. The
instrument calculates the N, mean, range, maximum
and minimum values, SD, and CV (%). Test results
must be obtained and stored on the data disk before
a precision check can be performed. Results with
data flags are not included in calculations.
Enter the sequence number of the first sample in field
1 and press ENTER. Enter the sequence number of
the last sample in field 2 and press ENTER.
Wait until all test results print out before attempting
the next keyboard entry.
Test S.No. Scale
X [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Y [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to perform a correlation calculation
between consecutive data pairs. At least three data
pairs are needed, and up to 100 data pairs may be
entered. This calculation can be used for two
methods that are on board the system or it can be
used for correlations between two different systems or
another system to a method on board the 911.
NOTE
To perform a correlation analysis between two
different systems, you must first set up a separate
channel (test key number) in CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS. Make sure that the entry in the Data
Mode field is Manual. You then can edit results from
another system to this channel number on the DATA
REVIEW screen, using the Data Editing field.
Test S.No. Scale
X [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Y [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use this field to specify the test to be plotted on the
X axis. Enter the test key code and press ENTER.
Test S.No. Scale
X [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Y [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use these fields to specify the sample number range
for the test to be plotted on the X axis. Enter the first
sample number in field 2 and press ENTER. Enter the
last sample number in field 3 and press ENTER.
2 180
Test S.No. Scale
X [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Y [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Minimum Level : ENTER
Input Maximum Level : ENTER
Use these fields to specify the range of the scale for
the X axis. Enter the minimum level of the X-axis scale
in field 4 and press ENTER. Enter the maximum level
of the X-axis scale in field 5 and press ENTER.
Test S.No. Scale
X [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Y [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Use this field to specify the test to be plotted on the
Y axis. Enter the test key code and press ENTER.
Test S.No. Scale
X [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Y [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Sample No. 1 to 800:ENTER
Input Sample No. 1 to 800:ENTER
Use these fields to specify the sample number range
for the test to be plotted on the Y axis. Enter the first
sample number in field 7 and press ENTER. Enter the
last sample number in field 8 and press ENTER.
Test S.No. Scale
X [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Y [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
Input Minimum Level : ENTER
Input Maximum Level : ENTER
Use these fields to specify the range of the scale for
the Y-axis. Enter the minimum level of the Y-axis
scale in field 9 and press ENTER. Enter the maximum
level of the Y-axis scale in field 10 and press ENTER.
Execute [ ]
Input 1:To Execute : ENTER (Use COPY KEY for
Graph)
Use this field to execute the correlation calculation.
Press 1 Execute Correlation ENTER. Press COPY to
print the correlation graph.
N, R, a, b, Syx, MEAN (X and Y)
These numbers are calculated by the analyzer. No
operator entry is permitted in these fields.
N is the number of data pairs used in the calculation
R is the regression coefficient.
a is the slope of the line.
b is the y-intercept.
Syx is the standard error of the estimate or scatter.
Mean X is the mean of the X values.
Mean Y is the mean of the Y values.
2 181
2.59 Maintenance Job Working
Information
2.59.1 Introduction
Use the WORKING INFORMATION screen to track
information about the scheduled maintenance of your
analyzer.
2.59.2 Displaying the WORKING
INFORMATION Screen
Press MAINTENANCE to di spl ay the
MAINTENANCE JOB MENU. Press 4 ENTER to
display the WORKING INFORMATION screen.
2.59.3 Example of the WORKING
INFORMATION Screen
Figure 2-76 is an example of the WORKING
INFORMATION screen.
Figure 2-76: WORKING INFORMATION Screen
2.59.4 WORKING INFORMATION
Each WORKING INFORMATION field and screen
PHOTOMETRIC UPDATE
Cells XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Changed (OK<21days,??=21-30 days,
!!>30days) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the reaction cells
were changed. Press 1 ENTER and the date will
automatically change to the current date.
2.59 Maintenance Job - - Working Information
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 02/05/93 12:20
4 Working Information
PHOTOMETRIC UPDATE
Cells
Lamp
?? ! !
! !
! !
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
10/29/92
Input 1:If Changed (OK< 21 days, ??= 21-30 days, > 30 days) : ENTER
SEAL CHANGE
Serum
Reagent 1
Reagent 2
01/06/93
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
ISE SEAL PIECE
Internal STD
Dilution
Sipper
07/09/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
Syringe Filter 10/29/92
Pinch Valve Tubing
Syringe Filter 08/27/92 MONTHLY CLEANING
3-MONTH CLEANING
! !
! !
11/12/92
04/27/92
NaOH Reservoir
Maintenance Report
Cumulative Operations Report
02/04/93
??
:
Caution
! !
: Over
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
K
Cl
Electrode
Electrode
ISE UPDATE
Na
Ref.
Electrode
Electrode
2 182
Lamp XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Changed (OK<600hrs,??=600-750 hrs,
!!>750hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the photometer lamp
was changed. Press 1 ENTER and the date will
SEAL CHANGE
Serum XX/XX/XX [ ]
!!>500 hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the sample pipettor
seals were changed. Press 1 ENTER and the date will
Reagent 1 XX/XX/XX [ ]
!!>500 hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the reagent 1 pipettor
Reagent 2 XX/XX/XX [ ]
!!>500 hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the reagent 2 pipettor
Syringe Filter XX/XX/XX [ ]
!!>750 hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the inlet water filter
MONTHLY CLEANING XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:Initiate Program (OK<21days,??=21-30 days,
!!>30 days) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the date the monthly scheduled
maintenance was completed. Refer to the 911
Maintenance Log for a list of the monthly maintenance
items. Press 1 ENTER and the date will automatically
change to the current date.
3-MONTH CLEANING XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:Initiate Program (OK<81days,??=81-90 days,
!!>90 days) : ENTER
Use this field to enter the date quarterly scheduled
maintenance was completed. Refer to the 911
Maintenance Log for a list of the quarterly
maintenance items. Press 1 ENTER and the date will
NaOH Reservoir XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Refilled (OK<5days,??=5 - 7 days,
!!>7 days) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the NaOH reservoir
was filled with Multiclean. Press 1 ENTER and the
date will automatically change to the current date.
ISE UPDATE
Na Electrode XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Changed (0K <50 days,??=50-60 days,
!!>60 days) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the Na+ electrode
automatically change to the current date. Change the
cartridge when the slope is < 32.
2 183
K Electrode XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Changed (0K <50 days, ??=50-60 days,
!!>60 days) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the K+ electrode was
changed. Press 1 ENTER and the date will
cartridge when the slope is < 32.
Cl Electrode XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Changed (0K <25 days,??=25-30 days,
!!>30 days) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the Cl- electrode was
cartridge when the slope is > -34.9.
Ref. Electrode XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Electrode Changed (OK<140 days,??=140-
180 days, !!>180 days) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the reference
electrode was changed. Press 1 ENTER and the date
will automatically change to the current date.
ISE SEAL PIECE
Internal STD XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Seal Changed (OK<400 hrs,??=400-500
hrs, !!>500 hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the internal reference
pipettor seals were changed. Press 1 ENTER and the
date will automatically change to the current date.
Dilution XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Seal Changed (OK<400 hrs,??=400-500
Use this field to update the date the diluent pipettor
Sipper XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Seal Changed (OK<400 hrs, ??=400-500
Use this field to update the date the sipper pipettor
Pinch Valve Tubing XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Changed (OK<600 hrs, ??=600-750 hrs,
!!>750 hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the pinch valve tubing
Syringe Filter XX/XX/XX [ ]
Input 1:If Changed (OK<600 hrs,??=600-750 hrs,
!!>750 hrs) : ENTER
Use this field to update the date the syringe filter was
?? Caution
Two question marks (??) appear in yellow highlight in
front of the date as a caution to indicate that you
should prepare to perform this maintenance task.
!! Over
Two exclamation marks (!!) appear in red highlight in
front of the date to indicate that this maintenance
function is over due and needs to be performed.
2 184
Maintenance Report [ ]
Use this field to request a printout of the history of the
cleaning and replacement of parts for the last 10 times.
Press 1 ENTER to request the printout.
Cumulative Operations Report [ ]
Use this field to request a printout of the cumulative
information on routine operation. Press 1 ENTER to
request the printout.
2 185
2.60 Overview
2.60.1 Section Contents
Several reports are generated from the Boehringer
Mannheim/Hitachi 911 Analyzer. This section
contains examples of the available reports and briefly
discusses their content and use.
2.60.2 Report Table
The table below lists the reports available, and the
section where an example of each report is included.
2.60 Overview
2. REPORTS
Report Name
(Printout)
Request from
This Job
Request from
This Section
Section
Number
Reagent Status Routine Reagent
Status
2.61
Requisition List -
without BCR
Routine Patient Test
Selection
2.62
Requisition List -
with BCR
Routine Patient Test
Selection
2.63
Calibrator Load
List
Routine Calibration
Test
Selection
2.64
Rerun List Routine Rerun
Samples
2.65
Calibration Monitor Routine Start
Conditions
2.66
Individual QC
Monitor
QC Individual QC
Monitor
2.67
Individual QC List QC Individual QC
List
2.68
Cumulative QC
Monitor
QC Cumulative
QC Monitor
2.69
Report Name
(Printout)
Request from
This Job
Request from
This Section
Section
Number
Cumulative QC List QC Cumulative
QC List
2.70
Reaction Monitor Monitor Reaction
Monitor
2.71
Patient Reports--
Report Format
Routine Data Review 2.72
Patient Reports--
Short Format
Routine Data Review 2.73
Calibration Trace Monitor Calibration
Trace
2.74
Profiling List Parameter Profiling 2.75
Photometer Check Maintenance Analyzer
Maintenance
2.76
Cell Blank Maintenance Analyzer
Maintenance
2.77
Bar Code Reader
Check
Maintenance Mechanisms
Check
2.78
ISECheck Maintenance Mechanisms
Check
2.79
Printer Check Maintenance Mechanisms
Check
2.80
Daily Alarm Trace Maintenance Mechanisms
Check
2.81
Cumulative Alarm
Trace
Check
2.82
Host
Communication
Log
Check
2.83
Floppy Disk Check Maintenance Mechanisms
Check
2.84
Memory Check Maintenance Mechanisms
Check
2.85
Precision Check Maintenance Support
Function
2.86
Maintenance
Report
Maintenance Working
Information
2.87
Cumulative
Operations List
Maintenance Working
Information
2.88
Original
Absorbance
Parameter System
Parameters
2.89
PART C
2 186
2.61 Reagent Status
2.61.1 Introduction
The Reagent Status report is a printout of the
information shown on the REAGENT STATUS
screen. The test name, position, remaining tests, lot
number, and expiration date for all reagents
registered on board the analyzer are listed.
2.61.2 Printing the Reagent Status
Report
Press ROUTINE 1 ENTER to display the REAGENT
STATUS screen. Move the cursor to the Print field.
Press 1 ENTER to print the Reagent Status report.
2.61.3 Printing the Reagent Status
Report
Figure 2-77 is an example of the Reagent Status
report.
Figure 2-77: Reagent Status Report
2.61 Reagent Status
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
REAGENT STATUS 01/06/93 14:39
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/G
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
MG
INDEX
U/CSF
93
20
70
230
130
93
170
30
93
170
90
180
180
93
140
110
93
80
220
0
200
60
70
40
40
110
360
93
50
60
80
80
0
300
190
520
120
710
0
60
70
5
46
25
150
880
80
mL
mL
mL
mL
mL
*
mL
*
mL
mL
mL
ASSAY TYPE POS. TESTS SIZE LOT NO. SEQ.NO. APP CODE EXP.WK STAB
DIL
R1
R1
R3
R1
R3
DIL
R1
R3!
DIL
R1
R3
R1
R3
DIL
R1
R3
DIL
R1
R1
R1
R2
R1
R2
R1
R2
R1
R2
DIL
R1
R1
R3
R1
R1 ?
R2
R1
R2
R1
R2
R1
R1
R1
R2
W
W
W
R1
R1
R3
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
6
2
8
5
20
11
6
24
20
6
21
21
30
19
6
27
15
6
14
3
28
14
29
23
31
18
23
1
6
4
18
26
9
26
28
16
17
15
3
1
25
11
9
13
22
31
32
12
7
L
M
M
S
L
S
L
L
M
L
L
M
L
M
L
L
S
L
S
L
L
M
L
L
M
S
L
L
L
L
L
S
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
049902
048803
048803
048803
048800
048800
049902
048796
046444
049902
048795
046377
048791
048791
049902
046160
046160
049902
051700
048799
048799
048799
048794
048794
048793
048793
054004
054004
049902
046854
048792
048792
044831
048801
048801
048802
048802
048797
048797
00848
00499
00519
00161
00121
00928
00848
01355
00016
00848
00046
00001
00281
00079
00848
00014
00014
00848
13887
00216
00673
00378
00265
00238
00621
01527
00206
00085
00848
00003
00103
00513
00021
00513
00629
00308
00135
00720
00435
00023
00296
00506
02820
00506
00501
00700
01147
01916
045424
048804
048827
048827
049901
049901
049901
053152
053152
00311
00074
00074
000?4
00115
00115
00311
00036
00036
00311
00018
00018
00016
00016
00311
00093
00093
00311
00031
00053
00053
00053
00095
00095
00040
00040
00059
00059
00311
00158
00160
00160
00012
00155
00155
00133
00133
00077
00077
00072
00072
00119
00119
00317
00317
00317
00299
93/52
93/17
93/17
93/17
93/30
93/43
93/52
93/21
93/08
93/52
93/25
93/04
93/04
93/47
93/52
93/52
93/52
93/52
93/43
93/43
93/43
93/43
93/47
93/38
93/43
93/17
93/47
93/47
93/52
93/47
93/08
03/04
93/17
93/12
93/12
93/43
93/43
93/43
93/43
93/39
93/47
93/34
93/34
93/43
93/43
93/43
93/43
93/43
5
4
0
9
6
23
23
23
23
85
16
13
21
16
16
9
5
3
13
6
51
51
25
20
28
7
7
16
16
00171
00171
*
2 187
2.61.4 Explanation of the Reagent
Status Report
ASSAY
The abbreviated test name for each chemistry is
printed in this column. Only tests that are currently
on the analyzer are listed. A question mark (?) in this
column indicates parameters for this application code
are not entered.
TYPE
The reagent type: R1, R2, R3, R4, diluent, or wash
solution is printed in this column. An exclamation (!)
after this column indicates that fewer tests remain
than indicated in the Reagent Level Check field on the
SYSTEM PARAMETERS screen. (For diluents and
wash solutions less than 10 mL remains.) A question
mark (?) indicates that fewer than 10 tests remain in
the bottle. (For diluents and wash solutions, less than
1 mL remains.)
POS.
This column indicates which position the reagent
occupies on the analyzer. The first number indicates
whether the reagent is located on reagent disk 1 or
reagent disk 2. The second number indicates the
reagent disk position number 1 - 32. An asterisk (*)
following the disk position number indicates the
information is for a manually entered reagent. An
exclamation mark (!) following the disk position
number indicates that a manually entered reagent
was programmed to a position containing a full bar-
coded reagent. A question mark (?) following the disk
position number indicates that a bottle has been
placed on the wrong disk.
TESTS
This column lists the number of tests remaining for
each reagent in units of 10 tests. This number is
truncated to the lowest 10. For diluents and wash
solutions this number is mL remaining and is not
truncated.
SIZE
This column indicates the bottle size S (20 mL), M (50
mL), or L (100 mL) for each reagent.
LOT NO.
This column lists the lot number for each reagent.
SEQ. NO.
This column indicates the bottle number for the
reagent.
APP CODE
This column lists the application code for each
reagent.
EXP. WK
This column indicates the year and week the reagent
expires.
STAB
This column indicates the working reagent stability.
This is the number of remaining days before
expiration.
2.61 Reagent Status
2. REPORTS
2 188
2.62 Requisition List - - Without
Bar Code Reader
2.62.1 Introduction
The Requisition List is a printout of all tests selected
for each requested sample. This format of the
Requisition List is generated only by analyzers that
operate with the sample bar code reader turned OFF.
2.62.2 Printing the Requisition
List - - Without BarCode Reader
TEST SELECTION screen. Move the cursor to the
Print field. Enter the range of sample numbers and
press ENTER to print the Requisition List.
2.62.3 Example of the Requisition
List- Without Bar Code Reader
Figure 2-78 is an example of the Requisition List - -
Without Bar Code Reader.
Figure 2-78: Requisition List - - Without Bar
Code Reader
2.62 Requisition List - - Without Bar Code Reader
2. REPORTS
3
ENTER
S.NO. POS. ID 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
R001
R002*
R003
R004
R005
R006
R007
R008
R009
R010
R011
R012
R013
R014
0-01
0-02
0-03*
0-04
0-05
0-06
0-07
0-08
0-09
0-10
0-11
0-12
0-13
0-14
1234567890123
1234567890346
7475843725647
2347809872348
4758943627846
3478390128375
4758932703598
7082345798487
4558709502893
0983409094078
3820938704745
8374092850470
7029831490434
7039842798234
TEST COUNT
CHANNEL TEST QUANTITY CHANNEL TEST QUANTITY CHANNEL TEST QUANTITY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
11
0
11
13
13
8
13
1
7
4
1
10
4
5
1
0
0
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PHOS
CREAT
CHOL
MG
1
1
0
0
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
ISE
S.IND
NA
K
Cl
*--**+-*-I-+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*--**+-*---+-----+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
--*-*+-*-**+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-**I+-*D-*+-*I--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
--***+*--ID+-I***+---I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*-I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*-D-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-**-+-*--D+-*-I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**-*-+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
---**+**-I-+-*-D-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**-**+**---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
2 189
2.62.4 Explanation of the Requisition
List - Without Bar Code Reader
DATE and TIME
The date and time when the report is printed appears
in the upper right corner of the report.
S. NO.
This column displays the sample number as it was
specified on the Patient Test Selection display. An
asterisk (*) following the sample number indicates the
sample is a type 2 (urine) sample.
ROUTINE: SAMPLE NO. RXXX
RXXX: 0001-800 (routine sequence
number)
POS.
Two numbers are shown here: the sample disk
number and the sample cup position number
respectively (as shown above). These numbers are
entered on the Patient Test Selection display. An
asterisk (*) following the position number indicates
the sample was in a micro sample cup.
D: 0-9 (disk number)
PP: 01-50 (sample position number)
ID
The patient or sample identification number, a
maximum of 13 alphanumeric characters, is shown in
this column as entered on the PATIENT TEST
SELECTION screen.
TEST SELECTIONS ( 5 10 15 20 25 30
35 40 45 )
These columns indicate the tests that are selected for
each sample number. Tests are listed by channel
number (1-46). Channel 46 represents Na
+
, K
+
,
and Cl
-
.
An asterisk (*) below the channel number
indicates that the test is selected for the specified
sample.
A hyphen (-) indicates that the test is not selected.
The letter I indicates that an increased sample
volume has been selected for that test.
The letter D indicates that a decreased sample
volume has been selected for that test.
TEST COUNT
There are three columns that list the channel number,
test name, and a cumulative count of the number of
times each test is requested for the range of samples
included in the printout. S.IND represents serum
indexes.
2.62 Requisition List - - Without Bar Code Reader
2. REPORTS
2 190
2.63 Requisition List - With Bar
Code Reader
2.63.1 Introduction
The Requisition List is a printout of all tests selected
for each requested sample. This format of the
Requisition List is generated only by analyzers that
operate with the sample bar code reader turned on.
2.63.2 Printing the Requisition List - -
With Bar Code Reader
Print field. Enter the sample ID number you want to
begin the list with and press ENTER.
2.63.3 Example of the Requisition
List - - With Bar Code Reader
Figure 2-79 is an example of the Requisition List - -
With Bar Code Reader.
Figure 2-79: Requisition List - - With Bar Code
Reader
2.63 Requisition List - - With Bar Code Reader
2. REPORTS
3
ENTER
ID 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
* * 1234567890123
1234567890346
7475843725647
2347809872348
4758943627846
3478390128375
4758932703598
7082345798487
4558709502893
0983409094078
3820938704745
8374092850470
7029831490434
7039842798234
TEST COUNT
CHANNEL TEST QUANTITY CHANNEL TEST QUANTITY CHANNEL TEST QUANTITY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
11
0
11
13
13
8
13
1
7
4
1
10
4
5
1
0
0
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PHOS
CREAT
CHOL
MG
1
1
0
0
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
ISE
S.IND
NA
K
CL
*--**+-*-I-+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*--**+-*---+-----+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
--*-*+-*-**+--D--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-**I+-*D-*+-*I--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
--***+*--ID+-I***+---I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*-I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*-D-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-**-+-*--D+-*-I-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**-*-+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
---**+**-I-+-*-D-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**---+-*---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
*-***+**-**+**---+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
2 191
2.63.4 Explanation of the Requisition
List - - With Bar Code Reader
DATE and TIME
The date and time at which the report is printed
appears in the upper right corner of the report.
ID
The identification number is a maximum of 13
alphanumeric characters as entered on the PATIENT
TEST SELECTION screen or downloaded from the
host computer. This number denotes the bar code
number. Asterisks may appear to the left of the ID
number in two columns. An asterisk in the first
column indicates the sample was a type 2 (urine)
sample. An asterisk in the second column indicates
a micro sample cup was used.
35 40 45 )
each sample number. Tests are listed by channel
number (1-46). Channel 47 represents Na
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
.
An asterisk (*) below the channel number indicates
that the test is selected for the specified sample. A
hyphen (-) indicates that the test is not selected. The
letter I indicates that an increased sample volume has
been selected for that test. The letter D indicates that
a decreased sample volume has been selected for
that test.
TEST COUNT
included in the printout. S. IND represents Serum
Indexes.
2.63 Requisition List - - With Bar Code Reader
2. REPORTS
2 192
2.64 Calibrator Load List
2.64.1 Introduction
The Calibrator Load List gives a detailed description of
where to physically place standards on the sample
tray.
2.64.2 Printing the Calibrator Load List
Press ROUTINE 2 ENTER to di spl ay the
CALIBRATION TEST SELECTION screen. Press
GUIDANCE to display the Time Out Status listing.
Move the cursor to the Calibrator List field and select
the type of Calibrator Load List you want to print and
press ENTER.
2.64.3 Example of the Calibrator
Load List
Figure 2-80 is an example of the Calibrator Load List.
Figure 2-80: Calibration Load List
2.64.4 Explanation of the Calibrator
Load List
DATE and TIME
at the upper right corner of the report.
POS. NO.
Position of each standard on the sample disk. This
information is specified on the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen.
2. REPORTS
2
ENTER
CO2
K
K
GLU
K
CA
Cl
Cl
CA
Cl
TRIG
TRIG
UA
UA
CALIBRATOR LOAD LIST 01/06/93 14:39
POS.NO. CALIB.NAME - - - - - - - - - - - - - TEST NAME - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
[ START UP ]
SALINE CK LD AST ALT ALP/A GGT AMYL TBILI DBILI S18
S19
S20
S21
(I)
(I)
(I)
(I)
ISE-LO
ISE HI
PCAL-79
GLU
Na
Na
TBILI*
Na
ALB/P
ALB/P
TP
TP
PHOS
PHOS
CREA
CREA
2 193
CALIB.NAME
This lists the name of each calibrator as defined on the
TEST NAME
Up to 46 tests can be listed for each calibrator (except
ISEs). An asterisk (*) following the test name
indicates the test is masked.
2. REPORTS
2 194
2.65 Rerun List
2.65.1 Introduction
This Rerun List shows the sample and tests on the
rerun schedule. Tests are automatically placed on
the rerun schedule according to the parameters
programmed for each test. The reruns may be done
automatically or in a batch mode.
2.65.2 Printing the Rerun List
Press ROUTINE 7 ENTER to display the RERUN
SAMPLES screen. Move the cursor to the Print field.
Enter sample numbers for the range of samples you
want to print on the Rerun List and press ENTER.
2.65.3 Example of the Rerun List
Figure 2-81 is an example of the Rerun List.
Figure 2-81: Rerun List
2.65.4 Explanation of the Rerun List
DATE and TIME
in the upper right corner of the report.
S. NO.
The first column represents the sample number. This
number is preceded by an R to denote a rerun. An
asterisk (*) following this number indicates this was a
urine (type 2) sample.
2.65 Rerun List
2. REPORTS
7
ENTER
RERUN LIST 01/06/93 14:39
S.NO. POS. ID 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
R001
R002
R003
R004
R005
R007*
R008*
R010*
R011
R012
R013
R015
0-01
0-02
0-03
0-04
0-05
0-07
0-08
0-10
0-11
0-12
0-13
0-15
TEST COUNT
CHANNEL TEST COUNT CHANNEL TEST COUNT CHANNEL TEST COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP
GGT
AMYL
T.BIL
D.BIL
BUN
GLU
CO2
CA
TRIG
URIC
ALB
T.P.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
11
0
0
0
1
1
1
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PHOS
CREAT
CHOL
MG
Tst22
Tst23
Tst24
Tst25
Tst26
Tst27
Tst28
Tst29
Tst30
Tst31
Tst32
Tst33
Tst34
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
ISE
S.IND
Tst35
Tst36
Tst37
Tst38
Tst39
Tst40
Tst41
Tst42
Tst43
Tst44
Tst45
Tst46
NA
K
Cl
-----+-----+D---*+***--+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+-----+---*-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+----*+D----+---*-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
-----+-----+D----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
2 195
POS.
Two numbers are shown here: the sample disk
number (0-9) and the sample position number,
respectively. These numbers correspond to those
entered on the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen.
An asterisk (*) following this number indicates this
sample was in a micro cup.
ID
This is the sample identification number, a maximum
of 13 alphanumeric characters, which is entered on
the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen. The ID
represents the bar code number for those instruments
using the bar code reader accessory.
35 40 45 )
each sample number rerun. Tests are listed by
channel number (1-46). Channel 46 represents Na
+
,
K
+
, and Cl
-
. An asterisk (*) below the channel number
indicates that the test is selected for rerun. A hyphen
(-) indicates that the test is not selected for rerun. The
letter I indicates that an increased sample volume has
been selected for that rerun. The letter D indicates
that a decreased sample volume has been selected
for that rerun.
TEST COUNT
included in the printout.
2.65 Rerun List
2. REPORTS
2 196
2.66 Calibration Monitor
2.66.1 Introduction
The Boehringer Mannheim/Hitachi 911 Analyzer
automatically issues a Calibration Monitor report
during calibration when a printout is requested in the
Calibration Print field on the START CONDITIONS
screen. This report shows the results of the latest
calibrations, including the ISE calibration.
2.66.2 Printing the Calibration Monitor
Report
Press ROUTINE 4 ENTER to display the START
Calibration Print field and press 1 ENTER to request
that a real time Calibration Monitor report prints
following calibration.
2.66.3 Example of the Calibration
Monitor Report
Figure 2-82 is an example of the Calibration Monitor
report.
Figure 2-82: Calibration Monitor Report
2.66.4 Explanation of the Calibration
Monitor Report
DATE and TIME
appears at the upper right corner of the report.
ISE Calibration Information
TEST
This column lists the name of each ISE test.
2. REPORTS
4
ENTER
CALIBRATION MONITOR 01/06/93 14:39
CH TEST ---- S1 ---- ---- S2 ---- ---- S3 ---- ---- S4 ---- ---- S5 ---- ---- S6 ----
TEST IS. EMF S1 EMF S2 EMF S3 EMF SLOPE IS.CONC. S3 CONC. C.VALUE
10
20
13
19
17405
17323
9104
9168
1184
1174
BUN
CHOL
CA
CALIB
CREA
Na
K
Cl
-32.6
-37.3
-131.1
-36.8
-51.1
136.7
-29.3
-29.3
128.3
-23.2
-39.3
131.9
60.0
59.2
-47.7
141
5.1
105
138
4.7
101
-2
0.0
0
-17
-20
287
285
3284
3288
8
7
17599
17532
287
306
3714
3891
437
438
-898
-891
9549
9563
209
206
2 197
IS. EMF
This column lists the electromotive force (EMF) or
electrical potential generated by the internal
reference solution at the specified electrolyte
cartridge. The value printed is in millivolts (mV).
S1 EMF
This column lists the electrical potential (mV)
generated by the LOW standard at the specified
electrolyte cartridge.
S2 EMF
generated by the HIGH standard at the specified
electrolyte cartridge.
S3 EMF
generated by the calibrator/compensator at the
specified electrolyte cartridge.
SLOPE
This column lists the sensitivity of the specified
electrolyte cartridge. The slope should gradually
decrease with time, reflecting the aging of
the cartridge.
When the slope falls outside of the optimal slope
range values as presented below, an ISE SLOPE
warning is issued. The SLOPE warning is issued if the
slope falls between the optimal and critical ranges.
When a SLOPE warning is seen, check the control
values. If the controls are within range, continue
operation until the next convenient time to replace the
cartridge.
When an ISE SLOPE ERROR:REPLACE
CARTRIDE alarm is seen, replace the cartridge
immediately and recalibrate.
IS CONC.
This column lists the measured concentration of the
internal reference solution (mmol/L) determined
during calibration.
S3 CONC.
This column lists the measured concentration of the
cal i brator/compensator determi ned duri ng
calibration.
C. VALUE
This column lists the compensation factor (mmol/L)
determined during calibration. This factor is the
difference between the measured concentration of
STD 3 and the actual value of STD 3. This value is
added to all measured control and patient values.
2. REPORTS
CARTRIDGE OPTIMAL
ISE
SLOPE
ISE
PREPARE
CRITICAL
ISE
SLOPE
Sodium 38.0 to
68.0
> 32 < 38 32.0
Potassium 38.0 to
68.0
> 32 < 38 32.0
Chloride -30.0 to
-68.0
>-25 <-30 -25.0
2 198
Photometric Chemistry Calibration Information
CH
The channel number is listed in the left column.
Calibration data are printed in order of channel number.
TEST
The short test name (specified on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen) is printed to the right of the
channel number.
S1 through S6
Standard levels 1-6 are represented in separate
columns across the page.
RESULTS
Duplicate absorbance measurement values are
printed, one below the other. Further information on
assay type and calibration method can be found in
Chapter 5, Theory.
DATA ALARMS
Any data alarm that affects an entire test is printed two
rows below the test name. Some alarms include: SD
LIM, CAL?, and CALIB. See Section 4.5, Data
Alarms, for information about these alarms.
Data alarms that affect individual standard
measurements are printed below the absorbance for
the affected standard. When data alarms occur for
both measurements, the alarm for the first is listed.
2. REPORTS
2 199
2.67 Individual QC Monitor
2.67.1 Introduction
The Individual QC Monitor report lists the control data
summary for a specified test and control level. Use
the INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR screen to select the
test and control level for which you wish to obtain a
printout.
2.67.2 Printing the Individual QC
Monitor Report
Press QC 2 ENTER to display the INDIVIDUAL QC
MONITOR screen. Move the cursor to the Print field.
Select 1 ENTER to print all Individual QC Monitor
reports or 2 ENTER to print only non-accumulated
reports.
2.67.3 Example of the Individual QC
Monitor Report
Figure 2-83 is an example of the Individual QC Monitor
Report.
Figure 2-83: Individual QC Monitor Report
2.67.4 Explanation of the Individual QC
Monitor Report
DATE and TIME
The date and time this report was printed appears in
the upper right hand corner of the report.
CONTROL
This is the name of the selected control as specified
from the CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen.
TARGET MEAN
This is the target mean for the selected test and
control level that is specified on the CONTROL
2. REPORTS
2
ENTER
INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR 01/06/93 14:39
CONTROL
CLASS
TEST
PTA-156
SERUM
GLU
TARGET
TARGET
MEAN
SD
306
10.0
S.NO. DATE TIME RESULT DEVIATION %ERROR
210
209
208
205
204
202
201
27
-1
0
3
-1
3
1
01 / 06
01 / 06
01 / 06
01 / 06
01 / 06
01 / 06
01 / 06
8.82
-0.33
0.00
0.98
-0.33
0.98
0.33
7 : 54
7 : 52
7 : 46
7 : 36
7 : 32
7 : 20
7 : 13
333#
305
306
309
305
309
307
*
2 200
S. TYPE
This is the sample type specified on the CONTROL
VALUE SETTING screen for the selected test and
control level.
TARGET SD
This is the target SD specified for the selected test
and control level on the CONTROL VALUE SETTING
screen.
TEST
This is the short test name specified in the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen for the selected
test.
S.NO.
This column lists the sample number for each run of
the selected control level on the selected test.
DATE
This column gives the dates each control run was
completed for the specified test.
TIME
This column gives the time each control run was
completed for the specified test.
RESULT
This column gives the result of each control run for the
specified test.
DEVIATION
This column gives the deviation from the mean for
each control run. An asterisk (*) following this number
indicates it is > 2SD from the mean.
%ERROR
This column gives the percent error for each control
run.
2. REPORTS
2 201
2.68 Individual QC List
2.68.1 Introduction
The Individual QC List gives the calculated statistics
for a specified control level for all tests. Use the
INDIVIDUAL QC LIST screen to specify the control
level for which you want to print the report.
2.68.2 Printing the Individual QC List
Report
Press QC 3 ENTER to display the INDIVIDUAL QC
LIST screen. Move the cursor to the Print field. Press
1 ENTER to print the Individual QC List report.
2.68.3 Example of the Individual QC
List Report
Figure 2-84 is an example of the Individual QC List
report.
Figure 2-84: Individual QC List Report
2.68.4 Explanation of the Individual QC
List Report
DATE and TIME
The date and time the report was printed appears in the
upper right hand corner of the report.
CONTROL
This gives the name of the control as specified in the
CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen.
S. TYPE
This gives the sample type specified from the
2. REPORTS
3
ENTER
INDIVIDUAL QC LIST 01/06/93 14:39
CONTROL PTA-156 CLASS SERUM
CH TEST N MEAN 2 SD LIMITS SD CV(%) RANGE
CK
AST
ALT
BUN
GLU
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/G
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
Na
K
Cl
1
3
4
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
47
48
49l
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
591.0
132.0
139.0
66.83
305.3
13.00
220.3
7.10
3.03
5.00
8.33
6.57
139.0
138.17
3.547
98.83
587.0
121.0
134.0
62.80
286.0
12.0
197.0
6.3
2.80
4.70
7.3
6.16
129.0
126.5
3.11
90.6
785.0
159.0
170.0
71.80
326.0
13.6
245.0
7.9
3.40
5.30
8.9
7.16
143.0
138.9
3.71
102.6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.47
0.76
0.72
0.48
0.20
0.77
0.68
0.00
1.98
0.00
0.72
0.91
0.72
1.35
1.44
1.11
2.8
1.0
1.0
0.32
0.6
0.10
1.5
0.00
0.06
0.00
0.06
0.06
1.0
1.86
0.051
1.10
4
2
2
0.6
1
0.2
3
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.1
0.1
2
3.6
0.10
2.2
2 202
CH
This column lists the channel number for each test.
TEST
This gives the short test name specified in the
N
This column gives the number of times the control was
run for each test.
MEAN
This column lists the calculated mean for the set of
individual control values for each test.
2 SD LIMITS
This column lists the target 2 SD limit range as
specified on CONTROL VALUE SETTING.
SD
This column lists the calculated SD value for the set of
individual control values for each test.
CV%
This column lists the calculated percent CV for the set
of individual control values for each test.
RANGE
This column lists the difference between the highest
and lowest control values for the set of individual
control values for each test.
2. REPORTS
2 203
2.69 Cumulative QC Monitor
2.69.1 Introduction
The Cumulative QC Monitor report lists the
accumulated control data summary for a specific
control level and specific test. Select the control level
and test for which you want the report to print from the
CUMULATIVE QC MONITOR screen.
2.69.2 Printing the Cumulative QC
Monitor Report
Press QC 5 ENTER to display the CUMULATIVE QC
MONITOR screen. Move the cursor to the Print field.
Press 1 ENTER to print the Cumulative QC Monitor
report.
2.69.3 Example of the Cumulative QC
Monitor Report
Figure 2-85 is an example of the Cumulative QC
Monitor report.
Figure 2-85: Cumulative QC Monitor Report
2.69.4 Explanation of the Cumulative
QC Monitor Report
DATE and TIME
The date and time the report was printed appears in
the upper right hand corner of the report.
CONTROL
This gives the name of the control as specified on the
TARGET MEAN
This lists the target mean for the control that is
specified in the CONTROL VALUE SETTING screen.
2. REPORTS
5
ENTER
INDIVIDUAL QC MONITOR 01/06/93 14:39
CONTROL
CLASS
TEST
PTA-156
SERUM
GLU
TARGET
TARGET
MEAN
SD
306
10.0
NO. DATE TIME RESULT N RANGE DEVIATION %ERROR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
0
4
0
5
0
0
2
0
1
2
3
-1
3
1
1
-2
-1
-5
-8
1
3
0
1
01/06
01/06
01/06
01/06
01/05
01/05
01/04
01/04
01/04
01/03
01/03
01/03
-0.23
0.98
0.33
0.33
-0.65
-0.33
-1.63
-2.61
0.33
0.82
0.00
0.16
8:22
8:38
8:42
1:23
15:23
8:12
22:00
13:31
8:55
15:10
14:37
13:11
305.3
309.0
307.0
307.0
304.0
305.0
301.0
298.0
307.0
308.5
306.0
306.5
3
1
3
1
3
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2 204
S. TYPE
This gives the sample type specified in the CONTROL
TARGET SD
This lists the target SD specified from the CONTROL
TEST
NO.
This column lists the number for each accumulated
set of data. This may not exceed 31.
DATE
This column gives the dates each set of data was
accumulated.
TIME
This column gives the time each set of data was
accumulated.
RESULT
This column gives the mean result of each
accumulated set of data. If M-R was chosen on
SYSTEM PARAMETERS, this is the mean value. If X-
R was chosen, this may be an individual result.
N
This column gives the number of control runs in each
accumulated set of data.
RANGE
This column gives the difference between the highest
and lowest control values in the group of accumulated
data.
DEVIATION
This column gives the standard deviation from the
mean for each accumulated set of data. An asterisk
(*) following this number indicates it is > 2SD from the
mean.
%ERROR
This column gives the percent error for each
accumulated set of data.
2. REPORTS
2 205
2.70 Cumulative QC List
2.70.1 Introduction
The Cumulative QC List report lists the accumulated
calculated statistics for all tests for a specified control
level. Specify the control level for which you want to
print accumulated data from the CUMULATIVE QC
LIST screen.
2.70.2 Printing the Cumulative QC
List Report
Press QC 6 ENTER to display the CUMULATIVE QC
LIST screen. Move the cursor to the Print field. Press
1 ENTER to print the Cumulative QC List report.
2.70.3 Example of the Cumulative QC
List Report
Figure 2-86 is an example of the Cumulative QC List
report.
Figure 2-86: Cumulative QC List Report
QC List Report
DATE and TIME
The date and time the report was printed appears in the
upper right hand corner of the report.
CONTROL
This gives the name of the control as specified from the
S. TYPE
This gives the sample type specified in the CONTROL
2. REPORTS
6
ENTER
CUMULATIVE QC LIST 01/06/93 14:39
CONTROL PTA-156 CLASS SERUM
CH TEST N MEAN 2 SD LIMITS SD CV(%)
CK
AST
ALT
BUN
GLU
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/G
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
Na
K
Cl
1
3
4
10
11
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
47
48
49l
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
591.0
132.0
139.0
66.83
305.3
13.00
220.3
7.10
3.03
5.00
8.33
6.57
139.0
138.17
3.547
98.83
587.0
121.0
134.0
62.80
286.0
12.0
197.0
6.3
2.80
4.70
7.3
6.16
129.0
126.5
3.11
90.6
785.0
159.0
170.0
71.80
326.0
13.6
245.0
7.9
3.40
5.30
8.9
7.16
143.0
138.9
3.71
102.6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.47
0.76
0.72
0.48
0.20
0.77
0.68
0.00
1.98
0.00
0.72
0.91
0.72
1.35
1.44
1.11
2.8
1.0
1.0
0.32
0.6
0.10
1.5
0.00
0.06
0.00
0.06
0.06
1.0
1.86
0.051
1.10
2 206
CH
This column lists the channel number for each test.
TEST
N
This column gives the number of times the control was
run for each test.
MEAN
This column lists the calculated mean for the set of
accumulated control values for each test.
2 SD LIMITS
This column lists the target 2 SD limit range for each
test as specified on the CONTROL VALUE
SETTINGS screen.
SD
This column lists the calculated SD value for the set of
accumulated control values for each test.
CV%
This column lists the calculated percent CV for the set
of accumulated control values for each test.
2. REPORTS
2 207
2.71 Reaction Monitor
2.71.1 Introduction
The Reaction Monitor report lists all of the absorbance
data for a specific test performed on a specific sample.
Specify the sample number and test on the
REACTION MONITOR screen. Press the COPY key
to obtain a copy of the reaction graph.
2.71.2 Printing the Reaction Monitor
Report
Press MONITOR 1 ENTER to display the REACTION
MONITOR screen. Move the cursor to the Print field
and press 1 ENTER to request the Reaction Monitor
report.
2.71.3 Example of the Reaction
Monitor Report
Figure 2-87 is an example of the Reaction Monitor
report.
Figure 2-87: Reaction Monitor
2.71.4 Explanation of the Reaction
Monitor Report
DATE and TIME
The date and time at which the report was printed
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
REACTION MONITOR 01/06/93 14:39
S.NO. R001 0-01 CELL 011 (LD 425 )
CB1-4 1-5 6-10 11-15 16-20 21-25 26-30 31-35 36-40 41-45 46-49
382
290
273
260
252
204
244
239
234
231
231
226
223
223
220
219
216
215
212
210
208
208
206
206
204
701
789
850
906
958
1011
1059
2 208
SAMPLE NUMBER
The sample number consists of a sequence number,
disk number, and sample position number. This
information is specified on the Patient Test
Selection screen for instruments not using a bar code
reader, or assigned automatically by the instrument
computer for instruments that are using a bar code
reader. The range of each number is specific to the
type of sample:
ROUTINE: SAMPLE NO. RXX D-PP
R: (routine)
XXX: 001-800 (routine sequence number)
ROUTINE RERUN: SAMPLE NO. RRXXX-DPP
RR (routine rerun)
STAT: SAMPLE NO. EXXX-DPP
E: (stat)
XXX: 001-200 (stat sequence number)
PP: 51-70 (sample position number
without BCR )
with BCR
+ 51-70 for samples without
Barcodelabel)
STAT RERUN: SAMPLE NO. ERXXX-DPP
ER: (stat rerun)
without BCR)
with BCR
Barcodelabel)
CONTROL: SAMPLE NO. CXYY
C: (control)
X: 1-8 (control level)
YY: 01-30 (control sequence number)
CALIBRATOR: SAMPLE NO. SXY
S: (calibrator)
X: 1-6 (standard number)
Y: 1-2 (first or second of duplicate
sampling)
CELL NO.
This number indicates which reaction cell contained
the chemical reaction whose results are displayed on
the report.
TEST 1 NAME AND RESULTS
The test name and calculated results appear in
parentheses to the right of the cell number. If a data
flag exists, it appears to the right of the numeric result.
If a second test was run within the same cell, the test
name and results (as well as any existing data flags)
appear in parentheses to the right of the first test
name and results.
ID NO.
This field is used only by instruments using a bar code
reader. The patient ID NO. denotes the bar code
number and appears immediately below the sample
number.
2. REPORTS
2 209
ABSORBANCE DATA
Absorbance data points are printed in 11 columns
below the ID NO. The first line gives the cycle number
during which the readings occurred. The first column
contains the cell blank readings (primary minus
secondary wavelengths); the other 10 columns
contain the reaction absorbances (primary minus
secondary wavelengths) obtained with each pass
through the photometer read window.
2. REPORTS
2 210
2.72 Patient Reports - - Report
Format
2.72.1 Introduction
Patient Reports list all of the results for the tests
requested on each sample. The Patient Reports can
be printed in one of two formats. The report or long
format includes demographic information as well as
the tests results. This section explains the report
format.
2.72.2 Printing the Patient Report - -
Report Format
CONDITIONS screen. Move the cursor to the Print
Format field. Press 1 ENTER to print real time reports
in the report format. Press 0 ENTER to cancel real
time report printing.
Press ROUTINE 6 ENTER to display the DATA
REVIEW screen. Move the cursor to the Data Print
field to request batch printing of patient reports.
Choose the report format, and whether you wish to
print all reports or only edited reports. Input the range
of sample numbers for which you wish to print reports
and press ENTER.
2.72.3 Example of the Patient Report -
-
Report Format
Figure 2-88 is an example of the Patient Report - -
Report Format.
Figure 2-88: Patient Report - - Report Format
2.72 Patient Reports - - Report Format
2. REPORTS
4
ENTER
6
ENTER
BOEHRINGER MANNHEIM
ID 07037 DATE 01/06/03 12:08
S.NO.
CLASS
AGE
SEX
DRAW DATE
DRAW TIME
TEST RESULT UNITS EXPECTED VALUE REMARKS
Urea Nitrogen
Glucose
Creatlinine
Na
K
Cl
BUN/CREATININE RATIO
N002-202
SERUM
25 Y
01/06/93
09:12
NAME
LOCATION
PHYSICIAN
PATIENT ID
DRAWN BY :
51.8
199
4.4
133.4
4.58
96.1
12
H
H
H
L
6-
70-
0.6-
133-
3.30-
96.0-
15-
19
105
1.1
145.0
5.10
108.0
24
mg/dL
mg/dL
mg/dL
mmol/l
mmol/l
mmol/l
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
( )
2 211
2.72.4 Explanation of the Patient
Report - - Report Format
TITLE
The title is specified on the Report Format display. It
can be up to three lines.
ID
A maximum of 13 alphanumeric characters; entered
on the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen. This
number is used to indicate the bar code number if the
bar code reader is being used.
DATE
The date on which the report is printed appears in the
upper right corner, below the title.
SAMPLE NUMBER
information is specified on the PATIENT TEST
SELECTION screen for instruments not using a bar
code reader, or is assigned automatically by the
instrument computer if a bar code reader is used. The
range of each number is specific to the type of
sample:
R: (routine)
RR (routine rerun)
E: (stat)
without BCR)
with BCR
Barcodelabel)
ER: (stat rerun)
without BCR)
with BCR
Barcodelabel)
CLASS, AGE, SEX, DRAW DATE and DRAW TIME
This information is displayed as entered in the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen.
NAME, LOCATION, PHYSICIAN, PATIENT ID and
DRAWN BY
This information is displayed as entered in the
PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen. These field
names are user definable and may appear differently
on your analyzer. The titles are defined in SYSTEM
PARAMETERS.
TEST
The long test name for each chemistry is printed here.
These tests names are defined in CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS.
2. REPORTS
2 212
RESULT
The result for each test is printed here. Decimal
placement is determined by the number format used
for the Std (1) concentration for each test
(CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen). Test results
are printed in the order specified on the PRINT ORDER
screen.
UNITS
The units printed are specified on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
EXPECTED VALUE
Each chemistrys range of expected values is entered
on the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. The
values printed pertain to the sex and age of the
patient; if these are not given, the default range is
used.
REMARKS
Data alarms are printed in this column. The lateral
position of this column is specified on the REPORT
FORMAT screen.
CALCULATED TESTS
If all tests involved in the calculation of a calculated
test are run, the result of the calculated test is on the
printout. Placement of the decimal in a calculated
test result is determined by the number format of the
LOW value of its expected range (see CALCULATED
TEST screen).
COMPENSATED TESTS
If a requested test requires a compensating formula
(see COMPENSATED TEST screen), and a test
necessary for that formula is not available, an asterisk
(*) is printed in place of the compensated result.
An example of this printout can be requested by
entering 1 in the Example Print field of the REPORT
FORMAT screen.
2. REPORTS
2 213
2.73 Patient Reports - - Short
Format
2.73.1 Introduction
Patient Reports list all of the results for the tests
requested on each sample. The Patient Reports can
be printed in one of two formats. The short report
format does not include demographic information with
the tests results. This section explains the short
report format.
2.73.2 Printing the Patient Report - -
Short Format
CONDITIONS screen. Move the cursor to the Print
Format field. Press 2 ENTER to print real time reports
in the short format. Press 0 ENTER to cancel real time
report printing.
Press ROUTINE 6 ENTER to display the DATA
REVIEW screen. Move the cursor to the Data Print
field to request batch printing of patient reports.
Choose the short format, and whether you wish to print
all reports or only edited reports. Enter the range of
sample numbers for which you wish to print reports
and press ENTER.
2.73.3 Example of the Patient Report -
-
Short Format
Figure 2-89 is an example of the Patient Report - -
Short Format.
Figure 2-89: Patient Report - - Short Format
2.73 Patient Reports - - Short Format
2. REPORTS
4
ENTER
6
ENTER
DATA MONITOR 01/06/93 14:39
S.NO. R001 0-01 ID
01 / 06 / 93 LD AST ALT BUN GLUC CO2 CREAT Na K
SERUM 425H 146H 156H 67.4H 292H 17.5H 6.4H 126.9 3.41
Cl
91.5
UN/CR
10.5
2 214
2.73.4 Explanation of the Patient
Report - - Short Format
DATE and TIME
The date and time of the print-out appears at the upper
right corner of the report.
SAMPLE NUMBER
SELECTION screen for instruments not using a bar
code reader, or is assigned automatically by the
instrument computer for instruments that are using a
bar code reader. The range of each number is specific
to the type of sample as shown on the next page.
R: (routine)
RR (routine rerun)
E: (stat)
ER: (stat)
ID NO.
A maximum of 13 alphanumeric characters; entered
on the PATIENT TEST SELECTION screen. This
number represents the bar code number if a bar code
reader is being used.
DATE
The date the sample was drawn appears to the left of
the report.
CLASS
The class appears below the date.
RESULTS PRINTOUT
Results for several samples are printed on each page.
The tests are listed in up to seven rows with as many
as nine columns available in each row. Decimal
placement in the printed result is determined by the
number format of Std (1) concentration, specified on
the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. The order
in which test results are printed is specified on the
PRINT ORDER screen.
CALCULATED TESTS
Decimal placement in a calculated test result is
determined by the number format of the LOW value of
its expected range (see CALCULATED TEST
screen).
DATA ALARMS
H and L flags are printed to the right of the test result.
Data flags print below the test results.
2.73 Patient Reports - - Short Format
2. REPORTS
2 215
2.74 Calibration Trace
2.74.1 Introduction
The Calibration Trace report is a printout of the
absorbance values for Standard 1 and Standards 2-6
for a specified photometric test. For ISEs the millivolt
values for the slope are printed. Choose the test for
which you want to print standard absorbance values
from the CALIBRATION TRACE screen.
2.74.2 Printing the Calibration Trace
Report
Press MONITOR 2 ENTER to display the
CALIBRATION TRACE screen. Move the
cursor to the Print field and press 1 ENTER
to print the Calibration Trace report.
2.74.3 Example of the Calibration Trace
Report
Figure 2-90 is an example of the Calibration Trace
report.
Figure 2-90: Calibration Trace Report
2.74.4 Explanation of the Calibration
Trace Report
DATE and TIME
The date and time of the printout appears at the upper
RESULTS
Absorbance (x10
4
) values listed under column STD 1,
and STD 2 - 6, are printed one below the other, to the
right of the date measured (month/day). For non-
linear tests the absorbance of the highest standard is
printed.
2. REPORTS
2
ENTER
CALIBRATION TRACE 01/06/93 14:39
GLU (STD 1)
2186
2187
2184
2191
2200
2215
2211*
2220
2166
2167*
2174*
2131
2290
2145
2551
2660
1156
2477
1255
2454*
2253
2210
2258
2255
3242
3352
3255
2533
2582
2485
2844
2544
1556
1865
3885
4557*
2556
3886
2886
3514
(10/01)
(10/02)
(10/03)
(10/04)
(10/05)
(10/06)
(10/07)
(10/08)
(10/09)
(10/10)
(10/11)
(10/12)
(10/13)
(10/14)
(10/15)
(10/16)
(10/17)
(10/18)
(10/19)
(10/20)
(10/21)
(10/22)
(10/23)
(10/24)
(10/25)
(10/26)
(10/27)
(10/28)
(10/29)
(10/30)
(10/31)
(11/01)
(11/02)
(11/03)
(11/04)
(11/05)
(11/06)
(11/07)
(11/08)
(11/09)
GLU (STD 2-6)
5681
5729
5645
5829
5829
5663
5566*
5710
2656
2667*
2194*
2131
2560
2665
2231
2990
2255
2134
3122
2415*
2312
3215
3785
3548
1255
1552
1889*
2886
2661
3644
3551
2556
2845
4662
5645*
5562
2558
4556
5775
4886
(10/01)
(10/02)
(10/03)
(10/04)
(10/05)
(10/06)
(10/07)
(10/08)
(10/09)
(10/10)
(10/11)
(10/12)
(10/13)
(10/14)
(10/15)
(10/16)
(10/17)
(10/18)
(10/19)
(10/20)
(10/21)
(10/22)
(10/23)
(10/24)
(10/25)
(10/26)
(10/27)
(10/28)
(10/29)
(10/30)
(10/31)
(11/01)
(11/02)
(11/03)
(11/04)
(11/05)
(11/06)
(11/07)
(11/08)
(11/09)
2 216
NOTE
For rate chemistries, the Calibration Trace data for
STD 1 absorbance values may appear to be different
than the Calibration Monitor data for STD 1 because
the Calibration Trace absorbance data is taken from
the first photometric measurement point (sample and
reagent dispensed at R1 timing) at the primary
wavelength only.
DATA ALARMS
If a CALIB alarm occurs, an asterisk (*) is printed to
the right of the absorbance measurement for
photometric tests. For ISEs this indicates a failed
calibration.
2. REPORTS
2 217
2.75 Profiling List
2.75.1 Introduction
The Profiling List printout lists the names of each
defined profile and the tests which are selected for
each profile.
2.75.2 Printing the Profiling List Report
Press PARAMETER 2 ENTER to display the
PROFILING screen. Move the cursor to the Print field
and press 1 ENTER to request the printout. An
asterisk (*) indicates that test will be performed as a
part of the named profile.
2.75.3 Example of the Profiling List
Report
Figure 2-91 is an example of the Profiling List report.
Figure 2-91: Profiling List Report
2.75.4 Explanation of the Profiling List
Report
DATE and TIME
The date and time of the printout appears in the upper
right corner.
KEY PROFILE
This lists the name of each profile and the tests that
are selected as part of each profile. An asterisk on the
grid indicates the test will be run as a part of the profile.
An asterisk in front of the profile name indicates a
default profile.
2.75 Profiling List
2. REPORTS
2
ENTER
PROFILING LIST 01/06/93 14:39
[KEY PROFILE] 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
*A MON.
B CHEM6
C CHEM7
D ALL
CH TEST NAME CH TEST NAME CH TEST NAME CH TEST NAME
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CK
LD
AST
ALT
ALP/A
GGT
AMYL
TBILI
DBILI
BUN
GLU
CO2
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
CA
TRIG
UA
ALB/P
TP
PHOS
CREA
CHOL
MG
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
THEO 37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
ISE
S.IND
REF
-----+-----+--**-+*****+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-*-
-----+----*+*----+---*-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-*-
-----+----*+**---+---*-+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-*-
*****+*****+*****+*****+-----+-----+-----+-----+*****+**-
2 218
CH
This column lists each channel number.
TEST NAME
This column lists the short name assigned to each
channel.
2.75 Profiling List
2. REPORTS
2 219
2.76 Photometer Check
2.76.1 Introduction
The Photometer Check lists the light intensity of the
photometer. According to the light intensity,
deterioration of the lamp can be identified. Both the
current measurement and the previous measurement
are printed on the report.
2.76.2 Printing the Photometer Check
Report
Press MAINTENANCE 1 ENTER to display the
ANALYZER MAINTENANCE screen. Move the cursor
to the Photometer Check field. Press 1 ENTER to
request a Photometer Check report. The data on the
report is given below.
A Photometer Check must be performed following a
reaction bath exchange. The exchange occurs
automatically at power ON or can be requested via the
ANALYZER MAINTENANCE screen if the analyzer is
not powered OFF daily.
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
2.76.3 Example of the Photometer
Check Report
Figure 2-92 is an example of the Photometer Check
report.
Figure 2-92: Photometer Check Report
2.76.4 Explanation of the Photometer
Check Report
When performing the Photometer Check, the
instrument fills two reaction cells (1 and 119) with
deionized water and rotates them through the
photometer lightpath. The absorbance of both cells is
determined at each of the 12 available wavelengths,
and their mean absorbance (at each wavelength) is
printed. "WV1 (secondary)" and "WV2 (primary)"
refer to the internal processing of absorbance data by
the instrument. The results at any given wavelength
should be similar when comparing WV1 and WV2.
DATE and TIME
The date and time of the printout appears at the upper
PHOTOMETER CHECK 01/06/93 14:39
----------PREVIOUS DATA---------- ----------CURRENT DATA----------
2ND WL PRIM. WL 2ND WL PRIM. WL
340
376
415
450
480
505
546
570
600
660
700
800
340
376
415
450
480
505
546
570
600
660
700
800
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
NM
8824
8703
8742
8658
8619
8617
8668
8634
8604
8603
8599
8684
8824
8703
8743
8657
8620
8619
8667
8633
8604
8603
8599
8685
8890
8739
8754
8669
8638
8627
8668
8622
8583
8575
8562
8612
8893
8741
8756
8670
8641
8628
8670
8625
8585
8578
8564
8614
2 220
RESULTS
Previous and current photometer check results are
printed under the appropriate heading. These are used
for comparison purposes; values should increase
gradually from previous to current. If a sudden
increase in values is observed, it must be investigated.
If any current value exceeds 13,000, the photometer
lamp must be replaced, a cell blank performed, and all
channels must be recalibrated. Factors affecting the
Photometer Check results include:
reaction bath contents (insufficient Hitergent, dirt
in bath water)
clean reaction cells (must be replaced monthly)
photometer lamp.
2. REPORTS
2 221
2.77 Cell Blank
2.77.1 Introduction
The Cell Blank report lists the absorbance of all 120
reaction cells at all 12 wavelengths. These
absorbance readings are taken with the reaction cells
filled with water.
A Cell Blank is performed:
during weekly maintenance
when reaction cells are replaced
when the photometer window is cleaned or
photometer lamp is replaced.
2.77.2 Printing the Cell Blank Report
ANALYZER MAINTENANCE screen. Move the
cursor to the Cell Blank field. Press 1 ENTER to
request a Cell Blank report.
2.77.3 Example of the Cell Blank Report
Figure 2-93 is an example of the Cell Blank report.
Figure 2-93: Cell Blank
2.77 Cell Blank
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
CELL BLANK MEASUREMENTS 01/06/93 14:39
01 / 04 / 93 14 : 39 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- WAVE LENGTH (NM) - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
NO. 340 376 415 450 480 505 546 570 600 660 700 800
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
8987
8942
-81
-31
-26
134
-79
128
55
65
27
89
81
103
-37
73
926
94
-31
-145
-210
-186
-249
-187
-187
212
-149
-136
-121
-110
-105
11
136
-10
6
423
9
121
-19
128
8819
8820
-113
-47
-66
155
-121
26
-34
-15
-48
82
-10
-113
-74
-15
221
127
-107
-162
-199
-179
-223
-191
-183
278
-155
-152
-137
-129
-132
-48
45
-5
-36
330
-53
45
-71
42
8814
8943
-84
-47
-60
162
-105
8
-47
-19
-36
78
-26
-97
-61
-24
300
-29
-71
-137
-158
-150
-178
-157
-150
292
-131
-126
-115
-105
-113
-45
34
26
-21
300
-48
44
-58
29
8719
8713
-73
-48
-53
187
-100
3
-53
-16
-40
84
-31
-82
-48
-24
216
-34
-65
-123
-137
-137
-149
-144
-134
330
-113
-113
-105
-90
-107
-40
24
48
-8
297
-44
48
-53
26
8685
8679
-66
-53
-52
204
-97
0
-60
-13
-47
90
-39
-74
-40
-29
225
-40
-52
-113
-123
-129
-129
-134
-121
355
-103
-107
-99
-81
-100
-39
16
61
-2
288
-42
47
-48
19
8659
8654
-48
-58
-45
215
-90
-6
-66
-10
-48
92
-50
-66
-29
-32
229
215
-42
-100
-100
-116
-99
-118
-105
391
-87
-92
-89
-63
-89
-34
8
78
8
276
-36
50
-39
18
8707
8793
-44
-57
-45
213
-87
-8
-63
-11
-47
95
-50
-60
-27
-36
225
200
-39
-92
-90
-107
-89
-110
-97
394
-81
-82
-81
-57
-82
-31
6
81
10
270
-34
45
-37
11
8641
8650
-39
-57
-45
225
-84
-11
-66
-13
-50
99
-55
-55
-26
-39
239
218
-36
-87
-82
-100
-79
-102
-89
409
-74
-78
-76
-52
-79
-32
2
87
10
260
-36
42
-36
5
8585
8456
-16
-61
-39
239
-82
-18
-78
-5
-57
94
-68
-42
-8
-42
242
241
-19
-74
-57
-92
-45
-89
-74
449
-61
-65
-66
-34
-74
-27
-8
108
29
250
-24
48
-24
-3
8560
8679
-15
-63
-39
244
-78
-23
-79
-6
-58
99
-69
-40
-8
-44
243
239
-18
-71
-50
-86
-32
-82
-66
462
-57
-60
-60
-26
-71
-27
-11
113
31
242
-24
42
-24
-8
8491
8456
-16
-53
-37
239
-68
-21
-68
-8
-52
107
-60
-37
-13
-42
229
208
-21
-65
-47
-73
-34
-71
-61
438
-48
-53
-52
-26
-61
-26
-8
108
23
237
-24
31
-24
-10
8476
8432
-13
-50
-34
242
-65
-23
-66
-8
-50
115
-63
-32
-13
-45
227
202
-19
-61
-40
-66
-27
-63
-57
446
-44
-48
-48
-23
-57
-24
-10
107
19
231
-24
26
-24
-15
2 222
2.77.4 Explanation of the Cell Blank
Report
DATE and TIME
RESULTS
Absorbance (x10
4
) of the first reaction cell at 12
wavelengths is printed. Data for subsequent reaction
cells are computed as changes in absorbance,
compared with the first reaction cell. This information
is automatically written to CRAM after completion of
all 120 cell blanks.
If any data from reaction cells 2 - 120 exceed + 800,
refer to Chapter 3 for proper corrective procedures.
Data for reaction cell 2 must be < 13,000.
2.77 Cell Blank
2. REPORTS
2 223
2.78 Bar Code Reader Check
2.78.1 Introduction
The Bar Code Reader Check report prints out the bar
code numbers read by each of the reagent bar code
readers and the sample bar code reader.
2.78.2 Printing the Bar Cod Reader
Check Report
MECHANISMS CHECK screen. Move the cursor to
the Bar Code Reader Check field. Enter the number
bar codes to be read and press ENTER.
2.78.3 Example of the Bar Code Reader
Check Report
Figure 2-94 is an example of the Bar Code Reader
Check report.
Figure 2-94: Bar Code Reader Check
2.78.4 Explanation of the Bar Code
Reader Check Report
DATE and TIME
DISK
This line identifies which bar code reader the data
refers to: reagent disk 1, reagent disk 2, or sample
disk.
2. REPORTS
2
ENTER
BARCODE READER CHECK 01/06/93 14:39
R.DISK1
POS.NO.------ ID ------
R.DISK2
POS.NO.------ ID ------
S.DISK
POS.NO.--- ID ---
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
059051983006715243
311049902004839323
095051982009963624
077048797003627583
160051981012076683
053051984014854344
040051443036281274
155048801005642003
072051994006296683
158048806006382003
013048835000969203
115051985006134344
160051981030056683
018048795007674343
133052153010555964
160051981009336003
115051985005523664
013048835005669233
077070149005955274
095051982011012934
059051983003144373
053051984004034364
160051981009476003
155048801002672033
133048802002297613
036046444000101333
018048795000204403
11224
059882
10287
00162
21080
21634
24050
5436
18716
12508
00102
365
25072
10322
1131
059901
1284
21726
9601
16142
11538
07075
12317
07029
17964
14606
7262
32060
32685
18019
2 224
RESULTS
The position number is listed in the POS. NO. column.
The ID No. is listed in the ID column, and represents
the bar code number. An asterisk (*) displayed in front
of the POS. NO. column indicates that the instrument
failed to read the bar code.
2. REPORTS
2 225
2.79 ISE Check
2.79.1 Introduction
The ISE Check Report is a printout of the EMFs of
the internal reference solution, measured for Na
+
,
K
+
and Cl
-
. The replicates should be within 2.0
mV. The EMF of KCl measured through the
reference cartridge is also printed. The replicates
should be within 0.3 mV.
2.79.2 Printing the ISE Check Report
the ISE Check field. Input the number of repetitions
and press ENTER.
2.79.3 Example of the ISE Check Report
Figure 2-95 is an example of the ISE Check report.
Figure 2-95: ISE Check Report
2.79.4 Explanation of the ISE Check
Report
NO.
This column lists the number of replicates performed
during the ISE check.
NA EMF
This column lists the EMF for Na+ for each ISE check
performed. The number should fall within the range of
-90 to -10 mV.
2.79 ISE Check
2. REPORTS
2
ENTER
ISE CHECK 01/06/93 14:39
NO. NA EMF K EMF CL EMF REF EMF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
0.8
0.8
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
0.7
0.6
0.8
0.7
0.9
0.8
0.8
0.6
0.6
-36.1
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-36.3
-36.2
-36.3
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-36.3
-36.3
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-36.2
-35.5
-35.6
-35.7
-35.7
-35.8
-35.8
-35.8
-35.8
-35.9
-35.8
-35.9
-35.9
-36.0
-36.0
-36.0
-36.0
-36.0
-36.0
-36.0
-36.1
116.9
116.9
116.9
117.0
117.0
117.0
117.0
117.1
117.1
117.0
117.1
117.1
117.1
117.1
117.2
117.2
117.2
117.2
117.2
117.2
2 226
K EMF
This column lists the EMF for K+ for each ISE check
-90 to -10 mV.
CL EMF
This column lists the EMF for Cl- for each ISE check
80 to 160 mV.
REF EMF
This column lists the EMF for the reference cartridge
for each ISE check performed.
2.79 ISE Check
2. REPORTS
2 227
2.80 Printer Check
2.80.1 Introduction
The Printer Check is a diagnostic procedure that is
performed to verify that the instrument can send a full
page of characters to the printer, and that the printer
can print them.
2.80.2 Printing the Printer Check Report
MECHANISM CHECK screen. Move the cursor to the
Printer Check field. Press 1 ENTER to initiate a
printer check.
2.80.3 Example of the Printer Check
Report
Figure 2-96 is an example of the Printer Check report.
Figure 2-96: Printer Check Report
2.80.4 Explanation of the Printer Check
Report
The report prints out one line of each character to
ensure the printer is functioning properly.
2.80 Printer Check
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
PRINTER CHECK 01/06/93 14:39
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
-
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
]
^
2 228
2.81 Daily Alarm Trace
2.81.1 Introduction
The Daily Alarm Trace contains information about
alarms stored in CRAM. The last 200 alarms can be
stored.
2.81.2 Printing the Daily Alarm Trace
Report
the Alarm Log field. Press 1 ENTER to choose the
daily alarm trace. Press 1 ENTER to begin printing the
alarm log.
2.81.3 Example of the Daily Alarm
Trace Report
Figure 2-97 is an example of the Daily Alarm Trace
report.
Figure 2-97: Daily Alarm Trace Report
2.81.4 Explanation of the Daily Alarm
Trace Report
DATE and TIME
ALARM DATE and TIME
The date and time (on the OPERATION MONITOR
screen) when the alarm occurred.
2.81 Daily Alarm Trace
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
DAILY ALARM TRACE 01/06/93 14:39
01 / 05
01 / 05
01 / 05
01 / 05
01 / 05
10 : 43
09 : 57
09 : 47
08 : 33
08 : 28
4
4
3
7
10
1
1
1
1
1
A
A
R
R
R
051-010-015
040-001-070
001-002-000
052-001-000
050-001-000
timing
alarm code or retry frequency
alarm class or retry code
alarm or retry
frequency
analyzer status
alarm time
alarm date
2 229
ANALYZER STATUS
This code represents the status of the instrument
when the alarm occurred. The code assignments are
as follows:
STATUS # ANALYZER STATUS
1 INITIAL
2 STAND-BY
3 RESET (prior to Operate)
4 OPERATE
5 E. STOP
6 PHOTOMETER CHECK
7 WASH (ALL)
8 WASH (CELLS)
9 WASH (ISE)
10 AIR PURGE
11 ISE PRIME (START UP)
12 ISE PRIME (IS,DIL)
13 ISE PRIME (KCL)
14 INC. BATH EXCHANGE
15 CELL BLANK
16 RESET (Maintenance display)
17 PROBE ADJUST
18 SAMPLING MECHA.
(Maintenance display)
19 DISK
20 REAGENT 1 PIPETTING
21 REAGENT 2 PIPETTING
22 STIRRER (Maintenance display)
23 BAR CODE READER
FREQUENCY
Represents the number of successive cycles during
which each alarm has occurred since power up.
ALARM OR RETRY
The letter "A" indicates an instrument alarm. The
letter "R" indicates a retry code. Retry codes
document analyzer functions as monitored by the
CPU. Not all retry codes indicate an abnormality.
Retry codes are intended for service use only and are
not listed in this manual.
ALARM CLASS
This number, for "A" type alarms, is the same as the
alarm class in the instrument alarms table, found in
Chapter 4.
RETRY CODE
The identification code of the retry (for service use
only).
ALARM CODE
This number is the same as the alarm code in the
instrument alarms table.
RETRY FREQUENCY
The frequency with which the specified retry has
occurred (for service use only).
TIMING
This represents the time (within a mechanical cycle)
at which the alarm occurred. Range: 1-200. Units of
measurement: 100 msec.
Up to eight alarms or retries can be listed for each
cycle. If more than eight are encountered, the overflow
is not printed here, but will appear on the cumulative
alarm log.
2.81 Daily Alarm Check
2. REPORTS
2 230
2.82 Cumulative Alarm Trace
2.82.1 Introduction
The Cumulative Alarm Trace report includes all
instrument alarms that have occurred during the most
recent 256 days. One day is determined as the period
of time from power up to power down.
Alarm or retry information is printed on this display. A
retry occurs when the instrument senses an apparent
alarm condition, then rechecks, or "retries", the
sensor several times before issuing an alarm.
2.82.2 Printing the Cumulative Alarm
Trace Report
the Alarm Log field. Press 2 ENTER to choose the
Cumulative Alarm Trace. Press 1 ENTER to print the
Cumulative Alarm Trace report.
2.82.3 Example of the Cumulative
Alarm Trace Report
Figure 2-98 is an example of the Cumulative Alarm
Trace.
Figure 2-98: Cumulative Alarm Trace Report
Alarm Trace Report
DATE and TIME
DATE
The date on which the alarm occurred appears in the
far left column.
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
LOG OUT (CUMULATIVE) 01/28/93 14:39
28 / 01 / 89 08 : 09 10 : 04 A 040-001-001 051-010-001
27 / 01 / 89 08 : 02 16 : 08 A 021-003-002 040-001-005 051-019-001 101-002-015
24 / 01 / 89 00 : 00 17 : 17 A 012-001-255 040-001-005 101-002-017 021-003-003
23 / 01 / 89 08 : 26 16 : 49 A 082-007-001 040-001-010 051-007-001 050-006-00
22 / 01 / 89 13 : 49 16 : 56 A 040-001-005 050-006-002 021-003-006 051-006-002
R 050-001
R 051-001
R 027-012
R 050-001
021-019-001
051-002-001
051-006-001
046-001
041-004
027-003
052-001
055-002
054-001
052-001
012-001-003
051-002-001
027-005
129-001
054-001
041-001
050-001
052-001
042-001
041-011
041-006
050-001
046-002
041-001
012-001-107
date
power up time
last alarm time
alarm or retry
retry code
retry frequency
alarm class
alarm code
alarm frequency
2 231
POWER UP TIME
The time at which the instrument is powered up,
determined by the real time clock. If the instrument is
powered up continuously, the end of the day is
determined by the real time clock.
LAST ALARM TIME
The time at which the last alarm occurred, determined
by the real time clock.
ALARM OR RETRY
The letter "A" indicates an instrument alarm. The
letter "R" indicates a retry code. Retry codes
document analyzer functions as monitored by the
CPU. Not all retry codes indicate an abnormality.
Retry codes are intended for service use only and are
not listed in this manual.
RETRY CODE
The identification code of the retry (for service use
only).
RETRY FREQUENCY
The frequency with which the specified retry has
occurred (for service use only).
ALARM CLASS
instrument alarms table, Chapter 4.
ALARM CODE
instrument alarms table, Chapter 4.
ALARM FREQUENCY
This number represents the number of successive
cycles during which this alarm has occurred since
power-up.
Up to 20 alarms (A) and 20 retries (R) for each of 256
days are stored in the cumulative alarm file.
2. REPORTS
2 232
2.83 Host Communication Log
2.83.1 Introduction
A trace of information flow between the instrument and
a host computer is printed. This feature is usually for
use by Service Representative.
2.83.2 Printing the Host Communication
Log
the Host Communication Log field and press 1
ENTER to print the report.
2.83.3 Example of the Host
Communication Log Report
Figure 2-99 is an example of the Host Communication
Log.
Figure 2-99: Host Communication Log
2.83.4 Explanation of the Host
Communication Log Report
For information concerning interpretation of this report,
contact Customer Technical Support.
2.83 Host Communication Log
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
SYSTEM COMMUNICATION TRACE 01/06/93 14:39
10:04:17-10:04:17 HOST->AU
;A 398748 CODE12800398 23311016911212
10:04:16-10:04:17 AU->HOST
>
ETX
10:04:16-10:04:16 HOST->AU
;A 397747 CODE12800397 23311016911212
10:04:15-10:04:16 AU->HOST
ETX
10:04:15-10:04:15 HOST->AU
;A 396746 CODE12800396 23311016911212
10:04:14-10:04:15 AU->HOST
ETX
10:04:14-10:04:14 HOST->AU
;A 395745 CODE12800395 23311016911212
10:04:13-10:04:14 AU->HOST
ETX
10:04:13-10:04:13 HOST->AU
;A 394744 CODE12800394 23311016911212
10:04:12-10:04:13 AU->HOST
ETX
10:04:12-10:04:12 HOST->AU
;A 393743 CODE12800393 23311016911212
10:04 10:04:12 AU->HOST
>
ETX
10:04 10:04:11 HOST->AU
;A 392742 CODE12800392 23311016911212
10:04:10-10:04:11 AU->HOST
ETX
10:04:10-10:04:10 HOST->AU
;A 391741 CODE12800391 23311016911212
10:04:09-10:04:10 AU->HOST
2 233
2.84 Floppy Disk Check
2.84.1 Introduction
The Floppy Disk Utility report includes the version and
revision numbers of each disk, and the checks of each
file on the disk. This report is performed by, or at the
request of, a Boehringer Mannheim representative
while the instrument is in Stand-by.
2.84.2 Printing the Floppy Disk Check
Report
the Program Check field and choose the drive you
want to check.
2.84.3 Example of the Floppy Disk
Check Report
Figure 2-100, shown on the next page, is an example
of the FD Utility Check report.
2.84.4 Explanation of the Floppy
Disk Check Report
Figure 2-100: Floppy Disk Check Report
2.84 Floppy Disk Check
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
FD CHECK 06/06/93 14:39
[SYSTEM DISK] FILE NO. FILE NAME SUM (HEX) REV.NO.
7076020-04-11
06/26/93
0000000000
[TOTAL SUM]
75BA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
CHEMPF
CALIBDF
PARAMDF
CNTMSDDF
COMMONPF
CNTCMNPF
CNTL1PF
CNTL2PF
TMPADCPF
TSTSKPF
SYSIFMPF
SYSIFSPF
FDTSKMPF
FDTSKSPF
PRINTMPF
026A
01FF
020F
027B
0A1F
B3C4
82DE
BF3C
FC86
40B5
1D6D
1CA3
55C0
1F23
CB7F
BD05
D3B5
0016
3AE6
F166
FEC7
4443
96C2
00
00
02
00
01
06
13
18
06
08
06
05
03
04
12
10
09
05
09
06
07
21
21
13
12
08
10
13
13
16
10
08
08
07
04
02
01
02
KC1PF
KC2PF
KC3PF
KC4PF
KC5PF
KC6PF
SCD1PF
SCD2PF
REAGPF
DAT1PF
DAT2PF
DAT3PF
TMCH1PF
TMCH2PF
TMCH3PF
ESTR1PF
ESTR2PF
EINPINFF
ALMINFPF
INIT
HOS
DOSSY
TMCH4PF
766B
03B9
C215
8968
5187
86CE
731E
FA6A
4091
DFA5
7706
C475
8D4B
590C
258
[SYSTEM DISK] FILE NO. FILE NAME SUM (HEX) REV.NO.
7076001-00-01
06/18/93
[TOTAL SUM]
4005
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
NHEADDF
NORMDF1
NORMDF2
NORMDF3
NORMDF4
NORMDF5
NORMDF6
NORMDF7
NORMDF8
NORMDF9
NORMDF10
01D4
0471
04BE
040C
035A
03A7
03F4
0441
048E
03E3
0331
037E
03CB
0418
0465
04B2
0400
0164
0359
039D
03EA
0437
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
EHEADDF
EMEGDF1
EMEGDF2
EMEGDF3
EMEGDF4
NORMDF11
NORMDF12
NORMDF13
NORMDF14
NORMDF15
NORMDF16
2 234
2.85 Memory Check
2.85.1 Introduction
The Memory Check report shows the check sum of the
instrument RAM and ROM. Memory Check can only
be performed while the analyzer is in Stand-by.
2.85.2 Printing the Memory Check
Report
the Program Check field and press
4 ENTER to print the Memory Check report.
2.85.3 Example of the Memory Check
Report
Figure 2-101 is an example of the Memory Check
report.
Figure 2-101: Memory Check Report
2.85.4 Explanation of the Memory
Check Report
2.85 Memory Check
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
MEMORY CHECK 01/06/93 14:39
00
08
10
18
20
28
30
38
40
48
50
58
60
68
70
78
80
88
90
98
A0
A8
B0
B8
C0
C8
D0
D8
E0
E8
[VERSION]
[TOTAL SUM]
7076020-04-08
6FEE (RAM) DC01 (ROM)
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
1A6A
E2CE
3761
3C12
ED39
C003
5A6D
----
94D2
0000
----
5147
0000
0000
88C1
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
01
09
11
19
21
29
31
39
41
49
51
59
61
69
71
79
81
89
91
99
A1
A9
B1
B9
C1
C9
D1
D9
E1
E9
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
4C7C
0000
61D1
75D6
----
F655
7D9C
----
B751
E467
----
B9B4
CF0C
0000
1D2B
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
02
0A
12
1A
22
2A
32
3A
42
4A
52
5A
62
6A
72
7A
82
8A
92
9A
A2
AA
B2
BA
C2
CA
D2
DA
E2
EA
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
88A9
0000
22B1
36E7
1FA2
174D
37F1
----
0A99
C883
2FFF
C756
D616
0000
4FD5
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
03
0B
13
1B
23
2B
33
3B
43
4B
53
5B
63
6B
73
7B
83
8B
93
9B
A3
AB
B3
BB
C3
CB
D3
DB
E3
EB
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
5583
0000
D648
405E
DF83
4291
13EB
----
0000
54E6
49B6
2BC3
1048
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
04
0C
14
1C
24
2C
34
3C
44
4C
54
5C
64
6C
74
7C
84
8C
94
9C
A4
AC
B4
BC
C4
CC
D4
DC
E4
EC
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
FC19
0000
450A
1AE9
F633
94A9
C331
----
0000
C830
50F7
2914
1C91
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
05
0D
15
1D
25
2D
35
3D
45
4D
55
5D
65
6D
75
7D
85
8D
95
9D
A5
AD
B5
BD
C5
CD
D5
DD
E5
ED
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
4ADD
0000
9FC7
48AC
7ADD
2BD0
----
----
0000
0000
7474
----
232C
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
06
0E
16
1E
26
2E
36
3E
46
4E
56
5E
66
6E
76
7E
86
8E
96
9E
A6
AE
B6
BE
C6
CE
D6
DE
E6
EE
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
6C8E
0000
3438
B6C9
88EO
4CE4
----
----
0000
C206
CCD8
----
E027
0000
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
07
0F
17
1F
27
2F
37
3F
47
4F
57
5F
67
6F
77
7F
87
8F
97
9F
A7
AF
B7
BF
C7
CF
D7
DF
E7
EF
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
3583
0000
73B1
BD70
9E19
5EE6
----
----
0000
E034
14CF
----
0000
0000
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
I/O RAM
8D96
----
F1
F9
F0
F8
----
----
F2
FA
----
----
F3
FB
----
----
F4
FC
----
----
F5
FD
----
----
F6
FE
----
----
F7
FF
----
EF6B
2 235
2.86 Precision Check
2.86.1 Introduction
The Precision Check report is a printout of statistical
calculations performed on a maximum of 49 tests, for
a maximum of 800 patient files (sequence numbers).
2.86.2 Printing the Precision Check
Report
SUPPORT FUNCTION screen. Move the cursor to the
Precision Check field and press 1 ENTER to print a
Precision Check report.
2.86.3 Example of the Precision Check
Report
Figure 2-102 is an example of the Precision Check
report.
Figure 2-102: Precision Check Report
2.86.4 Explanation of the Precision
Check Report
DATE and TIME
SAMPLE NO.
This represents the range of sequence numbers
requested for the statistical calculation.
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
PRECISION CHECK 01/06/93 14:39
SAMPLE NO. 0001 - - - - - - 0010
TEST N MEAN RANGE MAX. MIN. SD CV(%)
3
1
3
6
1
3
2
3
3
2
1
3
1
1
4
4
4
ALB/P
AMYL
PHOS
TP
CREA
CA
LDH
ALT
AST
GGT
TRIG
UA
BILI
CHOL
Na
K
Cl
3.050
701.80
8.73
4.87
3.480
14.83
487.15
167.70
163.73
179.70
213.90
7.57
5.3
108.9
126.30
3.737
98.85
2.3
10
3.5
0.1
4
0.0
0.1
0.3
0.0
0.2
4
2.0
0.09
1.7
4.58
6.6
2.3
3.06
89
8.8
4.9
6.48
15.2
489.6
169.1
164.8
181.0
213.9
7.6
5.3
109
128.3
3.78
99.6
3.03
701.8
8.6
4.8
6.48
14.3
484.7
167.0
163.2
178.4
213.9
7.5
5.3
109
124.3
3.71
98.2
0.017
0.00
0.12
0.05
0.000
0.47
3.46
1.21
0.92
1.84
0.00
0.06
0.00
0.0
1.65
0.034
0.66
0.56
0.00
1.37
1.03
0.00
3.17
0.71
0.72
0.56
1.02
0.00
0.79
0.00
0.00
1.31
0.91
0.67
2 236
TEST
A maximum of 49 tests may appear, including Na
+
,
K
+
, and Cl
-
. Any test not included in the specified
range of sequence numbers is not printed.
RESULTS
Test data is read from the data disk, and prints out in
order of test codes. Those results with data alarms
(other than H or L) are excluded from the calculation.
The number of tests (N) included in the calculation, the
maximum value, minimum value, mean (X), SD, and
CV% are printed. This can be used to troubleshoot
chemistry problems or verify precision, particularly
after performing maintenance.
2. REPORTS
2 237
2.87 Maintenance Report
2.87.1 Introduction
The Maintenance Report is a printout of the 10 most
recent dates the i tems on the WORKING
INFORMATION screen were performed.
2.87.2 Printing the Maintenance Report
WORKING INFORMATION screen. Move the cursor
to the Maintenance Report field and press 1 ENTER
to print the report.
2.87.3 Example of the Maintenance
Report
Figure 2-103 is an example of the Maintenance report.
Figure 2-103: Maintenance Report
2.87.4 Explanation of the Maintenance
Report
The name of each maintenance item from the
WORKING INFORMATION screen is listed on the left
side of the report. The dates each item was performed
is listed on the right.
2.87 Maintenance Report
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
MAINTENANCE REPORT 01/06/93 14:39
CELLS
LAMP
SERUM
REAGENT 1
REAGENT 2
SYRINGE FILTER
MONTHLY
3-MONTHS
(ISE)
NA ELECTRODE
K ELECTRODE
CL ELECTRODE
REF. ELECTRODE
INT.STD
DILUTION
SIPPER
SIPPER TUBE
11/12/92
09/03/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
10/29/92
11/12/92
06/17/92
04/27/92
11/05/92
07/23/92
10/29/92
10/29/92
10/29/92
10/29/92
08/27/92
10/29/92
04/27/92
10/29/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
08/27/92
07/09/92
08/27/92
07/09/92
10/08/92
10/15/92
06/17/92
04/27/92
07/09/92
04/27/92
07/09/92
04/27/92
07/23/92
10/07/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
07/09/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
10/29/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
07/07/92
08/27/92
10/29/92
10/29/92
10/29/92
08/27/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
07/09/92
10/15/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
04/27/92
07/09/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
04/27/92
SYRINGE FILTER
2 238
2.88 Cumulative Operations
Report
2.88.1 Introduction
The Cumulative Operations report gives an overview of
the tests that have been performed by the analyzer, as
well as power on time, time in operation, and floppy
disk accesses.
2.88.2 Printing the Cumulative
Operations Report
WORKING INFORMATION screen. Move the cursor
to the Cumulative Operations Report field and
press 1 ENTER to print the report.
2.88.3 Example of the Cumulative
Operations Report
Figure 2-104 is an example of the Cumulative
Operations report.
Figure 2-104: Cumulative Operations Report
Operations Report
DATE and TIME
POWER ON TIME
The cumulative number of hours the 911 has been
powered ON.
2.88 Cumulative Operations List
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
INDIVIDUAL OPERATIONS LIST 01/06/93 14:39
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
POWER ON TIME
OPERATION
SYSTEM
DATA
TEST COUNT
DISK
DISK
2721
652
30
3152
HOURS
HOURS
TIMES
TIMES
CHANNEL TEST CODE ROUTINE CALIB. CONT. RERUN STAT TOTAL
6. NO.OF SAMPLES ROUTINE RERUN STAT TOTAL
786 143 117 1046
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
52
113
117
115
2
0
0
0
0
131
120
109
152
137
112
76
145
36
37
50
264
204
147
280
134
185
169
182
427
123
149
148
103
127
ALB
AMYL
PHOS
TP
GLU
CREAT
CA
LDH
ALT
AST
GGT
ALP
CPK
TRIG
BUN
UA
BILI
218
182
431
188
152
401
234
174
117
250
104
155
139
152
397
93
119
118
73
97
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
24
2 239
OPERATION
The cumulative number of hours of instrument
mechanical operation.
SYSTEM DISK
The number of times that the System Disk has been
accessed. When a disk has been accessed more
than 100,000 times, it should be replaced and the disk
drive cleaned. Refer to Section 3.15.
DATA DISK
The number of times that the Data Disk has been
accessed. When a disk has been accessed more
than 100,000 times, it should be replaced and the disk
drive cleaned.
TEST COUNT
A list of each chemistry channel, the name of the test
currently assigned to that channel, application code,
and test count totals for routine, calibration, control,
rerun, stat samples. The last column gives a total
count.
NO. OF SAMPLES
This line includes a total of all samples for routine,
rerun, stat, and total.
NOTE
This number resets to zero when a new system disk
is formatted.
NOTE
This number resets to zero when a new data disk is
formatted.
2.88 Cumulative Operations List
2. REPORTS
2 240
2.89 Original Absorbance
2.89.1 Introduction
The Original Absorbance reports original absorbance
readings for a specified sample and test.
2.89.2 Printing the Original Absorbance
Report
Press PARAMETER 9 ENTER to display the
SYSTEM PARAMETER screen. Move the cursor to
the Original Absorbance field and press 1 ENTER to
request an Original Absorbance printout.
2.89.3 Example of the Original
Absorbance Report
Figure 2-105 is an example of the Original Absorbance
Report.
Figure 2-105: Original Absorbance Report
2.89.4 Explanation of the Original
Absorbance Report
DATE and TIME
SAMPLE NUMBER
SELECTION screen. The range of each number is
specific to the type of sample:
2.89 Original Absorbance Monitor
2. REPORTS
1
ENTER
ORIGINAL ABS. MONITOR 01/06/93 14:39
S.NO. N001 2-03 CELL 120 (ALB 3.84 )
ID NO. 1234567890123
CB1-4 1-5 6-10 11-15 16-20 21-25 26-30 31-35 36-40 41-45 46-49
22
27
27
28
31
-2
0
1
4
31
29
28
31
35
33
32
32
29
32
33
29
33
34
31
30
34
34
34
9823
10083
10166
10244
10294
10330
10359
10379
10394
10406
10413
10420
10425
10430
10430
10435
10435
10436
10437
10435
10438
10439
10438
10440
10440
2 241
ROUTINE: SAMPLE NO. RXXX-DPP
RXXX: 001-800 (routine sequence number)
E: (emergency)
without BCR)
with BCR)
CELL NO.
This number indicates which reaction cell contains the
chemical reaction whose results are displayed below
it.
The test name and calculated results appear in
parentheses to the right of the cell number. If a data
flag exists, it appears to the right of the numeric result.
If a second test was run within the same cell, the test
name and results (as well as any existing data flags)
appear in parentheses to the right of the first test
name and results.
SERUM INDEXES RESULTS
If serum indexes are ordered on a sample, the results
are listed in the TEST 2 NAME field as well as on a
second line below the first.
ID NO.
The patient ID NO. appears immediately below the
sample number. This number represents the bar code
number if a bar code reader is being used.
2. REPORTS
PRINT ORDER
Results are printed in order of test codes.
RESULTS
Absorbance (x10
4
) is printed for four cell blanks and up
to 49 measurement cycles. The measurement data
represents the bichromatic absorbance (primary
minus secondary wavelength) for each measurement
taken in the photometric read window. When this
mode is chosen, no calibrations are performed and the
data is not stored on the data disk.
2 242
2. REPORTS
NOTES
3. MAINTENANCE
PART A - SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
3.1 Maintenance Procedures Overview .......................................................... 3 1
3.1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 3 1
3.1.2 How To Use This Chapter ................................................................................................... 3 1
3.1.3 Replacement Parts .............................................................................................................. 3 1
3.1.4 Required Cleaning Solutions ............................................................................................. 3 1
3.2 Working Information................................................................................... 3 2
3.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 3 2
3.2.2 Working Information Display.............................................................................................. 3 2
3.2.3 Working Information Timetable ......................................................................................... 3 3
3.3 Reaction System Wash .............................................................................. 3 4
3.3.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 3 4
3.3.2 Wash Procedure.................................................................................................................. 3 4
3.4 Empty Waste Solution Reservoir .............................................................. 3 5
3.4.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 3 5
3.4.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 3 5
3.5 ISE Maintenance ......................................................................................... 3 6
3.5.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 3 6
3.5.2 START CONDITIONS............................................................................................................ 3 6
3.5.3 Using the ANALYZER MAINTENANCE Screen .................................................................... 3 7
3.6 Clean DI Water Reservoir ........................................................................... 3 8
3.6.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 3 8
3.6.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 3 8
3. MAINTENANCE
Contents
3. MAINTENANCE
Contents
3.7 Check Reaction Cell Condition ................................................................. 3 9
3.7.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 3 9
3.7.2 Perform Cell Blank .............................................................................................................. 3 9
3.7.3 Clean Reaction Cells........................................................................................................... 3 9
3.8 Clean and Adjust Reaction System Components ................................. 3 11
3.8.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 11
3.8.2 Clean and Adjust Sample Probe....................................................................................... 3 11
3.8.3 Clean and Adjust Reagent Probes .................................................................................... 3 13
3.8.4 Clean and Adjust Stirrer .................................................................................................... 3 14
3.8.5 Clean Cell Rinse Unit Nozzles ........................................................................................... 3 14
3.8.6 Clean Probe and Stirrer Rinse Bath ................................................................................. 3 15
3.9 Replace Reaction Cells and Clean Reaction Bath ................................. 3 16
3.9.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 16
3.9.2 Remove Reaction Cells...................................................................................................... 3 16
3.9.3 Clean Reaction Bath .......................................................................................................... 3 17
3.9.4 Clean Reaction Bath Drain Filter ...................................................................................... 3 18
3.9.5 Reinstall Reaction Cells ..................................................................................................... 3 19
3.9.6 Cell Blank............................................................................................................................ 3 20
3.10 Clean Sample and Reagent Disk Compartments................................... 3 21
3.10.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 21
3.10.2 Clean Sample Disk Compartment ..................................................................................... 3 22
3.10.3 Clean Reagent Disk Compartments .................................................................................. 3 24
3.11 Clean Refrigerator Condenser Filter ....................................................... 3 27
3.11.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 27
3.11.2 Clean Refrigerator Condenser Filter ................................................................................ 3 27
3.12 Clean Inlet Water Filter ............................................................................. 3 28
3.12.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 28
3.12.2 Clean Inlet Water Filter ..................................................................................................... 3 29
3.13 Replace ISE Pinch Valve Tubing............................................................. 3 30
3.13.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 30
3.13.2 Replace ISE Pinch Valve Tubing ...................................................................................... 3 30
3.13.3 Perform ISE Prime ............................................................................................................. 3 31
3.14 Replace Pipettor Seals ............................................................................. 3 33
3.14.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 33
3.14.2 Disassemble Pipettor ......................................................................................................... 3 34
3.14.3 Expose Pipettor Seal ......................................................................................................... 3 35
3.14.4 Replace Sample Pipettor Seal .......................................................................................... 3 37
3.14.5 Replace Reagent Pipettor Seal ........................................................................................ 3 38
3.14.6 Reassemble Pipettor .......................................................................................................... 3 40
3.14.7 Perform an Air Purge......................................................................................................... 3 42
3.14.8 Replace ISE Pipettor Seals ............................................................................................... 3 43
3.14.9 Perform ISE Prime ............................................................................................................. 3 43
3. MAINTENANCE
Contents
PART B - UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
3.15 Floppy Disk Replacement ........................................................................ 3 45
3.15.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 45
3.15.2 Format a Blank Disk ........................................................................................................... 3 45
3.15.3 Create a New System Disk ................................................................................................ 3 46
3.15.4 Create a New Data Disk ..................................................................................................... 3 47
3.16 System Software Installation ................................................................... 3 50
3.16.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 50
3.16.2 System Software Installation ............................................................................................ 3 50
3.17 Clean Cell Rinse Unit ................................................................................ 3 53
3.17.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 53
3.17.2 Clean Clogged Nozzle ....................................................................................................... 3 53
3.17.3 Perform a Mechanism Check ............................................................................................ 3 55
3.18 Replace Photometer Lamp ...................................................................... 3 56
3.18.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 56
3.18.2 Remove Reaction Disk ....................................................................................................... 3 57
3.18.3 Replace Photometer Lamp ............................................................................................... 3 58
3.18.4 Reinstall Reaction Disk ...................................................................................................... 3 61
3.18.5 Perform Cell Blank ............................................................................................................. 3 61
3.18.6 Recalibrate ......................................................................................................................... 3 61
3.19 Clean ISE Reagent Flowpath ................................................................... 3 62
3.19.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 62
3.19.2 Clean ISE Reagent Flowpath ............................................................................................ 3 63
3.19.3 Calibrate ISE System ......................................................................................................... 3 64
3. MAINTENANCE
Contents
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
) ....................................... 3 65
3.20.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 65
3.20.2 Remove Old Cartridge ....................................................................................................... 3 66
3.20.3 Install New Cartridge ......................................................................................................... 3 67
3.20.4 Prime ISE System............................................................................................................... 3 69
3.21 Replace ISE Reference Cartridge............................................................ 3 70
3.21.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 70
3.21.2 Remove Old Cartridge ....................................................................................................... 3 71
3.21.3 Install New Cartridge ......................................................................................................... 3 73
3.21.4 Prime ISE System............................................................................................................... 3 75
3.22 Check/Refill Multiclean Solution.............................................................. 3 76
3.22.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 76
3.22.2 Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 3 76
3.23 Replace Sample Probe............................................................................. 3 79
3.23.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 79
3.23.2 Remove Sample Probe...................................................................................................... 3 80
3.23.3 Install New Sample Probe................................................................................................. 3 86
3.23.4 Check/Adjust Horizontal Sample Probe Alignment ......................................................... 3 90
3.23.5 Check/Adjust Vertical Sample Probe Alignment ............................................................. 3 91
3.23.6 Perform an Air Purge......................................................................................................... 3 91
3.24 Replace Reagent Probes ......................................................................... 3 93
3.24.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 3 93
3.24.2 Remove Reagent Probe..................................................................................................... 3 94
3.24.3 Replace Reagent Probe................................................................................................... 3 100
3.24.4 Check/Adjust Reagent Probe Alignment ........................................................................ 3 106
3.24.5 Perform an Air Purge....................................................................................................... 3 107
3. MAINTENANCE
Contents
3.25 Replace Stirring Paddle ......................................................................... 3 108
3.25.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 3 108
3.25.2 Replace Stirrer Paddle .................................................................................................... 3 108
3.25.3 Check Stirrer Action ......................................................................................................... 3 109
3.26 Load Continuous-Form Paper ............................................................... 3 111
3.26.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 3 111
3.26.2 Load Continuous-Form Paper ......................................................................................... 3 111
3.26.3 Set Paper Online.............................................................................................................. 3 115
3.27 Replace Printer Ribbon Cassette .......................................................... 3 116
3.27.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 3 116
3.27.2 Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 3 116
3. MAINTENANCE
Contents
3 1
3.1 Maintenance Procedures
Overview
3.1.1 Introduction
The following maintenance procedures are written for
an operator who attended to a BM-technical customer
training with a working knowledge of all instrument
mechanical functions, CRT displays and software
functions. The instrument must be provided with
proper care and maintenance to ensure consistent
and accurate functioning.
3.1.2 How To Use This Chapter
Each maintenance procedure is divided into two parts:
the Introduction and the Procedure.
The Introduction provides important information about
the procedure, which includes:
materials required
time required
precautions.
The Procedure gives step-by-step directions for
performing the required maintenance function. This
part frequently is divided into smaller procedure
blocks to help you organize your approach to
maintenance.
3.1.3 Replacement Parts
A replacement part may be needed for a specific
maintenance procedure.
For most efficient use of time, gather all required
materials corresponding to part- or Id.-Nr. before
starting a maintenance procedure.
3.1.4 Required Cleaning Solutions
In order to perform some of the maintenance
procedures contained in this chapter, you must
prepare the specified cleaning solutions. Brief
preparation instructions for the required cleaning
solutions are included below:
2% Hitergent
In a clean container (plastic or glass) that can be
used to store the solution, mix 98 parts deionized
water with 2 parts concentrated Hitergent. Label
the container 2% Hitergent.
0.525% Sodium Hypochlorite
In a clean container (plastic or glass) that can be
used to store the solution, prepare 90 parts
deionized water with 10 parts undiluted 5.25%
sodium hypochlorite. Once diluted this solution
should be used completely. Do not store, longer
than 1 week (cool). Old diluted solution can
contaminate instead of clean! Label the container
0.525% Sodium Hypochlorite.
1 N NaOH
Multiclean
Automatic cleaning solution, (1 N NaOH), is used
during automatic cleaning procedures.
ISE Cleaning solution
3. SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
3.1 Maintenance Procedures Overview
3 2
3.2 Working Information
3.2.1 Introduction
The WORKING INFORMATION screen displays a list
of analyzer parts that require routine maintenance.
The screen shows the date each maintenance
procedure was last performed. This screen is an on-
board maintenance log for your system.
The analyzer contains an internal timer for
maintenance that counts the appropriate time interval
down during operation and power ON. Two question
marks (??) prior to the date displayed indicate the
date for scheduled maintenance is approaching and
you should prepare to perform that maintenance
function. (80% of the maintenance time has
elapsed.) Two exclamation marks (!!) prior to the date
indicate the date for scheduled maintenance is due or
overdue and the maintenance function should be
performed as soon as possible.
On the following page is a time table showing when the
Working Information screen will display the caution
(??) and over (!!) indicators for each maintenance
function shown on the screen below.
3.2.2 Working Information Display
To display the WORKING INFORMATION screen, as
shown in Figure 3-1, press MAINTENANCE, followed
by 4 ENTER.
Figure 3-1: Working Information
After performing any maintenance function, move the
cursor to the proper field on the WORKING
INFORMATION screen and press 1 ENTER to reset
the internal timer to the current date as shown on the
Analyzer Status line.
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Working Information
PHOTOMETRIC UPDATE
Cells
Lamp
??
! !
! !
! !
! !
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
10/29/92
Input 1:If Changed (OK< 21 days, ??= 21-30 days, > 30 days) : ENTER
SEAL CHANGE
Serum
Reagent 1
Reagent 2
01/06/93
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
11/12/92
?? ISE SEAL PIECE
Internal STD
Dilution
Sipper
07/09/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
07/09/92
Syringe Filter 10/29/92
Pinch Valve Tubing
Syringe Filter 08/27/92 MONTHLY CLEANING
3-MONTH CLEANING
! !
! !
11/12/92
04/27/92
NaOH Reservoir
Maintenance Report
Cumulative Operations Report
Clear Test Counter
02/04/93
??
:
Caution
! !
: Over
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
K
Cl
Electrode
Electrode
ISE UPDATE
Na
Ref.
Electrode
Electrode
3 3
3.2.3 Working Information Timetable
* Hours powered ON excludes hours in the Sleep
Mode.
Maintenance Item Unit of Time Time ?? !!
Prior Caution Over
CELLS Calendar day 21 days 21 - 30 days > 30 days
LAMP Hours powered ON* 600 hours 600 - 750 hours > 750 hours
SEAL PIECE
SERUM
REAGENT 1
REAGENT 2
Hours of Operation 400 hours 400 - 500 hours > 500 hours
SYRINGE FILTER Hours powered ON* 600 hours 600 - 750 hours > 750 hours
PERIODICAL CLEANING
MONTHLY PROGRAM
Calender days 21 days 21 - 30 days > 30 days
PERIODICAL CLEANING
3 MONTH PROGRAM
Calender days 81 days 81 - 90 days > 90 days
NaOH Reservoir Calender days 5 days 5 - 7 days > 7 days
ISE PERIODICAL CHECK
Na CARTRIDGE
K CARTRIDGE
Cl CARTRIDGE
REF CARTRIDGE
Calender days
Calender days
Calender days
Calender days
50 days
50 days
25 days
140 days
50 - 60 days
50 - 60 days
25 - 30 days
140 - 180 days
>
>
>
>
60 days
60 days
30 days
180 days
ISE SEAL PIECE
INT. STD
DILUTION
SIPPER
Hours of Operation 400 hours 400 - 500 hours > 500 hours
SIPPER TUBE Hours powered ON* 600 hours 600 - 750 hours > 750 hours
ISE SYRINGE FILTER Hours powered ON* 600 hours 600 - 750 hours > 750 hours
3 4
3.3 Reaction System Wash
3.3.1 Introduction
The Reaction System Wash procedure is performed
automatically by the analyzer following completion of
each sampling run. The following system parts are
cleaned:
reaction cells
sample probe
reagent probes
rinse unit nozzles
stirrers.
Operator time: No additional time.
Instrument time: No additional time.
Materials Required:
Sample Cup
Hitergent Solution (100 mL)
Multiclean (1 N NaOH)
3.3.2 Wash Procedure
1 Place a sample cup containing approximately 1
mL of System Cleaning Solution in the "W1"
position on the middle ring of the sample disk, as
shown in Photograph 3-1.
2 Make sure a container with at least 10 mL of
Hitergent solution is in position 33 of both the R1
and R2 reagent disks.
3 Make sure the Multiclean is in place inside the left
front panel.
The analyzer will automatically perform the reaction
system wash at the end of the sampling cycle.
Photograph 3-1:
System Cleaning Solution
3.3 Reaction System Wash
3 5
3.4 Empty Waste Solution
Reservoir
3.4.1 Introduction
The waste solution reservoir receives sample waste
from the ISE system and reaction cell rinse unit. This
container should be emptied daily. An alarm, Empty
Waste Reservoir is issued when the container is full.
Operator time: Approximately 2 minutes.
Precaution: Contents of the waste solution
reservoir, and subsequently the
water used to rinse the
container, are potentially
biohazardous. This waste
should be handled, and
disposed of, in an appropriate
manner. Wear rubber gloves
when performing this procedure.
Materials Required:
0.525% sodium hypochlorite solution
Water for rinsing
Paper towels
3.4.2 Procedure
1 Locate the waste solution reservoir at the back of
the analyzer.
2 Lift the liquid level sensor assembly from the
waste reservoir, as shown in Photograph 3-2, and
place it on paper towels or other absorbent
material.
3 Remove the drain hose from the waste reservoir,
making sure any residual waste in the hose drains
into the waste container. Place the hose by the
liquid level sensor on the paper towels.
4 Remove the waste container and dispose of its
contents in a manner acceptable for your
institution.
5 Rinse the waste container thoroughly with water
and dispose of the rinse water in the same manner.
6 Pour 0.525% sodium hypochlorite into the waste
container until it is approximately 1 cm deep.
7 Place the waste container back in its original
position at the back of the analyzer.
8 Place the liquid level sensor assembly and drain
hose back on the waste container.
9 Properly dispose of the paper towels.
Photograph 3-2:
Waste Solution Reservoir
3.4 Empty Waste Solution Reservoir
3 6
3.5 ISE Maintenance
3.5.1 Introduction
ISE Maintenance should be initiated daily, after
finishing the routine job. Performing this procedure
cleans the ISE sample flow path. There are two ways
to initiate this procedure: from START CONDITIONS
or from ANALYZER MAINTENANCE.
After cleaning ISE flowpath, the ISE must be
calibrated before reusing it.
Operator time: Approximately 1 minute.
Instrument time: Approximately 4 minutes.
Materials Required:
Sample Cup
3.5.2 START CONDITIONS
1 Press the ROUTINE key, followed by 4 ENTER, to
display the START CONDITIONS screen. Place
a sample cup with System Cleaning Solution in the
"W2" position on the middle ring of the sample
disk.
2 Move the cursor to the ISE Maintenance entry
field, as shown in Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-2: ISE Maintenance from START
CONDITIONS
3 Press 1 Initiate ISE Maintenance just before the
last RUN ENTER. After sampling ends, the ISE
maintenance is performed.
4 Other keyboard entries may be made while the
analyzer is executing the ISE Maintenance
function. The maintenance is complete when the
analyzer status line returns to Stand-by.
5 The field enabling automatic ISE maintenance
should only be used at the last run of the day: since
ISE maintenance should only be performed once
per day. Also please note that after ISE
Maintenance (either from "Start Conditions "
Screen or from "Maintenance" Screen) the ISE
must be conditioned and calibrated prior to further
samples analysis.
3.5 ISE Maintenance
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Start Conditions
Choose 1:Initiate ISE Maintenance at End of Run 0 : No : ENTER
Start Sample No.
Repeat Calibration
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Manual Masking
Host Communication
ISE Maintenance
Print Format
Calibration Print
Clear Results
Default Sample Cup
[ ] : [ 0] [ 1]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] : [ ] - [ ]
[STD Cup ]
1
Off
Off
Off
Automatic
-
Off
Report
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
1
ENTER
3 7
3.5.3 Using the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE Screen
1 The analyzer must be in the Stand-by mode to
perform this function from the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
2 Press the MAINTENANCE key, followed by 1
ENTER to di spl ay the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
3 With the cursor in the Wash field, as shown in
Figure 3-3. Press 2 Wash ISE ENTER to initiate
the ISE maintenance. The ISE maintenance
function is complete when the analyzer status line
returns to Stand-by.
4 Perform dummy sampling with clear human serum
10x for ISE (preconditionning).
5 Calibrate the ISEs prior to running patient
samples. An alarm, Execute ISE CALIBRATION,
is issued if samples are processed without first
calibrating.
Figure 3-3: ISE Maintenance from Analyzer
Maintenance
3.5 ISE Maintenance
1
ENTER
2
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Choose 1:Wash Cells 2:Wash ISE 3:Wash Cells + ISE : ENTER
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 8
3.6 Clean DI Water Reservoir
3.6.1 Introduction
Your deionized water reservoir may or may not require
frequent cleaning, depending upon the quality of your
water supply. As a precaution, clean the reservoir
weekly. The deionized water reservoir is located
internally and does not have to be accessed to
perform the cleaning function. You cannot stop this
maintenance function once it is initiated.
3.6.2 Procedure
ENTER, to display the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
2 Move the cursor to the Water Tank field, as shown
in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4: Water Reservoir Cleaning
3 Press 1, ENTER to initiate the deionized water
reservoir cleaning.
4 Other keyboard entries may be made while the
analyzer is cleaning the deionized water reservoir.
The function is complete when the analyzer status
line returns to Stand-by.
3.6 Clean DI Water Reservoir
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 9
3.7 Check Reaction Cell
Condition
3.7.1 Introduction
During operation of the Analyzer the Cell blank quality
is automatically checked by comparison against
previous data. The operator should perform the
following actions to ensure that the "baseline" cell
blank datas stored in the instrument memory is
updated.
Weekly
Perform Cell blank procedure, this will update and
printout cell blank data for each cuvette.
Using the printout-data check that values for the 1
st
cell are < 13000 and that for all other cells the
difference does not exceed 800 from the 1
st
cell. If
these limits are exceeded the cells should be cleaned
using cell cleaning program and then cell blank should
be repeated. If limits are still exceeded the cells
should be exchanged.
Monthly
Cells should be exchanged monthly to ensure
continued good performance. Please note that it is
possible that slight scattering of the cells can occur
over this time (e.g. scratches) which will not
necessarily give poor cell blank values but can
increase the likelihood of carryover of reaction
contents.
Materials Required:
If reaction cell cleaning is required:
2% Hitergent solution
Deionized water
3.7.2 Clean Reaction Cells
1 Move the cursor to the Wash field. Press 1 ENTER
to initiate a wash cells.
3.7.3 Perform Cell Blank
MAINTENANCE screen.
2 Move the cursor to the Cell Blank field, as shown
in Figure 3-5 on the following page, and press 1
(Initiate & Print Cell Blank) ENTER to initiate a cell
blank. The cell blank function is complete when
the Analyzer Status line returns to Stand-by.
3.7 Check Reaction Cell Integrity
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
3 10
Figure 3-5: Initiate Cell Blank
3 Verify that the cell blank results are 13000 or less
for reaction cell number 1 (at all wavelengths) and
800 for reaction cells 2-120. If the results are
outside the specified range, clean the reaction
cells, following the instructions in Section 3.7.3. If
the cells are more than one month old, they should
be replaced, following the instructions in
Section 3.9.
3.7 Check Reaction Cell Integrity
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Choose 1:Read From FD 2:Write to FD : ENTER
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 11
3.8 Clean and Adjust Reaction
System Components
3.8.1 Introduction
Read the entire procedure below before adjusting any
probes. Failure to follow the procedure as outlined
may result in probe damage. Sample and reagent
probes should be cleaned daily. Reaction system
components should be adjusted weekly.
This procedure is divided into five parts:
clean/adjust sample probes
clean/adjust reagent probes
clean/adjust stirring paddles
clean rinse unit nozzles
clean probe rinse baths.
Instrument time: Approximately 5 minutes
(concurrent with operator time).
Precaution: Do not use unnecessary force
when adjusting probes.
Materials Required:
0.525% sodium hypochlorite
Ethanol or Isopropyl Alcohol
Gauze squares
Deionized water
50cc syringe (with tubing attached)
If internal cleaning of probes is required:
Wire Stylet
Multiclean (or 1 N NaOH)
3.8 Clean and Adjust Reaction System Components
3.8.2 Clean and Adjust Sample Probe
NOTE
Remove all sample cups and tubes from the following
positions on the sample disk prior to beginning this
procedure: position 1 on the outer ring, position W1
on the middle ring and position S18 on the inner ring.
ENTER to display the MECHANISMS CHECK
screen, shown in Figure 3-6 on the following page.
Figure 3-6: Probe Adjust
2 Press 1 (S. Probe (Horiz.)) ENTER to initiate a
horizontal sample probe adjust. Do not continue
2
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Mechanisms Check
Probe Adjust
Mechanism Check
ISE Check
Printer Check
Alarm Log
Program Check
FD Special Copy
C-RAM Info Read/Write
[ ]
H1 : 84.6 H2 : 42.4
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
3 12
until the probe is positioned over the reaction disk.
3 Ground yoursel f by touchi ng the ISE
compartment screw prior to wiping the sample
probe.
4 Remove sample disk. Press sample stop to
position the probe over sample disk area. Moisten
a small gauze square with ethanol or isopropanol
alcohol. Beginning from the top of the sample
probe, wipe, in a downward motion, the entire
length of the sample probe, as shown in
Photograph 3-3. Do not touch the sample probe tip
with your hands. Press sample stop to position
probe over the cells. Replace sample disk.
Photograph 3-3:
Wipe Sample Probe
5 If the sample probe is clogged or heavily
contaminated, proceed to Section 3.23. If the
sample probe is not clogged or heavily
contaminated, proceed to Step 6.
6 Check the sample probe for correct alignment
over the reaction cells. The probe tip must be
centered over the reaction cell, as shown in
Figure 3-7.
Figure 3-7: Align Sample Probe
CAUTION
DO NOT bend the probe sharply. This can crimp the
probe, thereby requiring replacement. The correct
alignment of all probes is critical for proper functioning
of the instrument. Failure to correctly align all probes
can result in damage to the instrument and/or
incorrect test results.
7 While firmly holding the probe arm, gently bend the
probe, in an arc, over its entire length to center its
tip over the reaction cell beneath it.
8 Press the SAMPLING STOP key to move the
probe to different positions over the sample disk
and ISE dilution vessel. Each time the
SAMPLING STOP key is pressed, the probe
moves to a different position. This can be used to
check the probe alignment at each of the stop
positions.
9 Press STOP to end adjustment.
1
ENTER
Reaction Cell
Probe
+
+
SAMPLING
STOP
3 13
Do not continue until the probe is at rinse
station-position.
3.8.3 Clean and Adjust Reagent
Probes
1 Press 3 (Reagent Probes) ENTER from the Probe
Adjust field to initiate a reagent probe adjust. Do
not continue until the probes are positioned
over the reaction disk.
2 Place paper towel under the reagent probe to make
sure no alcohol comes in contact with the reaction
cells. Moisten a small gauze square with ethanol
or isopropyl alcohol and gently wipe, in a down-
ward motion, the tip of the reagent probes.
3 If a reagent probe is clogged or heavily
contaminated, proceed to Section 3.24. If a
reagent probe is not clogged or heavily
contaminated, proceed to Step 5.
4 Check the reagent probes for correct alignment
over the reaction cells. The probe tips must be
centered over the reaction cells, as shown in
Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-8: Align Reagent Probes
CAUTION
DO NOT bend the probe sharply. This can crimp the
probe, thereby requiring replacement. The correct
alignment of all probes is critical for proper functioning
of the instrument. Failure to correctly align all probes
can result in damage to the instrument and/or
incorrect test results.
5 While firmly supporting the probe arm, gently bend
the probe, in an arc, over its entire length to center
its tip over the reaction cell beneath it.
Do not continue until the probes are at rinse
station position.
3
ENTER
STOP
STOP
Reaction Cell
R2
R1
Stirrer
Reagent
Probe
3 14
Do not continue until thestirrers are at rinse
station position.
3.8.5 Clean Cell Rinse Unit Nozzles
1 Moisten a small gauze square with a 2% Hitergent
solution and gently wipe, in a downward motion,
the tip of the cell rinse unit nozzles.
2 Apply deionized water to another gauze square
and wipe any excess detergent from the nozzles.
3.8.4 Clean and Adjust Stirrers
1 Press 4 (Stirrers) ENTER from the Probe Adjust
field to initiate a stirrer adjust. Do not continue
until the stirrers have been positioned.
2 Moisten a small gauze square with a 2% Hitergent
solution and gently wipe, in a downward motion,
the tip of the stirrers.
3 Apply deionized water to another gauze square
and wipe any excess detergent from the stirrers.
4 Check the stirrers for correct alignment over the
reaction cells. The stirrer must be centered over
the reaction cells, as shown in Figure 3-9. If they
are not, contact Boehringer Mannheim Technical
Support.
Figure 3-9: Align Stirrers
4
ENTER
STOP
Reaction Cell
R2
R1
Stirrer
Reagent
Probe
3 15
3.8.6 Clean Probe and Stirrer Rinse
Baths
1 Fill a 50 cc syringe (with tubing attached) with
0.525% sodium hypochlorite (Wash Solution).
2 Inject the Wash Solution (empty the syringe) into
the drain hole of the sample probe rinse bath as
Photograph 3-4:
Clean Rinse Bath
3 Fill the syringe with deionized water.
4 Inject the water (empty the syringe) into the drain
hole of the sample probe rinse bath.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 for both reagent probe
rinse baths and both stirrer rinse baths.
NOTE
If the probes or stirrers are in the way, making it
difficult to reach the rinse bath drain holes, put that
component into a probe or stirrer adjust. This will
move the component out of the way. Follow
instructions in Section 3.8 for performing the adjusts.
3 16
3.9 Replace Reaction Cells and
Clean Reaction Bath
3.9.1 Introduction
The reaction cells should be replaced and the reaction
bath cleaned monthly.
remove reaction cells and disk
clean reaction bath
clean reaction bath drain filter
reinstall reaction disk and new cells
perform cell blank.
NOTE
New reaction cells should be soaked overnight in 2%
Hitergent before installing. If an emergency makes
this impossible, wipe the outside of the new cells with
full strength Hitergent before installing. In addition,
perform a Wash Cells function from the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen immediately before
performing the Cell Blank.
Precautions: Handle the reaction cells and
reaction disk carefully.
Do not scratch the photometer
windows.
Do not touch optical surfaces.
Clean only the photometer
window sides that are in
contact with reaction bath
water.
Wear rubber gloves when
cleaning the reaction bath to
prevent the introduction of
contaminants into the system.
Materials Required:
Reaction cell set
Deionized water
Gauze squares
Reaction bath drain filter
3.9.2 Remove Reaction Cells
1 Remove the retaining nut securing the rinse unit.
Carefully lift the entire unit off of the mounting
bracket and set it aside, as shown in Photograph
3-5.
Photograph 3-5:
Remove Cell Rinse Unit
3.9 Replace Reaction Cells and Clean Reaction Bath
3 17
2 Loosen and remove the two thumbscrews on each
reaction cell section, as shown in Photograph 3-6,
and set them aside. (The thumbscrews will be
reused when new reaction cells are installed.)
Photograph 3-6:
Loosen Thumbscrews
3 Lift each reaction cell section out of the reaction
disk and discard it.
4 If you do not wish to clean the bath, proceed to
Section 3.9.4.
3.9.3 Clean Reaction Bath
ENTER to display the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen. Move the cursor to the
INC. Water Exchange field, as shown in Figure 3-
10 on the following page.
Figure 3-10: Reaction Bath Exchange
2 Press 1 ENTER to initiate the reaction bath
exchange. After the water drains, power OFF the
instrument.
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 18
NOTE
An alternative method of draining the reaction bath is
to use a 50 cc (or larger) syringe to manually remove
the water.
CAUTION
DO NOT scratch the photometer windows. Clean only
where they come into contact with the reaction bath
water. Use only gauze moistened with 2% Hitergent.
3 Loosen the retaining nut, as shown in Photograph
3-7, and remove the reaction disk from the
analyzer.
Photograph 3-7:
Remove Reaction Disk
4 Using a clean gauze square moistened with 2%
Hitergent solution, carefully wipe the photometer
window, as shown in Photograph 3-8.
Photograph 3-8:
Clean Photometer Window
5 Using a clean gauze square moistened with 2%
Hitergent solution, carefully wipe the inside
surfaces of the reaction bath, as shown in
Photograph 3-9.
Photograph 3-9:
Clean Reaction Bath
3 19
3.9.4 Clean Reaction Bath Drain Filter
1 Remove the reaction bath drain filter, located at the
outlet port of the reaction bath, as shown in
Photograph 3-10.
Photograph 3-10:
Remove Reaction Bath Drain Filter
2 Wash (backflush) the filter with deionized water.
3 Replace the incubation bath drain filter.
4 Using a beaker, fill the reaction bath with 500 mL
of deionized water. This eliminates foaming that
may occur at power UP.
3.9.5 Reinstall Reaction Cells
1 Replace the reaction disk and tighten the retaining
nut. Ensure that the pin on the analyzer aligns with
the hole in the top of the reaction disk.
2 Place the new reaction cell sections in the reaction
disk, handling them by their edges only, as shown
in Photograph 3-11. Make sure you have soaked
or wiped the new reaction cells with Hitergent as
outlined on page 3-18. Do not touch the optical
surfaces.
Photograph 3-11:
Replace Reaction Cells
3 To ensure that each reaction cell section is seated
properly, align the pins in each set of reaction cells
as shown in Photograph 3-12.
Photograph 3-12:
Align Pins
3 20
4 Reinstall the thumbscrews securely, as shown in
Photograph 3-13.
Photograph 3-13:
Reinstall Thumbscrews
5 Return the rinse unit to its proper position over the
reaction disk. Make sure the pin on the mounting
bracket aligns with the hole in the bottom of the
cell rinse unit.
6 Finger-tighten the retaining nut on the rinse unit
mounting bracket, as shown in Photograph 3-14.
Photograph 3-14:
Replace Cell Rinse Unit
3.9.6 Cell Blank
1 Turn the instrument power ON.
2 Perform other monthly items (time for foam/air
bubbles to disappear).
3 Cell Wash function from ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
4 Cell Blank
If cell is not < 13000 or the remaining cells 2 - 120
are not within 800, check the following items:
- the new cells have not been soaked/wiped off
well enough so reminders of the separator fluid
are on the cells, causing drifted cell blank
values.
- the cell blank procedure has been carried out to
soon after "Bath exchange" and foam
develloped during exchange is still on the cell
surfaces and windows.
In both cases perform 1 - 2 additional cell wash
procedures and than start a new cell blank
procedure.
- If cell 1 is > 13000 check photometer and if
necessary replace lamp.
3 21
3.10 Clean Sample and Reagent
Disk Compartments
3.10.1 Introduction
Clean the sample and reagent disk compartments
monthly. As always, sample and reagent spills
should be cleaned up as they occur. If excessive
condensation occurs, the disk compartments may
need to be cleaned more frequently.
This procedure is divided into two parts:
clean sample disk compartment
clean reagent disk compartments.
Precautions: The instrument must be in
Stand-by or OFF.
Handl e the sampl e and
reagent disks carefully.
Do not scratch the bar code
reader windows.
Wear rubber gloves!
Materials Required:
Paper towels
Gauze squares
Alcohol prep pad
3.10 Clean Sample and Reagent Disk Compartments
3 22
3.10.2 Clean Sample Disk Compartment
1 Move the handle of the sample disk evaporation
cover to the OPEN position, as shown in
Photograph 3-15, and remove the cover.
2 Lift the outer ring of the sample disk from the
analyzer, as shown in Photograph 3-16, and place
it on a flat surface.
3 Grasp each of the white snap fasteners on the
inner ring of the sample disk and pull upward, as
shown in Photograph 3-17, to unfasten the snaps.
Photograph 3-15:
Remove Evaporation Cover
Photograph 3-16:
Remove Outer Ring
Photograph 3-17:
Unfasten Snaps
3 23
4 Lift the inner ring of the sample disk from the
analyzer, as shown in Photograph 3-18, and place
it on a flat surface.
5 Wipe the bar code reader with a clean gauze
square using alcohol or glass cleaner, as shown in
Photograph 3-19.
6 Clean the inside of the sample disk compartment,
both inner and outer rings, with gauze or paper
towel, as shown in Photograph 3-20. Make sure
you remove all condensation.
Photograph 3-18:
Remove Inner Ring
Photograph 3-19:
Clean Bar Code Reader
Photograph 3-20:
Clean Inside of Disk
3 24
7 Replace the inner sample disk and press down on
the white snap fasteners to secure the disk.
8 Replace the outer sample disk.
9 Replace the sample disk evaporation cover. Make
sure the guide pins are aligned properly, as shown
in Photograph 3-21.
Guide Pins
Align in holes
3.10.3 Clean Reagent Disk
Compartments
Use this procedure to clean both reagent disk
compartments.
1 Turn the locking handle on the reagent disk
evaporation cover to the OPEN position, as
shown in Photograph 3-22, and remove the cover.
Photograph 3-21:
Align Guide Pins on
Evaporation Cover
Photograph 3-22:
Unlock Reagent Cover
3 25
2 Grasp each of the white snap fasteners on the
reagent disk, as shown in Photograph 3-23, and
pull upward to unfasten the snaps.
3 Remove the reagent disk from the instrument, as
shown in Photograph 3-24, and place it on a flat,
stable surface. If maintenance procedure is
necessary put reagents into fridge.
4 Wipe the reagent bar code reader with clean gauze
using alcohol or glass cleaner, as shown in
Photograph 3-25.
Photograph 3-23:
Unlock Snap Fasteners
Photograph 3-24:
Remove Reagent Disk
Photograph 3-25:
Clean Bar Code Reader
3 26
5 Wipe the inside surface of the reagent disk
compartment with paper towels or other absorbent
material, as shown in Photograph 3-26, to remove
any foreign material (spills, condensation, etc.).
Do not wipe condensation or reagents onto the bar
code reader window.
6 Replace the reagent disk. Make sure the hole in
the reagent disk aligns with the screw as shown in
Photograph 3-27.
7 Press each white snap fastener down to secure the
disk.
8 Repeat the entire procedure with the other reagent
disk.
Hole in reagent disk
aligns with Allen screw
9 Replace and lock both reagent disk covers, as
shown in Photograph 3-28. Verify that the opening
in the reagent cover is in the proper position
between the guide bars on the top of the instrument
to allow the reagent probes access to the reagent
bottles.
Guide Bars
Photograph 3-26:
Clean Reagent Disks
Photograph 3-27:
Replace Reagent Disk
Photograph 3-28:
Replace Reagent Covers
3 27
3.11 Clean Refrigerator
Condenser Filter
3.11.1 Introduction
The refrigerator condenser filter and condenser
cooling fins must be kept free of dust or dirt
accumulation. Perform this procedure monthly.
Precautions: Instrument power must be in
Stand-by or OFF.
Take care not to bend the
condenser cooling fins.
DO NOT use compressed air
to clean the condenser cooling
fins as this will blow dust and
dirt into the instrument.
Materials Required:
Paper towels
Water for rinsing
Vacuum cleaner
3.11.2 Clean Refrigerator Condenser
Filter
1 Turn instrument power OFF or wait for Stand-by,
then open both of the front instrument panels.
2 Remove the condenser filter from its retaining
bracket in front of the condenser, as shown in
Photograph 3-29.
Photograph 3-29:
Remove Condenser Filter
3 Rinse the filter with water; blot dry with paper
towels or vacuum.
WARNING
Avoid touching the cooling fins on the condenser unit
as they are very sharp and can cause personal injury.
4 Vacuum the cooling fins on the front of the
condenser unit. (A soft bristle brush can be used
instead of, or in addition to, the vacuum cleaner.)
5 Reinstall the condenser filter.
6 Close the front instrument panels.
7 Turn the instrument power ON, if powered OFF
during the procedure.
3.11 Clean Refrierator Condensor Filter
3 28
3.12 Clean Inlet Water Filter
3.12.1 Introduction
Performance of this procedure prevents clogging of
the water system and the reaction bath drain. Perform
this procedure quarterly.
Stand-by or OFF.
The external instrument
water supply must be OFF.
handl i ng i nternal water
system components to assist
in preventing the introduction
of contaminants into the
system.
Materials Required:
Water pump filter (if replacement is required)
Paper towels (in case of spilled water)
Deionized water
500 mL beaker
3 29
3.12.2 Clean Inlet Water Filter
1 Turn the power switch to the OFF position or verify
the analyzer is in Stand-by. Turn off the external
water supply.
2 Place a 500 mL beaker (or a similar type container)
beneath the inlet water manifold.
3 Turn the knurled ring on the water filter cap
counterclockwise and disconnect the inlet water
hose, as shown in Photograph 3-30.
4 Unscrew the water filter from the inlet water hose
connector, as shown in Photograph 3-31. Place
the hose in the beaker.
5 Clean the filter thoroughly with deionized water,
then reinstall the filter in the inlet water hose
connector.
6 Reconnect the inlet water hose to the inlet water
manifold, as shown in Photograph 3-32.
7 Turn the external water supply ON.
8 Turn the power switch to the ON position if the
analyzer was powered OFF during the procedure.
,
Photograph 3-30:
Disconnect Inlet Water Hose
Photograph 3-31:
Remove Filter
Photograph 3-32:
Reconnect Inlet Water Hose
3 30
3.13 Replace ISE Pinch Valve
Tubing
3.13.1 Introduction
The ISE pinch valve tubing must be periodically
replaced. Perform this procedure quarterly.
Precaution: The instrument must be in
Stand-by or OFF.
Wear rubber gloves.
Materials Required:
ISE pinch valve tubing
3.13.2 Replace ISE Pinch Valve Tubing
1 Loosen the retaining nut and lift off the ISE
compartment cover, as shown in Photograph
3-33.
Photograph 3-33:
Remove ISE Cover
3.13 Replace ISE Pinch Valve Tubing
3 31
2 Remove the pinch valve tubing by pulling it off of
the stainless steel connectors on either side of the
compartment, then through the pinch valve, as
3 Push one end of the new pinch valve tubing onto
one of the stainless steel connectors on either
side of the pinch valve.
4 Thread the pinch valve tubing through the pinch
valve and push the end of the tubing onto the
remaining stainless steel connector.
5 Replace the ISE compartment cover and tighten
the retaining nut.
3.13.3 Perform ISE Prime
MAINTENANCE screen.
Photograph 3-34:
Remove Pinch Valve Tubing
1
ENTER
3 32
2 Move the cursor to the ISE Prime field, as shown
in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11: ISE Prime
3 Press 3 (Int. Ref. + DIL) ENTER to initiate an ISE
prime. The ISE prime function is complete when
the analyzer status line returns to Stand-by.
4 Perform ISE Calibration.
3
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Choose 1:Int. Ref. 2:DIL 3:Int. Ref. + DIL 4:KCl 5:Prime All : ENTER
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 33
3.14 Replace Pipettor Seals
3.14.1 Introduction
Pipettor seals should be replaced every 500 hours of
operation. Based on the analyzer working 8 hours per
day, 5 days per week this frequency is every three
months. If your analyzers work load is higher, pipettor
seals may require more frequent replacement.
This procedure is divided into seven parts:
disassemble pipettor
expose pipettor seal
replace sample pipettor seal
replace reagent pipettor seal (includes ISE
pipettors)
reassemble pipettor
perform an air purge
ISE prime.
Stand-by or OFF.
Do not crimp (bend) pipettor
tubing.
Perform the enti re seal
replacement procedure on
one pipettor put clean paper
on to a table to work on before
proceeding to the next.
handling pipettor components
and tubi ng to assi st i n
preventing the introduction of
contaminants into the system.
Materials Required:
Sample pipettor:
Syringe barrel o-ring
O-ring
Seals and spacer
Reagent pipettors:
O-ring
Seal
ISE pipettors:
O-ring
Seal
Spanner wrench
Absorbent towels
Gauze squares
3 34
3.14.2 Disassemble Pipettor
1 Open the front instrument panels.
2 Have dry gauze ready to catch water spillage.
3 Disconnect the tubing at the top of the locking
screw (Photograph 3-36) by turning its retaining nut
counterclockwise.
4 Hold a dry gauze square or other absorbent
material next to the side tubing on the pipettor;
disconnect this tubing by turning its retaining nut
counterclockwise. Use a gauze square to absorb
water as it drains from the tubing, as shown in
Photograph 3-35.
5 Loosen the knurled locking screw from the top of
the pi pettor assembl y by turni ng i t
counterclockwise, as shown in Photograph 3-36.
5 Carefully lift the syringe assy a little bit so the blue
blase comes free from the aluminium mount block.
While taking care that the plunger comes free from
the U-shoped slot without bending (!) and the glass
barrel to come out of the locking screw pull the
syringe assy completely towards you. In case of
blocking lift further, or completely remove the blue
locking screw on top of the glass barrel.
Photograph 3-35:
Disconnect Pipettor Tube
Photograph 3-36:
Loosen Locking Screw
Photograph 3-37:
Remove Syringe Assembly
3 35
7 Remove the glass syringe barrel. Remove the o-
ring from the top of the barrel. Set them aside in
a safe place. Remove the o-ring that fits below the
syringe barrel, as shown in Photograph 3-38, and
set in a safe place. (Note: The o-ring that fits
above the syringe barrel may not be present on
your analyzer or sticks in the blue locking screw;
check and remove the small o-ring out of the
locking screw. This is normal and does not affect
the function of the 911.)
3.14.3 Expose Pipettor Seal
1 Turn the syringe holder upside down and expose
the plunger retaining screw.
2 Apply the spanner wrench to the plunger retaining
screw, as shown in Photograph 3-39, and turn the
screw counterclockwise until it is loose.
Photograph 3-38:
Remove O-ring
Photograph 3-39:
Remove Plunger Retaining Screw
3 36
3 Turn the syringe holder right side up and carefully
lift the syringe holder off of the plunger. Leave
all of the parts on the plunger, as shown in
Photographs 3-40 and 3-41 to the right.
4
Photograph 3-40:
Sample Plunger
Photograph 3-41:
Reagent and ISE Plunger
IF... THEN...
you are replacing the
sample pipettor seal
proceed to Section
3.14.4.
you are replacing a
reagent pipettor seal
or ISE pipettor seal
proceed to Section
3.14.5.
3 37
3.14.4 Replace Sample Pipettor Seal
1 Remove the first and second seals and spacer
from the plunger, as shown in Photograph 3-42.
2 Wipe the plunger with a gauze square to remove
any debris, carefully!
3 Ensure that the retaining screw and spring are
positioned on the plunger, then place a new seal
onto the plunger, closed end first.
4 Thread the new spacer onto the plunger, and follow
it with the second seal, open end first. Replace the
seals as shown in Figure 3-12.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten the syringe retaining screw. If the
retaining screw is overtightened, the seal piece wears
out quickly and the plunger may bend, requiring
replacement.
Photograph 3-42:
Remove Sample Probe Seals
Figure 3-12:
Sample Pipettor Seal
SECOND
SEAL
FIRST
SEAL
RETAINING
SCREW
SPACER SPRING
3 38
5 With the syringe oriented vertically. Place the
plunger back into the syringe holder. Tighten the
retaining screw with the spanner wrench until the
screw is flush with the bottom surface of the
syringe holder, as shown in Photograph 3-43.
6 Proceed to Section 3.14.6, Reassemble Pipettor.
3.14.5 Replace Reagent Pipettor Seal
1 Remove the seal from the plunger, as shown in
Photograph 3-44.
2 Wipe the plunger with a gauze square or other
absorbent material to remove any debris,
carefully!
Photograph 3-43:
Replace Retaining Screw
Photograph 3-44:
Remove Reagent Pipettor Seal
3 39
3 After you ensure that the retaining screw, spring
and press piece are positioned on the plunger,
place a new seal, with its flat surface up, onto the
plunger, as shown in Figure 3-13. The spring fits
in the hollow portion of the press piece.
CAUTION
Do not overtighten the syringe retaining screw. If the
retaining screw is overtightened, the seal piece wears
out quickly and the plunger may bend, requiring
replacement.
4 Place the plunger back into the syringe holder.
With the syringe oriented vertically, as shown in
Photograph 3-45, tighten the retaining screw with
the spanner wrench until the screw is flush with the
bottom surface of the syringe holder.
5 Proceed to Section 3.14.6, Reassemble Pipettor.
Figure 3-13:
Reagent Pipettor Seal
Photograph 3-45:
Replace Retaining Screw
RETAINING
SCREW
SPRING
PRESS
PIECE
SEAL
3 40
3.14.6 Reassemble Pipettor
1 Place the syringe holder o-ring into the syringe
holder. The sample pipettor is used in Photograph
3-46 for illustration. If the o-ring is damaged it
should be replaced.
2 Before replacing, all barrels should be cleaned with
0,5% Hypochloride solution to remove any growth
of alges/bacteriae and flushed with water.
3 Inspect the syringe barrel for chips or cracks at the
top and bottom. If the syringe barrel is etched or
damaged in any way, it should be replaced. Place
the syringe barrel over the piston, onto the syringe
holder, as shown in Photograph 3-47. It is easier
to place the barrel back on if the barrel and syringe
holder are dry.
CAUTION
If the syringe holder is not properly seated in its
mounting block recess, damage to the syringe
assembly may occur.
Photograph 3-46:
Replace Syringe Holder O-ring
Photograph 3-47:
Replace Syringe Barrel
3 41
4 Place the syringe holder back onto its mounting
block by tilting the top of the syringe toward the
instrument, as shown in Photograph 3-48. Ensure
that the syringe holder is in the recess on the top
surface of the mounting block and the plunger is
guided into the U-slot simultaneously.
5 Rotate the syringe holder until the side tube port is
positioned to accept the pipettor tubing.
6 Finger-tighten the top knurled locking screw, as
shown in Photograph 3-49. Ensure that syringe
assembly is seated correctly (not loose or
crooked).
7 After tightening the blue locking screw on top of the
glass barrel, place back, if present before, the
small O-ring via the hole of the blue locking screw
on top of the glass barrel, as shown in Photograph
3-50.
Photograph 3-48:
Replace Barrel and Holder
Photograph 3-49:
Tighten Locking Screw
Photograph 3-50:
Position the Plunger
3 42
CAUTION
The top and side tubing retaining nuts can be
damaged if excessive force is applied when
replacing them. Take care not to cross-thread these
nuts.
8 Reconnect the pipettors top tubing and finger-
tighten its retaining nut.
9 Reconnect the side tubing and finger-tighten its
retaining nut.
3.14.7 Perform an Air Purge
MAINTENANCE screen.
2 Move the cursor to the Air Purge entry field, as
Figure 3-14: Air Purge
3 Press 1 (Start) ENTER to begin execution of the air
purge. The air purge function is complete when
the Analyzer Status line returns to Stand-by.
4 When the air purge is complete, inspect the
pipettors to ensure that no air remains in the
pipettors, and no leaks are visible at any of their
fittings.
If desired, a precision check can be performed to
verify pipettor precision.
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
IF... THEN...
the sample or reagent
seals were replaced
proceed to Section
3.14.7.
the ISE seals were
replaced
proceed to Section
3.14.9.
3 43
3.14.8 Replace ISE Pipettor Seals
To replace the ISE pipettor seals, follow the same
procedures outlined for replacing the reagent pipettor
seals. Refer to Section 3.14.3. In addition, an ISE
Prime must be performed. The sipper syringe
contains biohazardous materials. Use caution.
3.14.9 Perform ISE Prime
ENTER to di spl ay the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
2 Move the cursor to the ISE Prime entry field, as
3 Press the key corresponding to the desired prime,
followed by ENTER to execute the ISE prime:
1 (Int. Ref.) ENTER
2 (DIL) ENTER
3 (Int. Ref. + DIL) ENTER
4 (KCl) ENTER
5 (Prime All) ENTER
The ISE prime function is complete when the
Analyzer Status line returns to Stand-by.
4 After the ISE Prime is complete, inspect the
pipettors to ensure that no air remains in the
pipettors and no leaks are visible at any of their
fittings.
If desired, a precision check can be performed to
verify pipettor precision.
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 44
NOTES
3 45
3.15 Floppy Disk Replacement
3.15.1 Introduction
The floppy disks must be replaced, when the disks
have been accessed 100,000 times. The instrument
automatically keeps track of the number of times the
disks are accessed and issues an alarm, Replace FD
(alarm code 125-1 or 125-2) at power up when the limit
is reached.
Replacement System and Data disks may be
purchased from Boehringer Mannheim, or copies
may be made onto appropriate blank diskettes (after
they are formatted). Blank diskettes may be
purchased from most office supply or computer
supply stores and must meet the following
specifications:
Double sided, unformatted, 3.5 inch
High density (2.0 Megabytes)
Double track (80 sectors/track)
135 TPI
This procedure is divided into four parts:
format a new blank disk
create a new system disk
create a new data disk.
Stand-by.
Use only blank disks that
meet
the specifications outlined
above.
Wait until a requested function
is complete before attempting
another keyboard entry.
Materials Required: Boehringer Mannheim
Catalog Number:
Blank disks obtain locally
3.15.2 Format a Blank Disk
MAINTENANCE screen.
2 Advance the cursor to the FD Utility entry field, as
Figure 3-16: Format Blank Disk
3. UNSCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Choose 1:Format FD Dr. 2 2:Copy FD Dr. 1 (to 2) 3.Format & Copy : ENTER
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 46
CAUTION
Failure to replace the data disk in drive 2 with a blank
disk will result in the LOSS OF ALL DATA ON THE
DATA DISK.
3 Remove the data disk from drive 2 and insert the
disk to be formatted.
4 Press 1 (Format FD in Drive 2) ENTER and the CRT
displays "Are You Sure?".
5 Press 1 (Continue) ENTER and the instrument will
format the new disk, or press 0 (Cancel) ENTER to
abort this function. (When the cursor moves to the
next entry field, the formatting procedure
is complete.)
3.15.3 Create a New System Disk
NOTE
A formatted blank disk must be used to create a new
system disk. Refer to Section 3.15.3 for disk
formatting instructions. Boehringer Mannheim
recommends storing the master copy of your system
disk in a safe place, and working from a copy of the
master system disk. Section 3.15.4 explains how to
create a copy of the master system disk.
MAINTENANCE screen.
Figure 3-17: Create System Disk
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 47
3 Place the master system disk in drive 1. Remove
the data disk from disk drive 2, and replace it with
a formatted blank disk.
4 Press 2 (Copy FD Drive 1 to Drive 2) ENTER and
the CRT displays "Are You Sure?".
copy the system disk in drive 1 onto the blank disk
in drive 2, or press 0 (Cancel) ENTER to stop this
function. When the cursor moves to the next entry
field, the copy procedure is complete.
6 Remove the newly copied system disk from drive
2. Attach a label indicating the drive number,
version number of system disk and date of
creation. Properly store the master system disk
and insert the copy of the system disk back into
drive 1. Insert the data disk back into drive 2.
2
ENTER
ENTER
1
3.15.4 Create a New Data Disk
NOTE
A formatted blank disk must be used to create a new
data disk. Refer to Section 3.15.3 for disk formatting
instructions.
MAINTENANCE screen.
Figure 3-18: Create Data Disk
3 Remove the system disk from drive 1 and place it
in its protective envelope.
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 48
4 Remove the data disk from drive 2. Place the data
disk to be copied in drive 1, then place a formatted
blank disk in drive 2.
5 Press 2 (Copy FD Dr. (1 to 2)) ENTER and the CRT
displays "Are You Sure?".
copy the data disk in drive 1 onto the blank disk in
drive 2, or press 0 (Cancel) ENTER to abort this
field, the copy procedure is complete.
7 Remove the old data disk from disk drive 1 and
replace it with the system disk.
8 Press the ROUTINE key, followed by 4 ENTER to
display the START CONDITIONS screen.
9 Advance the cursor to the Clear Results entry
Figure 3-19: Clear Results
CAUTION
Clearing all results also clears individual daily control
results. If this is not desired, individually clear normal
and stat data using options 1 and 2.
10 Press 4 (All) ENTER and the CRT displays
"Are You Sure?".
2
ENTER
1
ENTER
4
ENTER
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
4 Start Conditions
Choose 1:Clear Routine Sample Results 2:Stats 3:Controls 4:All : ENTER
Start Sample No.
Repeat Calibration
Routine Rerun Mode
Stat Rerun Mode
Manual Masking
Host Communication
ISE Maintenance
Print Format
Calibration Print
Clear Results
Default Sample Cup
[ ] : [ 0] [ 1]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] : [ ] - [ ]
[STD Cup ]
1
Off
Off
Off
Automatic
-
Off
Report
On
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
3 49
clear all copied patient files from the new Data
Disk, or press 0 (Cancel) ENTER to abort this
field, the data clear procedure is complete.
ENTER
1
3 50
3.16 System Software
Installation
3.16.1 Introduction
From time to time, Boehringer Mannheim will provide
you with enhanced system software for your
instrument. The following procedure contains
instructions for installing new system disk software.
Precautions: Instrument power must be
OFF, initially.
3.16.2 System Software Installation
1 Before installing a new system disk, ensure that
you have made a working copy of your current
master system disk. The working copy should be
used when performing the new software
installation procedure.
2 Place the new system disk and your existing data
disk in the appropriate drives and power up the
analyzer.
3 After the analyzer has gone to Stand-by, remove
the new system disk from the disk drive and
replace it with the old system disk.
MAINTENANCE screen.
5 Move the cursor to the Parameter Read/Write
Figure 3-20:
Read Parameters From Old System Disk
6 Press 1 (Read from FD) ENTER. When the prompt
Are You Sure? appears at the bottom of the
screen, press 1 (Continue) ENTER to read the
operating parameters from the old system disk into
memory. The parameter read function is complete
when the Analyzer Status line returns to Stand-by.
7 Press the ROUTINE key, followed by 1 ENTER to
3.16 System Software Insatllation
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
1
ENTER
3 51
display the REAGENT STATUS screen.
Figure 3-21: Check For Parameters
Verify that your parameters are present by checking
the test key matrix on the bottom of the screen. The
matrix must match your keyboard setup on
the analyzer.
If the matrix does not match the keyboard, perform
steps 3-7 again. If it still does not match, call
Customer Technical Support.
NOTE
Another way to verify that your parameters are present
is to display the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen. Press the PARAMETER key followed by 1
ENTER. Once the screen is displayed, press any test
key and verify that the parameters for that test are
correct by checking the display against the
appropriate application sheet.
1
ENTER
8 After verifying that your parameters are present,
remove the old system disk from the disk drive
and replace it with the new system disk.
ENTER to call up the ANALYZER MAINTENANCE
screen.
Figure 3-22:
Write Parameters to New System Disk
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Reagent Status
Registration
Manual Set
Cancel
Print
Hitergent Disk 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
11
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 S.IND
ISE A B C
D E F
G H I
J K L
MON. CHEM6 CHEM7
ALL
ISE Int. Ref.
ISE Dil
ISE KCl
2
[ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] 80 mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
[ ] mL
Y e s
Y e s
3 7 0
2 3 0
2 7 0
THEO
3 52
Advance the cursor to the Parameter Read/
Write field, as shown in Figure 3-23. Press 2
(Write to FD) ENTER.
When the prompt Are You Sure? appears at the
bottom of the screen, press 1 (Continue) ENTER to
write the operating parameters onto the new
system disk.
10 Verify that all parameters were transferred by
powering OFF the analyzer, then powering it back
ON with the new system disk. Call up the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETER and REAGENT
STATUS screens to verify the presence of your
parameters. If they were not transferred, Power
OFF and repeat this procedure, beginning with
step 2. If the parameters are not transferred after
repeating the procedure, call Customer Technical
Support.
11 When you have verified that all parameters were
transferred, calibrate the analyzer and run controls
to verify proper system operation.
12 Format a disk following the instructions in Section
3.15.3. Use this formatted disk to make a copy of
the new system disk you just installed, using the
procedure found in Section 3.15.4.
2
ENTER
ENTER
1
3 53
3.17 Clean Cell Rinse Unit
3.17.1 Introduction
Normal daily washing sufficiently cleans the cell rinse
unit in most cases. If the rinse unit becomes clogged,
follow this procedure to thoroughly clean the clogged
nozzle.
clean clogged nozzle
perform Mechanisms Check.
Materials Required:
Wire stylet
New nozzle tip (squeegee), if needed
3.17.2 Clean Clogged Nozzle
1 Loosen the retai ni ng nut by turni ng i t
counterclockwise. Remove the cell rinse unit
from the mounting bracket, as shown in
Photograph
3-52.
Photograph 3-52:
3 54
2 Insert the wire stylet into the end of each nozzle
to clean, as shown in Photograph 3-53. Take care
not to bend the nozzles, or insert the wire stylet to
deep into the nozzle.
3 If the nozzle tip is clogged heavily or worn
excessively, replace it with a new one. To remove
the nozzle tip, pull it away from the nozzle, as
shown in Photograph 3-54. When attaching the
new nozzle tip, make sure it is positioned as shown
in the photo to the right.
4 Replace the cell rinse unit in its proper position and
tighten the retaining nut, as shown in Photograph
3-55. Make sure that the pin on the mounting
bracket aligns with the hole on the bottom of the
cell rinse unit.
Photograph 3-53:
Clean Nozzles
Photograph 3-54:
Replace Nozzle Tip
Photograph 3-55:
Replace Cell Rinse Unit
3 55
3 Type 10 ENTER. The analyzer will perform the
mechanism check 10 times. Make sure that the
rinse water does not overflow from the reaction
cells to the reaction bath. If the rinse water does
overflow into the bath, make sure the cell rinse unit
has been replaced properly and repeat the
mechanism check. If the water still overflows,
Call Technical Support.
3.17.3 Perform a Mechanism Check
screen.
2 Move the cursor to the Mechanism Check field,
as shown in Figure 3-23.
Figure 3-23: Mechanism Check
2
ENTER
1 0
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Mechanisms Check
Select the Number of Repetitions 1 to 9999 : ENTER
Probe Adjust
Mechanism Check
ISE Check
Printer Check
Alarm Log
Program Check
FD Special Copy
[ ]
H1 : 84.6 H2 : 42.4
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
3 56
3.18 Replace Photometer Lamp
3.18.1 Introduction
The photometer lamp should be replaced if any of the
daily photometer check values exceed 13000.
remove reaction disk
replace photometer lamp
reinstall reaction disk
perform cell blank
recalibrate.
Precautions: Instrument power must be
OFF.
Allow old lamp to cool before
replacing.
Do not touch or clean the glass
surface of the new photometer
lamp.
Take care not to damage the
reacti on cel l s whi l e the
reacti on di sk i s off the
instrument.
Materials Required:
Photometer lamp
Phillips screwdriver
Gauze squares
3 57
3.18.2 Remove Reaction Disk
1 Turn the instrument power switch OFF.
2 Turn the retaining nut on the reaction cell rinse unit
counterclockwise. When the nut is loosened
completely, carefully remove and place the entire
unit aside, as shown in Photograph 3-56.
3 Turn the black retaining nut counterclockwise and
remove it from the reaction disk, as shown in
Photograph 3-57.
4 Carefully lift the reaction disk from the instrument.
Place the disk on a flat, stable surface.
Photograph 3-56:
Photograph 3-57:
Remove Reaction Disk
3 58
3.18.3 Replace Photometer Lamp
1 Remove the black and red photometer lamp lead
wire connector nuts, as shown in Photograph 3-58.
Set them aside in a safe place and remove the lead
wires from the connector posts.
2 Loosen the screws on top of the photometer water
jacket with a Phillips screwdriver, as shown in
Photograph 3-59.
3 Lift the water jacket containing the photometer
lamp from the analyzer, as shown in Photograph 3-
60.
Photograph 3-58:
Remove Lead Wire Connector Nuts
Photograph 3-59:
Loosen Water Jacket Screws
Photograph 3-60:
Remove Water Jacket
3 59
4 Loosen screws on the lamp base with a Phillips
screwdriver, as shown in Photograph 3-61.
5 When both screws are sufficiently loosened, the
lamp can be removed from its water jacket, as
shown in Photograph 3-62. The lamp mounting
screws are threaded so that they are not easily
removed from the lamp base plate. This prevents
them from falling into the interior of the instrument.
6 Remove the new lamp from its packaging. Do not
touch or clean the glass surface of the lamp.
7 Insert the new lamp into the water jacket.
8 The alignment pin on the side of the water jacket
must be inserted into the pin alignment in the
lamps mounting base, as shown in Photograph 3-
63.
Photograph 3-61:
Loosen Lamp Screws
Photograph 3-62:
Remove Photometer Lamp
Photograph 3-63:
Replace Photometer Lamp
3 60
9 Tighten the lamp mounting screws until snug; do
not overtighten them.
10 Replace the water jacket on the analyzer, as
shown in Photograph 3-64. Tighten the water
jacket screws.
11 Place the lamp lead wires on the threaded
connector posts, as shown in Photograph 3-65.
The lamp lead wires are not color coded and either
wire may be connected to either post.
12 Replace the black and red lead wire connector
nuts and finger-tighten. Do not allow the lead wires
to rotate as the connector nuts are tightened. It
does not matter which connector nut is placed on
which lead wire.
13 With a clean, dry gauze square, carefully wipe the
inside surfaces of the U-shaped reaction disk
photo detectors (D101, D102, D103), as shown in
Photograph 3-66.
Photograph 3-64:
Replace Water Jacket
Photograph 3-65:
Replace Lead Wires
Photograph 3-66:
Clean Disk Detectors
3 61
3.18.4 Reinstall Reaction Disk
1 Reinstall the reaction disk, aligning the guide pin
on the reaction disk shaft with the pin hole in the
reaction disk, as shown in Photograph 3-67.
2 Return the black knurled nut to the reaction disk
shaft and turn it clockwise until snug, but not tight.
3 Return the reaction cell rinse unit to its proper
position over the reaction disk. (An alignment pin
on the rinse unit main shaft fits into a slot in the
rinse unit mounting bracket.)
4 Finger-tighten the knurled nut on the cell rinse unit
mounting bracket.
3.18.5 Perform Cell Blank
1 Turn the instrument power switch on and wait for
the instrument to enter Stand-by and for the
temperature to stabilize.
2 Perform a Cell Blank according to the procedure in
Section 3.7.2.
3.18.6 Recalibrate
1 Calibrate all photometric chemistries prior to
assaying controls and other samples.
2 Follow the procedure for full calibration outlined in
Section 2.3.
Photograph 3-67:
Align Pin to Position Reaction Disk
3 62
3.19 Clean ISE Reagent
Flowpath
3.19.1 Introduction
This procedure should be performed only at the
direction of Boehringer Mannheim Technical
Support.
This procedure is divided into three parts:
clean ISE reagent flowpath
perform ISE check
calibrate ISE system.
Stand-by.
Make certain that the ISE
reagent lines are correctly
labeled.
handling ISE reagent lines to
assi st i n preventi ng the
introduction of contaminants
into the system.
Materials Required:
500 mL beaker
Gauze squares
Deionized water
3.19 Clean ISE Reagent Flowpath
3 63
3.19.2 Clean ISE Reagent Flowpath
1 Remove the ISE reagents from the top of the
analyzer.
2 Pour at least 200 mL of ISE Cleaning Solution in a
500 mL beaker. Place the beaker where the ISE
reagents are normally located on the analyzer. Put
the Internal Reference (IS) and Diluent (DIL) and
KCl- reagent lines in the beaker, as shown in
Photograph 3-68.
MAINTENANCE screen.
1
ENTER
Photograph 3-68:
Put IS and DIL Lines Into NaOH
3 64
4 Move the cursor to the ISE Prime field, as shown
in Figure 3-24.
5 Press (All) ENTER to initiate an ISE Prime. The
ISE Prime function is complete when the Analyzer
Status line returns to Stand-by.
Once the ISE-cleaning-solution has entered the
system by priming, immediately preceed to the
next steps, without any break or pause. At all times
it should be prevented that ISE-cleaning solution
has opportunity to diffuse into the liquid carriing
plastic parts of the ISE, due to longer detection.
Detection < 5 minutes.
6 Remove the Internal Reference (IS) and Diluent
(DIL) and KCl- reagent lines from the beaker of ISE
Cleaning Solution. Dispose of the NaOH and rinse
the beaker several times with deionized water.
7 Execute step 5 again with all reagent lines put into
a beaker with deionized or distilled water.
8 Use a clean gauze square to wipe off the external
surfaces of the reagent lines, then place the lines
back into their respective reagent containers.
The ISE reagent lines have white plastic collars
and are labeled as follows:
20 - - Internal Standard
30 - - Diluent
40 - - KCl
9 Press 3 (IS + DIL) ENTER to initiate an ISE prime.
Analyzer Status line returns to Stand-by. Repeat
the prime.
3.19.3 Calibrate ISE System
Calibrate the ISE system before assaying any
unknown samples. Follow the instructions for
calibration found in Section 2.3. If the calibration
fails, try recalibrating. If recalibration fails, a problem
is indicated and should be investigated (see Chapter
4, Troubleshooting).
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3
ENTER
3 65
3.20 Replace ISE Measuring
Cartridge (Na
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
)
3.20.1 Introduction
The electrical response of each measuring cartridge
decreases gradually with the length of time it is in use,
and is dependent upon proper maintenance. An ISE
cartridge must be replaced when its slope falls outside
of the critical slope values:
When the slope is less than the optimal values, an
ISE Slope Warning alarm is issued. This alarm alerts
you that a replacement cartridge is needed. The
cartridge that caused the alarm may continue to be
used if all controls are still in range. If any controls
are out of range, or the slope falls outside the critical
value, the cartridge must be replaced. An ISE Slope
Error: Replace Cart. alarm is issued when the values
fall below the critical slope.
remove old cartridges
install new cartridges
prime ISE system
precondition with dummy sampling
perform ISE check
Stand-by or OFF.
handling internal ISE system
components to assi st i n
contami nants i nto the
system.
Materials Required:
Sodium (Na
+
) cartridge
Potassium (K
+
) cartridge
Chloride (Cl
-
) cartridge
Gauze squares
Large tweezers
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
)
32
32
-25
38.0 to 68.0
38.0 to 68.0
-30.0 to -68.0
Sodium (Na
+
)
Potassium (K
+
)
Chloride (Cl
-
)
CARTRIDGE OPTIMAL SLOPE CRITICAL SLOPE
3 66
3.20.2 Remove Old Cartridge
1 Loosen the retaining nut holding the ISE
compartment cover in place and lift the cover from
the compartment, as shown in Photograph 3-69.
2 Remove the color-coded lead wires from the
cartridges, as shown in Photograph 3-70.
3 Press the release lever back to loosen the
cartridges in their mounting block, as shown in
Photograph 3-71.
Cl
-
- blue
Na
+
- yellow
K
+
- red
Photograph 3-69:
Remove ISE Cover
Photograph 3-70:
Remove Lead Wires
Photograph 3-71:
Pull Lever to Release
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
)
3 67
4 Use large tweezers to remove the cartridges from
the block, as shown in Photograph 3-72.
CAUTION
Check the expiration date on the new cartridge. Do not
use any cartridge beyond its expiration date.
Check if all old cartridges still have there O-ring in
position. If not, check the block, the O-ring could be
there and spoil the sealing of new cartridges.
5 Replace the expired cartridge with a new one,
keeping all three cartridges in their original order.
CAUTION
If the cartridges are not seated properly, the ISE
assembly may leak, resulting in a malfunction.
3.20.3 Install New Cartridge
1 Make certain that the o-ring on the upper side of
each cartridge and the base is dry when the
cartridges are fitted together.
2 The cartridges must be stacked in the following
order, from back to front:
Chloride ........... (blue) .......... Back
Sodium ............ (yellow) ....... Middle
Potassium ....... (red) ............ Front
The analyzer is marked to show the correct
position of each cartridge. Refer to Figure 3-25 and
Photograph 3-71 for the proper orientation.
Photograph 3-72:
Remove Cartridges
Figure 3-25:
ISE Cartridge Positioning
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
)
Cl
-
- blue
Na
+
- yellow
K
+
- red
3 68
3 Replace the cartridges as shown in Photograph 3-
73.
4 Pull the lock lever forward into place. This
positions the base fitting of the ISE assembly and
secures the cartridges in place.
5 Reconnect the color-coded lead wires to their
respective cartridges, as shown in Photograph 3-
74. The lead wires must be connected to the
proper cartridges.
CAUTION
If any spilled or leaked liquid is visible in the ISE
compartment, clean and dry the compartment as
thoroughly as possible. Liquid and air leaks can
prevent the ISE system from operating properly.
6 Replace the ISE compartment cover.
Photograph 3-73:
Install Cartridges
Photograph 3-74:
Reconnect Lead Wire
3.20.4 Prime ISE System
1 If the analyzer was OFF during cartridge
replacement, turn the power switch back ON.
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
)
3 69
MAINTENANCE screen.
4 Press 3 (Int. Ref + DIL) ENTER to initiate an ISE
prime cycle. The ISE prime is complete when the
- Precondition the system (see 3.19.3)
- Calibrate the ISE system before assaying any
unknown samples. Refer to Section 2.3 for
calibration instructions. If the calibration fails, try
recalibrating. If recalibration fails, a problem is
indicated and should be investigated (see Chapter
1
ENTER
3
ENTER
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
)
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 70
3.21 Replace ISE Reference
Cartridge
3.21.1 Introduction
The reference electrode should be replaced at the
following conditions:
Every six months-preventive maintenance
When the ISE check value for the reference
electrode is outside limit 7 mV
When slope values for Na
+
, K
+
and Cl
-
are unstable
nearly or simultaneous.
remove old cartridge
install new cartridge
prime ISE system
perform ISE check
Stand-by or OFF.
Wear disposable gloves when
handling internal ISE system
components to assi st i n
contami nants i nto the
system.
Materials Required:
Reference cartridge
Large tweezers
Phillips screwdriver
Paper towels
3.21 Replace ISE Reference Cartridge
3 71
3.21.2 Remove Old Cartridge
1 Remove the reagent lines from the ISE reagent
bottles and place the lines on a paper towel. Make
sure the lines do not touch. Remove the reagent
bottles from the top of the analyzer.
2 Loosen the retaining nut holding the ISE
compartment cover in place and lift the cover from
the analyzer, as shown in Photograph 3-75.
3 Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw
and washer holding the reference cartridge
compartment cover in place, as shown in
Photograph 3-76.
4 Remove the back left instrument panel from the
reference cartridge compartment, as shown in
Photograph 3-77.
Photograph 3-75:
Remove ISE Compartment Cover
Photograph 3-76:
Loosen Screws
Photograph 3-77:
Remove Compartment Cover
3 72
5 Disconnect the reference cartridge lead wire, as
6 Push the reference cartridge clamp back with your
thumb and lift the reference cartridge from the
compartment using tweezers, as shown in
Photograph 3-79. Inspect the compartment for
salt buildup and clean if necessary with a damp
gauze.
Check if the small black O-ring is still on the
cartridge and did not stick in the compartment.
Photograph 3-78:
Disconnect Lead Wire
Photograph 3-79:
Push Clamp Back
3 73
3.21.3 Install New Cartridge
1 Install the new reference cartridge; the clamp
locks the cartridge into position, as shown in
Photograph 3-80.
2 Reconnect the reference cartridge lead wire, as
3 Replace the back left instrument panel over the
reference cartridge compartment, as shown in
Photograph 3-82, and tighten the screws, using a
Phillips screwdriver.
Photograph 3-80:
Install New Cartridge
Photograph 3-81:
Reconnect Lead Wire
Photograph 3-82:
Replace Back Left Cover
3 74
4 Replace the ISE compartment cover, as shown in
Photograph 3-83.
5 Replace the ISE reagent bottles in the proper
positions and insert the correct line into each
reagent bottle.
Photograph 3-83:
Replace ISE Compartment Cover
3 75
3.21.4 Prime ISE System
1 If the instrument was OFF during cartridge
replacement, turn the power switch back ON.
MAINTENANCE screen.
4 Press 4 KCl ENTER to initiate an ISE prime cycle.
Calibrate the ISE system before assaying any
unknown samples. Follow the instructions for
calibration found in Section 2.4. If the calibration
fails, try recalibrating. If recalibration fails, a problem
is indicated and should be investigated (see Chapter
1
ENTER
4
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 76
3.22 Check/Refill Multiclean
Solution
3.22.1 Introduction
Check the Multiclean container daily. If less than 4
cm of liquid remains in the container, refill the
container.
Precaution: Multiclean is a concentrated
solution. Wear gloves when
handling it. Clean any spills
from the analyzer immediately.
Materials Required
Multiclean
Funnel
Paper Towels
3.22.2 Procedure
1 Open the front panels of the analyzer. Check the
level of the Multiclean solution.
3.22 Check/Refill Multiclean Solution
IF... THEN...
the level is less
than 4 cm
proceed to Step 2.
the level is greater
than 4 cm
close the front panels
and proceed with daily
start up procedures.
3 77
2 Use the metal handle to gently pull the tray holding
the Multiclean container up, then forward, as
3 Loosen and remove the cap from the container, as
4 Place the funnel into the container. Fill the
container with fresh Multiclean solution, as shown
in Photograph 3-86.
5 Remove the funnel and place it on a paper towel or
other absorbent material. Use a paper towel to
clean up any spillage of the solution.
Photograph 3-84:
Pull Out Tray
Photograph 3-85:
Remove Cap
Photograph 3-86:
Fill Bottle
3 78
6 Replace the cap on the container, as shown in
Photograph 3-87.
7 Gently slide the tray holding the Multiclean
container back into position, as shown in
Photograph 3-88.
8 Close the front panels of the analyzer.
Photograph 3-87:
Replace Cap
Photograph 3-88:
Push Tray Inside Instrument
3 79
3.23 Replace Sample Probe
3.23.1 Introduction
Replacing the sample probe is necessary only when
a sample probe is bent or otherwise damaged. You
may, however, need to remove the probe for cleaning.
remove sample probe
install new sample probe
check/adjust probe alignment
perform an air purge.
Stand-by or OFF during probe
replacement.
handling probe seals to assist
system.
Materials Required:
Sample probe
Wire stylet
Gauze squares
3 80
3.23.2 Remove Sample Probe
1 Ensure that the instrument is in Stand-by or OFF.
Figure 3-28 illustrates the sample probe arm.
2 Before touching any part of the sample arm/probe
be sure you are not static loaded. Grab any
grounded metal part (e.g. water-hose) with both
hands for 10 " before touching the sample arm/
probe. Remove the probe arm cover by grasping
the front with your thumb and forefinger and lifting
up gently. This exposes the two lead wires and the
retaining nut. Refer to Photograph 3-89 and Figure
3-29, on the following page.
Figure 3-28: Sample Probe with Cover
Photograph 3-89:
Remove Sample Probe Arm Cover
Squeeze to release
sample probe cover
3 81
Top of sample probe arm
Retaining nut
Lead wires
Figure 3-29: Removing Sample Probe Cover
3 82
3 Disconnect the two lead wires. Hold the end of the
lead wire contained in the mounting bracket with
the thumb and forefinger of one hand. Gently pull
the other end of the lead wire out with the thumb
and forefinger of your free hand until it
disconnects. Repeat the procedure for the second
lead wire. Refer to Photograph 3-90 and Figure 3-
30, on the following page.
4 Loosen the sample probe retaining nut by turning
it clockwise, as shown in Photograph 3-91. Take
care not to loose the white teflon seal between
tube-end and needle.
Photograph 3-90:
Photograph 3-91:
Loosen Retaining Nut
3 83
Figure 3-30: Sample Probe Lead Wires and Retaining Nut
Ends stay in
mounting brackets
Gently pull lead
wires out
Turn retaining nut
clockwise to loosen
3 84
5 Lift the probe from the probe arm, as shown in
Figure 3-31 on the following page.
6 Locate the probe seal either on the end of the probe
or in the retaining nut, as shown in Photograph 3-
92.
7 Place the probe seal in a safe place.
8 Run the thin stainless steel wire stylet through the
probe from the bottom, as shown in Photograph 3-
93, until the probe is clear.
9 Rinse the inside of the probe thoroughly with
deionized water, then wipe the probe with clean
gauze squares.
10 Replace the probe seal on the probe.
11 Continue with Section 3.23.3, Step 2.
Photograph 3-92:
Locate Probe Seal
Photograph 3-93:
Clean Sample Probe
IF... THEN...
you are removing the
sample probe to clean
it
proceed with Step 7.
sample probe to
replace it
proceed to Section
3.23.3.
3 85
Figure 3-31: Removing Sample Probe
Locate probe seal, either on end of probe
or inside the retaining nut
Lift probe out of
probe arm
3 86
3.23.3 Install New Sample Probe
1 Insert the new probe seal (packaged with the new
probe) into the sample probe, as shown in
Photograph 3-94.
2 Insert the probe and seal into the sample probe
arm.
3 Tighten the retaining nut, as shown in Photograph
3-95, making sure the probe seal is in place.
4 Reconnect the lead wires, as shown in Photograph
3-96 and in Figure 3-32 on the following page. Take
care not to mix up the wire connecfious.
Photograph 3-94:
Replace Probe Seal
Photograph 3-95:
Tighten Retaining Nut
Photograph 3-96:
Reconnect Lead Wires
3 87
Figure 3-32: Reconnect Sample Probe Lead Wires and Retaining Nut
Ends stay in
mounting brackets
Reconnect lead
wires
Turn retaining nut
counter-clockwise to
tighten
3 88
5 Replace the sample probe arm cover, making sure
the spring inside the cover faces the front of the
sample probe arm. Refer to Photograph 3-97 and
Figure 3-33, on the following page.
6 Verify proper spring return action of the probe.
Grasp the probe between your thumb and
forefinger and gently move it up. Upon releasing
your grasp, the probe should spring downward. If
the probe does not respond as described, remove
the sample arm cover and check the lead wires to
make sure they do not impede movement of the
probe.
Photograph 3-97:
Replace Sample Probe Arm Cover
3 89
Figure 3-33: Replace Sample Probe Arm Cover
Replace sample probe
arm cover
Retaining nut
Lead wires in
proper position
3 90
3.23.4 Check/Adjust Horizontal Sample
Probe Alignment
1 If instrument power was OFF during probe
replacement, turn the instrument power switch
ON.
screen.
3 Move the cursor to the Probe Adjust field, as
Figure 3-34: Probe Adjust
2
ENTER
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Mechanisms Check
Probe Adjust
Mechanism Check
ISE Check
Printer Check
Alarm Log
Program Check
FD Special Copy
[ ]
H1 : 84.6 H2 : 42.4
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Reaction Cell
Probe
+
+
4 Press 1 ENTER to initiate a sample probe
alignment check.
5 Check the sample probe for correct alignment over
the reaction cells. The probe tip must be centered
over the reaction cell, as shown in Figure 3-35.
Figure 3-35: Probe Alignment
6 Gently bend the probe, in an arc, over its entire
length, to center its tip over the reaction cell
beneath it.
7 Press STOP to terminate probe adjust.
STOP
3 91
3.23.5 Check/Adjust Vertical Sample
Probe Alignment
1 Press 2 S.PROBE 2 ENTER from the Probe
Adjust field to initiate a vertical sample probe
adjust.
2 Place an empty normal 2.0 mL sample cup in
position 1 on the outer ring of the sample disk.
Press the SAMPLING STOP key. The probe will
descend until the bottom of the sample cup is
detected. The distance descended is stored in
memory (shown as H1 on the MECHANISMS
CHECK screen) and the probe returns to the rinse
station.
3 Place a primary tube in position 1 on the outer ring
of the sample disk and put an empty sample cup
on the tube. Press the SAMPLING STOP key.
The probe will descend until the bottom of the
sample cup on the tube is detected. The distance
descended is stored in memory (shown as H2 on
the MECHANISMS CHECK screen) and the probe
returns to the rinse station.
4 Do not mix up this sequence:
H1: Cup only
H2: Cup on tube
Press PAGE FORWARD followed by PAGE
BACK to view the new H1 and H2 values as they
are not updated on the CRT on a real-time basis.
NOTE
During routine sampling, visually verify alignment of
the sample probe over the sample cup (or tube).
Proper alignment of the probe over the reaction cell
ensures that the sample probe is also centered over
the sample cup (or tube).
MAINTENANCE screen.
2
ENTER
SAMPLING
STOP
SAMPLING
STOP
1
ENTER
3 92
2 Move the cursor to the Air Purge entry field, as
3 Press 1 ENTER to initiate an air purge. The air
purge function is complete when the Analyzer
Status line returns to Stand-by.
ENTER
1
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 93
3.24 Replace Reagent Probes
3.24.1 Introduction
Replacing the reagent probe is necessary only when
a reagent probe is bent or otherwise damaged. The
reagent probe may need to be removed for cleaning.
remove damaged reagent probe
install new reagent probe
check/adjust probe alignment
perform an air purge.
Stand-by or OFF during probe
replacement.
handling probe seals to assist
system.
Materials Required:
Reagent probeWire stylet
Gauze squares
Put the tube under
the nozzle
Put the tube under
the nozzle
Joint
Joint
Nozzle
3 94
3.24.2 Remove Reagent Probe
1 Ensure that the instrument is in Stand-by or OFF.
Figure 3-37 illustrates the reagent probe arm.
Before touching any part of the reagent arm/probe
be sure you are not static loaded.
2 Remove the reagent probe arm cover by grasping
the front with your thumb and forefinger and gently
lifting up. This exposes the lead wire and the
retaining nut. Refer to Photograph 3-98 and Figure
3-38, on the following page.
Figure 3-37: Reagent Probe with Cover
Photograph 3-98:
Remove Reagent Probe Arm Cover
Squeeze here to
release reagent
probe cover
3 95
Figure 3-38: Remove Reagent Probe Arm Cover
Remove reagent
probe arm cover
Retaining nut
Lead wire
3 96
3 Disconnect the lead wire. Hold the end of the lead
wire contained in the mounting bracket with the
thumb and forefinger of one hand. With your free
hand, gently pull the other end of the lead wire out
until it disconnects. Refer to Photograph 3-99 and
4 Loosen the retai ni ng nut by turni ng i t
counterclockwise. Refer to Photograph 3-100 and
Take care not to loose the black rubber seal
between connector and probe.
5 Locate the probe seal either on the end of the probe
or in the retaining nut. Refer to Photograph 3-101
on this page and Figure 3-39, on the following page.
Photograph 3-99:
Photograph 3-100:
Loosen Retaining Nut
Photograph 3-101:
Locate Probe Seal
3 97
Figure 3-39: Loosen Reagent Probe Lead Wire and Retaining Nut
Pull lead wire apart
Leave in mounting
bracket
Probe seal
Turn retaining nut
counter clockwise to
loosen
3 98
6 Lift the reagent probe and white plastic holder from
the reagent probe arm. Refer to Photograph
3-102 and Figure 3-40, on the following page.
7 Place the probe seal in a safe place.
8 Run the thin stainless steel wire stylet through the
probe from the bottom until the probe is clear, as
9 Rinse the inside of the probe thoroughly with
deionized water, then wipe the probe with clean
gauze squares.
10 Replace the probe seal.
11 Continue with Section 3.24.3, Step 5.
Photograph 3-102:
Remove Reagent Probe and Holder
Photograph 3-103:
Clean Reagent Probe
IF... THEN...
reagent probe to
clean it
proceed with Step 7.
reagent probe to
replace it
proceed to Section
3.24.3, step 1.
3 99
Figure 3-40: Removing Reagent Probe and Holder
Remove reagent probe
from the reagent probe arm
3 100
3.24.3 Replace Reagent Probe1
1 Remove the old probe from the white plastic
holder. Grasp the holder and turn it until the probe
snaps loose. Slide the holder down the length of
the probe to remove it. Do not discard the holder.
Refer to Photograph 3-104 and Figures 3-41A and
3-41B.
Figure 3-41A: Unsnap Reagent Probe Holder
Figure 3-41B: Remove Reagent Probe Holder
Photograph 3-104:
Remove Reagent Probe Holder
B
A
3 101
2 Slide the white plastic holder onto the new reagent
probe from the bottom up.
3 Turn the holder and snap in place on the new
reagent probe. Refer to Photograph 3-105 and
Figures 3-42A and 3-42B.
4 Insert the new probe seal into the retaining nut on
the end of the probe, as shown in Photograph
3-106.
Check: length of probe has to be checked/adopted
to be 100,0 mm, otherwise dead volume incorrect.
Figure 3-42A: Replace Reagent Probe Holder
Figure 3-42B: Snap Reagent Probe Holder in
Place
Photograph 3-105:
Replace Reagent Probe Holder
Photograph 3-106:
Replace Reagent Probe Seal
A
B
3 102
5 Place the probe and holder into the reagent probe
arm, as shown in Photograph 3-107.
6 Tighten the retaining nut, making sure the seal is
in place. Refer to Photograph 3-108 and Figure 3-
43, on the following page.
7 Reconnect the lead wire. Refer to Photograph
3-109 and Figure 3-43, on the following page.
Photograph 3-107:
Replace Probe and Holder
Photograph 3-108:
Tighten Retaining Nut
Photograph 3-109:
Reconnect Lead Wire
3 103
Figure 3-43: Reconnect Reagent Probe Lead Wire and Tighten Retaining Nut
Push lead wire
together
Leave in mounting
bracket
Probe seal
Turn retaining nut
clockwise to tighten
3 104
8 Replace the reagent probe arm cover, making sure
the spring on the under side of the cover aligns with
the front of the reagent probe arm. Refer to
Photograph 3-110 and Figure 3-44 on the following
page.
9 Verify proper spring return action of the probe.
Grasp the probe between your thumb and
forefinger and gently move it up. Upon releasing
your grasp, the probe should spring downward. If
the probe does not respond as described, remove
the sample arm cover and check the lead wires to
make sure they do not impede movement of the
probe.
Photograph 3-110:
Replace Reagent Probe Arm Cover
3 105
Figure 3-44: Replace Reagent Probe Arm Cover
Remove reagent
probe arm cover
Retaining nut
Lead wire in position
3 106
3.24.4 Check/Adjust Reagent Probe
Alignment
1 To check the reagent probes for correct alignment
over the reaction cells, press the MAINTENANCE
key, followed by 2 ENTER to display the
Figure 3-45: Adjsut Reagent Probe
2 Move the cursor to the Probe Adjust field, as
shown in Figure 3-45, and press 3 ENTER to
initiate a reagent probe alignment check. Both R1
and R2 probes will be checked.
3 Check the reagent probes for correct alignment
over the reaction cells. The probe tips must be
centered over the reacti on cel l s,
as shown in Figure 3-46.
Figure 3-46:
Align Reagent Probe
4 Gently bend the probe, in an arc, over its entire
length, to center its tip over the reaction cell
beneath it.
5 After proper probe alignment, press the STOP key
to reset all probes to their home positions.
ENTER
3
ENTER
STOP
2
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Mechanisms Check
Probe Adjust
Mechanism Check
ISE Check
Printer Check
Alarm Log
Program Check
FD Special Copy
[ ]
H1 : 84.6 H2 : 42.4
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
Reaction Cell
R2
R1
Stirrer
Reagent
Probe
3 107
MAINTENANCE screen.
2 Move the cursor to the Air Purge entry field as
3 Press 1 ENTER to initiate an air purge. The air
purge function is complete when the Analyzer
Status line on the OPERATION MONITOR screen
returns to Stand-by.
1
ENTER
1
ENTER
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Wash
Water Tank
Photometer Check
ISE Prime
Cell Blank
Air Purge
Inc. Water Exchange
Reset
FD Utility
FD Drive Cleaning
T/S Read/Write
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
3 108
3.25 Replace Stirring Paddle
3.25.1 Introduction
This procedure is necessary only when a stirring
paddle is bent or otherwise damaged.
replace stirrer paddle
check stirrer action.
Instrument time: Approximately 1 minute.
Precaution: The instrument must be in
Stand-by or OFF during paddle
replacement.
Materials Required:
Stirring paddle
Small metric Phillips screwdriver
3.25.2 Replace Stirrer Paddle
1 While holding the stirring paddle, loosen (but do not
remove) the two Phillips set screws that secure the
paddle to its drive shaft. Refer to Figure 3-48.
Figure 3-48:
Loosen Stirring Paddle Set Screws
2 Pull the stirring paddle down and off its drive shaft.
3 Insert a new stirring paddle onto the drive shaft and
adjust its position so that the distance between the
cuvette and the bottom of the stirrer is 7,5 mm,
then tighten the screws.
MOUNTING
PLATE
SETSCREWS
TOP OF
STIRRING
PADDLE
3 109
3.25.3 Check Stirrer Action
NOTE
Visually inspect the new stirring paddle. If it appears
bent or misaligned, you may wish to install an old
reaction cell section at the stirring position before
testing the stirrer action. Damage could result if a bent
or misaligned paddle comes into contact with a
reaction cell.
1 If instrument power was OFF during paddle
replacement, turn the instrument power switch
ON. When the analyzer reaches Stand-by,
continue with Step 2.
screen.
3 Move the cursor to the Probe Adjust entry field, as
Figure 3-49: Adjust Stirrers
4 Press 4 ENTER and verify the stirrer is properly
aligned by its movement.
5 Press STOP to terminate stirrer adjust.
2
ENTER
4
ENTER
STOP
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
2 Mechanisms Check
Probe Adjust
Mechanism Check
ISE Check
Printer Check
Alarm Log
Program Check
FD Special Copy
[ ]
H1 : 84.6 H2 : 42.4
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
3 110
Reaction Cell
R2
R1
Stirrer
Reagent
Probe
Figure 3-50: Align Stirrer
6 Move the cursor to the Mechanisms Check field.
7 Press 10 ENTER; observe the stirrers as they
move through stirring cycles.
8 Loosen the stirring paddle set screws, reposition
the paddle, then tighten the set screws.
9 Repeat the stirring cycle. If the stirring paddle still
comes into contact with the reaction cell, try
another new stirring paddle. If this does not solve
the problem, call Boehringer Mannheim Technical
Support.
IF... THEN...
the paddle comes into
contact with the sides
or bottom of the
reaction cell when
stirring
check the paddle. If it
is bent, replace it; if it
is straight, proceed to
step 8.
correct stirrer action is
observed
no further action is
necessary.
3 111
3.26 Load Continuous-Form
Paper
3.26.1 Introduction
Use this procedure to load continuous-form paper in
the printer.
Materials Required:
Printer Paper (continuous-form)
NOTE
If paper runs out or jams during printing of patient
results, the results are stored on the data disk. After
correcting the paper supply, results may be reprinted
by following the procedure in Routine Job, Data
Review, Section 2.25.
3.26.2 Load Continuous- Form Paper
1 Turn the printer power switch to the ON position, as
Photograph 3-111:
Turn Printer ON
3.26 Load Continuous-Form Paper
3 112
2 Move the cut/continuous-form select lever to the
continuous-form position, as shown in Photograph
3-112.
3 Using both hands, move the front cover forward as
shown in Photograph 3-113A.
Lift the top cover up and leave it in upright position
as shown in Photograph 3-113B.
Photograph 3-112:
Select Continuous-Form Paper
Photograph 3-113A:
Lift Up Top and Front Covers
Photograph 113B
3 113
4 Remove rear cover, as shown in Photograph
3-114.
5 Adjust the paper thickness lever, as shown in
Photograph 3-115, according to the number of
copies to be printed. Refer to the table below.
6 Slide the left and right bail rollers to the
approximate width of the paper, as shown in
Photograph 3-116.
Photograph 3-114
Remove Rear Cover
Photograph 3-115:
Adjust Paper Thickness
Photograph 3-116:
Move Bail Rollers
Number of Copies Lever Position
5
4
3
2
1
4
4
3
2
1
3 114
7 Release the lock lever of the right sprocket unit by
pushing it to the rear of the printer, as shown in
Photograph 3-117.
8 Move the right sprocket unit to the right, as far as
it will go, as shown in Photograph 3-118.
9 Unlock the left sprocket unit, and move it to the left
margin position of the paper. Lock the left
sprocket unit in place. Refer to Photograph 3-119.
Photograph 3-117:
Unlock Right Sprocket
Photograph 3-118:
Move Right Sprocket to Right
Photograph 3-119:
Lock Left Sprocket
3 115
10 Open both the left and right paper drive sprocket
covers, as shown in Photograph 3-120.
NOTE
Most continuous-form computer paper has round
holes on one side and oblong holes on the other side.
If you are using this type of paper, ensure that the
round holes are placed on the left paper drive sprocket
and the oblong holes are placed on the right sprocket.
11 Align the holes on the left side of the paper with the
wheel pins of the left paper drive sprocket. Close
the left sprocket cover.
12 Ensure that the paper is straight. Align the holes
on the right side of the paper with the wheel pins of
the right paper drive sprocket, as shown in
Photograph 3-121. Close the sprocket cover,
making sure the paper is not slack.
13 Lift the bail roller to make sure the paper slides
underneath the roller.
14 Turn the platen knob clockwise to feed the paper
until its top emerges (about one inch) from the print
head.
15 Put the rear cover back on the printer and lower it
to its original position, then lower the top cover to
its original position.
Photograph 3-120:
Open Drive Sprocket Covers
Photograph 3-121:
Align Holes with Wheel Pins
3 116
3.26.3 Set Paper Online
1 Press the ONLINE button to bring the printer
offline, as shown in Photograph 3-122. The green
indicator light is not illuminated.
2 Press the FF button.
3 Turn the platen knob until the perforation on the
paper is aligned with the red line on the print head.
4 Press the ONLINE button to bring the printer
online. The green indicator light illuminates.
Photograph 3-122:
Turn the Printer Offline
3 117
3.27 Replace Printer Ribbon
Cassette
3.27.1 Introduction
Use this procedure to change the printer ribbon
cassette.
Precaution: Printer power must be OFF.
Materials Required:
Ribbon cassette
3.27.2 Procedure
1 Turn the printer power switch OFF.
2 Open the front cover of the printer. Then place your
index fingers in the indents on the side of the top
cover and lift open the cover.
3 Manually move the print head to the center of the
printer.
4 Pull the ribbon cassette holder forward until the
locking pin of the ribbon cassette is released, then
lift the ribbon cassette out of the printer, as shown
in Photograph 3-123.
3.27 Replace Printer Ribbon Cassette
Photograph 3-123:
Remove Ribbon Cassette
3 118
3.27 Replace Printer Ribbon Cassette
5 Remove the red stopper from the new ribbon
cassette and turn the ribbon winding knob
clockwise to take up excess slack inside the
cassette, as shown in Photograph 3-124. (Never
turn the ribbon winding knob counterclockwise.)
6 Place the ribbon cassette on its seat so that the
side locking pin is located between the ribbon
cassette holders hook and the carrier frame.
7 Gently push down on the ribbon cassette until it is
firmly seated in the ribbon cassette holder. It may
be necessary to turn the ribbon winding knob
clockwise while pushing down on the ribbon
cassette to make it fit into its seat.
8 Close both the front and top covers.
9 Turn the printer power switch ON.
Photograph 3-124:
Wind Excess Ribbon
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
4.1 Troubleshooting Procedures .................................................................... 4 1
4.1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 4 1
4.1.2 Calling Customer Technical Support ................................................................................. 4 2
4.2 Troubleshooting Conditions That Occur At Power Up............................ 4 3
4.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 4 3
4.2.2 Troubleshooting Instrument Power Up.............................................................................. 4 3
4.3 Chemistry Troubleshooting....................................................................... 4 4
4.3.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 4 4
4.3.2 Check Preparation of Reagents, Calibrators, Controls .................................................... 4 4
4.3.3 High Test Results ................................................................................................................. 4 5
4.3.4 Low Test Results.................................................................................................................. 4 6
4.3.5 Erratic Test Results .............................................................................................................. 4 7
4.3.6 Chemistry Troubleshooting Flowcharts............................................................................. 4 8
4.4 Instrument Troubleshooting.................................................................... 4 12
4.4.1 General Considerations ..................................................................................................... 4 12
4.4.2 General Mechanical Problem Isolation............................................................................ 4 12
4.4.3 Types of Alarms .................................................................................................................. 4 12
4.5 Data Alarms ............................................................................................... 4 13
4.5.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 4 13
4.5.2 Data Alarms Table.............................................................................................................. 4 14
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
Contents
4. TROUBLESHOOTING
Contents
4.6 Instrument Alarms .................................................................................... 4 21
4.6.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 4 21
4.6.2 Instrument Alarms Display................................................................................................. 4 21
4.6.3 Troubleshooting Alarm Conditions ................................................................................... 4 23
4.6.4 Instrument Alarms Quick Reference Table ...................................................................... 4 23
4.6.5 Instrument Alarms Table ................................................................................................... 4 27
4 1
4.1 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting
Procedures
4.1.1 Introduction
To identify and isolate problems effectively, you need
a good understanding of the theory of operation,
operating procedures, emergency procedures and
chemistry reaction descriptions covered in this
manual. Follow a logical and sequential series of
steps to isolate a problem into one or a combination
of the following areas:
Chemistry problems:
reagent considerations
sample considerations
operator error.
Instrument problems:
electrical/electronic considerations
mechanical considerations
operator error.
Computer problems:
incorrect parameters, faulty chemistry parameter
disk
faulty system parameter on disk or disk load
operator error.
Facility problems:
heat
humidity
power
water (guidance, germ index)
drain.
The operators primary troubleshooting responsibility
lies in the following areas that are detailed in the
Operators Manual:
reagent preparation and storage
sample considerations
i nstrument mechani cal al i gnments and
adjustments performed by the operator
computer parameters and general computer input/
output operations
basic component replacement
operator technique in overall operation of the
instrument
maintenance.
THE BASIC OPERATOR IS NOT RESPONSIBLE
FOR TROUBLESHOOTING ELECTRICAL
PROBLEMS, EXCEPT AS COVERED IN THE
OPERATORS MANUAL, AND SHOULD NOT
ATTEMPT REMOVAL OF PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARDS UNLESS SPECIFICALLY INSTRUCTED
TO DO SO BY A BOEHRINGER MANNHEIM
SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE.
It is understood that different operators will have
different aptitudes in chemistry, mechanics and
electronics. Where one person may be well
experienced in one or two areas, he/she may also not
be as experienced in other areas. Whatever the case,
when a problem arises that you feel is beyond your
capabilities and/or scope as a basic operator, consult
Boehringer Mannheims Customer Technical Support
Department. When troubleshooting, observe the
alarms and isolate the problem to the area denoted by
the alarms. In many cases, you may be able to find
the problem, correct it, and then resume chemistry
processing.
The remainder of this chapter provides you with
instructions and guidelines to aid in isolating
problems.
4 2
4.1.2 Calling Customer Technical
Support
If it becomes necessary to consult Customer
Technical Support to troubleshoot a chemistry or
instrument problem, please be prepared with the
following information:
Chemistry Problem
account number
chemistry(ies) affected
description of the problem
catalog and lot numbers of reagents, calibrators,
and controls in use
calibration parameters from the last few
calibrations performed
control results from the last few calibrations
performed
patient results (with correlation results, if relevant).
Instrument Problem
account number
instrument serial number, ID Nr. of software used
description of the problem including relevant
alarm(s)
other instrument or maintenance related
information.
4.1 Troubleshooting Procedures
4 3
4.2 Troubleshooting Conditions
That Occur At Power Up
4.2.1 Introduction
Certain conditions can affect instrument power up.
These conditions are presented in the table below.
To troubleshoot a problem, find the category below
that best describes the problem, and follow the
recommended remedy. If all remedies are
unsuccessful, call Customer Technical Support.
4.2.2 Troubleshooting Instrument
Power Up
4.2 Troubleshooting Conditions That Occur At Power Up
CAUSE OR
DESCRIPTION
REMEDY
PROBLEM: The instrument does not power up.
1 Main circuit breaker
in OFF position (right
side of instrument).
1 Switch main circuit
breaker to the ON
position.
2 The CPU RUN light
comes on, but no
image appears on the
CRT. (The CPU run
light is at the
instruments right
rear, to the right of
the connectors going
to the control unit for
the printer, keyboard,
and CRT.)
2 The CRT brightness
control may be turned
down. Turn the CRT
brightness control up
(control is below
CRT, to the left of the
CRT ON/OFF
switch).
3 The circuit breaker
for the instrument line
is tripped.
3 Have your facility
electrician check the
appropriate circuit
breaker.
CAUSE OR
DESCRIPTION
REMEDY
PROBLEM:
When instrument is powered up,
this message appears: "SYSTEM
NOT FOUND --- PLEASE CHECK
FLOPPY DISK AND RETRY."
1 Data disk is in drive
#1 (system disk
drive).
1 Place system disk in
drive #1 and power
up again.
2 System disk is
damaged.
2 Place backup system
disk in drive #1 and
power up again.
3 Disk not inserted into
disk drive properly.
3 Re-insert disk and
power up again.
4 No disk in drive #1. 4 Place system disk in
drive #1 and power
up again.
4 4
4.3 Chemistry Troubleshooting
4.3.1 Introduction
Mechanical problems can be identified by visual
inspection or when the analyzer shows an alarm
message. A chemistry problem may display a data
flag, such as Z or W, or may only become evident with
an unexpected result.
Deciding that a problem exists is the first step in the
process. The fol l owi ng si tuati ons requi re
troubleshooting:
error codes during calibration
data flags for control or patient samples
quality control sample results fall outside
established ranges
patient tests yield unexpected results.
To troubleshoot effectively, eliminate extraneous
information and pinpoint the problem. Using the
calibration report, quality control results, or patient
results, decide which of the following conditions apply
and perform the checks associated with them:
high test results
low test results
erratic test results
single sample affectedall tests
single chemistry affectedall samples
multiple chemistries affected:
- all photometric chemistries
- only photometric chemistries using multiple
reagents
- only photometric chemistries using one
reagent
- all chemistries including ISEs
- all chemistries using two set-points
- only enzyme chemistries
- only rate chemistries
- no pattern
only ISE chemistries affected.
4.3.2 Check Preparation of Reagents,
Calibrators, Controls
Sometimes conditions arise that cannot be detected
by the instrument. These conditions do not cause
instrument alarms and therefore must be detected by
the operator. When one or more of these conditions
is present, test results can be extremely high, low, or
erratic.
To identify the cause of high, low, or erratic test
results, first verify the preparation of your reagents,
calibrators and controls by answering the questions
listed on the facing page. Next, review the tables in
Sections 4.3.3, 4.3.4 and 4.3.5, which list additional
causes for high, low, and erratic results.
When preparing reagents, calibrators and controls,
always read and follow the directions on the
package insert or value sheet.
When preparing reagents:
Has the catalog number changed?
What is the correct preparation procedure?
What is the expiration date of the prepared reagent?
What is the expiration date of the reagent lot?
Was fresh, bacteria-free, deionized water or the proper
diluent used in reconstitution?
When reconstituting controls:
If the lot number has changed, are the correct values
entered in CONTROL VALUE SETTING?
What is the correct reconstitution volume?
What is the recommended storage?
What is the expiration date of the reconstituted
material?
Was the volumetric pipette used to reconstitute?
What is the expiration date of the control lot?
Was the appropriate diluent used in reconstitution?
4 5
When reconstituting calibrators:
Has the lot number changed?
What is the correct reconstitution volume?
What is the recommended storage?
What is the expiration date of the reconstituted
material?
Was the volumetric pipette used to reconstitute?
What is the expiration date of the calibrator lot?
Was the appropriate diluent used in reconstitution?
After verifying the above information, proceed to the
next sections, which list additional causes for high,
low, or erratic results.
4.3.3 High Test Results
PROBLEM: High test results.
CAUSE REMEDY
1 Insufficient reagent
volume.
Verify reagent volume
on Chemistry
Parameters screen.
Check reagent
pipetting system.
Repeat analysis with
sufficient reagent.
2 Evaporation of
sample, calibrator, or
control.
fresh sample,
calibrator, and/or
control.
3 Poor calibration
results.
Verify calibrator pre-
paration.
Verify proper
calibration
programming; repeat
calibration if
necessary.
4 Incorrect sampling or
dilution of sample.
Verify correct
assembly of sample
probe and pipettor
parts.
Check all fittings for
leaks.
Replace o-rings and
seals.
5 Incubation bath
temperature too high.
Insert thermometer in
the opening near a
reagent probe. If bath
temperature does not
read 37 0.1 C, call
Technical Support.
6 Reagents not
properly prepared.
Check reagent
preparation.
7 Calibrators not
properly prepared.
Check calibrator
preparation.
4 6
4.3.4 Low Test Results
PROBLEM: Low test results.
CAUSE REMEDY
1 Reagents expired. See package insert for
stability of the prepared
reagent.
2 Reagents not
properly prepared.
See package insert for
proper preparation
instructions.
3 Reagents not
properly stored.
See package insert for
proper storage.
4 Incubation bath
temperature low.
Insert thermometer in
the opening near a
reagent probe. If bath
temperature does not
read 37 0.1 C, call
Technical Support.
5 Information not
correct on Chemistry
Parameters screen.
Check Chemistry
Parameters screen
against application
sheet and calibrator
value sheet for specific
chemistry.
6 Too much reagent
volume.
Verify reagent volume
on Chemistry
Parameters screen.
Check reagent
pipetting system.
correct reagent.
7 Calibrators not
properly prepared.
Check calibrator
preparation.
CAUSE REMEDY
8 Too little sample
volume.
Sufficient sample in
container?
Check sample
pipetting system.
Check sample probe
for obstructions.
Check CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen against
application sheet for
correct sample
volume.
4 7
4.3.5 Erratic Test Results
PROBLEM: Erratic test results.
CAUSE REMEDY
1 Maintenance not
performed properly or
at recommended
frequency on sample
or reagent pipettor or
probes.
If maintenance has
recently been
performed on the
sample or reagent
probes or pipettors:
Was air purge
performed after
maintenance?
Verify correct
assembly of all
parts.
Check all fittings
for air leaks.
Replace sample
and reagent probe
seals.
2 Fibrin clot in one
sample cup, or in
sample probe (if low
values printed for
several samples).
Check sample probe
for fibrin; clean probe
as outlined in Section
3.23.2, Clean Probes.
Request Air Purge on
ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE
screen.
3 Information not
correct on
CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen.
Check CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen against
application sheet and
calibrator value
sheets for specific
chemistry.
CAUSE REMEDY
4 Sample probe does
not reach the bottom
of the reaction cell
when dispensing
sample.
Perform Mechanism
Check on the
MECHANISMS
CHECK screen, and
verify that the probe
reaches the bottom of
the cell. Check the
spring mechanism to
make sure the probe
moves up and down
freely.
5 Insufficient sample
volume.
sufficient sample.
6 Contaminated
incubation bath.
Check for "Particles"
in incubation bath.
Perform incubation
bath exchange.
4 8
4.3.6 Chemistry Troubleshooting
Flowcharts
The table below outlines chemistry problems and the
patterns that may occur. Refer to the appropriate
flowchart to troubleshoot each problem.
Pattern of Chemistry
Problem Occurring
Troubleshooting
Flowchart Figure
Single Sample/Control Figure 4-1
Single Chemistry Figure 4-2
All Chemistries with two
setpoints
Figure 4-3
Multiple Chemistries
(photometrics only)
Figure 4-4
Multiple Chemistries
(only photometrics using R2s
or R3s)
Figure 4-5
All Chemistries including
ISEs
Figure 4-6
Rate Chemistries with one
setpoint
Figure 4-7
ISE -- all results are erratic -
excessive air in sipper
syringe
Figure 4-8
ISE results erratic Figure 4-9
4 9
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
Appropriate sample type (serum,
plasma, CSF, urine)?
Proper sample/control placement?
Sufficient sample volume?
Acceptable sample integrity
(fibrin, L, H, I)?
Appropriate collection time and
date of sample?
Incorrect test selections?
Call Customer Technical Support
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
Correct placement
and rerun.
Single
sample/control
Increase sample
volume and rerun.
Verify sample integrity.
Verify sample type;
check application sheet
for acceptable
specimen types.
Verify collection.
Verify test selections
on PATIENT TEST
SELECTION display
NO
YES
NO
Were calibrators properly
prepared and stored?
Are calibrator setpoints
acceptable?
YES
Prepare new calibrators
and rerun.
All chemistries
with two setpoints
Verify proper setponits
on CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen
for each test.
Call Customer Technical Support.
YES
NO
Verify correct
parameters using the
application sheet.
NO
NO
Properlyprepared reagents?
Reagents expired, contaminated,
or discolored?
Correct parameter information on
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen?
YES
Prepare new reagent
using the package
insert.
Single
chemistry
Prepare new reagent
using the package
insert.
YES
NO
Is the reagent bottle in the correct
channel position (for manually set
reagents only)?
Is selected test masked?
YES
YES
NO
Verify correct channel
position using the
REAGENT STATUS
dispaly.
Verify test status on
REAGENT STATUS
display.
NO
YES
NO
Verify connections in R1
probe arm and pipettor.
Verify seal integrity.
YES
NO
Is the photometer lamp OK?
Is R1 probe misaligned?
Is R1 system leaking?
Is incubation bath free of debris?
NO
YES
YES
Perform probe adjust. Multiple
chemistries
(photometrics only)
Perform air purge.
Perform Photometer
Check.
Perform maintenance.
Figure 4-1: Single Sample/Control
Figure 4-2: Single Chemistry
Figure 4-3: All Chemistries with Two Setpoints
Figure 4-4: Multiple Chemistries (Photometrics Only)
4 10
Figure 4-7: Rate Chemistries with One Setpoint
Figure 4-8: ISE All Results Are Erratic - Excessive Air
in Sipper Syringe
YES
NO
YES
Is R2 probe misaligned?
Is R2 system leaking?
NO
Perform probe adjust. Multiple
chemistries
(only photometrics
using reagents
dispensed as
R2 or R3)
Perform air prug.
Verify connections in R2
probe arm and pipettor.
Verify seal integrity.
NO
YES
YES
Is sample probe obstructed?
NO
Is sample system leaking?
Were controls/calibrators
properly prepared and stored?
NO
YES
Perform air purge. All chemistries
including ISEs
Verify proper dispense.
Clean/replace probe.
Verify connections.
Perform air purge.
Prepare new
controls/calibrators.
NO
YES
Was standard 1 properly
prepared and stored?
NO
Is incubation bath
temperature correct?
Is almp acceptable?
NO
Verify calibrator integrity
and rerun.
Rate chemistries
with one setpoint
Verify bath
temperature at 37 C
1C.
Perform Photometer
Check.
If unacceptable,
call Technical Support.
YES
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
Is reference cartidge placed
properly?
All reagent volumes sufficient,
reagent lines in the bottles?
Is the system leaking?
Are measuring cartridges
placed properly?
YES
YES
YES
Verify reagent volumes. ISE-- all
results are
erratic -
excessive air in
sipper syringe
Verify all connections
for leaks. Tighten loose
fittings. Verify seal
integrity for IS, Diluent,
and sipper syringes.
Verify cartridge
placement.
Verify cartridge
placement.
Figure 4-5: Multiple Chemistries (Only Photometrics
Using Reagents Dispensed as R2 or R3)
Figure 4-6: All Chemistries Including ISEs
4 11
Figure 4-9: ISE Results Erratic
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
Is microbial growth present in
the reagent system?
Are reagents correctly placed?
Is there salt buildup on
eletrodes or syringes?
Is the reference cartridge in
poor condition?
NO
NO
Verify placement
prime, and rerun.
ISE results
erratic
Clean all salt buildup
with wet gauze.
Clean ISE reagent
flowpath.
Replace ISE
reference cartridge.
4 12
4.4 Instrument Troubleshooting
4.4 Instrument Troubleshooting
4.4.1 General Considerations
You are required to troubleshoot the instrument only
to the extent of the procedures covered in this manual
(see Chapter 3, Maintenance). With more complex
problems you may be able to isolate and identify the
problem, but may not be able to correct it yourself. In
such cases, contact Customer Technical Support for
advice.
4.4.2 General Mechanical Problem
Isolation
The computer controls and monitors all mechanical
functions of the instrument. When a mechanical
problem arises within the instrument, it is
immediately recognized by the computer. An audible
alarm sounds and an alarm message appears on the
lower portion of the OPERATION MONITOR screen,
alerting you to the specific problem.
If a problem affects the instruments performance, the
computer terminates the Operation mode and enters
the Sampling Stop (S.Stop) or Stop mode. In the
Sampling Stop mode, the computer allows completion
of the samples in process which have not been
affected by the failure. If the problem affects all
samples in process, the computer immediately
terminates the Operation mode with a Stop or
Emergency Stop.
The remainder of this chapter provides a complete
listing of all alarms and suggested remedies for each.
WARNING
Certain instrument problems may arise that the
computer does not monitor. There will be no alarm on
the CRT to alert the operator. Such problems include
worn parts, air leaks in the pipettor system, reagent
contamination, etc. When you encounter these types
of problems, decide whether to continue to process
samples or to terminate the Operation mode,
according to the possibility of causing damage to the
analyzer or reporting erroneous test results.
4.4.3 Types of Alarms
The instrument issues two types of alarms: data
alarms and instrument alarms. Alarms that are
specific to calibration and abnormal quality control are
listed in both the data and instrument alarms sections.
The table below shows you where you can observe the
actual alarm.
ALARM
TYPE
OPERATION
MONITOR
DATA
REVIEW
REALTIME
DATA
MONITOR
Data X X
Instrument X
Calibration X
QC X X
ALARM
TYPE
RERUN
SAMPLES
INDIVIDUAL
QC
MONITOR
ANALYZER
PRINTOUT
Data X X
Instrument
Calibration X
QC X X
4 13
4.5 Data Alarms
4.5 Data Alarms
4.5.1 Introduction
Data alarms flag unusual reaction conditions
(insufficient sample or reagent, substrate depletion,
etc). This type of alarm appears on printed reports and
the DATA REVIEW screen, as well as the RERUN
SAMPLES and REAL TIME DATA MONITOR
screens. The data alarms section shows the code
that prints on reports in the Printed column and the
alarm code that appears in the Data Review column on
the DATA REVIEW screen, as well as the RERUN
SAMPLES and REAL TIME DATA MONITOR
screens.
A description of each alarm and remedy is contained
in the remainder of Section 4.5.
The remedy for some data alarms may refer you to a
specific instrument alarm described in Section 4.6.
4 14
4.5 Data Alarms
4.5.2 Data Alarm Table
DATA PROCESSING ALARMS
ALARM PRINTED DATA REVIEW DESCRIPTION REMEDY
ADC
abnormal
ADC A The ADC (analog digital converter) value is
abnormal.
a. See alarm code ADC
Counter Failure (35-1
to 35-4).
Cell blank
abnormal
CELL Q The difference between the current passed cell
blanks and the previous cell blank measured by
the CELL BLANK function on the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen is greater than 0.1 ABS.
a. See alarm code Cell
Blank Out of Limits
(30 to 34).
Sample
Short
SAMP. V There is insufficient sample volume in the
sample cup.
a. Add sample and
rerun.
Reagent
short
RGNT T There is insufficient reagent volume in the
reagent bottle. (photometric)
There is insufficient ISE reagent volume.
a. See alarm code
Replace Low Reagent
(42-1 to 42-32).
Absorbance
over
ABS? Z The absorbance value to be used for calculation
after cell blank correction exceeds 3.3 ABS.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Check if there is an
obstacle in the optical
path of the
photometer.
Check if the
incubation bath is
contaminated.
Check if the waterbath
is full.
Check if the reagent
has been prepared
properly.
Check if the reaction
cell is scratched.
Is sample grossly
lipemic or an
extremely high value?
Prozone
error
xxxxxP
(xxxxx
indicates the
prozone
check value.)
P In one-point or two-point assay with prozone
check, the prozone check value (PC value)
exceeds the specified upper/lower limit. Shown
below is the relationship between the PC value
and upper/lower limit on occurrence of the error.
a.
b.
Check if the reagent
has been prepared
properly.
Check upper/lower
limit (Prozone Limit)
on CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen.
An - Ap
n - p
Am - Ap
m - p
x 100
Analytical
method
PC value
Relationship between
PC value and upper/
lower limit on
occurrence of error
LOWER UPPER
One-point
assay
(Note)
PC value
< Limit
value
PC value
> Limit
value
x {(Am+Am-1) -
k(Al+Al-1)}
Two-point
assay
(Note)
Note: [l], [m], [n] and [p] are photometric read cycle.
1
2
4 15
4.5 Data Alarms
Reaction
limit over
(only for
rate assay
including
two-point
rate assay)
LIM.1 I The main wavelength absorbance exceeds the
reaction limit at all photometric points to be used
for calculation.
a.
b.
Dilute and rerun the
sample.
Check ABS. Limit on
CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen.
LIM.2 J The main wavelength absorbance exceeds the
reaction limit at the second and subsequent
photometric points to be used for calculation.
LIM.3 K The main wavelength absorbance exceeds the
reaction limit at the third or fourth and
subsequent photometric points to be used for
calculation.
Linearity
abnormal
(only for rate
assay)
LIN. W When the number of photometric points within
the reaction limit range is nine or more, a
comparison of the absorbance change rates at
both the first and last six points exceeds the
linearity limit value as entered in system
parameters. Refer to Section 5.32 for more
details.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Check the stirring
mechanism.
Dilute and rerun the
sample.
Check Linearity Limit
on SYSTEM
PARAMETERS
screen.
Ensure water bath
free of debris.
LIN.8 F When the number of photometric points within
the reaction limit range is eight or less, a
comparison of the absorbance change rates at
both the first and last three points exceeds the
linearity limit value as entered in system
parameters. Refer to Section 5.32 for more
details.
Standard 1
absorbance
abnormal
S1 ABS? -- During calibration, the average of two measured
values of STD (1) is outside the STD (1)
absorbance range.S1 is bichromatic reading for
endpoints, monochromatic for rate.
a.
b.
c.
Check S1 ABS Limit
on CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen.
Check reagent
preparation and
calibration.
Recalibrate.
Duplicate
error
DUP -- During calibration, the difference between two
replicate measured absorbances of any
standard is larger than the tests duplicate limit.
a.
b.
Recalibrate.
Check Duplicate Limit
on CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen.
Edited Test EDITED * An edited 1st result or replaced rerun data is
marked with a $ on the DATA REVIEW screen.
This also prints on the patient report, as well as
the Rerun Samples and Real Time Data Monitor
screens.
Note: If the entered assay points [l] and [m] do
not satisfy l + 2 < m, the reaction limit is
always exceeded.
4 16
4.5 Data Alarms
Standard
error
CAL? -- 1. During photometric calibration, any one of
the following alarms is encountered:
a. See alarm code
Calibration Error (70-1
to 70-49).
ADC abnormal, cell blank abnormal,
sample short, reagent short,
absorbance over, reaction limit over,
Iinearity abnormal, prozone error,
duplicate error, calculation disabled
or standard 1 absorbance abnormal.
2.
3.
4.
During calibration, calculation is disabled.
During nonlinear calibration, an extreme
value appears.
During ISE calibration, any one of the
following alarms is encountered:
ADC abnormal, sample short,
calculation disabled, noise error,
and level error. Calibration is invalid.
Sensitivity
error
SENS -- Sensitivity is checked for linear (2 to 6 points),
nonlinear or isozyme-P calibration.
This error is indicated if the difference in
mean absorbance between STD (1) and STD
(N)* is smaller than the sensitivity limit (input
value).
a.
b.
See alarm code
Sensitivity Error (73-1
to 73-46).
Check Sensitivity Limit
on CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen.
*N: =
=
2.........
2 to
6...
(two calibration points) Linear
(2-point) or isozyme-P
(span point input value)
Nonlinear, linear (multi-point)
calibration, or nonlinear
(logit-log 3P/4P) calibration
Note: For span calibration, the previous S1
ABS (linear) or previous mean
absorbance (nonlinear) of standard
solution (l) is used for sensitivity
check.
Calibration
error
CALIB -- For photometric assay: during calibration,
there is a difference of 20% or more
between the current K factor and the previous
value. For ISEs, the calibration concentration
or slope level does not satisfy the following
expression:
a. See alarm code
Calibration Factor
Error (71-1 to 71-49).
SD error SD LIM -- During nonlinear or multipoint linear
calibration the SD value is larger than the SD
limit.
a.
b.
See alarm code SD Limit
Exceeded (72-1to72-46).
Check SD Limit on
CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
Noise error NOISE N The difference between the maximum and
minimum potential values exceeds the
following values during measurement:
a.
b.
Check for excess air
in the ISE reagent
lines; examine
pipettors and
cartridges for leaks.
If alarm occurred
during calibration,
correct problem and
recalibrate.
Na
+
: 0.7 mV
K
+
: 1.0 mV
Cl
-
: 0.8 mV
Previous Value - Current Value
( Previous Value + Current Value) / 2
Compensate
Level
10% x 100 >
4 17
4.5 Data Alarms
Level error LEVEL L During measurement of internal reference,
potential is not within the following range:
(Internal Standard Solution)
a.
b.
c.
d.
Check ISE compart-
ment for liquid
leakage and/or air
bubbles.
If other ISE alarms are
present, correct those
alarm conditions and
recalibrate.
Check reference
cartridge.
Salt bridges.
Slope
abnormal
SLOPE? -- The slope for the specified electrolyte cartridge
is outside of the acceptable range.
The electrode response is poor. The carryover
rate is shown below:
If the slope has
decreased gradually over
time, replace the
cartridge. Otherwise,
examine ISE system for
other abnormalities:
check standards,
reagents, priming leaks in
cartridges. Perform a
WASH (ISE) from the
screen.
Preparation
abnormal
(electrode
preparation)
PREP. -- The slope for the specified electrolyte cartridge
is not within the following range:
The electrode response characteristic has
deteriorated. The carryover rate (A) is within the
following range:
If control values are in
range, no action is
necessary. Be prepared
to replace a cartridge
soon (when the SLOPE
alarm occurs), as long as
the slope has decreased
gradually over time.
Otherwise, examine ISE
system for other
abnormalities: check
standards, reagents,
priming, leaks in
cartridges. Correct
abnormalities and
recalibrate.
Internal
Standard
concentration
abnormal
I.REF -- The concentration of Internal Standard solution
is not within the following range:
Check Internal Standard
reagent volume and
preparation.
Na
+
, K
+
: SLOPE 32.0 mV
Cl
-
: SLOPE -25.0 mV
Na
+
: 0.232 < A
K
+
: 0.160 < A
Cl
-
: 0.490 < A
Na
+
: -90.0 mV to -10 mV
K
+
: -90.0 mV to -10 mV
Cl
-
: 80.0 mV to 160.0 mV
Na
+
: 0.154 < A
K
+
: 0.107 < A
Cl
-
: 0.330 < A
Na
+
: 120.0 mmol/L to 160.0 mmol/L
K
+
Cl
-
Na
+
, K
+
: 32.0 mV SLOPE -37.9 mV
or 68.1 mV SLOPE
Cl
-
: -29.9 mV SLOPE -25.0 mV
or -68.1 mV SLOPE
4 18
4.5 Data Alarms
Sample
value
abnormal
R.OVER & The concentration of sample is outside the
following range:
Test-to-test
compensation
error
CMP.T C 1.
2.
In test-to-test compensation calculation, any
data alarm other than those shown below is
indicated for the compensation test data.
In isozyme-Q concentration calculation, any
data alarm other than those shown below is
indicated for the isozyme-P concentration,
a. Check the relevant
data.
Calculation disabled, test-to-test
compensation disabled, overflow, random
error, systematic error, QC
error and outside of expected value.
Test-to-test
compensation
disabled
CMP.T! M 1.
2.
3.
4.
During test-to-test compensation
calculation, the denominator becomes zero.
The test to be used for test-to-test
compensation has not been measured yet.
Any test to be used for test-to-test
compensation has the data alarm
calculation disabled or test-to-test
compensation disabled.
Any compensation test has the data alarm
(SAMP., RGNT., etc.) that leaves the data
blank.
data.
Technical
limit over
LIM.H
LIM.L
$ The measured value is outside the technical
limit range.
a.
b.
Check Techincal Limit
on CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS
screen.
Rerun the sample and
check the measured
value.
Greater than the upper limit value
(LIM.H).
Less than the lower limit value (LIM.L).
Random
error
RANDOM @ 1.
2.
Any of the current and (N-1) preceding
control X values are larger than 2SD and
any of the current and (N-1) preceding
control Y values are smaller than -2SD
(range > 4 SD).
Any of the current or preceding control X
values are smaller than -2SD and any of
the current or preceding control Y values
are larger than 2SD.
Legend:
a.
b.
NOTE: Check is
performed only when
RULE R-4SD is
selected.
See alarm code
Random Control Error
(74).
N = control run
number entered on
Real Time QC screen
X:
Y:
Control number entered for X on REAL
TIME QC.
Control number entered for Y on REAL
TIME QC.
Mean, SD: Values specified on REAL
TIME QCData: Measured value mean.
Na
+
: 10 mmol/L to 250 mmol/L
K
+
Cl
-
4 19
4.5 Data Alarms
Systematic
error 1
SYSTM1 # 1.
2.
The control X and Y data values are larger
than 2SD.
The control X and Y data values are
smaller than -2SD.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 2-2SD is
selected.
See alarm code
Systematic Control
Error (75).
Systematic
error 2
SYSTM2 # 1.
2.
3.
4.
The last two control X data values are
larger than 2SD.
The last two control X data values are
smaller than -2SD.
The last two control Y data values are
larger than 2SD.
The last two control Y data values are
smaller than -2SD.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 2-2SD is
selected.
See alarm code
Systematic Control
Error (75).
Systematic
error 3
SYSTM3 # 1.
2.
The last two control X and last two control
Y data values are larger than 1SD.
The last two control X and last two control
Y data values are smaller than -1SD.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 4-1SD is
selected.
See alarm code
Systematic Control
Error (75).
Systematic
error 4
SYSTM4 # 1.
2.
3.
4.
The last four control X data values are
larger than 1SD.
The last four control X data values are
smaller than -1SD.
The last four control Y data values are
larger than 1SD.
The last four control Y data values are
smaller than -1SD.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 4-1SD is
selected.
See alarm code
Systematic Control
Error (75).
Systematic
error 5
SYSTM5 # 1.
2.
The last five control X and last five control
Y data values are all positive--above the
mean value.
The last five control X and last five control
Y data values are all negative--below the
mean value.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 10X is selected.
See alarm code
Systematic Control
Error (75).
Systematic
error 6
SYSTM6 # 1.
2.
3.
4.
The last 10 control X data values are
all positive--above the mean value.
The last 10 control X data values are
all negative--below the mean value.
The last 10 control Y data values are
all positive--above the mean value.
The last 10 control Y data values are
all negative--below the mean value.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 10X is selected.
See alarm code
Systematic Control
Error (75).
4 20
4.5 Data Alarms
QC error 1 QCERR1 + 1.
2.
The control X data value or control Y data
value is larger than 3SD.
value is smaller than -3SD.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 1-3SD is
selected.
See alarm code Real
Time QC Error (76).
QC error 2 QCERR2 + 1.
2.
value is larger than 2.5SD.
value is smaller than -2.5SD.
a.
NOTE: This check is
performed only when
RULE 1-2.5SD is
selected.
See alarm code Real
Time QC Error (76).
Calculation
test error
CALC? % Any data alarm other than those shown below is
indicated for the test to be used for calculation.
data.
Calculation disabled, test-to-test
compensation disabled and outside of
expected values.
Overflow OVER O The result data cannot be output within the
specified number of digits.
Note: Blank space is left for data.
a. Try rerun.
Calculation
disabled
??? X 1.
2.
3.
During calculation, the denominator
becomes zero.
An overflow occurs in logarithmic or
exponential calculation.
In isozyme-Q channel concentration
calculation, the data alarm calculation
disabled is indicated for the
isozyme-Pchannel data or the isozyme-P
channel is not measured.
Note: Result is left blank.
a. Check if there is a
logical error in
calculation formulas.
Outside of
expected
value
H -- For patient samples, the calculated
concentration is larger than the upper limit of
the expected value. For control samples, a
concentration exceeds the values input on
Control Value Setting.
L For patient samples, the calculated
concentration is smaller than the lower limit of
the expected value. For control samples, a
concentration is lower than the values entered
via Control Value Setting.
Calibration
Result
Abnormal
CALIB! ! Any alarm (other than CALIB) has occurred
during the latest calibration.
a.
b.
Correct the condition
causing the CAL? or
SENS alarm.
Recalibrate.
4 21
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Operation Monitor
Alarm Message
Stirrer 2:Execute Mech. Check
Level
STOP
Code
02-006
Time
10:20
51 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 60 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5
70
E E E E E
R:R. Finished
E:S. Finished
R:Routine
E:Stat
R:R. Finished
E:S. Finished
R:N. Rerun
E:S. Rerun
26 7 8 9 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 40
10 20
50
R R R R R R R R R R
Currently Sampling
Outer
Ring
Middle
Ring
S.No.
R52
Pos.
42
ID
1234567890123
Test
AMYL
4.6 Instrument Alarms
4.6.1 Introduction
Instrument alarms flag unusual instrument conditions
(abnormal reaction bath temperature, mechanical
malfunctions, etc.). This type of alarm appears on
the OPERATION MONITOR screen and causes an
audible alarm if the buzzer has not been inactivated
at the keyboard.
4.6.2 Instrument Alarms Display
Press OPERATION MONITOR, followed by
GUIDANCE, to display the instrument alarms list.
The OPERATION MONITOR, screen shown below in
Figure 4-10, illustrates how the alarms appear on the
analyzer.
Figure 4-10: Operation Monitor Alarms Display
The lower portion of the Operation Monitor screen
provides the following information about each alarm:
Alarm Message
Alarm Level
Alarm Code
Time Alarm Occurred
ALARM MESSAGE -
Descriptive name
of the alarm.
TIME -
Time alarm
occurred.
CODE -
Identifies the alarm
code for easy
reference in table.
LEVEL -
Severity
of the alarm.
4 22
ALARM LEVELS
The alarm level indicates the severity of the alarm
condition. The four alarm levels are:
WARNING
S. STOP
STOP
E. STOP
WARNING:
When a WARNING alarm is issued, there is no
immediate danger to the analyzer and operation is not
interrupted. Refer to the Operation Monitor screen,
note the alarm message, and correct the problem.
S. STOP:
The S. STOP (Sampling Stop) alarm is issued to
indicate a problem that affects the sampling system.
The instrument stops sampling, but continues to
process any samples which have already been
dispensed. Correct the alarm condition, note which
sample was last to be dispensed, and resume
operation with the next sample to be processed.
STOP:
The STOP alarm is issued when an instrument
problem prevents completion of analyses in process.
The instrument stops all mechanical functions at the
end of the current (10-second) cycle. Correct the
alarm condition, note which specimen was last to
print out before the alarm, and resume operation,
repeating those samples that did not print out.
E. STOP:
The E. STOP (Emergency Stop) alarm is issued when
an alarm condition is present that could damage the
instrument. Under these conditions, the instrument
stops all mechanical functions as soon as the alarm
condition is detected. Correct the alarm condition,
note which specimen was last to print out before the
alarm, and resume operation, repeating those
samples that did not print out.
4.6.3 Troubleshooting Alarm
Conditions
The quick reference table on the following pages list
the class and alarm Message, along with the
operators manual page where a description of each
alarm is located. This table is designed for use as a
quick reference to the instrument alarms section.
The instrument alarms table follows the quick
reference guide. This table is arranged in order of
alarm message, code, level, description, and
remedy. The alarm message, code, and level appear
as shown above on the OPERATION MONITOR
screen.
To troubleshoot instrument alarm conditions:
2 Look at the alarm display. If there are any alarms
listed, record the alarm class and code, then find
the description of the alarm in the Instrument
Alarms table on page 4-29 through 4-66.
3 The description may list more than one cause for
a single alarm. Read the entire description before
proceeding to remedy the situation. The remedy
column provides troubleshooting steps in
sequential order. One remedy section may be
applicable to more than one alarm. Follow the
recommended procedure for correcting the alarm
condition that is listed in the remedy column.
If the remedy column lists Call Technical Support
as the first or only step for the alarm you are
experiencing, call Boehringer Mannheim
Customer Technical Support immediately.
If the alarms recur, call Customer Technical
Support.
4 23
4.6.4 Instrument Alarms Quick
Reference Table
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
QUICK REFERENCE TABLE
Code Alarm Message Page
1 Stirrer 1: Execute MECH
CHECK 427
2 Stirrer 2: Execute MECH
CHECK 428
3 Rinse: Execute MECH
CHECK 428
4 Reaction Disk (Homing
Failure) 429
5 Abnormal Sample Probe
Movement 430
6 Sample Disk: Execute
MECH CHECK 432
7 Abnormal S. Syringe
Movement 434
8 Abnormal R1 Probe
Movement 435
9 Abnormal R2 Probe
Movement 435
10 Check R1 Disk then:
MECH CHECK 436
11 Check R2 Disk then:
MECH CHECK 437
12 Replace R1 Disk Cover 438
13 Replace R2 Disk Cover 438
14 Abnormal R1 Syringe
Movement 438
15 Abnormal R2 Syringe
Movement 439
16 ISE Sipper: Execute
MECH CHECK 439
17 ISE Vacuum: Execute
MECH CHECK 439
18 Abnormal ISE Syringe
Movement 440
19 ISE Stopped: Resolve
ISE Alarm 441
20 Incubator Water Temp Error 441
21 Incubator Water Level Error 441
22 Execute INC. WATER
EXCHANGE 441
23 Water Reservoir Level
Too Low 441
24 Empty Waste Reservoir 442
25 Power Supply Unit
> 70 degrees 442
26 Degasser Heater
> 70 degrees 442
4 24
42 Replace Low Reagent
(R2) 446
43 R1 < User Defined Level 446
44 R2 < User Defined Level 447
45 Check R1 Position and
App Code 447
46 Check R2 Position and
App Code 447
47 R1 Label: Execute
MANUAL SET 447
48 R2 Label: Execute
MANUAL SET 447
49 Load Cell Wash Bottle 448
50 Load Probe Wash Bottle 448
51 Dup. Barcode: Replace
Bottle 448
52 Dup. Barcode: Relabel
Sample 448
53 Enter Test Selections 448
54 T/S Exceed 800 Patients 449
55 Sampling Delay 449
56 No More Samples to
Process 449
57 C-RAM Error 449
27 Check Stoppers on
Vacuum Tank 442
28 Liquid in Vacuum Tank 442
29 3 ABS Readings > 3.3 442
30 Cell Blank Out of
Limits (2X) 443
Limits (3X) 444
Limits (10X) 444
Limits (10X) 444
Limits (2X) 444
35 ADC Counter Failure 444
36 ADC Voltage: Execute
RESET 445
37 Sample Barcode Error 445
38 Barcode Reader Error 445
39 R1 Barcode Error 446
40 R2 Barcode Error 446
41 Replace Low Reagent
(R1) 446
4 25
58 Interrupt Error 449
59 DC Error: Turn 911
OFF then ON 449
60 Replace Fuse 449
61 Power Failure Has
Occurred 450
62 Controller Motor
Error 450
63 Controller Motor
Failure 450
65 Replace Cell Wash
Solution 450
66 Replace Probe Wash
Solution 450
67 Cell Wash Solution
< 10 mL 451
68 Probe Wash Solution
< 10 mL 451
69 Stat Error, Testing
Incomplete 451
70 Calibration Error 451
71 Calibration Factor Error 452
72 SD Limit Exceeded 452
73 Sensitivity Error 452
74 Random Control Error 453
75 Systematic Control Error 453
76 Real Time QC Error 454
80 ISE Int. Ref. Error 454
81 ISE Noise: Execute
ISE CHECK 454
82 ISE Slope Warning 454
83 ISE Slope Error:
Replace Cart. 454
84 ISE I. Ref Concentration
Error 455
85 Execute ISE
CALIBRATION 455
87 Replace Low ISE
Reagent 455
88 Replace Low
Hitergent 455
89 Check Hitergent
Position 455
90 Twin Test Parameter
Error 455
91 Check App Code and
Assay Point 456
92 Calibration Parameter
Error 456
4 26
93 Check R1-4 Dispense
Volumes 457
94 Isozyme Parameter Error 457
95 Range Error 458
96 Check COMP. TEST
Parameters 458
97 Serum Index Test Error 458
99 Check REAGENT
PROBE WASH 458
100 No Measurable Channel
On Board 459
101 Execute 10 sec.
CYCLE TIME 459
102 Duplicate Bottle Code 459
103 Test Selection Error 459
104 Cannot Execute ORIG.
ABS. Now 459
105 Check Hitergent Position 459
106 Refill Hiterg, Do Bath
Exchange 460
107 Execute REAGENT
REGISTRATION 460
108 Check ISE Standard Codes 460
110 Printer Error 460
111 System Interface Error 461
112 Non Existing Key Code
Entered 462
113 C-RAM Error 462
114 Real Time Clock Error 462
115 APU Fail: Turn 911 OFF
then ON 462
116 ACI Fail: Turn 911 OFF
then ON 462
120 Reinsert Floppy Disk 462
121 Wrong FD in Drive 463
122 FD Reading Error 463
123 FD Writing Error 464
124 Write Protected Disk
in Drive 464
125 Clean FDD Head,
Replace FD 464
4 27
4.6.5 Instrument Alarms Table
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Alarm Code Level Description Remedy
Stirrer 1:
Execute MECH
CHECK
1-1 STOP Stirrer 1 does not reach its
highest position (rinse bath
side) when ascending.
a.
b.
The MECHANISMS CHECK
screen: execute Mechanism
Check 10 times.
Resume operation; if alarm
recurs, call Technical Support.
highest position (cell side)
when ascending.
a.
b.
Check 10 times.
1-3 STOP Stirrer 1 does not descend into
the reaction cell.
a.
b.
Check 10 times.
1-4 STOP Stirrer 1 does not reach the
rinse bath position when
rotating toward the rinse bath.
a.
b.
Check 10 times.
1-5 STOP Stirrer 1 does not move to the
reaction disk.
a.
b.
Check 10 times.
1-6 STOP When RESET, stirrer 1 does
not return to the rinse bath
(home) position.
Manually raise the stirring unit to
its highest position, then execute
Reset on theANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
1-7 STOP When RESET, stirrer 1 does
not leave the rinse bath
(home) position.
MAINTENANCE screen.
1-8 STOP Stirrer 1 does not rotate in the
highest position.
MAINTENANCE screen.
4 28
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Stirrer 2:
Execute
MECH CHECK
highest position (rinse bath side)
when ascending.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK
Check 10 times.
highest position (cell side) when
ascending.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK
Check 10 times.
2-3 STOP Stirrer 2 does not descend into
the reaction cell.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK
Check 10 times.
2-4 STOP Stirrer 2 does not reach the rinse
bath position when moving to the
rinse bath.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK
Check 10 times.
2-5 STOP Stirrer 2 does not move to the
reaction disk.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK
Check 10 times.
2-6 STOP When reset, stirrer 2 does not
return to the rinse bath (home)
position.
Manually raise stirring unit to highest
position, then execute Reset on
2-7 STOP When reset, stirrer 2 does not
leave the rinse bath (home)
position.
2-8 STOP Stirrer 2 does not rotate in the
highest position.
Rinse:
Execute
MECH CHECK
3-1 STOP The rinse mechanism does not
reach the highest position when
ascending.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK
Check 10 times.
4 29
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Rinse:
Execute MECH
CHECK
(contd)
3-2 STOP The rinse mechanism does
not descend into cell.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK
Check 10 times.
Reaction Disk
(Homing
Failure)
4-1 STOP Reaction disk does not detect
its stop position.
a.
b.
c.
Check for water droplets on
bottom of reaction disk, if disk
has been recently washed.
Dry thoroughly.
Check for water droplets on the
detector below reaction disk.
Dry thoroughly.
4-2 STOP The reaction disk does not
stop at the correct position.
a.
b.
c.
Dry thoroughly.
Dry thoroughly.
4-3 STOP Reaction disk does not detect
its home position when
RESET.
a.
b.
c.
Dry thoroughly.
Dry thoroughly.
4-4 STOP The first reaction cell does not
stop at the specified position
when RESET.
a.
b.
c.
Dry thoroughly.
Dry thoroughly.
4 30
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Reaction Disk
(Homing
Failure)
(contd)
4-5 STOP When the reaction disk rotates,
the sample probe, reagent
probe, stirrer, or cell rinse
mechanism is not set at the
highest point.
a.
b.
ANALYZER MAINTENANCE
screen: execute Reset.
Abnormal
Sample Probe
Movement
5-1 S. STOP The sample probe does not
ascend to the highest point
when leaving any position other
than the reaction cell.
a.
b.
MECHANISMS CHECK screen:
execute Mechanism Check 10
times.
5-2 STOP The sample probe does not
ascend to the highest point
when leaving the reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
5-3 S. STOP Sample probe descends
abnormally at any position other
than at the reaction cell.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
times.
Inspect probe where it is
attached to the sample probe
arm. The probe is spring-
mounted and should travel freely
up and down.
Inspect cup bottom for proper
height.
Check sample cup for distortion.
execute vertical Probe Adjust.
5-4 STOP The sample probe descends
abnormally into the reaction cell.
a.
b.
c.
d.
times.
Inspect probe where it is
attached to the sample probe
arm. The probe is spring-
mounted and should travel freely
up and down.
execute vertical Probe Adjust.
Resume operation. If alarm
4 31
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Abnormal
Sample Probe
Movement
(contd)
descend at any position other
a.
b.
times.
5-6 STOP The sample probe does not
descend into the reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
5-7 WARNING Sample probe continues to
descend abnormally. The
abnormal descent detector
remains on.
Inspect probe where it is attached to
the sample probe arm. The probe is
spring-mounted and should travel
freely up and down. If necessary,
remount the probe.
5-8 S. STOP Sample probe cannot detect the
correct cell position as it rotates
to the reaction disk.
a.
b.
times.
5-9 S. STOP Sample probe does not leave
cell position when trying to
rotate.
a.
b.
times.
5-10 S. STOP Sample probe does not
descend properly at the ISE
dilution vessel.
a.
b.
execute Probe Adjust. (Press
1 ENTER for Horizontal Probe
adjust.) Press SAMPLE STOP
four times to position probe over
ISE dilution vessel.
5-11 S. STOP Liquid level detector is not
reset.
a.
b.
5-12 WARNING Sample probe descends
abnormally during rotation of
S. Probe in PROBE ADJUST.
a.
b.
c.
times.
Verify probe wire connection.
4 32
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Abnormal
Sample Probe
Movement
(contd)
rotate in its highest position.
a.
b.
times.
Sample Disk:
Execute
MECH CHECK
6-1 S. STOP Sample disk cannot detect the
stop position on outer ring.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Do not touch the sample disk
during operation.
If anything is obstructing sample
disk movement, correct the
situation.
times.
6-2 S. STOP Sample disk does not stop at
correct position on outer ring.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
6-3 S. STOP Sample disk cannot detect its
stop position on middle ring.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
4 33
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Sample Disk:
Execute
MECH CHECK
(contd)
the correct position on the
middle ring.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
6-5 S. STOP Sample disk cannot detect the
stop position on inner ring.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
correct position on inner ring.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
6-7 STOP Sample disk does not stop at
the home position during RESET.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
4 34
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Sample Disk:
Execute
MECH CHECK
(contd)
6-8 STOP Sample disk does not leave
home position during RESET.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
6-9 STOP Sample disk does not stop at
specified home position during
RESET.
a.
b.
c.
d.
during operation.
situation.
times.
Abnormal
S. Syringe
Movement
7-1 S.STOP Sample syringe does not ascend
to the highest point.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
times.
If sample pipettor was recently
serviced, verify that retaining
screw is not overtightened.
Verify that sample pipettor
retaining screw is not bent.
screen: execute Air Purge
and observe sample syringe for
ascending movement.
7-2 S.STOP Sample syringe will not descend
from the highest point.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
times.
If sample pipettor was recently
serviced, verify that retaining
screw is not overtightened.
Verify that sample pipettor
retaining screw is not bent.
and observe sample syringe for
ascending movement.
4 35
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Abnormal
R1 Probe
Movement
8-1 STOP The Reagent 1 probe does not
ascend to the highest point when
leaving any position other than
the reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
8-3 STOP Reagent 1 probe descends
a.
b.
c.
Verify that reagent bottle is
uncapped.
Verify that reagent disk cover is
in the proper position.
Verify that Reagent 1 probe is
not bent.
8-4 STOP Reagent 1 probe does not
descend from the highest point
at any position other than over
the reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
8-6 WARNING Reagent 1 probe continues to
descend abnormally.
Verify that cushioning of the
Reagent 1 probe is normal.
8-7 STOP Reagent 1 probe cannot detect
the reaction cell position as it
rotates to the reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
8-8 STOP Reagent 1 probe does not leave
the cell position when trying to
rotate.
a.
b.
times.
8-9 STOP Liquid level detector is not reset. a.
b.
8-10 STOP Reagent 1 probe does not rotate
in its highest position.
a.
b.
Abnormal
R2 Probe
Movement
9-1 STOP The Reagent 2 probe does not
ascend to the highest point when
leaving any position other than
the reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
4 36
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Abnormal
R2 Probe
Movement
(contd)
9-3 STOP Reagent 2 probe descends
a.
b.
c.
Verify that reagent bottle is
uncapped.
Verify that reagent disk cover is
in the proper position.
Verify that Reagent 2 probe is
not bent.
9-4 STOP Reagent 2 probe does not
descend from the highest point at
any position other than over the
reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
9-6 WARNING Reagent 2 probe continues to
descend abnormally.
Verify that cushioning of the Reagent
2 probe is normal.
9-7 STOP Reagent 2 probe cannot detect
the cell position as it rotates to
the reaction cell.
a.
b.
times.
9-8 STOP Reagent 2 probe does not leave
the cell position when trying to
rotate.
a.
b.
times.
9-9 STOP Liquid level detector is not
RESET.
a.
b.
9-10 STOP Reagent 2 probe does not rotate
in its highest position.
a.
b.
Check R1
Disk then:
MECH CHECK
10-1 STOP Reagent 1 disk does not detect
its stop position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Do not touch the reagent disk
during operation.
Remove item(s) such as reagent
lids, which may be obstructing
disk rotation.
Ensure reagent bottles are
inserted properly.
times.
4 37
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Check R1
Disk then:
MECH CHECK
(contd)
10-2 STOP Reagent 1 disk does not stop at
the correct position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
during operation.
Remove item(s), such as reagent
lids, that may be obstructing
disk rotation.
inserted properly.
execute Mechanism Check
10 times.
its home position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
during operation.
disk rotation.
inserted properly.
10 times.
Check R2
Disk then:
MECH CHECK
its stop position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
during operation.
disk rotation.
inserted properly.
10 times.
11-2 STOP Reagent 2 disk does not stop at
correct position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
during operation.
disk rotation.
inserted properly.
10 times.
4 38
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Check R2
Disk then:
MECH CHECK
(contd)
its home position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
during operation.
lids, that may be obstructing disk
rotation.
inserted properly.
Replace R1
Disk Cover
12-1 WARNING Reagent 1 disk cover is left open
at the start of operation.
Instrument will not start.
Close the reagent 1 disk cover.
12-2 WARNING Reagent 1 disk cover is opened
during operation or sampling
stop.
during reagent registration.
for 5 minutes or more during
stand-by or stat stand-by.
Replace R2
Disk Cover
at the start of operation.
Instrument will not start.
during operation or sampling
stop.
during reagent registration.
for 5 minutes or more during
stand-by or STAT stand-by.
Abnormal
R1 Syringe
Movement
14-1 STOP Reagent 1 syringe does not
reach its highest position.
a.
b.
c.
Verify that the retaining screw
of the reagent 1 system is not
overtightened.
and observe reagent 1 syringe
for ascending movement.
4 39
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Abnormal
R1 Syringe
Movement
(contd)
descend from its highest
position.
a.
b.
c.
overtightened.
screen: execute Air Purge and
observe reagent 1 syringe
for descending movement.
Abnormal
R2 Syringe
Movement
reach its highest position.
a.
b.
c.
overtightened.
descend from its highest
position.
a.
b.
c.
overtightened.
ISE Sipper:
Execute
MECH CHECK
16-1 WARNING/
STOP*1
ISE sipper nozzle does not reach
the lowest position (during reset/
operation).
a.
b.
execute ISE Check 10 times.
16-2 WARNING/
STOP*1
ISE sipper nozzle cannot leave
the lowest position.
a.
b.
ISE Vacuum:
Execute MECH
CHECK
17-1 WARNING/
STOP*1
ISE vacuum nozzle does not
reach the lowest position.
a.
b.
17-2 WARNING/
STOP*1
ISE vacuum nozzle cannot leave
the lowest position.
a.
b.
4 40
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Abnormal
ISE Syringe
Movement
18-1 WARNING/
STOP*1
ISE sipper syringe does not
reach the highest position.
a.
b.
c.
If syringe was recently
reassembled, check for
proper assembly.
18-2 WARNING/
STOP*1
ISE sipper syringe cannot leave
the highest position.
a.
b.
c.
proper assembly.
18-3 WARNING/
STOP*1
Diluent syringe cannot reach the
highest position.
a.
b.
c.
proper assembly.
18-4 WARNING/
STOP*1
Diluent syringe cannot leave the
highest position.
a.
b.
c.
proper assembly.
18-5 WARNING/
STOP*1
Internal standard solution syringe
cannot reach the highest
position.
a.
b.
c.
proper assembly.
18-6 WARNING/
STOP*1
Internal standard solution syringe
cannot leave the highest
position.
a.
b.
c.
proper assembly.
4 41
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
ISE Stopped:
Resolve ISE
Alarm
19-1 WARNING/
STOP*1
ISE function stops due to an
alarm.
Remedy the presented alarm, then
resume operation.
Incubator
Water Temp
Error
20-1 WARNING Water temperature in the
incubation bath exceeds 45 C.
a.
b.
c.
Ensure that radiator filter on
front of instrument is not
clogged with dust.
Verify that both liquid level
sensors are plugged in.
20-2 WARNING Water temperature in the
incubation bath is outside a
range of 37 0.5 C.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ensure that radiator filter on
front of instrument is not clogged
with dust.
Ensure that room temperature is
15 to 32 C.
Verify that incubation bath water
is circulating.
Incubator
Water Level
Error
21-1 WARNING Incubation bath water level is
too low.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Verify that pump does not contain
air. If so, repeat Inc. Water
Exchange on the MAINTENANCE
screen several times.
Ensure that pump filter is not
clogged.
Check Hitergent level in supply
bottle.
Execute
INC. WATER
EXCHANGE
22-1 WARNING More than 24 hours have
elapsed since the last incubation
bath water exchange.
MAINTENANCE screen: execute
Inc. Water Exchange.
Water
Reservoir
Level Too Low
23-1 STOP Deionized water reservoir level
is too low.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Ensure that water supply is ON.
Ensure that water supply
pressure is 15-25 psi.
Ensure that external supply
water flow rate is 100 liters
(26.4 gallons) per hour.
Clean inlet water filter.
4 42
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Empty Waste
Reservoir
24-1 WARNING Waste reservoir full. a.
b.
c.
Empty waste reservoir.
Ensure that liquid level sensor
wires in drain tubing cap are not
touching each other, or the cap.
Power Supply
Unit > 70
Degrees
125- WARNING Temperature of power supply
unit is above 70 C.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Ensure that instrument cooling
fans are clean and operational.
If room temperature exceeds 30
C (86F), correct the room
temperature.
If the instrument is less than
three feet from a wall (or other
barrier) on any side, move the
instrument according to
installation requirements.
Degasser
Heater > 70
Degrees
26-1 STOP Heater temperature in the
degasser is 70 C or higher.
Check
Stoppers on
Vacuum Tank
27-1 STOP Vacuum pump is not supplying
enough negative pressure.
Liquid in
Vacuum Tank
28-1 WARNING Liquid detected in vacuum tank. a.
b.
c.
Verify that drain hose to waste
container is properly placed and
not pinched.
Verify that main drain tubing from
instrument is not pinched.
3 ABS
Readings
> 3.3
29-1 WARNING During normal operation, the
stopped cell blank absorbance
measurement for one
wave-length is greater than 3.3
ABS.
NOTE: This cell is not used for
analysis.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Ensure that reaction bath is full,
and water is not cloudy.
If reaction bath is not full, or if the
bath water is cloudy, perform
Ensure that lamp leads are not
touching and that lead wires are
securely fastened.
Replace photometer lamp.
4 43
The ADC 2,2 or 1-12 value of
the stopped cell blank
measurement of one cell differs
from the reference value of the
cell blank measurement (taken
from ANALYZER MAINTENANCE)
by more than 0.1 ABS for two
consecutive measurements.
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
3 ABS
Readings
> 3.3 (contd)
29-2 S. STOP
(STOP*)
During normal operation, the
stopped cell blank absorbance
measurement for all wave-
lengths is greater than 3.3 ABS.
analysis. * STOP appears if this
alarm is issued in any mode
other than Operate.
a.
b.
c.
d.
securely fastened.
29-3 S. STOP
(STOP*)
Alarm code 29-1 is
encountered 10 consecutive
times.
analysis. * STOP appears if
this alarm is issued in any
mode other than Operate.
a.
b.
c.
d.
securely fastened.
Cell Blank Out
of Limits (2X)
30-1 -
30-120*
WARNING
*Subcode 1-120 indicates the
reaction cell number.
analysis.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Verify that reaction cell is not
contaminated or cracked.
Verify that there are no air
bubbles formed in the water
contained in the reaction cell.
Ensure that no dust particles are
in the incubation bath.
screen: perform Wash Cells.
Perform Cell Blank after
replacement of lamp or cell.
Ensure that there is an adequate
amount of rinse water.
bubbles formed in the incubation
bath.
4 44
The ADC 1,2 or 1-12 value
of the stopped cell blank
measurement of a cell differs
cell blank measurement (from
ANALYZER MAINTENANCE)
by more than 0.1 ABS for three
consecutive reaction cells.
STOP occurs if this alarm
appears in any mode other
than operation.
of the stopped cell blank
from the reference value of the cell
blank measurement (from
by more than 0.1 ABS for 10
STOP occurs if this alarm
appears in any mode other
than operation.
of the passing cell blank
by more than 0.1 ABS for 10
of the passing cell blank
measurement of one cell differs
by more than 0.1 ABS for two out of
the last three reaction cells.
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Cell Blank
Out of Limits
(3X)
31-1-
31-120*
S. STOP
(STOP)
Follow the same procedures outlined
for the Cell Blank out of Limits (2X)
alarm, error 30.
*Subcode 1-120 indicates the reaction
cell number.
Cell Blank
Out of Limits
(10X)
32-1-
32-120*
S. STOP
(STOP)
Follow the same procedures outlined
alarm, error 30.
cell number.
Cell Blank
Out of Limits
(10X)
33-1-
33-120*
S. STOP Follow the same procedures outlined
alarm, error 30.
cell number.
Cell Blank
Out of Limits
(2X)
34-1-
34-120*
WARNING Follow the same procedures outlined
alarm, error 30.
cell number.
NOTE: If the passed cell blank
differs one time, then the average of
the two normal readings are used.
ADC Counter
Failure
35-1 WARNING ADC for sub (secondary)
wavelength fails to operate
normally.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Correct any other alarm
conditions in OPERATION
MONITOR appearing before
ADC Counter Failure.
If reaction disk was removed
recently, dry detectors as
shown in Section 3.9, Clean
Reaction Bath.
4 45
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
ADC Counter
Failure
(contd)
35-2 WARNING ADC for main (primary)
wavelength fails to operate
normally.
a.
b.
35-3 WARNING ISE ADC abnormal. a.
b.
35-4 WARNING ADC for temperature control fails
to operate normally.
a.
b.
ADC Voltage:
Execute
RESET
36-1 WARNING ADC reference voltage for sub
(secondary) wavelength
produces abnormal count.
a.
b.
36-2 WARNING ADC reference voltage for main
(primary) wavelength produces
abnormal count.
a.
b.
36-3 WARNING ADC reference voltage for ISE
produces abnormal count.
a.
b.
36-4 WARNING ADC reference voltage for
temperature produces
abnormal count.
a.
b.
Sample
Barcode Error
37-1 -
37-50
WARNING At the sample position
corresponding to subcode
1-50, data reception from the
bar code reader was not
completed before ID reception
timed out. (Read error due to
improper label, empty position
or defective bar code reader.)
a.
b.
c.
execute Barcode Reader Check.
Verify that bar code label is not
obscured or removed.
Barcode
Reader Error
38-1 -
38-3*
WARNING Error is encountered during
communication with the bar code
reader. (Parity, framing, or
overrun error.)
a.
b.
c.
execute Barcode Reader Check.
Verify that bar code label is not
obscured or removed.
* Subcode 1
Subcode 2
Subcode 3
-
-
-
Reagent 1
bar code
Reagent 2
bar code
Reagent 3
bar code
4 46
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
R1 Barcode
Error
39-1 -
39-32*
WARNING During bar code reading on the
R1 disk, bar code data does not
conform to the label protocol
(code out of normal range).
*Subcode indicates the reagent
bottle position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Verify the label protocol.
Replace the errant reagent
bottle with one labelled
correctly.
Verify that Hitergent is in
position 33 on the reagent disk.
R2 Barcode
Error
40-1 -
40-32*
WARNING In bar code reading on the R2
disk, bar code data does not
conform to the label protocol
(code out of normal range).
bottle position.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Verify the label protocol.
Replace the errant reagent
bottle with one labelled
correctly.
Verify that Hitergent is in
position 33 on the reagent disk.
Replace Low
Reagent (R1)
41-1 -
41-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
Remaining reagent
volume on R1 disk
sufficient for less than 10
tests.
Remaining diluent or
wash solution volume
on the R1 disk is less
than 1 mL.
a.
b.
c.
Verify reagent volumes on
theREAGENT STATUS screen.
Replace low reagent with a
new one.
*Subcode indicates the test key
assignment.
Replace Low
Reagent (R2)
42-1 -
42-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
Remaining reagent
volume on R2 disk
sufficient for less than 10
tests.
Remaining diluent or
wash solution volume
on the R2 disk is less
than 1 mL.
a.
b.
c.
Verify reagent volumes on
theREAGENT STATUS screen.
Replace low reagent with a
new one.
assignment.
R1 < User
Defined Level
43-1
43-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
Volume of reagent is less
than the reagent check level
specified in SYSTEM
PARAMETERS.
Diluent or wash solution
volume is less than 10 mL.
a.
b.
c.
Verify reagent volumes on the
REAGENT STATUS screen.
Make sure that the reagent
check level set on the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen is
correct.
assignment.
4 47
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
R2 < User
Defined Level
44-1 -
44-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
Volume of reagent is less
than the reagent check
level specified in System
Parameters.
Diluent or wash solution
volume is less than 10 mL.
a.
b.
c.
Verify reagent volumes on the
Make sure that the reagent
check level set on the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen is proper.
assignment.
Check R1
Position and
App Code
45-1 -
45-32*
WARNING 1.
2.
A R2 or R3 reagent is
loaded on the R1 disk.
A reagent is on board that
does not have parameters
assigned.
a.
b.
c.
Verify that there is not a reagent
whose type does not match the
disk on the REAGENT STATUS
screen.
Ensure that all app code nos. can
be accessed on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
recurs, call Technical Support. *Subcode indicates the reagent
bottle position.
Check R2
Position and
App Code
46-1 -
46-32*
WARNING 1.
2.
R1, R4 reagent, or diluent
bottle is loaded on the
R2 disk.
A reagent is on board that
does not have parameters
assigned.
a.
b.
c.
Verify that there is not a reagent
whose type does not match the
disk on the REAGENT STATUS
screen.
Ensure that all app code nos. can
be accessed on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
recurs, call Technical Support. *Subcode indicates the reagent
bottle position.
R1 Label:
Execute
MANUAL SET
47-1 -
47-32*
WARNING A bottle with a minimal bar code
label has been loaded in position
on the R1 disk without entering
reagent information.
bottle position.
a.
b.
c.
Ensure that ????? is displayed
for the channel concerned on the
Manually enter reagent data.
R2 Label:
Execute
MANUAL SET
48-1 -
48-32*
WARNING A bottle with a minimal bar code
label has been loaded in position
on the R2 disk without entering
reagent information.
bottle position.
a.
b.
c.
Ensure that ????? is displayed
for the channel concerned on the
Manually enter reagent data.
4 48
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Load Cell
Wash Bottle
49-1 -
49-8*
WARNING In reagent registration, the wash
solution bottle specified in the
Cell Wash field on the SPECIAL
WASH PROGRAMMING screen
is not loaded on the reagent disk.
*Subcode indicates number
specified on SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING screen.
a.
b.
c.
Verfiy the washing solution
setting on the SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING screen.
Load the wash solution bottle.
Load Probe
Wash Bottle
50-1 -
50-16*
WARNING In reagent registration, the wash
solution bottle specified in the
Reagent Probe Wash on the
SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING screen is not
loaded on the reagent disk.
specified on SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING screen.
a.
b.
c.
Verfiy the washing solution
setting on the SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING screen.
Load the wash solution bottle.
Dup. Barcode:
Replace Bottle
51-1 -
51-2*
WARNING Duplicate reagent bar code is
registered.
*Subcode indicates reagent disk
number.
Change the reagent, or diluent wash
bottle with the duplicate bar code.
Dup. Barcode:
Relabel
Sample
52-1*?? WARNING Duplicate sample bar code is
registered.
*Subcode indicates sample disk
position.
Enter Test
Selections
53-1 -
53-50*
WARNING 1.
2.
3.
A sample number was
programmed with no tests
selected.
A sample has been placed
on the sample disk with no
tests selected.
Host did not respond in time
with test selections and no
selections were found.
a.
b.
Rerun the tests that were not
analyzed.
Enter test selections before
placing samples on the analzyer.
*Subcode indicates sample disk
position.
NOTE: This alarm is issued only
when real-time test selection
inquiry from a host is specified.
4 49
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
T/S Exceed
800 patients
54-1 WARNING 1.
2.
3.
Tests for > 800 samples
have been requested.
have been requested by
real-time downloading.
have been requested by
batch downloading.
After completing the analysis of the
first 800 samples, program the
remaining samples.
Sampling
Delay
55-1 WARNING There is a delay in result data
printout during analysis for up to
40 samples. (printer)
If the remaining samples are moved
from their original positions on the
sample disk, return them before
restart of sampling.
55-2 WARNING There is a delay in result data
transmission during analysis for
up to 40 samples. (system
interface)
If the remaining samples are moved
from their original positions on the
sample disk, return them before
restart of sampling.
No More
Samples to
Process
56-1 WARNING There are no more routine
samples to be measured. This
alarm indicates completion of
sampling.
C-RAM Error 57-1 WARNING C.RAM is abnormal. Call Technical Support.
Interrupt Error 58-1 WARNING Fast interrupt error. FIRQ error.
58-2 WARNING IRQ interrupt error.
58-3 WARNING NMI interrupt error.
DC Error: Turn
911 OFF
then ON
59-1 STOP 15V DC power abnormality. a.
b.
Turn instrument OFF, then
back ON.
If alarm recurs, call Technical
Support.
59-2 STOP -15V DC power abnormality.
59-3 WARNING 12V DC power abnormality (for
lamp).
59-4 STOP 15V DC power abnormality (for
mechanism controller).
59-5 E. STOP DC power 24V abnormality (for
mechanism controller).
Replace Fuse 60-1 E. STOP Fuse has blown. Check fuses. Note which fuse
exhibits a white flag (if any), then call
Technical Support. DO NOT
REPLACE ANY FUSE UNLESS SO
DIRECTED BY BOEHRINGER
MANNHEIM TECHNICAL SUPPORT.
4 50
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Power Failure
Has Occurred
61-1 WARNING AC power is abnormal. This
alarm is normally seen
following a power failure.
a.
b.
If a power failure (including
momentary power failure)
happens, this alarm informs the
user.
Controller
Motor Error
62-1 -
62-22*
STOP The data is not transmitted to
the controller motor properly.
*Subcodes are as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Sample arm up/down
Sample arm rotation
Reaction disk rotation
Sample disk rotation
Reagent 1 disk rotation
Reagent 1 arm up/down
Reagent 1 arm rotation
Reagent 2 arm up/down
Reagent 2 arm rotation
Reagent 2 disk rotation
Rinse mechanism up/down
Stirring mechanism (1) arm
up/down
rotation
up/down
Stirring mechanism (2)
rotation
Sample syringe up/down
Reagent-1 syringe
Reagent-2 syringe
ISE stirrer
Stirring rod rotation
DIL/IS syringe
ISE sipper syringe
Controller
Motor Failure
63-1 -
63-22*
E. STOP Motor controller does not
recognize any command other
than stop.
*Subcodes are same as above.
Replace Cell
Wash Solution
65-1 -
65-8*
S. STOP Less than 1 mL wash solution
remaining.
programmed in SPECIAL
WASH PROGRAMMING.
Remove bottle, then load new wash
solution onto reagent disk.
Replace Probe
Wash Solution
66-1 -
66-16*
S. STOP Less than 1 mL wash solution
remaining.
programmed in SPECIAL WASH
PROGRAMMING.
4 51
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Cell Wash
Solution
< 10 mL
67-1 -
67-8*
S. STOP Washing solution < 10 mL.
PROGRAMMING.
Probe Wash
Solution
< 10 mL
68-1 -
68-16*
S. STOP Washing solution < 10 mL
PROGRAMMING.
Stat Error,
Testing
Incomplete
69-1 WARNING Stat sample or stat rerun sample
could not be analyzed for the
following reasons:
a.
b.
c.
Enter the correct ID.
Issue a test selection request or
turn off masking.
Return to the original sample disk
number.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ID read error.
The read sample ID and ID
entered on the screen do
not match.
Test selections not
received or test selections
are masked.
Prior to sampling, sample
disk number was changed
and restart executed.
Calibration
Error
70-1 -
70-49*
WARNING Photometric assay: Photometric:
1.
2.
During calibration, the
standard absorbance is
abnormal.
During calibration,
calculation is disabled.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Verify Duplicate and
Sensitivity Limit value on
the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen.
Check quantity of standard,
sample and reagents.
Check to see if a cell blank alarm
has been issued.
Check to see if the absorbance is
3.3 ABS or more.
Check to see if the reaction limit
value is exceeded.
Check to see if the linearity
abnormal alarm is issued.
ISE assay:
1.
2.
During calibration, the
potential data of
standard or internal
standard solution is
indicated with ADC error,
insufficient sample alarm,
noise alarm, or level alarm.
During calibration,
calculation is disabled.
assignment.
ISE:
Check to see if the ADC alarm has
been issued.
4 52
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Calibration
Factor Error
71-1 -
71-49*
WARNING K factor determined through
calibration differs from the
previous value by more than
20%. Display values for ISE
calibration, slope, or ISE 3
differed from the previous
calibration by a value greater
than the compensated limit
(%).*Subcode indicates the test
key assignment.NOTE: The
result of this calibration is
updated but not saved to floppy
disk.
a.
b.
If alarm occurs at same time as
other alarms, correct the other
alarm condition.
Check standards, reagents, and
controls. If controls are in range
and standards and reagents are
acceptable, go to the
MAINTENANCE screen and
execute Parameter Write
Continue operating. Otherwise,
correct abnormalities and
recalibrate.
SD Limit
Exceeded
72-1 -
72-46*
WARNING During multi-point calibration, the
mean remainder is larger than
the SD limit.*Subcode indicates
the test key assignment.NOTE:
The result of this calibration is
updated but not saved to floppy
disk.
a.
b.
c.
Verify SD limit, standard
concentrations, and positions
on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
Check preparation and expiration
dates of standards and reagents.
Recalibrate affected test.
Sensitivity
Error
73-1 -
73-46*
WARNING In linear, nonlinear, or isozyme-
P calibration, the difference
between mean STD (1)
absorbance and mean STD (N)
is smaller than the sensitivity
limit on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
NOTE:N = 2 for linear or
isozyme-P calibration.
N = 3 to 6 for nonlinear
calibration or multipoint linear
calibration.
If only STD (1) or STD (N) is
measured, the previous
absorbance is used for
sensitivity check.
assignment.
NOTE: The result of this
calibration is updated but not
saved to floppy disk.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Verify the Sensitivity Limit
specified on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
Check reagent and calibrators.
Check sample pipettor for leaks.
Recalibrate affected test.
4 53
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Random
Control Error
74-1 -
74-49*
WARNING Random error occurs in real
time QC.
assignment.
a.
b.
Verify the X and SD for the
specified assay are entered
correctly on the CONTROL
Check calibrators, controls, and
reagents:
Have they been properly prepared?
Have they been properly stored?
Have they been used beyond their
recommended expiration date?
Are calibrators and controls in the
correct positions on the sample disk?
c.
d.
e.
f.
Check Hitergent bottle. If
empty, replace and perform
Inc. Water Exchange on the
MAINTENANCE screen.
bubbles on the inner or outer
wall of the reaction cell.
Perform Photometer Check.
Systematic
Control Error
75-1 -
75-49*
WARNING Systematic error occurs in
real-time QC.
assignment.
a.
b.
c.
Are the X and SD for the
specified assay entered correctly
on the CONTROL VALUE
SETTING screen?
Is all information entered
correctly on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen?
Check calibrators, controls, and
reagents:
Have they been properly prepared?
Have they been properly stored?
Have they been used beyond their
recommended expiration date?
Are calibrators and controls in the
correct positions on the sample disk?
d.
e.
f.
g.
Has maintenance been
performed properly on sample
and reagent pipettors?
bubbles on the inner or outer wall
of the reaction cell.
Perform Photometer Check.
4 54
Na
+
: 0.7 mV
K
+
: 1.0 mV
Cl
-
: 0.8 mV
Na
+
: -90 to -10 mV
K
+
: -90 to -10 mV
Cl
-
: 80 to 160 mV
Na
+
: Less than 32
or A > 0.232
K
+
: Less than 32
or A > 0.160
Cl
-
: Greater than -25
or A > 0.490
A = carry-over rate
Na
+
: 32.0 SLOPE 37.9 or
SLOPE 68.1 or A > 0.154
K
+
: 32.0 SLOPE 37.9 or
SLOPE 68.1 or A > 0.107
Cl
-
: -29.9 SLOPE 25.0 or
SLOPE -68.0 or A > 0.330
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Real Time
QC Error
76-1 -
76-49*
WARNING QC error occurs in real-time QC
assignment.
Perform same steps as Systematic
Control Error alarm (75-71 to 75-49).
ISE Int. Ref.
Error
80-1
80-2
80-3
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
During measurement of internal
reference, potential is not within
the following range:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Perform ISE Check on the
Check for air in sipper line.
Check internal reference
solution.
Check ISE cartridge for leakage.
Check reference and ground
electrodes for leakage.
ISE Noise:
Execute ISE
Check
81-1
81-2
81-3
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Noise level exceeds the following
values during measurement:
a.
b.
Perform ISE Check on the
ISE Slope
Warning
82-1
82-2
82-3
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
During calibration, slope exceeds
the following limits:
If control values are in range, no
action is necessary. Be prepared to
replace a cartridge soon (when
SLOPE alarm occurs).
ISE Slope
Error:
Replace Cart.
83-1
83-2
83-3
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
During calibration, slope exceeds
the following limits:
If slope has changed gradually over
time, replace cartridge. Otherwise,
examine ISE system for other
abnormalities: check standards,
reagents, priming, leaks in cartridges.
Correct abnormalities and recalibrate.
4 55
Na
+
: 120 to 160 mmol/L
K
+
: 3.0 to 7.0 mmol/L
CI
-
: 80 to 120 mmol/L
I.S. < 50 mL
DIL < 30 mL
KCL< 30 mL
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
ISE I. Ref
Concentration
Error
84-1
84-2
84-3
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
Internal Reference (IS)
concentration calculated from a
generated calibration curve is not
within the following range.
If slope is acceptable, perform a
Wash ISE.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Check ISE standards on
sample disk.
Check ISE reagents.
Correct any other alarms.
Recalibrate.
Execute ISE
Calibration
85-1 WARNING Calibration was not performed
following ISE MAINTENANCE,
CELL WASH, or WASH CELLS
& ISE.
Execute ISE Calibration from START
CONDITIONS screen.
Replace Low
ISE Reagent
87-1
87-2
87-2
WARNING
WARNING
WARNING
The ISE reagent volume is less
than the following:
Replace ISE reagent.
Replace Low
Hitergent
88-1
88-2
WARNING The volume of Hitergent is less
than 2 mL.
Replace with fresh bottle of Hitergent.
Check
Hitergent
Position
89-1
89-2
WARNING 1.
2.
3.
A bottle other than Hitergent
(reagent, diluent, wash
solution) is in position 33 on
the reagent disk.
The Hitergent bottle is in
a position other than
position 33.
The reagent bottle bar code
in position 33 was not read.
1.
2.
3.
Replace the bottle in position 33
withHitergent.
Move the Hitergent bottle to
position 33.
Ensure that the barcode is
applied correctly to the reagent
bottle; on REAGENT STATUS
screen, specify cancel for
Hitergent bottles until a new
bottle is placed on the analyzer.
Twin Test
Parameter
Error
90-1 -
90-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
When twin test mode is
selected, the second test is
not specified.
When twin test mode is not
selected, a second test is
specified.
a.
b.
Make sure that the first test and
second test are specified
correctly in the twin test mode.
Make sure the chemistry
parameters are loaded correctly.
4 56
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Twin Test
Parameter
Error (contd)
3. In the twin test mode, the
two tests differ from each
other in at least one of the
following parameters:
assignment.
Check App
Code and
Assay Point
91-1 -
91-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
assay code and measure
point is invalid.
Assigned photometric point
lags behind the specified
reaction time.
a.
b.
Check the Assay Code on the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen.
Check the specified reaction
time.
assignment.
Calibration
Parameter
Error
92-1 -
92-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
assay code and calibration
type is invalid.
Calibration points necessary
for calibration type have not
been entered.
Standard solution position
necessary for calibration has
not been entered.
An improper span point
value has been entered.
calibration type and
calibration method is invalid.
Concentration value of
standard solution is not set
in ascending order (except
standard solutions 3 and 4
for isozyme.)
99 is specified for
standard position 2 and
the concentration is not
equal to zero.
The standard code or
position is not assigned
on the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen.
a.
b.
Program CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen as
indicated on chemistry
application sheet.
When running a nonlinear
assay, assign three or more
standards for that test.
assignment.
CONTROL INTERVAL
S. VOL. (NORMAL,
INCREASE, DECREASE)
DILUTION
STD POS.
STD PRE. VOL.
CALIB. POINTS
AUTO CALIB.
ASSAY CODE
R VOLUME (R2 - R4)
STD CODE
STD S. VOL.
CALIB TYPE
SPAN POINT
DIL. BOTTLE CODE/
AVAILABLE DAYS
DATA MODE
REACTION TIME
4 57
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Check R1-R4
Dispense
Volumes
93-1 -
93-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Total liquid volume up to
the last photometric point
> 700 L.
Discharge volume of
concentrated reagent
(diluent volume + reagent
volume) is > 350 L.
Volume of R2 and R3
reagents is not within a
range of 0 to 250 L.
Diluent volumes for the
second and third reagents
are not within a range of 0
to 250 L.
Volumes of R1 through R4
reagents are all zero.
Some volume of reagent is
programmed to be pipetted
after the reaction time is
completed.
sample dilution and
sample volume is
improper.
*Subcode indicates the test
key assignment.
Verify that the parameters are correct
on the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen.
Isozyme
Parameter
Error
94-1 -
94-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
3.
4.
Reaction time differs
between the isozyme-P
channel and isozyme-Q
channel tests.
In case of the isozyme-P
channel, the isozyme-Q
channel is not specified.
In case of the isozyme-Q
channel, a second test is
specified.
Isozyme-P channel and
isozyme-Q channel are not
paired in one-to-one
relationship.
*Subcode indicates the test
key assignment.
a.
b.
Verify that parameters are
correct for the isozyme-P
channel and isozyme-Q
channel on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
Make sure that the isozyme-P
channel specifies the isozyme-Q
channel test and the isozyme-Q
channel does not specify the
isozyme-P channel test.
4 58
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Range Error 95-1 -
95-46*
95-53 -
95-60**
WARNING The low value is greater than the
high value for the expected
value, technical limit, or S1 ABS
limit.
assignment.
**Subcode indicates the
calculated test number.
Verify test parameters specified on
the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS or
CALCULATED TESTS screens.
Check
COMP. TEST
Parameters
96-1 -
96-8*
WARNING Compensated test specifications
are wrong:
Verify that the parameters entered
on the CALCULATED TESTS
screen are correct.
1.
2.
3.
A test used in compensation
is not measurable.
A compensated test is not
included in the formula.
When compensated test is
photometric, an ISE test is
specified.
*Subcode indicates the
compensated test number.
Serum Index
Test Error
97-1 -
97-46*
WARNING 1.
2.
The test used for serum
index measurement does
not have the Rate A assay
code specified.
The test used for serum
index measurement has the
manual mode specified.
Specify the Rate A assay code for
the test used for serum index
measurement.
assignment.
Check
REAGENT
PROBE WASH
99-1 -
99-8*
WARNING 1.
2.
Relationship between the
reagent types (R1 and R4)
has been entered
incorrectly on the SPECIAL
WASH PROGRAMMING
screen:
R1 and R4 for probe R1,
R2 and R3 for probe R2.
When water is used to rinse
the R2 probe, the discharge
volume is greater than
250L.
Check the parameters specified in the
Reagent Probe Wash field on the
SPECIAL WASH PROGRAMMING
screen.
*Subcode indicates the number
of the reagent wash.
4 59
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
No Measurable
Channel On
Board
100-1 WARNING There is no measurable
channel. MANUAL is specified
in the Data Mode field for all
channels.
There is no channel for which
necessary reagents are
prepared.
a.
b.
Verify that the parameters
on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen are
correct.
Check the parameter specified
in the Data Mode field on the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen.
Execute 10 sec
CYCLE TIME
101-1 WARNING 1.
2.
In transition to the STAT
RECEPTION mode, the
cycle time is not 10 sec.
In modes other than
ORIGINAL ABS., the cycle
time is not 10 sec.
Check the Cycle Time setting on the
101-2 WARNING When attempting to start from
STAT Stand-By, STAT Rerun
mode is set to On.
Verify the STAT Rerun setting on
the START CONDITIONS screen
is set to Off.
Duplicate
Bottle Code
102-1 WARNING The same reagent bottle code is
specified for multiple channels.
Check the Bottle Code No. of
reagent on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
Test Selection
Error
103-1 WARNING When registering rerun of TS
from the host computer to the
analyzer, the first measurement
is not yet completed.
Check the Sample List on the
RERUN SAMPLES screen.
Cannot
Execute ORIG.
ABS. Now
104-1 WARNING Execution of ORIGINAL ABS.
was attempted during batch
printout or batch transfer of
measured data.
Check the Original ABS. setting
on the SYSTEM PARAMETERS
screen.
Check
Hitergent
Position
105-1 WARNING Bar-coded Hitergent is not on
Reagent Disk 1.
a.
b.
Place Hitergent in position 33
on Reagent Disk 1.
Check the Hitergent Disk 1
for proper settings on the
REAGENT STATUS SETTING
screen. If you are not using
bar-coded Hitergent, change
the field to Cancel.
105-2 WARNING Bar-coded Hitergent is not on
Reagent Disk 2.
a.
b.
Place Hitergent in position 33
on Reagent Disk 1.
Check the Hitergent Disk 2
field for proper settings on the
REAGENT STATUS SETTING
screen. If you are not using
bar-coded Hitergent, change
the field to Cancel.
4 60
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Refill Hiterg,
Do Bath
Exchange
106-1 WARNING No Hitergent was added to
incubation bath during water
exchange. 106-1 indicates
Reagent Disk 1.
a.
b.
Place Hitergent in position 33 on
Reagent Disk 1.
Request bath exchange.
106-2 WARNING No Hitergent was added to
incubation bath during water
exchange. 106-2 indicates
Reagent Disk 2.
a.
b.
Place Hitergent in position 33 on
Reagent Disk 2.
Request bath exchange.
Execute
REAGENT
REGISTRATION
107-1 WARNING 1.
2.
3.
4.
Reagent registration was
not successfully
completed at Start Up.
not successfully
completed at Wake Up.
not successfully
completed after closing
the reagent disk cover.
not successfully completed
after requesting from
REAGENT STATUS
screen.
a.
b.
Request Read Reagent
Barcodes from REAGENT
STATUS screen.
Check ISE
Standard
Codes
108-1 WARNING The ISE standard code or
position is not assigned on the
Assign ISE standard position on the
Printer Error 110-1 WARNING 1.
2.
Hardware is faulty.
(Acknowledgment is not
returned from printer.)
Time-out error occurs.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Is printer ON?
Is printer ON LINE light ON? If
not, press ON LINE button on
printer.
Is printer connected to
instrument?
Carry out Printer Check on
110-2 WARNING 1.
2.
3.
Printer paper is not set.
Printer select button is OFF.
Connector is disconnected.
Remove and replace paper. Ensure
that paper detector switch is engaged.
110-3 WARNING Self check error is found. Press ON LINE button on printer.
4 61
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Printer Error
(contd)
110-4 WARNING When the print mode selected is
report mode, measurement data
cannot print out with PAGE
LENGTH.
Verify the Page Length parameter
value specified on the REPORT
FORMAT screen.
System
Interface Error
111-1 WARNING The text cannot be received from
the system within the
predetermined period of time.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Check host computer. Is it
ON?
Verify Host Communication on
START CONDITIONS.
Check cable connections
between instrument and host
computer.
Check host computer transmit
condition.
Ensure that host and
instrument are utilizing
same baud rate.
111-2 WARNING Data cannot be sent to the
system within the predetermined
time period.
111-3 WARNING Communication has been
attempted regardless of an
unsuccessful initialization of the
buffered controller.
111-4 WARNING A command cannot be issued to
the buffered controller.
111-5 WARNING The end-of-command interrupt is
not returned from the buffered
controller.
111-6 WARNING An abnormal command or data
write has been attempted to the
111-7 WARNING An error has occurred in
accessing the FIFO buffer of the
111-8 WARNING The serial interface LSI circuit of
the buffered controller is faulty.
111-9 WARNING An invalid interrupt has been
issued from the buffered
controller.
111-10 WARNING In response to each frame
transmitted from the analyzer,
the REP frame has been
returned from the host
successively more than
specified.
111-11 WARNING The received text contains an
illegal character.
111-12 WARNING The character count in the test
received is out of range.(The
character count between STX to
ETX is out of range.)
4 62
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
System
Interface Error
(contd)
111-13 WARNING The host has sent the text in
disregard of the transmission
procedure.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Check host computer. Is it ON?
Verify Host Communication on
System Parameters.
Check cable connections
between instrument and host
computer.
Check host computer transmit
condition.
Ensure that host and instrument
are utilizing same baud rate.
111-14 WARNING A vertical parity error occurred
during data reception.
111-15 WARNING Overrun error occurred during
data reception.
111-16 WARNING Framing error occurred during
data reception.
111-17 WARNING BCC error found in received test.
111-18 WARNING BCC error in data transfer from
host to analyzer.
Non Existing
Key Code
Entered
112-1 WARNING A non-existent key code has
been entered.
C-RAM Error 113-1 WARNING Error occurred in C-RAM. Call Technical Support.
Real Time
Clock Error
114-1 WARNING Faulty RTC read. (RTC: Real
Time Clock)
APU Fail:
Turn 911 OFF
then ON
115-1 WARNING APU reset time-out error has
occurred. (APU: Arithmetic
Processor Unit)
a.
b.
Turn instrument OFF, then back
ON.
115-2 WARNING DATA READY time-out error
has occurred.
115-3 WARNING STATUS READY time-out error
has occurred.
115-4 WARNING Command execution time-out
error has occurred.
ACI Fail:
Turn 911 OFF
then ON
116-1 -
116-4
WARNING The ACI for barcode has been
initialized unsuccessfully.
1: Sample
2: Reagent 1
3: Reagent 2
4: Transfer
Reinsert
Floppy Disk
120-1 WARNING The system disk is not inserted
into drive 1.
Insert the FD properly.
120-2 WARNING The data disk is not inserted into
drive 2.
Insert the FD properly.
4 63
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
Wrong FD in
Drive
121-1 WARNING Wrong disk is inserted in drive 1. a.
b.
Ensure that both floppy disks
are correctly inserted in the
proper disk drives.
121-2 WARNING Wrong disk is inserted in drive 2.
121-3 WARNING During FD read/write for stat and
stat rerun samples, a data disk
that cannot be accessed by the
floppy drive has been inserted
into drive 2.
FD Reading
Error
122-1 WARNING A hardware error occurred in
parameter reading.
a.
b.
c.
Clean the floppy disk drive as
Check if floppy disk needs to be
replaced. The useful life of a
floppy disk is approximately
100,000 accesses.Refer to
Section 2.88, Cumulative
Operations List, for the access
count of the disk currently in use.
reading of result data for the
routine or routine rerun sample.
reading of result data for the stat
or stat rerun sample.
reading of C-RAM data.
122-7 WARNING A hardware error occurred when
reading the analytical test
parameters from the parameter
disk.
122-10 WARNING 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
A hardware error occurred
during execution of the FD
copy command on the drive
1 side.
during execution of the FD
check.
during reading of the FD
access count.
during reading of the FD
version number and revision
number.
during reading of the disk ID.
122-11 WARNING When reading test selection
data, the barcode reader modes
of the floppy disk and the
analyzer do not match.
4 64
INSTRUMENT ALARMS
FD Writing
Error
writing parameters.
a.
b.
c.
Clean the floppy disk drive as
Check if floppy disk needs to be
replaced. Useful life of floppy
disk is approximately 100,000
accesses.
writing the calibration result data.
writing the result data for the
routine/routine rerun samples.
writing the result data for the stat
or stat rerun samples.
writing the C-RAM data.
123-8 WARNING A hardware error occurred
when writing the analytical
test parameters onto the
parameter disk.
123-10 WARNING 1.
2.
A hardware error
occurred during execution
of the FD copy command
on the drive 2 side.
FD head formatting has
been unsuccessful.
Write
Protected Disk
in Drive
124-1 WARNING WRITE PROTECTED disk is
inserted in the system disk drive.
a.
b.
Uncover the write protect notch
on the disk.
Be sure that you are writing
appropriate information on the
correct disk.
124-2 WARNING WRITE PROTECTED disk is
inserted in the data disk drive.
Clean FDD
Head, Replace
FD
125-1 WARNING System disk has been accessed
100,000 times on the drive 1
side.
a.
b.
Clean the FDD read/write had
using the cleaning disk (see
Chapter 3, for the procedure).
Replace floppy disk. 125-2 WARNING Data disk has been accessed
100,000 times on the drive 2
side.
NOTE: This alarm is only issued
at Power-Up.
5. THEORY
PART A - INSTRUMENT THEORY
5.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 5 1
5.1.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 5 1
5.1.2 General Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 5 1
5.1.3 Sample Route ...................................................................................................................... 5 2
5.2 Cell Rinse And Blanking ............................................................................ 5 5
5.2.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 5 5
5.2.2 Reaction Cell Rinse Unit .................................................................................................. ... 5 5
5.2.3 Cell Blanking ....................................................................................................................... 5 7
5.3 Begin Operation.......................................................................................... 5 8
5.3.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................... 5 8
5.3.2 Mechanical Cycle ................................................................................................................ 5 8
5.4 Sample Aspiration and Dispense ............................................................ 5 14
5.4.1 Sample Aspiration.............................................................................................................. 5 14
5.4.2 Sample DispenseStart of Rotation #1............................................................................ 5 15
5.4.3 Sample Probe Rinse .......................................................................................................... 5 17
5.5 Sample Predilution ................................................................................... 5 18
5.5.1 Diluent Aspiration............................................................................................................... 5 18
5.5.2 Diluent Dispense................................................................................................................. 5 19
5.5.3 Reagent Probe Rinse ......................................................................................................... 5 19
5.5.4 Sample and Diluent Stirring.............................................................................................. 5 20
5.5.5 Pre-diluted Sample Aspiration.......................................................................................... 5 21
5. THEORY
Contents
5. THEORY
Contents
5.6 Reagent Aspiration and Dispense .......................................................... 5 22
5.6.1 Reagent Aspiration at R1 Timing ...................................................................................... 5 22
5.6.2 Reagent Dispense at R1 Timing ........................................................................................ 5 23
5.6.3 Reagent Probe Rinse ......................................................................................................... 5 23
5.6.4 Sample and Reagent Stirring ........................................................................................... 5 24
5.6.8 Aspirate Reaction Mixture to Waste ................................................................................. 5 28
5.7 Sampling End............................................................................................ 5 29
5.7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................. 5 29
5.7.2 Sampling End ..................................................................................................................... 5 29
5.8 ISE System Components ......................................................................... 5 30
5.8.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 5 30
5.8.2 Internal Reference Flowpath ............................................................................................ 5 30
5.8.3 Dilution Vessel ........................................................................................................... ......... 5 33
5.8.4 ISE Sampling ...................................................................................................................... 5 34
5.8.5 Diluent Flowpath ................................................................................................................ 5 35
5.8.6 KCl and Reference Cartridge Flowpath ........................................................................... 5 36
5.8.7 Measuring Cartridge Flowpath.......................................................................................... 5 37
5.8.8 Sample Processing Sequence .......................................................................................... 5 39
PART B - CHEMISTRY THEORY
5.9 Overview.................................................................................................... 5 40
5.9.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 5 40
5.9.2 General Photometric Characteristics................................................................................ 5 40
5.10 Assay Techniques .................................................................................... 5 43
5.10.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 5 43
5.10.2 Selecting Assay Type and Measure Points ...................................................................... 5 43
5.10.3 Example of Endpoint Assay ............................................................................................... 5 44
5.10.4 Automatic Rerun Feature .................................................................................................. 5 45
5.11.1 1-Point Endpoint Assay Characteristics ............................................................................ 5 46
5.11.2 1-Point Endpoint Assay Graph........................................................................................... 5 46
5.11.3 1-Point Endpoint Assay Calculation .................................................................................. 5 47
5.12 2-Point Rate Assay ................................................................................... 5 48
5.12.1 2-Point Rate Assay Characteristics.................................................................................... 5 48
5.12.2 2-Point Rate Assay Graph .................................................................................................. 5 48
5.12.3 2-Point Rate Assay Calculation ......................................................................................... 5 50
5. THEORY
Contents
5.15 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay ........................................................... 5 56
5.15.1 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay Characteristics ............................................................ 5 56
5.15.2 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay Graph........................................................................... 5 56
5.15.3 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay Calculation.................................................................. 5 57
5.16 Rate A Assay ............................................................................................. 5 58
5.16.1 Rate A Assay Characteristics ............................................................................................. 5 58
5.16.2 Rate A Assay Graph ........................................................................................................... 5 58
5.16.3 Rate A Assay Calculation................................................................................................... 5 60
5.17 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1 ........................................................................... 5 61
5.17.1 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1 Characteristics ........................................................................... 5 61
5.17.2 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1 Graph .......................................................................................... 5 62
5.17.3 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1 Calculation ................................................................................. 5 62
5.18 Rate B Assay - - Mode 2 ........................................................................... 5 64
5.18.1 Rate B Assay - - Mode 2 Characteristics ........................................................................... 5 64
5.18.2 Rate B Assay - - Mode 2 Graph .......................................................................................... 5 64
5.18.3 Rate B Assay - - Mode 2 Calculation ................................................................................. 5 65
5.19 Summary of Assay Techniques .............................................................. 5 66
5.20 Calibration Overview ................................................................................ 5 67
5.20.1 Explanation of the Calibration Monitor Report by Assay Type....................................... 5 67
5.20.2 Calibration Methods ........................................................................................................... 5 69
5.20.3 Programming Calibration Methods................................................................................... 5 69
5. THEORY
Contents
5.21.1 Selecting 1-Point Linear Calibration ................................................................................ 5 71
5.21.2 1-Point Linear Calibration Graph...................................................................................... 5 71
5.21.3 1-Point Linear Calculation................................................................................................. 5 72
5.21.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 72
5.22.1 Selecting 2-Point Linear Calibration ................................................................................ 5 73
5.22.2 2-Point Linear Calibration Graph...................................................................................... 5 73
5.22.3 2-Point Linear Calculation................................................................................................. 5 74
5.22.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 74
5.23 Multipoint Linear Calibration.................................................................... 5 75
5.23.1 Selecting Multipoint Linear Calibration ........................................................................... 5 75
5.23.2 Multipoint Linear Calibration Graph................................................................................. 5 75
5.23.3 Multipoint Linear Calculation............................................................................................ 5 76
5.23.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 76
5.24 Non-Linear Logit-log 3P Calibration....................................................... 5 77
5.24.1 Selecting Non-Linear Logit-log 3P Calibration ................................................................ 5 77
5.24.2 Non-Linear Logit-log 3P Calibration Graph ..................................................................... 5 77
5.24.3 Non-Linear Logit-log 3P Calculation ................................................................................ 5 78
5.24.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 78
5.25.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 80
5. THEORY
Contents
5.26.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 82
5.27 Non-Linear Exponential Calibration........................................................ 5 83
5.27.1 Selecting Non-Linear Exponential Calibration ................................................................ 5 83
5.27.2 Non-Linear Exponential Calibration Graph ..................................................................... 5 83
5.27.3 Non-Linear Exponential Calculation ................................................................................ 5 84
5.27.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 84
5.28 Non-Linear Spline Calibration ................................................................. 5 85
5.28.1 Selecting Non-Linear Spline Calibration ......................................................................... 5 85
5.28.2 Non-Linear Spline Calibration Graph ............................................................................... 5 85
5.28.3 Non-Linear Spline Calculation .......................................................................................... 5 86
5.28.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 86
5.29 Isozyme P Calibration .............................................................................. 5 87
5.29.1 Selecting Isozyme P Calibration....................................................................................... 5 87
5.29.2 Isozyme P Calibration Graph ............................................................................................ 5 87
5.29.3 Isozyme P Calculation ....................................................................................................... 5 88
5.29.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 88
5.30 Isozyme Q Calibration .............................................................................. 5 89
5.30.1 Selecting Isozyme Q Calibration ...................................................................................... 5 89
5.30.2 Isozyme Q Calibration Graph ............................................................................................ 5 89
5.30.3 Isozyme Q Calculation ....................................................................................................... 5 90
5.30.4 Assay Types ........................................................................................................................ 5 90
5. THEORY
Contents
5.31 ISE Calibration .......................................................................................... 5 91
5.31.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 5 91
5.31.2 Slope Calculation............................................................................................................... 5 91
5.31.3 Internal Standard Calculation........................................................................................... 5 92
5.31.4 Single-Point Adjustment .................................................................................................... 5 92
5.31.5 Compensation Overview ................................................................................................... 5 92
5.31.6 Compensation Value Calculation ..................................................................................... 5 93
5.31.7 Reference Cartridge........................................................................................................... 5 93
5.31.8 Nernst Equation .................................................................................................................. 5 93
5.31.9 Calculation of Unknown Sample Concentrations............................................................ 5 94
5.32 Result Integrity Checks ............................................................................ 5 95
5.32.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 5 95
5.32.2 Prozone Effect .................................................................................................................... 5 95
5.32.3 Linearity Verification (LIN, LIN 8) ...................................................................................... 5 96
5.32.4 Substrate Depletion (LIM. 1, 2, 3) ...................................................................................... 5 97
5.33 Serum Index Function.............................................................................. 5 98
5.33.1 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 5 98
5.33.2 Definition of Serum Indexes.............................................................................................. 5 98
5.33.3 Serum Index Parameters .................................................................................................. 5 98
5.33.4 Using Existing Chemistry Channel .................................................................................... 5 99
5.33.5 Using a Saline Channel ..................................................................................................... 5 99
5.33.6 Graphic Representation of Serum Indexes.................................................................... 5 101
5.33.7 Calculation of Serum Indexes......................................................................................... 5 102
5.34 Real Time QC Evaluation ....................................................................... 5 103
5.34.1 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 5 103
5.34.2 Rule 1: 1-2SD .................................................................................................................... 5 103
5.34.3 Rule 2: 1-3SD .................................................................................................................... 5 103
5.34.4 Rule 3: 2-2SD .................................................................................................................... 5 104
5.34.5 Rule 4: R-4SD.................................................................................................................... 5 105
5.34.6 Rule 5: 4-1SD .................................................................................................................... 5 106
5.34.7 Rule 6: 10X........................................................................................................................ 5 107
5.34.8 Rule 7: 1-2.5SD.................................................................................................................. 5 108
5.34.9 Flowchart .......................................................................................................................... 5 109
5. THEORY
Contents
5.35 Reagent Labelling................................................................................... 5 110
5.35.1 General Information......................................................................................................... 5 110
5.35.2 Reagent Labelling............................................................................................................ 5 110
5. THEORY
Contents
5 1
5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Introduction
The Instrument Theory section of Chapter 5 gives a
detailed explanation of the role of the analytical units
mechanical systems. These systems include:
Cell rinse system
Photometric measuring system
Reaction bath system
Sampling system
ISE system
Reagent system
These mechanical systems work together with the
chemistry system and the control unit to produce final
results.
5.1.2 General Characteristics
The anal yzer i s a total l y sel f-contai ned
COMPUTERIZED, PROGRAMMABLE, DISCRETE,
SELECTIVE, SEQUENTIAL, FULLY AUTOMATED
CHEMISTRY ANALYZER. Each of these terms is
defined below as they relate to the analyzer.
COMPUTERIZED - - Automatic calibration,
calculations, and quality control analyses are performed
by a built-in computer. Test parameters are read from
a floppy disk and stored in memory. The mechanical
functions of the instrument are also controlled by the
computer. The computer is a powerful data
management system that gives the operator flexibility
in data handling.
PROGRAMMABLE - - The operator provides input to
the instrument computer for test requests, quality
control manipulation, and calculated tests.
Maintenance procedures are requested from the
instrument keyboard. Sample predilution can be
included as part of the chemistry parameters to
minimize manual predilution.
DISCRETE - - Each photometric test is performed in
its own reaction cell. Most chemistry procedures
require no pretreatment of the sample by the operator
or the instrument.
The Ion-Selective Electrode (ISE) Assembly assays
sodium, potassium, and chloride on a single sample
at the same time. The electrolytes can be performed
alone, or at the same time photometric chemistries
are performed.
SELECTIVE - - The operator programs the instrument
to perform one test, several tests, or a full test profile
on each sample. The analyzer performs only the
selected tests on each sample.
SEQUENTIAL - - Tests are performed in reaction cells,
which are positioned in the reaction disk. The reaction
disk rotates 360 plus two cell positions every 20
seconds. The rotation allows sequential processing to
occur.
FULLY AUTOMATED - - After pressing the START
key, the analyzer performs all programmed tests on
each sample without operator intervention.
5.1 Overview
5. INSTRUMENT THEORY
5 2
5.1.3 Sample Route
Figure 5-1 on the facing fold-out page outlines the
sequence of events in the processing of a sample.
The remainder of this section explains in detail the
theory of instrument operation involved in sample
processing.
5.1 Overview
5.1 Overview
5 3
Figure 5-1: Sample Processing
5 4
5.1 Overview
NOTES
5 5
5.2 Cell Rinse and Blanking
5.2.1 Introduction
After test selections are made and start conditions
are specified, press the START key to begin
operation.
The instrument performs a parameter check and
resets all mechanical components to their home
positions. The reaction cell rinse unit cleans reaction
cells and assists in photometrically blanking reaction
cells before sample dispense. It is active once during
each mechanical cycle when the instrument is in the
Operate mode.
5.2.2 Reaction Cell Rinse Unit
Photo 5-1, to the right, shows the reaction cell rinse
unit. Probe #1, at the far right side of the rinse unit, is
the home or starting position for the reaction cells.
The reaction disk moves counter-clockwise and the
reaction cells are indexed through the rinse unit from
right to left.
Photo 5-1: Cell Rinse Unit
Figure 5-2, on the facing page, shows the water and
vacuum supply to the cell rinse unit. Probe #1 is at
the far right.
The function of the reaction cell rinse unit can best be
described by following a reaction cell as it indexes
through the rinse unit.
Once every ten seconds the cell rinse unit lowers into
the reaction cells and vacuum is applied to its vacuum
probes. These spring-loaded probes touch the bottom
of the reaction cells and aspirate the liquid from them.
Fifty disk rotations after sample is added to a reaction
cell, that same cell pauses at cell rinse probe #1. The
results have been calculated and reported for the
reaction mixture in this cell. Nozzle D of cell rinse
probe #1 aspirates the reaction mixture into a vacuum
trap. (Refer to Figure 5-2.) The waste drains into the
serum waste container.
A solenoid valve opens, permitting wash solution to
flow through nozzle C of probe #1 into the reaction cell.
The cell rinse unit raises and the reaction disk begins
its next rotation. Wash solution remains in the cell
until it reaches the next cell rinse probe (20 seconds
later). This "soak" allows effective cleaning of
reaction cells.
Twenty seconds later, this reaction cell is positioned
at cell rinse probe #2, nozzle B, which aspirates the
wash solution and transfers the cell contents to the
main instrument drain. Nozzle A dispenses deionized
water, warmed to about 37 C, into the cell. The rinse
unit raises, and the reaction disk begins its next
rotation.
Cell rinse probe #3, nozzle B, aspirates the distilled
water and transfers the cell contents to the main
instrument drain. Nozzle A dispenses warm
deionized water into the cell. The rinse unit raises, and
the reaction disk begins its next rotation.
Cell rinse probe #4 has a Teflon block at its tip. This
block directs a vacuum to the corners of the reaction
cell as the probe removes all water from the cell. The
rinse unit raises and the reaction disk begins its next
rotation.
Cell rinse probe #5, nozzle E, dispenses warm
5 6
G F F E B AB AB CD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
deionized water into the cell. This water is left in the
cell for reading cell blank absorbance. The cell rinse
unit raises and the reaction disk begins its next
rotation.
This 500 L of deionized water remains undisturbed
in the reaction cell during the next four reaction disk
rotations. During each rotation, cell blank
absorbance is determined and compared to cell blank
data stored in battery supported memory.
Cell rinse probe #6 aspirates cell blank water from the
cells. The cell rinse unit is raised and the reaction
disk begins its next rotation.
Cell rinse probe #7 aspirates remaining water from the
cells. Probe #7 has a Teflon block at the tip of nozzle
F, to direct a vacuum to the corners of the reaction
cell. Nozzle G dispenses water to rinse the Teflon
block on nozzle F. This occurs only during the first few
rotations preceding the first sample aspiration. The
cell rinse unit raises and the reaction disk begins its
next rotation.
Sample is dispensed into the cell one rotation after
completing the cell rinse and blank.
E: Dispenses water for cell blank
F: Aspirates water from cell blank
G: Dispenses rinse water for nozzle
cleaning
A: Dispenses rinse water
B: Aspirates wash solution/
rinse water
C: Dispenses wash solution
D: Aspirates reaction solution
Figure 5-2: Cell Rinse Unit
5 7
5.2.3 Cell Blanking
Cell blank absorbances are used for two purposes:
to confirm the optical characteristics of the cell
to serve as a baseline for the reaction
measurement.
Weekly cell blanking is performed from the
ANALYZER MAINTENANCE display. All reaction
cells are filled with deionized water. The cells pass
through the photometer lightpath, where their
absorbances are measured at 12 wavelengths. The
measured absorbance data for all 120 cells is stored
in C RAM for subsequent comparison.
When reaction cells are photometrically blanked
during operation, the values obtained are compared
with those stored in C RAM. The absorbance of each
reaction cell filled with deionized water is measured on
four consecutive rotations. One of these cell blanks
is a stop blank, taken with the reaction cell in a
stopped position. The stop blank measures all 12
wavelengths. The other three cell blanks are streak
blanks, taken while the reaction disk is in motion. The
streak blank measures only the two reaction
wavelengths needed for the assay to be performed
in the cell.
To confirm the cells optical characteristics, each
measurement of the water-filled cell is compared to
the reading of that same cell obtained during Cell
Blank on the MAINTENANCE JOB display. (This cell
blank reading is automatically updated when each
new cell blank procedure is performed.) If acceptable,
the readings serve as the zero offset or baseline for
calculating final results. The first time these
presample cell blank readings are outside comparison
limits for the absorbance in memory for that cell, no
alarm is issued, but the cell is not used for a test. The
sample dispense is held until the next acceptable cell
is available. If additional cells are not acceptable, a
series of cell blank alarm messages may occur.
5 8
5.3 Begin Operation
5.3.1 Introduction
This section describes the mechanical function of the
instrument. The mechanical cycle is defined as a
series of mechanical events occurring at specific
times within a 10-second time period. Two
mechanical cycles occur during each reaction
disk rotation.
1 ISE Dilution Vessel
2 Sample Disk
3 Sample Probe
4 Cell Rinse Unit
5 Photometer (beneath top
surface of analyzer)
6 Photometer Lamp (beneath top
surface of analyzer)
5.3.2 Mechanical Cycle
The reaction disk (part of the photometric measuring
system) is the central component of reaction
processing. All other systems associated with
reaction processing are distributed around the
reaction disk. The discussion of the mechanical
cycle centers on the activity of the reaction disk and
its associated components, as shown in Figure 5-3.
7 Reaction Disk
8 Reagent Probe 1
9 Reagent Probe 2
10, 11 Stirrers
12 Reagent Disk 1
13 Reagent Disk 2
5.3 Begin Operation
Figure 5-3: Reaction Processing Components
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
I
I
^
1
I
^
1
2
5 9
Figure 5-4 illustrates the reaction disk in a close-up
view. The reaction cell positions are numbered and
the position where each component interacts with the
reaction disk is labelled. The counter-clockwise
rotation is also illustrated.
Figure 5-4: Reaction Disk Positions
5.3 Begin Operation
Counter-clockwise
Rotation
Reaction cell No. 1
in the reset position
Photometer Lamp
1
3
4
5
1
2
0 1
1
9 1
1
8 1
1
7
2
1
3
5
7
9
11 13 15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73 75
77
79
81
83
85
87
89
91
93
95
97
99
101
103
105
107
109
111
113
115
117
119
1
2
3
4
5
R2/R3 Dispense position
R2/R3 Stirring position
R4 Stirring position
R1 Stirring position
R4 Dispense position
R1 Dispense position
Aspiration of
deionized water
Sampling position
Dispense of deionized
water for water blank
measurement
Rinsing with
deionized water
Aspiration of reaction mixture;
Dispense of wash solution
5 10
During each 10-second mechanical cycle, the
reaction disk rotates counter-clockwise 180plus one
reaction cell position. The reaction disk pauses three
times during each 10-second cycle.
The reaction disk rotates as follows:
Moves 22 cells - - pauses
Moves 37 cells - - pauses
Moves 2 cells - - pauses.
This completes one mechanical cycle. This series of
movements and pauses allow the analyzer to:
pipette sample every 10 seconds (once per cycle)
pre-dilute sample
advance each reaction cell one position every 10
seconds
rotate each reaction cell through the lightpath
pipette up to four reagents per test
stir the reaction mixture.
Two mechanical cycles are completed each time the
reaction disk rotates one complete turn of 360plus
two reaction cells. During each reaction disk rotation,
one photometric measurement per reaction cell is
taken. This photometric measurement also is referred
to as a measure point or absorbance reading.
Figure 5-5 illustrates the timing of the reaction
processing sequence.
Figure 5-6, on the next page, illustrates the timing of
the mechanical cycles and reaction disk rotations.
In the following sections of Chapter 5, reaction
processing is explained in terms of reaction disk
rotations, not mechanical cycles.
5.3 Begin Operation
Figure 5-5: Reaction Processing Sequence
(49 measurements per reaction cell)
S
t
a
r
t

K
e
y

O
N
I
n
s
t
r
u
m
e
n
t

r
e
s
e
t
R
i
n
s
i
n
g

o
f

r
e
a
c
t
i
o
n

c
e
l
l
C
e
l
l

B
l
a
n
k
A
s
p
i
r
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

w
a
t
e
r
S
a
m
p
l
i
n
g
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

R
e
a
g
e
n
t
a
t

R
1

t
i
m
i
n
g
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

R
e
a
g
e
n
t
a
t

R
2

t
i
m
i
n
g
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

R
e
a
g
e
n
t
a
t

R
3

t
i
m
i
n
g
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

R
e
a
g
e
n
t
a
t

R
4

t
i
m
i
n
g
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
C
o
m
p
l
e
t
i
o
n

o
f

a
l
l
m
e
a
s
u
r
e
m
e
n
t
s
R
i
n
s
i
n
g

o
f

r
e
a
c
t
i
o
n

c
e
l
l
A
u
t
o
m
a
t
i
c

s
t
o
p
(
i
n
c
l
u
d
i
n
g

w
a
s
h
i
n
g

s
t
e
p
)
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
4 times
(water blank
correction
for each
test)
About
3.7 min.
(Less time STAT reception mode)
About
16 min.
About
4.0 min.

Printout of final results
3-Min reaction
4-Min reaction
5-Min reaction
10-Min reaction
15-Min reaction
5 11
0 5 10 15
20 (sec)
1 cycle (1/2 turn + 1 cell)
Time
Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
22 cells 37 cells 2 cells 22 cells 37 cells 2 cells
S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R1 to R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
M1 to M4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
R1 to R7 . . . . . . . . .
1 to 49
Sample dispense
Reagent dispense
Stirring
Cell blank
Rinse aspiration/dispense
Photometric point
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
2
3
5
6
7
S
R2
M2
R1 M1
M3
M4
R3
R4
STOPPED
CELL BLANK
CB1
CB2
CB3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
DIL.S
15-min reaction data
processing point
10-min reaction data
processing point
5-min reaction data
processing point
4-min reaction data
processing point
3-min reaction data
processing point
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
5.3 Begin Operation
Figure 5-6: Mechanical Cycle and Reaction Disk Rotation Timing
5 12
The first reagent is pipetted during the first rotation.
The second reagent is added during the fourth
rotation. The third reagent is added during the 16th
rotation. The fourth reagent is added during the 31st
rotation.
Figure 5-7 illustrates the timing of reaction events in
relation to reaction disk rotation.
Figure 5-7: Reaction Processing Timing
5.3 Begin Operation
Measure Point Time Time Interval
(Reaction Disk Rotation) (seconds) (seconds) Remarks
Pipetting of
sample and
reagent at R1
timing,
R1 stirring
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
0.00
19.92
39.84
59.76
79.69
99.61
119.53
139.45
159.37
179.29
199.21
219.14
239.06
255.74
275.66
295.59
325.51
335.43
355.35
375.27
395.19
415.11
435.04
454.96
472.16
490.43
510.35
530.27
550.20
570.12
590.04
609.96
629.88
649.80
669.73
689.65
709.57
729.49
749.41
769.33
789.25
809.18
829.10
865.70
885.63
905.55
925.47
945.39
965.31
About
19.92
About
16.69
About
19.92
About
17.20
About
18.27
About
19.92
About
36.61
About
19.92
R2 pipetting
R2 stirring
R3 pipetting and
stirring
R4 pipetting and
stirring
5 13
The absorbance of the reaction mixture is measured
every 20 seconds (one time per reaction disk rotation).
The photometer lightpath is positioned approximately
so that when the reaction disk is stationary, the light
passes through a reaction cell. Most absorbance
measurements are determined while the reaction disk
is moving. Absorbance measure points to be used in
resul t cal cul ati on are programmed i n the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. For a more
detailed explanation of absorbance measurements,
refer to Part B of this chapter, Chemistry Theory.
Figure 5-8 illustrates absorbance measure points over
time, throughout reaction processing.
Figure 5-8: Absorbance Measure Points Over Time
The next five sections follow one sample through
predilution, reagent addition, absorbance readings,
and aspiration to waste.
5.3 Begin Operation
0 5 10
15 (min)
S
t
o
p
p
e
d

c
e
l
l

B
l
a
n
k
S
t
r
e
a
k

c
e
l
l

b
l
a
n
k
Water
blank
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

R
e
a
g
e
n
t

a
t

R
1

t
i
m
i
n
g
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

R
e
a
g
e
n
t

a
t

R
2

t
i
m
i
n
g
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f

R
e
a
g
e
n
t

a
t

R
3

t
i
m
i
n
g
A
d
d
i
t
i
o
n

o
f
R
e
a
g
e
n
t

a
t
R
4

t
i
m
i
n
g
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
S
t
i
r
r
i
n
g
S
a
m
p
l
e

p
i
p
e
t
i
n
g
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1516
17
18
19
30
31
32
48
49
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
TIME
5 14
5.4 Sample Aspiration and
Dispense
5.4.1 Sample Aspiration
The first reaction cell receives sample and reagent(s)
after it has been rinsed and blanked. The
instruments computer searches its memory and
determines whether a calibrator, control, or patient
sample to be aspirated first.
1 Sample Aspiration
The sample disk can rotate in either direction to bring
the sample to the sample aspiration position. There
are three sample aspiration positions, one for each of
the rings on the sample disk. The arc of movement
by the sample probe arm determines the sample
aspiration position. The sample probe aspirates from
the inner ring through a hole in the evaporation cover.
Figure 5-9, below, shows the sample disk in the
correct position. The sample probe arm pivots and
moves the sample probe to rest over the first sample.
The sample pipettor motor activates, and a small
volume of air (5 L) is aspirated into the tip of the
probe. This air interface prevents the sample from
mixing with water in the sample pipetting system.
2 Sample Probe Rinse Station
5.4 Sample Aspiration and Dispense
Figure 5-9: Sample Aspiration
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
^
'
5 15
The sample probe arm motor lowers the sample probe
into the sample cup. The sample probe acts as a
liquid level sensor while it descends. If no sample is
detected, a data alarm, SAMP., is issued on the
printout next to the result. In addition, a
photodetector is located in the sample probe arm to
detect any abnormality in the descent of the arm. The
probe tip is immersed in the sample and the sample
pipettor aspirates the correct sample volume. When
using a micro sample cup, the sample probe utilizes
meniscus chasing to continue to descend as the
sample is aspirated. This ensures that even the
smallest sample volume is pipetted accurately. The
correct sample volume is part of the information
programmed in the chemistry parameters for each
test.
A small volume of extra sample (12 L) is aspirated
with the first test of each sample. This sample buffer
removes any water that may line the interior wall of the
sample probe. The buffer is discarded to waste after
the last test of the sample is dispensed. Also, 1 L of
extra sample is aspirated for spit-back. When the
stepper motor reverses direction from aspiration to
dispense, this extra volume is spit-back into the
sample cup. This ensures a reliable sample volume.
The sample probe moves to the sample dispense
position.
5.4.2 Sample Dispense - - Start of
Rotation #1
Sample can be dispensed in two different places - -
the ISE dilution vessel or a photometric reaction cell.
When ISEs are selected, 15 L of sample is delivered
into the special ISE sample port. The ISE unit dilutes
the sample 1:31. The diluted sample flows through
the Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
cartridges. The sample stops so
that an electrical voltage can be measured. The
voltage is proportional to the concentration of the
electrolytes in the sample. This measurement
occurs alone when no photometric chemistries are
ordered. When photometric chemistry assays are
also requested, ISE measurement occurs at the
same time.
When photometric chemistries are selected, the
sample probe moves to the dispense position. (Refer
to Figure 5-10 on the following page.) The sample
probe is spring-loaded where it connects to the probe
arm. This allows the probe to touch the bottom of the
reaction cell as it is lowered. The sample probe
touches the reaction cell bottom to ensure precise
delivery of an accurate volume.
If the sample volume is <5 L, the sample probe raises
slowly from the sample cup and reaction disk. This
makes sure a small sample volume is delivered
directly to the bottom of the reaction cell.
5 16
The sample pipettor dispenses the required sample
volume into the bottom of the reaction cell. The probe
is lifted from the cell, and either goes back to the
sample disk (if there are more tests to be performed
on the sample) or moves to the sample probe rinse
station.
1 ISE Dilution Vessel for sample
dispense
Figure 5-10: Sample Dispense
2 Sample dispense #1
(photometric tests)
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
^
5 17
5.4.3 Sample Probe Rinse
The sample probe is rinsed between samples. When
the last test for a sample has been pipetted, the
sample probe moves to the probe rinse station. Water
is flushed through the probe and over the outer
surface of the probe.
While the sample probe is being rinsed, the reaction
disk continues to rotate. The reaction disk moves 22
cell positions and pauses. The reaction disk then
moves another 37 cell positions and pauses. The
reaction cell containing sample is now in position to
receive any reagent with R1 timing.
5 18
5.5 Sample Predilution
5.5.1 Diluent Aspiration
The R1 reagent disk also rotates during the sample
probe rinse to bring the correct reagent container to the
reagent aspiration position. Both reagent disks rotate
in either direction, using the shortest route to position
the correct reagent. The reagent aspiration positions
are defined by the arc of the reagent probe movement.
Cutaway sections in the reagent disk evaporation
covers give the reagent probes access.
1 Reaction Cell Containing
Sample
2 Sample #2 Aspiration
When the reagent disk stops, the R1 probe pivots
over the disk. Figure 5-11 below shows the R1 probe
in position to aspirate the correct diluent. In this
example, diluent is dispensed for a sample pre-
dilution. The reagent pipettor is activated and
aspirates a small volume of air (15 L) into the reagent
probe. This air interface prevents reagent from
mixing with water in the reagent pipetting system.
The probe moves down, acting as a liquid level
sensor, to detect the reagent. A photodetector is
located in the reagent probe arm to detect any
abnormality in the descent of the arm. The computer
calculates the distance the probe descends and uses
this information in determining the number of mLs of
diluent remaining. The number of milliliters (mL) of
diluent remaining is updated on the REAGENT
STATUS display.
3 Diluent Aspiration
4 Reagent Probe Rinse Station
Figure 5-11: Diluent Aspiration
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
^
'
5 19
While the tip of the reagent probe is immersed in
diluent, the reagent pipettor motor activates and
aspirates diluent into the reagent probe. The volume
aspirated includes:
a small diluent volume to take up any water that
could possibly dilute the diluent being dispensed
the diluent volume stored in chemistry parameters
for each specific reagent
a small "spit-back" volume.
5.5.2 Diluent Dispense
Figure 5-12 below shows the reagent probe 1 in the
reagent dispense position. The pipettor motor
activates, and diluent is dispensed into the reaction
cell containing sample. The reagent probe does not
descend into the reaction cell, but dispenses from the
top of the cell.
1 Diluent Dispense
5.5.3 Reagent Probe Rinse
The reagent probe arm brings the reagent probe to its
rinse station after completion of diluent dispense.
Water is flushed through the probe as well as onto its
exterior surface to ensure proper cleaning. This rinse
mechanism is similar to that used for the sample
probe.
Figure 5-12: Diluent Dispense
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
^
5 20
5.5.4 Sample and Diluent Stirring
While reagent probe 1 is rinsing, the reaction disk
completes the first half of the rotation by moving two
cells. Figure 5-13 below shows the stirrer at the
reaction disk and stirring the sample and diluent. At
the same time, sample #2 is dispensed into a reaction
cell. After the reaction mixture is stirred, the stirrer
moves to its rinse station and is rinsed with deionized
water.
The reaction disk moves 22 cells and pauses. The
reaction disk then moves another 37 cells and
pauses. The sample and R1 reagent disks rotate at
this time, if necessary, to bring the appropriate sample
and reagent into position for the next dispense.
1 Stirring 2 Sample #2 Dispense
Figure 5-13: Sample 1 + Diluent Stirring
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
^
5 21
5.5.5 Pre-diluted Sample Aspiration
The Sample #1 + diluent mixture is now in position for
the sample probe to aspirate pre-diluted sample. The
sample probe is brought to the reaction disk and
reenters the reaction cell. The correct volume of
Sample #1 + Diluent (maximum of 10 l) is aspirated.
The sample probe moves up out of the reaction cell.
At the same time, reagent probe 1 dispenses the
reagent at R1 timing into the reaction cell containing
Sample #2.
1 Original Sample #1 + Diluent
3 Pre-diluted Sample Dispense
The reaction disk moves two cells and pauses. This
movement completes the first reaction disk rotation
of 360plus two cells. The sample probe descends
and dispenses the pre-diluted sample (Sample #1 +
diluent) into a new reaction cell. This pre-diluted
sample is treated like Sample #3 in the mechanical
timing sequence. (Refer to Figure 5-14 below.) At the
same time, the stirrer moves to the reaction disk and
stirs Sample #2 + R1 Reagent. Following dispense,
the sample probe moves to the probe rinse station.
2 Stirring Sample #2 + R1
Reagent
Figure 5-14: Pre-diluted Sample Dispense
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
^
5 22
5.6 Reagent Aspiration and
Dispense
5.6.1 Reagent Aspiration at R1 Timing
The R1 reagent disk also rotates during the sample
probe rinse to bring the correct reagent container to the
reagent aspiration position.
1 Reaction Cell Containing Pre-
diluted Sample
2 Sample #3 Aspiration
When the reagent disk stops, reagent probe 1 pivots
over the disk. Figure 5-15 below shows reagent probe
1 in position to aspirate the correct reagent. The
reagent pipettor is activated and aspirates a small
volume of air (15 L) into the reagent probe. This air
interface prevents reagent from mixing with water in
the reagent pipetting system. The probe moves
down, acting as a liquid level sensor, to detect the
reagent. A photodetector is located in the reagent
probe arm to detect any abnormality in the descent of
the arm. The computer calculates the distance the
probe descends and uses this information in
determining the number of tests remaining. The
number of tests remaining is automatically updated
on the REAGENT STATUS display.
3 Reagent Aspiration at R1 Timing
4 Reagent Probe Rinse Station
5.6 Reagent Aspiration and Dispense
Figure 5-15: Reagent Aspiration at R1 Timing
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
^
'
5 23
While the tip of the reagent probe is immersed in
reagent, the reagent pipettor motor activates and
aspirates reagent into the reagent probe. The volume
aspirated includes:
a small reagent volume to take up any water that
could possibly dilute the reagent being dispensed
the reagent volume stored in Chemistry
Parameters for each specific reagent
a small spit-back volume.
5.6.2 Reagent Dispense at R1 Timing
Figure 5-16 below shows the R1 probe in the R1 timing
reagent dispense position. The pipettor motor
activates, and R1 reagent is dispensed into the
reaction cell that contains the diluted sample. The
reagent probe does not descend into the reaction cell.
1 R1 Reagent Dispense
5.6.3 Reagent Probe Rinse
The reagent probe arm brings the reagent probe to its
rinse station after completion of R1 reagent dispense.
Water is flushed through the probe as well as onto its
exterior surface to ensure proper cleaning. This rinse
mechanism is similar to that used for the sample
probe.
2 Sample Dispense
Figure 5-16: Reagent Dispense at R1 Timing
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
^
5 24
5.6.4 Sample and Reagent Stirring
While the R1 probe is rinsing, the reaction disk
completes the first half of the rotation by moving two
cells. Figure 5-17 below shows the stirrer at the
reaction disk and stirring the sample and R1 reagent.
At the same time, another sample is dispensed into a
reaction cell. After the reaction mixture is stirred, the
stirrer moves to its rinse station and is rinsed with
deionized water.
The reaction disk moves 22 cells and pauses. The
reaction disk then moves another 37 cells and
pauses. The sample and R1 reagent disks rotate at
this time, if necessary, to bring the appropriate sample
and reagent into position for the next dispense.
1 Stirring
Figure 5-17: Prediluted Sample + R1 Reagent Stirring
2 Sample Dispense
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
^
5 25
At the end of each 20 second rotation, the reaction
cell containing the pre-diluted sample moves two
positions closer to the R2 timing reagent dispense
position. Figure 5-18 below shows this reaction cell
at the beginning of the fourth rotation following
dispense of the pre-diluted sample. This reaction cell
containing pre-diluted sample + R1 reagent is now
moving into position for dispense of R2 reagent. This
occurs approximately one minute and 20 seconds
after dispense of the diluted sample (4 rotations 20
seconds per rotation = 80 seconds). R2 reagent is
dispensed by reagent probe 2 after the first 22-cell
movement by the reaction disk in rotation 4. Stirring
occurs after the next 20 second rotation.
1 Pre-diluted Sample + R1 + R2
Reagent Dispense
3 Sample Aspiration Continues
2 Reagent Aspiration Continues
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
^
'
5 26
Figure 5-19 below shows the reaction cell during the
16th rotation. This reaction cell (containing pre-diluted
sample + R1 reagent + R2 reagent) is now moving into
position for dispense of the reagent at R3 timing, if
required. Reagent probe 2 is used to dispense the R3
reagent. This occurs approximately five minutes after
dispense of the pre-diluted sample (16 rotations 20
seconds per rotation = about 5 minutes). The R3
reagent addition occurs following the second 37-cell
movement by the reaction disk in rotation 16. Stirring
occurs following the second two-cell movement in
rotation 16, immediately after R3 reagent addition.
1 Pre-diluted Sample + R1 Reagent +
R2 Reagent + R3 Reagent Dispense
2 Reagent Dispense continues
3 Sample Dispense continues
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
^
'
5 27
Figure 5-20 below shows the reaction cell at the
beginning of the 31st rotation. The reaction cell
containing pre-diluted sample + R1 reagent + R2
reagent + R3 reagent is now moving into position for
dispense of reagent at R4 timing. Reagent probe 1 is
used to dispense reagent at R4 timing. This occurs
approximately 10 minutes after dispense of the pre-
diluted sample (31 rotations 20 seconds per rotation
= about 10 minutes). R4 reagent is dispensed
following the second 37-cell movement by the
reaction disk in rotation 31. Prediluted sample + R1
reagent + R2 reagent + R3 reagent + R4 reagent
stirring occurs following the second two-cell
movement in rotation 31, immediately after R4
reagent is added.
R2 Reagent + R3 Reagent +
Reagent Dispense at R4 Timing
Samples and reagents are aspirated and dispensed
throughout this time. The cell rinse unit is also active,
cleaning and blanking reaction cells for more sample
dispenses.
2 Sample Dispense Continues
3 Reagent Dispense Continues
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
^
'
5 28
5.6.8 Aspirate Reaction Mixture
to Waste
At the beginning of the 50th rotation, the first reaction
mixture is in position at the first probe of the cell rinse
unit (shown below in Figure 5-21). By this time, all
photometric readings have occurred for this reaction
mixture, and results have been calculated. The cell
rinse unit is lowered, the reaction mixture is aspirated
to the waste container, and the cell is filled with wash
solution.
During the next ten rotations, the reaction cell is rinsed
and photometrically blanked. One rotation later, it will
again be in position for sample dispense.
R2 Reagent + R3 Reagent +
R4 Reagent Aspirated to Waste
Figure 5-21: Sample Aspiration to Waste
48
2 3
47
2 2
46
2 1
45
2 0
44
1 9
4
3
1
8
4
2
1
7
4
1
1
6
4
0
1
5
3
9
1
4
3
8
1
3
3
7
1
2
3
6
1
1
3
5
1
0
3
4
9
3
3
8
3
2
7
3
1
6
3
0
5
2
9
4
2
8
3
2 7
2
2 6
1
2 5
50
2 4
49
E
6 6
S
16
E
6 5
S
15
E
6 4
S
14
E
6 3
S
13
E
6 2
S
12
E
6 1
S
11
E
6 0
S
10
E
5
9
S
9
E
5
8
S
8
E
5
7
S
7
E
5
6 S
6
E
5
5
S
5
E
5
4
S
4
E
5
3
S
3
E
52
S
2
E
51
S 1
W
3
E 7 0
W2
E 6 9
W1
S 6 8
S17
S 6 7
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
16 15
14
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
3 3 3 2
3 1
3 0
2
9
2
8
2
7
2
6
2
5
2
4
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
0
1
9
18
17
R2
R1
'
5 29
5.7 Sampling End
5.7.1 Overview
The instrument continues to pipette samples until one
of these conditions occurs:
the next sample to be aspirated is located on the
next sample disk
the next sample is assigned a sample position
number of 0 (without bar code reader)
the next sample position has a zero bar code label
(with bar code reader)
the bar code reader registers 10 empty positions
the operator pressed the SAMPLING STOP key.
5.7.2 Sampling End
If you are using the bar code reader accessory, a "0"
bar code should be placed in the position following the
last specimen to be sampled. This informs the
instrument to stop sampling patients and begin the
cleaning procedure.
If you are not using the bar code reader accessory, the
last patient specimen programmed becomes the last
sequence number to be assigned a sample disk
position number. The following sequence number
retains its sample position number of "0." This informs
the instrument that the next sequence number has not
been programmed, and, therefore, is not to be
sampled. If, during routine patient test selection,
without the bar code reader, a sample position number
of "0" is inadvertently entered, the instrument will stop
sampl i ng i mmedi atel y pri or to
that specimen.
When any of these conditions listed above occurs,
the analyzer automatically aspirates three samples
of the System Cleaning Solution from the "W1" cup on
the middle ring of the sample disk. This cleaning
solution is aspirated into the sample probe to clean it,
and then is deposited into a reaction cell. During this
time the Analyzer Status line at the top of the screen
reads Washing Probe.
After the cleaning solution aspiration is complete, a
No More Samples to Process warning is issued, and
the instrument stops sampling. When this occurs,
place the next sample disk on the instrument and
press START to resume operation.
5.7 Sampling End
5 30
5.8 ISE System Components
5.8.1 Introduction
The ISE system determines sample concentrations
of sodium, potassium and chloride. ISE analysis of
a sample can occur at the same time as photometric
chemistry assays, or can occur alone. The ISE
system can process up to 180 samples per hour. The
Ion-Selective Electrodes used by this instrument are
color-coded, modular plug-in cartridges.
A diagram of the ISE system is shown in Figure 5-23
on the next page. The main components of this
system include: three ISE measuring cartridges, a
reference cartridge, three syringes, a dilution vessel,
and a degassing unit.
The sipper, internal standard and diluent syringes are
behind the left front panel. The electrodes and
dilution vessel are positioned in a temperature-
controlled compartment. The compartment is found
on the top surface of the analyzer to the left of the
sample probe. Because the response of the
electrodes is affected by temperature, the ISE
compartment is heated to a constant temperature
with 37 C water. The degassing unit is inside the
analyzer and is connected to the ISE vacuum
system.
5.8.2 Internal Reference Flowpath
The Internal Standard syringe moves down and 600 L
of reagent is aspirated from its container. The reagent
flows into the IS syringe assembly. The syringe
moves up and the IS flows through a preheater and is
dispensed into the dilution vessel. This rinses the
system. The dispense cycle is repeated with 450 L
of reagent that is used for measurement. Figure 5-22
on Page 5 33 diagrams the flow of the internal
standard.
5.1 Overview
5 31
911 ISE Flowpath
Figure 5-23: ISE Diagram
1 Dilition Vessel:
mixing vessel used to dilute sample
2 ISE Nozzle Platform:
moves the ISE nozzle up and down
3 Vacuum Nozzle Platform:
moves the Vacuum nozzle up and down
4 ISE Measuring Cartridges:
ion-selective electrodes used to measure
concentration of Na
+
, K
+
and Cl
-
5 Pinch Valve:
helps control which solution is being pulled
by the sipper syringe
6 Reference Cartridge:
serves as a reference for calculation during
ISE measurement
7 Internal Standard Solution:
measured at calibration and before every
sample to compensate for minor drifts
8 Diluent Solution:
used to dilute samples and controls
9 Reference Solution:
used to measure electric baseline
10 Degassing Unit:
used to degas the diluent and reference solutions
11 Diluent Syringe:
positive displacement syringe used to dispense
diluent into the dilution vessel
12 Internal Standard Syringe:
positive displacement syringe used to dispense
internal standard into the dilution vessel
13 Sipper Syringe:
positive displacement syringe used to pull solutions from
the measuring cartridges and the reference cartridge
14 Drain to Waste Container:
excess solution inside the dilution vessel is vacuumed
to waste
ISVs:
solenoid valves
5 32
NOTES
5 33
Figure 5-22: Internal Standard Flowpath
5.8.3 Dilution Vessel
The dilution vessel allows the ISE sample to be
diluted 1:31 with diluent prior to measurement through
the cartridges. A sipper nozzle is permanently
inserted into the dilution vessel. It is mounted to a
spring-loaded platform that, when lowered, extends
almost to the bottom of the vessel. This nozzle
provides the path for diluted sample and the internal
standard solution to flow through the ISE cartridges.
Dispense lines for internal standard and diluent are
also positioned in the vessel. Another spring-
mounted nozzle, the vacuum nozzle, is activated to
remove residual waste from the dilution vessel. This
nozzle is connected directly to a vacuum vessel that
empties waste from the vessel into the biohazardous
waste container. Figure 5-24 below diagrams the
dilution vessel and nozzles.
Figure 5-24: Dilution Vessel
Dilution
Vessel
SIP
Syringe
IS
Syringe
DIL
Syringe
Drain
Drain
Sipper
Degasser
Ref K Na Cl
Pinch
Valve
LS2 LS1
IS
(600 mL)
DIL
(300 mL)
REF
(300 mL)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
I
S
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
D
I
L
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
R
E
F
)
Vacuum
37 C Water
For
Preheat
ISE Unit
Dilution
Vessel
LS2 LS1
To Cartridges
Delivers Diluent
Delivers to IS
To Waste
5 34
5.8.4 ISE Sampling
The sample probe moves from its position at the probe
rinse station to the sample aspiration position.
Sample (15 L) is aspirated into the probe when the
sample syringe piston moves downward. The sample
probe then moves to the dilution vessel shutter and
the shutter opens to allow the probe to lower into the
vessel. Before the sample can be drawn through the
measuring cartridge flowpath, it must be diluted 1:31
with 450 L of ISE diluent. Figure 5-25 below indicates
the flow direction in the system.
Figure 5-25: ISE Sample Flowpath
DI Water Supply
(temperature
controlled and
degassed)
Sample
Syringe
Solenoid
Valve
Sample
Probe
5 35
5.8.5 Diluent Flowpath
ISE diluent is added to the dilution vessel via the
diluent syringe positioned behind the left front panel of
the analytical unit. This syringe is filled with ISE
diluent, which is located on top of the analytical unit.
A solenoid valve controls the inlet to each syringe.
The solenoid valve opens when an ISE Prime is
executed. This purges the Internal Standard (IS) and
diluent dispense lines with reagent. A 3-way solenoid
valve, located at the outlet of the diluent syringe,
connects the diluent reagent bottle to a vacuum trap.
During ISE Prime, the vacuum draws the diluent into
the reagent coils.
On the downward stroke of the syringe piston, the
diluent is aspirated from its container. When the
piston moves upward, diluent is pushed through a
preheater, and into the dilution vessel. The force of
the dispense thoroughly mixes the diluted sample.
Before the diluted sample is drawn through the
cartridges, a baseline potential is taken by measuring
KCl through the reference cartridge.
Figure 5-26 below illustrates the diluent flowpath.
Figure 5-26: Diluent Flowpath
Dilution
Vessel
SIP
Syringe
IS
Syringe
DIL
Syringe
Drain
Drain
Sipper
Degasser
Ref K Na Cl
Pinch
Valve
LS2 LS1
IS
(600 mL)
DIL
(300 mL)
REF
(300 mL)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
I
S
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
D
I
L
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
R
E
F
)
Vacuum
37 C Water
For
Preheat
ISE Unit
5 36
5.8.6 KCI and Reference Cartridge
Flowpath
The sipper syringe downstrokes and pulls liquid
through one of two flowpaths, the measuring flowpath
or the reference flowpath. Sipper syringe aspiration
tubing divides where the two flowpaths meet, at the
reference cartridge block. The reference flowpath
originates at the KCl bottle and past the reference
cartridge. The measuring flowpath originates at the
dilution vessel, through the three measuring
cartridges and past a pinch valve.
Figure 5-27: KCl Flowpath
The reference cartridge is positioned in the KCl
flowpath. This flowpath is electrically continuous with
the measuring cartridge flowpath. The analyzer
measures the difference in potential between the two
flowpaths. This reference potential serves as the zero
baseline in ISE calculations. Before every ISE
measurement, the pinch valve closes and the
solenoid valve opens and 65 L of KCl is drawn into the
reference cartridge by the action of the sipper syringe.
The solenoid valve closes and the pinch valve opens
as the syringes piston continues downward, drawing
the diluted sample through the electrodes.
To prevent electronic noise, the reference cartridge
flowpath must be free from air bubbles. KCl flows
through a degassing unit before entering the reference
cartridge flowpath. A vacuum within the degasser
removes any dissolved air from the KCl.
Figure 5-27 below illustrates the flowpath of the
reference cartridge.
Dilution
Vessel
SIP
Syringe
IS
Syringe
DIL
Syringe
Drain
Drain
Sipper
Degasser
Ref K Na Cl
Pinch
Valve
LS2 LS1
IS
(600 mL)
DIL
(300 mL)
REF
(300 mL)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
I
S
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
D
I
L
)
P
r
e
h
e
a
t
e
r

(
R
E
F
)
Vacuum
37 C Water
For
Preheat
ISE Unit
5 37
5.8.7 Measuring Cartridge Flowpath
There are three electrodes housed in cartridges (blue
= chloride, yellow = sodium, and red = potassium).
These channeled cartridges are connected together
to form a flowpath for the sample. The action of the
sipper syringe piston draws the diluted sample from
the dilution vessel into the electrodes.
WARNING
Patient sample is pulled through the sipper syringe.
Exercise the normal precautions required for
biohazardous material when handling the sipper
syringe.
A pinch valve controls the soft tubing that leads from
the aspiration probe (at the dilution vessel) to the
measuring cartridges. The pinch valve opens and the
KCl line solenoid valve closes. The sipper syringe
downstrokes to aspirate contents of the dilution
vessel through the plastic tubing and into the
measuring flowpath.
Figure 5-28 below illustrates the measuring cartridge
flowpath.
Figure 5-28: Measuring Cartridge Flowpath
K Na Cl Ref
Sipper
(Drain)
Reference
(REF)
Diluent
(DIL)
Internal
Standard
(IS)
Dilution
Vessel
Drain
LS2 LS1
Pinch
Valve
5 38
As the diluted sample sits in the electrodes,
equilibration is achieved and a measurement of the
Electromotive Force (EMF) or voltage at the
membrane of the electrode is taken. Figure 5-29
below shows the relative position of membrane to
sample in each electrode.
Figure 5-29: Measuring Cartridge
The selectivity of the membrane to a particular ion is
dependent on the composition of the membrane.
The composition of the membrane in each electrode
determines its selectivity for a certain ion:
The PVC (polyvinyl chloride) material of the
sodium electrode membrane contains a neutral
carrier that provides a cavity for capturing the
sodium ion.
The molecular structure of the antibiotic
valinomycin in a PVC membrane in the potassium
electrode makes the electrode selective for the
potassium ion.
The chloride electrode membrane employs ion
exchange with a type of salt in the membrane that
pairs with chloride ions.
Diluted Sample Flowpath Internal Filling Gel
Ag/AgCl
Membrane
O-ring
5 39
5.8.8 Sample Processing Sequence
The step-action table below lists the sequence of
events in ISE sample processing.
Step Action Purpose
1 Dispense internal
standard
600 L of Internal Standard (IS) is dispensed to
rinse the vessel.
2 Empty vessel The vacuum nozzle aspirates the internal standard
used for rinse to waste.
3 Draw KCI Sipper syringe draws 65 L of KCl through reference
and ground electrodes.
4 Dispense internal
standard
450 L of IS are dispensed for one-point calibration
measurement.
5 Draw internal
standard
Internal Standard is drawn through the electrodes (by
sipper syringe) for a one-point calibration check.
6 Empty vessel The vacuum nozzle aspirates the remaining internal
standard to waste.
7 Dispense sample 15 L of sample is dispensed into the bottom of the
dilution vessel for dilution purposes.
8 Add diluent 450 L of ISE diluent is dispensed, mixing with the
sample.
9 Draw KCl Sipper syringe draws 65 L of KCl through reference
and ground electrodes.
10 Draw diluted
sample
300 L of diluted sample is aspirated (by sipper
syringe) into the electrodes.
11 Empty vessel The vacuum nozzle aspirates the remaining diluted
sample to waste.
5 40
5.9 Overview
5.9.1 Introduction
The rest of this chapter provides you with information
about the assay types and calibration methods used
by the analyzer. Cross references are made to other
information concerning calibration and calculation of
results contained in the manual.
5.9.2 General Photometric
Characteristics
The photometer is positioned so that absorbance
readings of each reaction cell are taken as the reaction
disk is moving. This arrangement enables the
instrument to read the absorbance of each reaction
cell as frequently as once every 20 seconds.
The light from the photometer lamp passes through
the following structures in sequence:
1 Lens
2 Inner reaction bath window
3 Incubation bath water
4 Reaction cell and its contents
5 Incubation bath water
6 Outer reaction bath window
7 Photometer
An illustration of the light path to the photometer is
shown on the following page in Figure 5-30. (This
cutaway is taken from the top of the analyzer, directly
in front of the cell rinse unit.) When the light beam
enters the photometer, it strikes a diffraction grating,
which separates the light into its constituent
wavelengths, and reflects them onto a fixed array of
12 photodiodes. Each photodiode is permanently
positioned to detect light at a different wavelength.
Absorbance readings are taken each time a reaction
cell rotates past the photometer. When the reaction
cell passes through the photometer lightpath,
absorbance at the two programmed wavelengths for
each individual assay is measured. Readings from
the programmed measure cycle(s) or measure
point(s) are forwarded to the computer for calculation
of final results.
All Boehringer Mannheim chemistries use two
wavelength readings to calculate results. The end
product of a chemical reaction absorbs the most light
at one particular wavelength. However, using the
difference between readings at two wavelengths
(bichromatic system) eliminates the effect of
interferences sometimes found when using a single
wavelength (monochromatic system).
5.9 Overview
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 41
Figure 5-30: Photometer Lightpath
5.9 Overview
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
Light Source
Water Jacket
Lens
Inner
Outer
Photometer
Reaction Bath
Windows
5 42
Bichromatic analysis uses two wavelengths: one that
is at or near the peak absorbance of the chromogen
produced by the reaction, and a second wavelength
at which little or no absorbance of the desired
chromogen occurs.
Any absorbance (A
2
) that occurs, due to interference
from other substances in the sample, is measured at
the secondary wavelength. This amount is then
subtracted from the total absorbance (A
1
) occurring at
the primary wavelength to yield the net absorbance
(A
C
), shown graphically in Figure 5-31 below:
Figure 5-31: Bichromatic Absorbance
The optimum measure points for each test are part of
the chemistry parameters.
All measure points for Boehringer Mannheim
chemistries are included with the chemistry
parameters when they are downloaded from the
Parameter disk. These measure points are also
listed in the Instrument Settings section of the
application sheet for each chemistry.
The assay code and calibration method programmed
from the chemistry parameters on the Parameter disk
determine how final results are calculated for each
test. Assay codes and calibration methods are
discussed in the following sections.
5.9 Overview
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
WAVELENGTH
OBSERVED
CHROMOPHORE
BLANK
1

2
A
1
A
C
A
2
5 43
5.10 Assay Techniques
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5.10.1 Introduction
There are two fundamental types of assays on this
instrument:
endpoint assays
rate assays
Measurements are taken by the photometer at
specific measure points. If measurements are taken
after the reactions have stopped (are completed), the
intensity of the colored (or turbid) product is an
indicator of the sample components concentration.
These are called endpoint assays.
If measurements are taken as the reaction proceeds,
the rate of the reaction is proportional to the sample
components concentration or activity being
analyzed. These are called rate reactions. There are
also modifications of these two techniques possible
in this instrument, as well as a combination of the two.
5.10.2 Selecting Assay Type and
Measure Points
The CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen displays
the assay type and measure points that have been
downloaded from the Parameter disk for an individual
test.
To view the assay type or measure point for a specific
test, press the PARAMETER key.
Press 1 ENTER and GUIDANCE. This calls up the
second page of the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen. Press the test key (1-46) for the test you want
to view. The Assay Code field displays the assay
type selected and the Assay Point field displays the
measure points selected.
1
ENTER
Figure 5-32: Assay Code and Assay Point Display
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Test
Assay Code
Assay Point
S. Vol. (Normal)
S. Vol. (Decrease)
S. Vol. (Increase )
ABS. Limit
Prozone Limit
Reagent
Calibration Type
R1
R2
R3
R4
Auto Time Out
Auto Change
Blank
Span
2 Point
Full
Lot
Bottle
SD Limit
Duplicate Limit
Sensitivity Limit
S1 ABS Limit
Compensated Limit
[ PHOS ]
[ 2POINT END ] [ 3 ] [ ]
[ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
< Serum > < Urine >
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ]
[ ] / [ ] 4 10 0 0
5
3
10
30
10
5
0
0
0
5
5
0
0
0
0
120
140
0
0 0 Increase
0 0 Lower
250
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00133
00133
00133
00133
LINEAR 2 2 0
999
0
0
0
0.1
100
1400
0 6000
2Point
BLANK
376 340
W 0
5 44
5.10.3 Example of Endpoint Assay
Boehringer Mannheims phosphorus reagents are
used to determine phosphorus in a patient sample
using the endpoint assay technique.
The Assay Code entry fi el d wi l l di spl ay:
[2POINT END] [ 3] [ ].
This assay is sample-blanked; "2POINT END"
means that the instrument will read the absorbance of
the reaction mixture at two points. The reaction time
is three minutes.
The Assay Point entry fi el d wi l l di spl ay:
[ 4] - [10] - [ 0] - [ 0].
The sample blank absorbance (sample plus the first
reagent) is determined by the measurement taken
during reaction disk rotation 4. The absorbance of the
sample plus the first and second reagents is
determined by the measurement taken during rotation
10.
The instrument always makes endpoint assay
absorbance determinations in duplicate. The
measure points for phosphorus are defined as disk
rotations 4 and 10; in each case, a duplicate reading
is also made in the previous disk rotation. The sample
blank readings occur during disk rotations 3 and 4.
The final absorbance readings occur during rotations
9 and 10.
When a sample is diluted with R1 reagent and read as
a blank, it cannot be compared to the reading taken
after the addition of R2 reagent, R3 reagent, and/or R4
reagent unless a correction for the dilution (from R2,
R3, R4) is taken into account:
dilution factor =
The Assay Code field has three separate entries. The
first entry displays the assay type selected. There are
seven different assay types including:
1: 1 Point
2: 2 Point Rate
3: 2 Point End
4: 3 POINT
5: 1 point and rate
6: Rate-A
7: Rate-B
Assay Code selections 1: 1 POINT, 3: 2 POINT END
and 4: 3 POINT are all endpoint assays. Assay Code
selections 2: 2 POINT RATE, 6: RATE-A and 7:
RATE-B are all rate assays. Assay Code selection
5: 1 POINT AND RATE is a combination of endpoint
and rate assay type.
The second entry displays reaction time. The third
entry is used for performing serum indexes or more
than one test in a reaction cell.
Assay Point has four entries. Each entry displays a
chosen measure point.
Sections 5.11 through 5.19 explain the assay types in
detail. In each of these sections, the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen for that assay type is shown
as follows:
CHEMISTRY PARAMETER screen displays:
Assay Code [Assay Type] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
sample vol. + R1 reagent vol.
sample vol. + R1 vol. + (R2, R3, R4) vol.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 45
The dilution factor (d) is applied as a multiplier to the
absorbance values used for calculations in the
phosphorus example.
Such as:
d = dilution factor
A
3
= absorbance at reaction disk rotation 3
A
4
= absorbance at reaction disk rotation 4
5.10.4 Automatic Rerun Feature
The 911 analyzer performs reruns automatically.
Automatic rerun is requested from the START
CONDITIONS screen. When automatic rerun is
selected, a sample with a triggering data alarm
attached to the result is automatically routed back into
the routine processing cycle. This sample will be
rerun only once through the use of automatic rerun.
A sample may also be automatically rerun at a
reduced sample volume, depending on the type of
data alarm that occurs. The automatic rerun feature,
using a reduced sample volume, is designed as an
added laboratory convenience. High-end results
falling within the chemistry-specific dynamic range
need not be further tested utilizing a reduced sample
volume.
The accuracy of the chemistry application relies on
the accuracy of the calibration or factoring. Because
these events are performed with the normal sample
volume, rerunning results using a reduced sample
volume can result in a bias. This bias is generally
about 5% (positive) depending on the ratio of the
original sample volume to the reduced sample volume
being used. The bias can approach 10% if there is a
large difference between the normal and reduced
sampl e vol ume, and i f the reduced
sample volume is less than three microliters.
When calculating results, the 911 analyzer rounds the
results to the appropriate decimal place. This rounded
number becomes the reported result.
Use the Data Editing field on the DATA REVIEW
screen to correct results for manually diluted samples
before reporting the results. When the reduced
sample volume feature is used, results on the DATA
REVIEW screen are automatically corrected by the
analyzer.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
d A
3
+ A
4
2
( )
5 46
5.11 1-Point Endpoint Assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5.11.1 1-Point Endpoint Assay
Characteristics
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen displays:
Assay Code [ 1POINT ] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0] - [ 0]
The first entry of the Assay Code displays assay
type [1POINT]. The second entry displays the
result printout designation time in minutes. The
third entry is not applicable. The first entry of the
Assay Point displays the measure point between
1 and 49. The other three entries are not applicable
for 1-point Endpoint assays.
Called 1-point because only one measure point (or
duplicate reading at mp1) is taken (and only one
measure point is designated in the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen as explained above).
Includes one or more reagent additions.
No sample blanking required.
The absorbance reading for this type of assay can
be taken during any disk rotation between 1 and 49
if one reagent is added.
The absorbance reading for this type of assay can
be taken during any disk rotation, after addition of
the final reagent, when more than one reagent is
added.
Total reagent volume must be between 250 and
500 L.
5.11.2 1-Point Endpoint Graph
A graphic representation of a 1-Point Endpoint Assay
using a reagent dispensed at R1 timing is shown
below in Figure 5-33A.
A graphic representation of a 1-point Endpoint Assay
using reagents dispensed at R1 and R3 Timing and
R3 timing is shown on next page in Figure 5-33B.
Figure 5-33A: 1-Point Endpoint Assay - - Reagent
at R1 Timing
MP1
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
1-Point Endpoint Assay
(1 reagent)
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
MP1
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
reagent addition at R1 timing
stirring after R1
1st measuring point
S,
R1,
ST1
5 47
Figure 5-33B: 1-Point Endpoint Assay - - Reagents at
R1
5.11.3 1-Point Endpoint Calculation
The calculation of A
X
uses the following equation:
A
x
=
A
x
= mean absorbance of the unknown
A
mp1
= absorbance at measure point 1
A
mp1-1
= absorbance at reaction disk revolution
prior to measure point 1
The calculation of an unknown sample concentration
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= concentration of the unknown patient
sample
K = calibration factor
A
x
A
b
= absorbance of STD1
C
b
= concentration of STD1
IF
A
, IF
B
= instrument constants, representing
slope and intercept
A
mp1
+ A
mp1-1
2
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
(2 reagents)
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
MP1 ST3 R3 S,
R1,
ST1
5 48
5.12 2-Point Rate Assay
5.12.1 2-Point Rate Assay
Characteristics
Assay Code [ 2 POINT RATE ] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0]
type [2POINT RATE]. The second entry displays
the result printout designation time in minutes.
The third entry is not applicable. The first entry of
the Assay Point displays the first measure point
(between measure point 1 and measure point 2).
The second entry displays the second measure
point (between measure point 1 and 49). The third
and fourth entries are not applicable.
Rate Assay measures change in absorbance per
minute.
Called 2-point because there are two measure
points (or duplicate readings at mp
1
and mp
2
)
entered in the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS
screen.
Allows for two or more reagent additions.
The first absorbance reading for this type of assay
can be taken during any
disk rotation after the second reagent is added.
The second absorbance reading for this type of
assay can be taken during any disk rotation after
the final reagent is added.
500 L.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5.12.2 2-Point Rate Assay Graph
A graphic representation of a 2-Point Rate Assay
using a reagent dispensed at R1 timing is shown below
in Figure 5-34A.
Figure 5-34A: 2-Point Rate Assay - - Reagent at R1
Timing
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
2-Point Rate Assay
(1 reagent)
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP2 MP1 S,
R1,
ST1
5 49
using reagents dispensed at R1 and R2 timing is
shown below in Figure 5-34B.
Figure 5-34B: 2-Point Rate Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R2 Timing
shown below in Figure 5-34C.
Figure 5-34C: 2-Point Rate Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R3 Timing
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
S,
R1,
ST1
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
2-Point Rate Assay
(2 reagents)
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R2
ST2
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R2
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 MP2 ST2 R2
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
S,
R1
ST1
TIME
2-Point Rate Assay
(2 reagents)
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 MP2 ST3 R3
5 50
5.12.3 2-Point Rate Assay Calculation
X
A
X
=
where:
A
x
A
mp1
A
mp2
t = time in minutes between measure point 1
and 2
C
x
= [{K ( DA
x
- DA
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
DA
x
= mean absorbance of the unknown, as
change in absorbance per minute
DA
b
= mean absorbance of STD1, as change
in absorbance per minute
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
( )
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
mp2
+ A
mp2-1
2
( )
A
mp1
+ A
mp1-1
2
-
t
5 51
5.13 2-Point Endpoint Assays
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
Characteristics
Assay Code [ 2 POINT END ] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0]
type [2POINT END]. The second entry displays
The third entry is not applicable. The first entry of
the Assay Point displays the first measure point
(between measure point 1 and measure point 2).
point (between measure point 1 and 49). The third
and fourth entries are used for prozone check read
points.
Called 2-point because there are duplicate
readings at mp
1
and mp
2
(blank and final), which
are desi gnated i n the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen.
Allows for two or more reagent additions.
Sample blanking is possible.
The first absorbance reading for this type of assay
can be taken during any disk rotation before the
final reagent is added.
Measure point (mp
2
) is at endpoint of reaction after
final reagent addition.
The second absorbance reading for this type of
assay can be taken during any disk rotation after
the final reagent is added.
500 L.
5.13.2 2-Point Endpoint Assay Graph
shown below in Figure 5-35A.
Figure 5-35A: 2-Point Endpoint Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R2 Timing
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R2
ST2
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R2
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 R2 ST2 MP2 S,
R1,
ST1
5 52
shown below in Figure 5-35B.
Figure 5-35B: 2-Point Endpoint Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R3 Timing
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 R3 ST3 MP2
S,
R1,
ST1
5 53
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
A
x
A
b
= mean absorbance of STD1
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
s l o p e
and intercept
Calculation
X
A
X
=
d =
where:
A
x
A
mp1
A
mp2
d = liquid volume correction factor (dilution
factor)
S = sample volume
Ri, Rj = reagent volumes
a = number of sample blanked reagents
at mp
1
b = number of reagents not sample blanked
at mp
2
(A
mp2
+ A
mp2-1
) - d (A
mp1
+ A
mp1-1
)
2
S + S Ri
a
i = 1
S + Rj
b
j = 1
5 54
Characteristics
Used to perform two different tests in one reaction
cell
Test 1:
Assay Code [ 3 POINT ][ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0] - [ 0]
The first entry of the Assay Code field displays
assay type [3POINT]. The second entry displays
The third entry displays the test key number of the
second test to be performed in this cell (described
below).
The first entry of the Assay Point field displays the
first measure point or the first test, mp
1
. The
second, third, and fourth entries are not applicable.
Test 2:
Assay Code [ 3 POINT ][ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0]
assay type [3POINT]. The second entry displays
The third entry is not applicable.
first measure point of the second test, mp
2
. The
second entry displays the second measure point
of the second test, mp
3
. The third and fourth
entries are not applicable.
1 mp
1
mp
2
< mp
3
49
The first reagent may or may not participate in the
second reaction. (The first reagent may only act
as a sample diluent for the second endpoint
reaction.)
500 L.
5.14.2 3-Point Endpoint Assay Graph
A graphic representation of a 3-Point Endpoint assay
shown below in Figure 5-36.
Figure 5-36: 3-Point Endpoint Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R3 Timing
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
MP3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
3rd measuring point
MP1 R3 ST3 MP3
S,
R1,
ST1
MP2
5 55
Test 1:
C
x
= [{K ( A
XA
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
]+ IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
K = calibration factor (Test 1)
A
XA
= mean absorbance of sample
A
b
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
= instrument constants representing slope
and intercept
Test 2:
C
x
= [{K ( A
xB
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
A
XB
A
b
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
= instrument constants representing slope
and intercept
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
mp1
+ A
mp1-1
2
(Amp3 + Amp3-1) - d (Amp2 + Amp2-1)
2
Calculation
The calculation of the mean sample absorbance uses
the following equations:
Test 1:
A
XA
=
Test 2:
A
XB
=
d =
where:
A
XA
= mean absorbance of the unknown for
Test 1
A
XB
= mean absorbance of the unknown for
Test 2
S = sample volume
A
mp1
= absorbance at mp
1
A
mp2
= absorbance at mp
2
A
mp3
= absorbance at mp
3
d = dilution factor
at mp
2
b = number of reagents not sample blanked
at mp
3
S + S Ri
a
i = 1
S + S Rj
b
j = 1
5 56
5.15 1-Point Endpoint and Rate
Assay
5.15.1 1-Point Endpoint and Rate
Assay Characteristics
Test 1:
Assay Code [ 1 POINT&RATE ] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0] - [ 0]
assay type [1POINT&RATE]. The second entry
displays the result printout designation time in
minutes. The third entry displays the test key
number of the second test to be performed in
this cell.
The first entry of the Assay Point field displays
the measure point for the first test, mp
3
. The
second, third, and fourth entries are not
applicable.
Test 2:
Assay Code [ 1 POINT&RATE ] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
assay type [1POINT&RATE]. The second entry
displays the result printout designation time in
minutes. The third entry is not applicable.
the first measure point of the second test, mp
1
.
point of the second test, mp
2
. The third entry
displays the third measure point of the second
test, mp
4
. The fourth entry displays the fourth
measure point of the second test, mp
5
.
Performs two different tests and two different
types of tests in one reaction cell
The first test is an endpoint assay, the second test
is a rate assay with blank.
1 mp
1
< mp
2
mp
3
< mp
4
< mp
5
49
mp
1
+ 2 < mp
2
, mp
4
+ 2 < mp
5
Rate assay blank = Abs (mp
1
, mp
2
)
Rate (A) assay final reaction = Abs (mp
4
, mp
5
)
Linearity and substrate depletion of Rate A test
are monitored.
Endpoint measure point = mp
3
= Test 1
result =
Assay Graph
A graphic representation of a 1-Point Endpoint and
Rate assay using reagents dispensed at R1 and R3
timing is shown below in Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-37: 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay - -
Reagents at R1 and R3 Timing
A
mp3
+ A
mp3-1
2
5.15 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
R3 ST3
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
1-Point Endpoint
and Rate Assay
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
3rd measuring point
4th measuring point
5th measuring point
MP1
S,
R1,
ST1
MP2 MP4 MP5 MP3
5 57
Assay Calculation
The calculation of the mean sample absorbance (Test
1) and change in absorbance per minute (Test 2) uses
Test 1:
A
XA
=
Test 2:
DA
XB
= DA
mp4
mp5 - d DA
mp1
mp2
d =
where:
A
XA
forTest 1
A
XB
= change in absorbance per minute
of the unknown for Test 2
S = sample volume
DA
mp1 mp2
between mp
1
and mp
2
A
mp3
= absorbance at mp
3
DA
mp4 mp5
between mp
4
and mp
5
d = dilution factor
a = number of sampl e bl anked
reagents at A
mp2 mp1
b = number of reagents not sample
blanked at A
mp4 mp5
Test 1:
C
x
= [{K ( A
XA
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
A
XA
A
b
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
Test 2:
C
x
=[{K ( DA
XB
- DA
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
= concentration of the unknown
DA
XB
= change in absorbance per minute of
sample at A
mp4 mp5
- d A
mp1 mp2
DA
b
STD1 at A
mp4 mp5
- d A
mp1 mp2
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
S + S Ri
a
i = 1
S + S Rj
b
j = 1
A
mp3
+ A
mp3-1
2
5.15 1-Point Endpoint and Rate Assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 58
5.16 Rate A Assay
5.16.1 Rate A Assay Characteristics
Assay Code [RATE A] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0]
assay type [RATE-A]. The second entry displays
The third entry may be used for serum indexes.
The first field of the Assay Point displays the first
measure point, mp
1
. The second field displays the
second measure point, mp
2
fields are not applicable.
One or more reagent assays possible.
500 L.
Measure points (disk rotations) between initial
(mp
1
) and last (mp
2
) reading used for verification of
linearity.
Rate of absorbance change is calculated by least
squares method.
Substrate depletion is monitored.
1 mp
1
< mp
2
49, mp
1 + 2
< mp
2
5.16.2 Rate A Assay Graph
A graphic representation of a Rate A assay using a
reagent dispensed at R1 timing is shown below in
Figure 5-38A:
Figure 5-38A: Rate A Assay - - Reagent at R1 Timing
A graphic representation of a Rate A assay using
reagents dispensed at R1 and R2 timing is shown
below in Figure 5-38B:
Figure 5-38B: Rate A Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R2 Timing
5.16 Rate A Assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
Rate A Assay
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1
S,
R1,
ST1
MP2
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
Rate A Assay
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R2
ST2
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R2
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1
S,
R1,
ST1
MP2 ST2 R2
5 59
reagents dispensed at R1 and R3 timing is shown
below in Figure 5-38C:
Figure 5-38C: Rate A Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R3 Timing
reagents dispensed at R1, R3 and R4 timing is shown
below in Figure 5-38D:
Figure 5-38D: Rate A Assay - - Reagents at
R1, R3 and R4 Timing
5.16 Rate A Assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
Rate A Assay
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1
S,
R1,
ST1
MP2 ST3 R3 R3 ST3
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
Rate A Assay
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
R4
ST4
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
stirring after R4
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1
S,
R1,
ST1
MP2 R4 ST4
5 60
5.16.3 Rate A Assay Calculation
Calculation of the change in absorbance per minute
DA
X
= D A
mp1

mp2
where:
DA
X
unknown
D A
mp1

mp2
between mp
1
and mp
2
.
Calculation of an unknown sample concentration uses
the following equation:
C
x
= [{K ( DA
x
- DA
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
= concentration of sample
D A
x
= measured change in absorbance per
minute of unknown
D A
b
= measured change in absorbance per
minute of STD 1
C
b
= concentration of STD 1
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
5.16 Rate A Assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 61
5.17 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1
5.17.1 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1
Characteristics
Blank compensation is available for Test 2 in two
modes: Mode 1 (described in Section 5.17) and
Mode 2 (described in Section 5.18).
a) In Mode 1, blank compensation is performed
only if Test 1 and Test 2 have identical
wavelengths.
b) In Mode 2, blank compensation is always
performed regardless of wavelengths selected.
Test 1:
Assay Code [RATE B] [ ] [ ]
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0]
assay type [RATE B]. The second entry displays
The third entry displays the test key number of the
second test to be performed in this cell.
first measure point of the first test, mp
1
. The
of the first test, mp
2
. The third and fourth entries
are not applicable.
Test 2:
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0]
The third entry is not applicable.
first measure point of the second test, mp
3
. The
of the second test, mp
4
entries are not applicable.
Used to perform two different rate reactions in the
same reaction cell.
3 mp
1
< mp
2
< mp
3
< mp
4
49
mp
1
+ 2 < mp
2
, mp
3
+ 2 < mp
4
During the first half of the incubation, Test 1 is
measured. During the final half of the incubation,
Test 2 is measured.
Linearity and substrate depletion are monitored.
squares method.
500 L.
5.17 Rate B Assay--Mode 1
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 62
5.17.2 Rate B Assay - - Mode 1 Graph
A graphic representation of a Rate B - - Mode 1 assay
shown below in Figure 5-39:
Figure 5-39: Rate B - - Mode 1 Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R3 Timing
Calculation
The calculation of the change in absorbance per
minute when Test 1 and Test 2 are measured at
different wavelengths uses the following equations:
Test 1:
DA
XA
= D A
mp1 mp2
Test 2:
DA
XB
= D A
mp3

mp4
where:
DA
XA
Test 1 unknown
DA
XB
Test 2 unknown
D A
mp1

mp2
between mp
1
and mp
2
DA
mp3

mp4
between mp
3
and mp
4
The calculation of the mean sample absorbance when
Test 1 and Test 2 are measured at the same
wavelengths uses the following equations:
Test 1:
DA
XA
= D A
mp1

mp2
Test 2:
DA
XB
= D A
mp3

mp4
- d DA
mp1

mp2
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
MP1 MP2 R3 ST3
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
Rate B Assay
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
3rd measuring point
4th measuring point
MP3
S,
R1,
ST1
MP4
5 63
d =
where:
DA
XA
the unknown for Test 1
DA
XB
S = sample volume
DA
mp1 mp2
between mp
1
and mp
2
DA
mp3 mp4
between mp
3
and mp
4
k = dilution factor
at A
mp1 mp2
blanked at A
mp3 mp4
uses the following equation, no matter whether Test
1 and Test 2 use the same or different wavelengths:
Test 1:
C
x
= [{K ( D A
XA
- D A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
DA
XA
sample
DA
b
STD1
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
Test 2:
C
x
= [{K ( D A
XB
- D A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
DA
XB
sample
DA
b
STD1
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
S + S Ri
a
i = 1
S + S Rj
b
j = 1
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 64
5.18 Rate B Assay - - Mode 2
Characteristics
Blank compensation is available for Test 2 in two
modes: Mode 1 (described in Section 5.17) and
Mode 2 (described in Section 5.18).
a) In Mode 1, blank compensation is performed
only if Test 1 and Test 2 have identical
wavelengths.
b) In Mode 2, blank compensation is always
performed regardless of wavelengths selected.
Test 1:
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ 0] - [ 0]
the length of reaction time in minutes. The third
entry displays the test key number of the second
test to be performed in this cell.
first measure point of the first test, mp
1
. The
of the first test, mp
2
. The third and fourth entries
are not applicable.
Test 2:
Assay Point [ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
the length of reaction time in minutes. The third
entry is not applicable.
the first measure point of the second test, mp
3
.
point of the second test, mp
4
. The third entry
displays the third measure point of the second
test, mp
5
. The fourth entry displays the fourth
measure point of the second test, mp
6
.
Used to perform two different rate reactions in one
reaction cell.
3 mp
1
< mp
2
< mp
3
< mp
4
< mp
5
< mp
6
49
mp
1 + 2
< mp
2
, mp
3 + 2
< mp
4
, mp
4 + 2
< mp
5
Linearity and substrate depletion are monitored .
squares method.
5.18.2 Rate B Assay - - Mode 2 Graph
A graphic representation of a Rate B - - Mode 2 assay
shown below in Figure 5-40:
Figure 5-40: Rate B - - Mode 2 Assay - - Reagents at
R1 and R3 Timing
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
MP3 MP1 MP4 MP2 R3 ST3
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
Rate B Assay
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
MP3
MP4
MP5
MP6
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
3rd measuring point
4th measuring point
5th measuring point
MP5
S,
R1,
ST1
MP6
6th measuring point
5 65
Calculation
The calculation of the mean sample absorbance uses
Test 1:
DA
XA
= D A
mp1

mp2
Test 2:
DA
XB
= D A
mp5

mp6
- d D A
mp3

mp4
d =
where:
DA
XA
DA
XB
S = sample volume
DA
mp1 mp2
between mp
1
and mp
2
DA
mp3 mp4
between mp
3
and mp
4
DA
mp5 mp6
between mp
5
and mp
6
d = dilution factor
at A
mp1 mp2
blanked at A
mp3 mp4
Test 1:
C
x
= [{K ( DA
XA
- DA
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
DA
XA
sample
DA
b
STD1
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
Test 2:
C
x
= [{K ( DA
XB
- DA
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
sample
DA
XB
sample
DA
b
STD1
C
b
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
S + S Ri
a
i = 1
S + S Rj
b
j = 1
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 66
5.19 Summary of Assay
Techniques
5.19 Summary of Assay Techniques
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
ASSAY TYPE TEST MEASURE POINTS CALCULATION OF UNKNOWN
1-point assay TEST 1
1-point assay
(with prozone
check)
TEST 1
2-point assay TEST 1
2-point assay
(with prozone
check)
TEST 1
2-point rate
assay
TEST 1
3-point assay TEST 1 & 2
1-point and
rate assay
TEST 1
TEST 2
Rate A assay
with serum
index
measurement
TEST 1
Rate A
assay
TEST 1
Rate B
assay
Mode 1
TEST 1
TEST 2
Mode 2
TEST 1
TEST 2
1 mp1 49
1 mp1 < mp2 49
1 mp1 < mp2 49
1 mp
1
< mp
3
< mp
4
< mp
2
49
1 mp
1
mp
2
< mp
3
49
1 mp
1
< mp
2
mp
3
< mp
4
< mp
5
49;
mp
1+2
< mp
1
; mp
4+2
< mp
5
5 mp
1
< mp
2
49;
mp
1 + 2
mp
2
1 mp
1
< mp
2
49;
mp
1 + 2
mp
2
3 mp
1
< mp
2
< mp
3
< mp
4
49;
mp
1 + 2
< mp
2
;
mp
3 + 2
< mp
4
3 - mp
1
< mp
2
< mp
3
< mp
4
< mp
5
< mp
6
- 49;
mp
1 + 2
< mp
2
;
mp
3 + 2
< mp
4
;
mp
4 + 2
< mp
5
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
Prozone Check:
{(A mp
2
+ A mp
2
- 1) -
d(A mp
1
+ A mp
1
- 1)}
1
2
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
Prozone Check:
( A (mp
2
mp
3
)/
A (mp
4
mp
3
) x 100
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
1 mp
1
< mp
2
49
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp4 mp5
- d A
mp1 mp2
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp1 mp2
- A
b
) + C
b
}
IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp1 mp2
- A
b
) + C
b
}
IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp1 mp2
- A
b
) + C
b
}
IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp3 mp4
- d A
mp1 mp2
-
A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
1
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp3 mp4
- A
b
) + C
b
}
IF
A
] + IF
B
2
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp1 mp2
- A
b
) + C
b
}
IF
A
] + IF
B
C
x
= [{K ( A
mp5 mp6
- d A
mp3 mp4
-
A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
1
Identical wavelengths to test 1.
2
Different wavelengths from test 1.
5 67
5.20 Calibration Overview
5.20.1 Explanation of the
Calibration Monitor Report
by Assay Type
The Calibration Monitor report is discussed in detail in
Section 2.66. An example of the report is shown in
Figure 5-41.
Figure 5-41: Calibration Monitor Report
The absorbance figures on the photometric portion of
the Calibration Monitor report are calculated
differently, depending on the assay type that is used.
The remainder of this section outlines the bichromatic
and monochromatic absorbance calculations for each
assay type.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
LEGEND
S1 = Standard 1
S2 = Standard 2
R1 = Reagent dispensed at R1 timing
R = The sum of all reagents dispensed
mp
1
= Measure Point 1
mp
2
= Measure Point 2
d = correction for dilution
d =
Sample Volume + R volumes at mp1
Sample Volume + R volumes at mp2
CALIBRATION MONITOR 01/06/93 14:39
TEST IS.EMF S1 EMF S2 EMF S3 EMF SLOPE IS.CONC. S3 CONC. C.VALUE
Na
K
Cl
CH TEST ----S1---- ----S2---- ----S3---- ----S4---- ----S5---- ----S6----
-32.6
-37.3
131.1
-36.8
-51.1
136.7
-29.3
-29.3
128.3
-23.2
-39.3
131.9
60.0
59.2
-47.7
141
5.1
-47.7
138
4.7
101
-2
0.0
0
-17
-20
17599
17532
17405
17323
-898
-891
287
285
3284
3288
8
7
437
438
209
206
1184
1174
3174
3891
9549
9563
9104
9168
287
306
10
20
13
19
BUN
CHOL
CA
CALIB
CREA
5 68
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
S1
Bichromatic ABS of
S1 + R at mp
1
Monochromatic ABS of
S1 + R at mp
1
S2
S2 + R at mp
1
Bichromatic ABS of
S2 + R at mp
1
ENDPOINT, mp
1
mp
2
(sample blanked)
S1 S2
Bichromatic ABS of
S1 + R at mp
2
-
d (S1 + R at mp
1
)
Monochromatic ABS
of
S1 + R at mp
2
Bichromatic ABS of
S2 + R at mp
2
-
d (S1 + R at mp
1
)
S2 + R at mp
2
RATE A, mp
1
mp
2
S1
Bichromatic ABS/MIN of
(S1 + R at mp
1
mp
2
)
S1 + R at mp
1
RATE B, Mode 1 (Test 1)
S1
(S1 + R at mp
1
mp
2
)
S1 + R at mp
1
RATE B, Mode 1 (Test 2 wavelengths Test 1 wavelengths)
S1
(S1 + R at mp
1
mp
2
)
for Test 2
S1 + R at mp
1
for Test 2
RATE B, Mode 1 (Test 2 wavelengths = Test 1 wavelengths)
S1
(S1 + R at mp 1 mp
2
)
for Test 2 - d (S1 + R
at mp
1
mp
2
) for Test 1
RATE B, Mode 2 (Test 1)
S1
(S1 + R at mp
1
mp
2
)
S1 + R at mp
1
for Test 2
S1 + R at mp
1
RATE B, Mode 1 (Test 2 wavelengths = or Test 1 wavelengths)
S1
(S1 + R at mp
1
mp
2
)
for Test 2 - d (S1 + R
at read cycles 20 - 24)
S1 + R at mp
1
for Test 2
ENDPOINT, mp
1
5 69
5.20.2 Calibration Methods
The following calibration methods are available on this
analyzer:
Linear Calibration
1-Point Linear Calibration (K Factor)
Multipoint Linear Calibration
2-Point Linear Calibration
Nonlinear Calibration
Logit-log 3P Calibration
Exponential Calibration
Spline Calibration
Isozyme Calibration
Isozyme P
Isozyme Q
The linear calibration methods are used for tests when
the plotted absorbance readings at different
concentrations form a linear curve.
Nonlinear calibration is used for those sample
components (e.g., therapeutic drug assays) whose
assay absorbances at different concentrations form a
nonlinear, but reproducible, plot. At least three and a
maximum of six calibrators are required for
calibration.
Isozyme calibration is used to analyze samples where
two similar isozymes are present.
A K factor is used in the calculation of unknown
sample results. Any test requiring more than just a
blank during calibration will have its K factor
calculated via the measured absorbances of the
blank and the other standard(s). A fixed K factor is
used to calculate results of all other reactions. The
K factor can be applied to all samples tested using the
same reagent as that used in calibration (within the
recommended calibration interval).
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5.20.3 Programming Calibration
Methods
The CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen displays
the calibration type that has been downloaded from
the Parameter disk for an individual test.
To view the calibration type for a specific test, press
the PARAMETER key and 1, ENTER, GUIDANCE.
This displays the second page of the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen. Press the test key (1-46) for
the test you want to view. The Calib. Type field has
five entries available. This field is highlighted on the
display shown below in Figure 5-42.
1
ENTER
Figure 5-42: Calibration Type Display
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Test
Assay Code
Assay Point
S. Vol. (Normal)
S. Vol. (Decrease)
S. Vol. (Increase )
ABS. Limit
Prozone Limit
Reagent
Calibration Type
R1
R2
R3
R4
Auto Time Out
Auto Change
Blank
Span
2 Point
Full
Lot
Bottle
SD Limit
Duplicate Limit
Sensitivity Limit
S1 ABS Limit
Compensated Limit
[ PHOS ]
[ 2POINT END ] [ 3 ] [ ]
[ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
< Serum > < Urine >
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ]
[ ] / [ ] 4 10 0 0
5
3
10
30
10
5
0
0
0
5
5
0
0
0
0
120
140
0
0 0 Increase
0 0 Lower
250
100
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00133
00133
00133
00133
LINEAR 2 2 0
999
0
0
0
0.1
100
1400
0 6000
2Point
BLANK
376 340
W 0
5 70
The Calib. Type field has five entries. The first entry
displays the calibration method selected. There are
eight different calibration methods including:
1 : LINEAR
2 : LOGIT-LOG(3P)
3 : (4P)
4 : (5P)
5 : EXPO.
6 : SPLINE
7 : ISO. P
8 : ISO. Q
The second entry displays the number of standards
(1 - 6) used in calibration.
The third entry displays the calibrator used in SPAN
calibration. Any calibrator except standard 1 (blank)
can be used.
The fourth entry displays the weight applied to the
standard solution used in calculation.
The fifth entry displays the Q channel used in
Isozyme P calibration.
The following sections discuss each calibration
method in detail. The Calib. Type entry for each
method is shown as follows:
Calib. Type [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
An explanation of each entry, as it applies to the
calibration method, is contained in each section.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 71
5.21.2 1-Point Linear Calibration
Graph
A graphic representation of this calibration method is
Figure 5-43: 1-Point Linear Calibration
5.21 1-Point Linear Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
K FACTOR
1
(KNOWN SLOPE
C
b
C
x
A
x
A
b
5.21.1 Selecting 1-Point Linear
Calibration
This calibration method is used for those sample
constituents (e.g., LD, AST, ALP) whose rate of
change in absorbance at different concentrations
forms a linear plot and the slope of the plot is already
known. Enzymes cannot be weighed out but their
activity can be determined. The slope is based on the
molar absorptivity of the absorbing species (e.g.,
NADH) of that particular chemistrys reaction. The K
factor for most enzyme assays, and some substrate
assays, is established by a Boehringer Mannheim
representative at installation according to the
following formula:
K =
In 1-point linear calibration, a zero or blank calibrator
(saline) is run and the absorbance and concentration
of this, as well as the predetermined K factor, are used
in the calculation of final results of the sample
(unknown). Saline is commonly used as a zero or
blank calibrator.
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS displays the following:
Calib. Type [LINEAR ] [ 1] [ 0] [ 0] [ ]
The first entry displays [LINEAR] as the calibration
method. The second entry displays [1] for the number
of standards chosen. The third entry displays [0] to
show that SPAN calibration is not selected. The
fourth entry displays [0] to show that no weighting
method applies to this calibration method. The fifth
total reaction volume (mL) x 100
molar absorptivity x lightpath (cm) x specimen volume (mL)
5 72
Substituting our expressions:
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
= concentration of unknown
A
x
= measured absorbance of unknown
C
b
= concentration of STD 1 (blank)
K = K factor (reciprocal of slope)
A
b
= blank absorbance
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
5.21.4 Assay Types
Assay techniques possible with this type of
calibration:
1-point assay
2-point assay
3-point assay
2-point rate assay
1-point and Rate assay
Rate A assay
Rate B assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
(y - b)
a
1
a
5.21.3 1-Point Linear Calculation
The final result of an unknown is calculated using the
equation for a straight line:
y = ax + b or x = or x = (y - b)
where:
x = concentration
y = absorbance
a = slope
b = y-intercept or offset
K = Therefore: x = K (y - b)
where:
x = Concentration of x
K = K factor
y = Absorbance of x
b = Absorbance of blank, when C
b
= 0
equations below:
when C
b
= 0:
b = A
b
C
x
= x A
x
= y K =
C
x
= [K (A
x
- A
b
) IF
A
] + IF
B
when C
b
0:
b = A
b
- a C
b
C
x
= x A
x
= y K =
1
a
1
a
1
a
5 73
5.22.1 Selecting 2-Point Linear
Calibration
For 2-point linear calibration, saline is commonly
used as a zero or blank calibrator. A second
calibrator with a known value is also run. These two
points are used to establish a linear plot and the slope
of this curve is used in the calculation of subsequent
control and patient results.
Calib. Type [LINEAR ] [ 2] [ 2] [ 0] [ ]
method. The second entry displays [2] for the number
of standards chosen. The third entry displays [2] to
show that if a SPAN calibration is selected, STD2 will
be used as the SPAN calibrator. The fourth entry
displays [0] to show that no weighting method applies
to this calibration. The fifth entry is not applicable.
5.22.2 2-Point Linear Calibration
Graph
A graphic representation of this calibration method is
Figure 5-44: 2-Point Linear Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
s
A
s
A
b
When Cb = 0
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
s
A
s
A
b
When Cb 0
5 74
5.22.3 2-Point Linear Calculation
The slope for a 2-point linear calibration is calculated
from the equation for a straight line:
y = ax + b or x = or x = (y - b)
where:
y = absorbance
a = slope
x = concentration
b = y-intercept or offset
Solving for slope (a) using two points:
a =
Substituting our terms for these expressions then:
a = K = or K =
Solving for y intercept (b) using two points:
when C
b
= 0:
b = A
b
when C
b
0:
b = A
b
- b C
b
where:
A
s
= absorbance of the second calibrator reaction
A
b
= absorbance of the blank calibrator reaction
C
s
= concentration of the second calibrator
C
b
= concentration of the blank calibrator
equations below:
From the equation for a straight line:
x = (y - b) Therefore: x = K (y - b)
when C
b
= 0:
b = A
b
C
x
= x A
x
= y K =
C
x
= K (A
x
- A
b
)
when C
b
0:
b = A
b
- a C
b
C
x
= x A
x
= y K =
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
A
x
= measured absorbance of unknown
C
b
= concentration of STD 1 (blank)
A
b
= blank absorbance
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
5.22.4 Assay Types
calibration are:
1-point assay
2-point assay
3-point assay
2-point rate assay
1-point and rate assay
Rate A assay
Rate B assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
1
a
1
a
(y - b)
a
1
a
D y
D x
A
s
- A
b
C
s
- C
b
1
a
C
s
- C
b
A
s
- A
b
1
a
5 75
5.23 Multipoint Linear
Calibration
5.23.1 Selecting Multipoint Linear
Calibration
Multipoint linear calibration is used for those sample
constituents requiring more than two standards for
linear calibration.
Calib. Type [LINEAR ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
method. The second entry displays the number of
standards chosen. The third entry displays the
calibrator selected for SPAN calibration. The fourth
entry displays the weight that has been given to this
calibration for purposes of calculation. The fifth entry
is not applicable.
5.23.2 Multipoint Linear Calibration
Graph
A graphic representation is shown below in
Figure 5-45.
Figure 5-45: Multipoint Linear Calibration
5.23 Multipoint Linear Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
S1
C
S2
C
S3
C
S4
C
S5
C
S6
A
S6
A
S1
A
S2
A
S3
A
S4
A
S5
5 76
5.23.3 Multipoint Linear Calculation
Multipoint linear calibration is carried out solving for
slope (a) and y-intercept (b) by using the method of
least squares.
Calculations to solve for slope (a) and y-intercept (b)
are as follows:
y = ax + b or x = or x = (y - b)
a = r
b = Y - a X
where:
y = absorbance of standard
x = concentration of standard
S
y
= SD of absorbance of standards 1 - 6
S
X
= SD of concentration of standards 1 - 6
r = correlation coefficient
Y = mean absorbance of standards 1 - 6
X = mean concentration of standards 1 - 6
equations below:
From the derivation of equations above:
x = (y - b) Therefore: x = K (y - b)
when C
b
= 0:
b = A
b
C
x
= x A
x
= y K =
C
x
= K (A
x
- A
b
)
when C
b
0:
b = A
b
- a C
b
C
x
= x A
x
= y K =
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
A
x
= Measured absorbance of unknown
C
b
= concentration of blank or STD 1
A
b
= blank absorbance
IF
A
, IF
B
= instrument constants representing
slope and intercept
5.23.4 Assay Types
calibration:
1-point assay
2-point assay
3-point assay
2-point rate assay
1-point and rate assay
Rate A assay
Rate B assay
S
y
S
x
1
a
(y - b)
a
1
a
1
a
1
a
5.23 Multipoint Linear Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 77
5.24 Non-Linear Logit-log 3P
Calibration
5.24.1 Selecting Non-linear Logit-log
3P Calibration
The non-linear method 1, LOGIT-LOG 3P, is applied
to a working curve in which the absorbance increases
or decreases in a non-linear manner as the
concentration increases.
Calib. Type [LOGIT-LOG(3P)] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
The first entry displays [LOGIT-LOG(3P)] as the
calibration method. The second entry displays the
number of standards chosen. The third entry displays
the calibrator selected for SPAN calibration. The
fourth entry displays the weight that has been given
to this calibration for purposes of calculation. The
fifth entry is not applicable.
5.24.2 Non-linear Logit-log 3P
Calibration Graph
A graphic representation of this calibration is shown
below in Figure 5-46.
Figure 5-46: Logit-log 3P Calibration
5.24 Non-Linear Logit-log 3P Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
S2
C
S3
C
X
C
N
A
N
A
b
A
S2
A
S3
A
X
5 78
Calculation
The math model for non-linear logit-log 3P calibration
curve approximation is shown below:
A

= B +
where:
A = measured absorbance value or absorbance
variation rate of standard solution (except
STD1 solution)
B = measured absorbance value or absorbance
variation rate of STD 1
a, b= calibration curve parameters
C = concentration of standard solution
The formula for sample concentration calculation is
shown below:
C
X
= (C + C
1
) IF
A
+ IF
B
C = { }
A
X
= B +
where:
C
X
= sample concentration corrected for
STD 1 concentration and instrument
factors
C = sample concentration
C
1
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
a, b = calibration curve parameters
A
X
= sample absorbance value
B = STD 1 measured absorbance value or
absorbance variation rate
5.24.4 Assay Types
Nonlinear logit-log 3P calibration can be used with the
following assay types:
1-point assay
2-point rate assay
2-point assay
Rate A assay
a
1 + bC
a - (A
x
- B)
A
x
- B
1
b
a
1 + bC
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 79
Calibration
4P Calibration
number of standards chosen. The third entry displays
the calibrator selected for SPAN calibration. The
fourth entry displays the weight that has been given
to this calibration for purpose of calculation. The fifth
Calibration Graph
Figure 5-47: Logit-log 4P Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
S2
C
S3
C
X
C
N
A
N
A
b
A
S2
A
S3
A
X
5 80
B = STD 1 measured absorbance value
or absorbance variation rate
5.25.4 Assay Types
1-point assay
2-point rate assay
2-point assay
Rate A assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
a
1 + bC
c
a
1 + bC
c
1
b
a - (A
x
- B)
A
x
- B
Calculation
A

= B +
where:
A = measured absorbance val ue or
absorbance variation rate of standard
solution (except STD 1 solution)
B = measured absorbance val ue or
absorbance variation rate of STD 1
a, b, c = calibration curve parameters
shown below:
C
X
= (C + C
1
) IF
A
+ IF
B
C
c =
{ }
A
X
= B +
where:
C
X
factors
C
1
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
A
X
5 81
Calibration
5P Calibration
number of standards chosen. The third, fourth, and
fifth entries are not applicable.
Calibration Graph
Figure 5-48 Logit-log 5P Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
S2
C
S3
C
X
C
N
A
N
A
b
A
S2
A
S3
A
X
5 82
Calculation
A

= B +
where:
A = measured absorbance value or
solution (except STD1 solution)
B = measured absorbance value or
lnC = natural log of standard concentration
shown below:
C
X
= (C + C
1
) IF
A
+ IF
B
a + blnC + c C - ln [ ] = 0
A
X
= B +
where:
C
X
factors
C
1
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
A
X
K = scale parameter
lnC = natural log of sample concentration
5.26.4 Assay Types
1-point assay
2-point rate assay
2-point assay
Rate A assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
x
- B
K - (A
x
- B)
K
1 + EXP { - (a + bln C + c C)}
K
1 + EXP { - (a + bln C + c C)}
5 83
5.27 Non-Linear Exponential
Calibration
5.27.1 Selecting Non-linear
Exponential Calibration
The non-linear method 4, EXPONENTIAL, is applied
Calib. Type [EXPONENTIAL] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
The first entry displays [EXPONENTIAL] as the
number of standards chosen. The third, fourth, and
fifth entries are not applicable.
5.27.2 Non-linear Exponential
Calibration Graph
Figure 5-49: Exponential Calibration
5.27 Non-Linear Exponential Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
S2
C
S3
C
X
C
N
A
N
A
b
A
S2
A
S3
A
X
5 84
5.27.3 Non-linear Exponential
Calculation
The math model for non-linear exponential calibration
A = B + K EXP {a (lnC) + b (lnC)
2
+ c (lnC)
3
}
where:
K = scale parameter
shown below:
C
X
= (C + C
1
) IF
A
+ IF
B
a (lnC) + b (lnC)
2
+ c (lnC)
3
- ln ( ) = 0
A
X
= B + K EXP {a (lnC) + b (lnC)
2
+ c (lnC)
3
}
where:
C
X
factors
C
1
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
A
X
K = scale parameter
5.27.4 Assay Types
Assay types that can be used with this calibration
include:
1-point assay
2-point assay
2-point rate assay
Rate A assay
5.27 Non-Linear Exponential Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
x
- B
K
5 85
5.28 Non-Linear Spline
Calibration
5.28.1 Selecting Non-linear Spline
Calibration
The non-linear method 5, SPLINE, is applied to a
working curve in which the absorbance increases as
the concentration increases. The range between
standard samples x and x - 1 measure values are
approximated and a curve is drawn.
Calib. Type [SPLINE ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
The first entry displays [SPLINE ] as the calibration
method. The second entry displays the number of
standards chosen. The third, fourth, and fifth entries
are not applicable.
5.28.2 Non-linear Spline Calibration
Graph
Figure 5-50: Spline Calibration
5.28 Non-Linear Spline Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
S2
C
S3
C
X
C
N-1
C
N
A
N
A
b
A
S2
A
S3
A
X
A
N-1
5 86
5.28.3 Non-linear Spline Calculation
The math model for non-linear spline calibration curve
approximation is shown below:
A = a ( I ) + b ( I )(C-C( I)) + c ( I )(C-C( I ))
2
+ B ( I )(C-C( I ))
3
where:
a (I ), b (I ),
c (I ), d (I ) = calibration curve parameters used
only in MODEL 5. These parameters
are determined according to the
standard sol uti on numbers "I"
and "I+1." (1 I 5).
shown below:
C
X
= (C + C
1
) IF
A
+ IF
B
a ( I ) + b ( I )(C
X
-C( I )) + c ( I )(C
X
-C( I ))
2
+ B ( I )
(C
X
-C( I ))
3
- A
X
= 0
A
X
= a ( I ) + b ( I )(C
X
-C( I )) + c ( I )(C
X
-C( I ))
2
+ B ( I ) (C
X
-C( I ))
3
where:
C
X
factors
C
1
IF
A
, IF
B
slope and intercept
A
X
K = scale parameter
a (I ), b (I ),
c (I ), d (I )= calibration curve parameters used
only in MODEL 5. These parameters
are determined according to the
standard sol uti on numbers "I"
and "I+1." (1 I 5).
5.28.4 Assay Types
Non-linear spline calibration can be used with the
1-point assay
2-point rate assay
2-point assay
Rate A assay
5.28 Non-Linear Spline Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5 87
5.29 Isozyme P Calibration
5.29.1 Selecting Isozyme P Calibration
This calibration technique is used in analyzing
isozymes (isoenzymes) - - one of a group of enzymes
very similar in their properties.
Isozyme P calibration:
uses reagent that measures the total activity of the
group of isozymes; that is, the total enzyme
activity (enzyme "A")
calculates total activity of the enzyme.
Calib. Type [ISOZYME P ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [
]
The first entry displays [ISOZYME P ] as the
calibration method. The second, third, and fourth
entries are not applicable.The fifth entry designates
the Isozyme Q channel.
5.29.2 Isozyme P Calibration Graph
A graphic representations of isozyme P calibration is
Figure 5-51: Isozyme P Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
x
C
A
A
b
A
C
A
x
A
B
A
A
5 88
5.29.3 Isozyme P Calculation
K = =
where:
C
A
= concentration of enzyme A STD2
solution
C
b
= concentration of the STD1 solution
A
A
= absorbance of enzyme A STD2
reaction
A
b
= absorbance of the STD1 reaction
A
B
= absorbance of isozyme B reaction
A
C
= absorbance of isozyme C reaction
A
x
= absorbance of sampl e enzyme
reaction (unknown)
Calculation of Results:
C
X
= [{K (A
X
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
3
= [{K (A
3
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
4
= [{K (A
4
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
,C
3
, C
4
= total enzyme activity (isozyme P) for
sample, STD 3, and STD 4
A
x
,A
3
, A
4
= absorbance of sample, STD 3, and
STD 4 enzyme reaction or its change
per minute
A
b
= absorbance of STD 1 reaction
C
b
= concentration of the STD 1 (blank)
IF
A
, IF
B
= instrument constants representing
slope and intercept
5.29.4 Assay Types
Assay types:
1-point assay
2-point rate assay
2-point assay
Rate A assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
D x
D y
C
A
- C
b
A
A
- A
b
5 89
5.30 Isozyme Q Calibration
5.30.1 Selecting Isozyme Q Calibration
Isozyme Q (Isozyme C - inhibiting reagent)
calibration:
uses reagent that inhibits a specific isozyme
(isozyme "C") but measures the remaining
enzyme activity.
calculates activity of isozymes not inhibited
(isozyme "B").
automatically uses K from isozyme P calibration.
Calib. Type [ISOZYME Q ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
The first entry displays [ISOZYME Q ] as the
calibration method. The second, third, fourth, and fifth
entries are not applicable .
5.30.2 Isozyme Q Calibration Graph
A graphic representations of Isozyme Q calibration is
Figure 5-52: Isozyme Q Calibration
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
CONCENTRATION
C
b
C
x
A
b
A
C
A
x
A
B
5 90
5.30.3 Isozyme Q Calculation
Calculation of preliminary results (with inhibiting
reagent):
C
x
= [{K (A
x
- A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
3
' = [{K (A
3
' - A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
C
4
' = [{K (A
4
' - A
b
) + C
b
} IF
A
] + IF
B
where:
C
x
, C
3
', C
4
' = residual sample, STD 3, and STD
4 enzyme activity (with inhibiting
reagent)
K = calibration factor (from isozyme P
reaction)
A
x
, C
3
', C
4
' = absorbance of sample isozyme Q
reaction
A
b
= absorbance of STD 1 reaction
C
b
Calculation of inhibition ratio:
a = b =
where:
a = inhibition ratio of isozyme B
A
B
(using inhibiting reagent)
A
B
(no inhibition)
b = inhibition ratio of isozyme C
A
C
A
C
(no inhibition)
Calculation of printed results:
C''
x
=
where:
C
x
= fi nal concentrati on of sampl e
isozyme of interest
C
x
= residual sample enzyme activity
b = inhibition ratio of isozyme C
a = inhibition ratio of isozyme B
C
x
= total enzyme activity
5.30.4 Assay Types
calibration:
1-point assay
2-point rate assay
2-point assay
Rate A assay
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
A'
B
A
B
A'
C
A
C
C
x
- b (C
x
)
a - b
5 91
5.31 ISE Calibration
5.31.1 Introduction
The ISE system requires full calibration once every 24
hours. Calibration of Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
in the ISE unit
requires the ISE Standard 1 (Low) and ISE Standard
2 (High), which are aqueous standards, and ISE
Standard 3 (Compensator), a protein-based standard.
If the analyzer is in the Stat Reception mode and the
ISE system has been inactive for 10 minutes of
operation, a single point calibration (internal standard
(IS)) is automatically performed. The Electromotive
Force (EMF) (voltage) is measured after equilibration
occurs at the electrode membrane as shown below in
Figure 5-53.
Figure 5-53: Electromotive Force Measurement
Based upon these readings and the assay value of
the standards, the instrument computer then
calculates a slope for the calibration. IS is the
Internal Standard, and its measured value is
calculated from its EMF as shown graphically above.
This value is stored in the computer memory for later
reference.
5.31.2 Slope Calculation
The slope is calculated in millivolts per decade (mV/
decade) from the aqueous high and low standards.
Ideally, the slope for an ion with a single charge is 61.6
mV/ decade of ion concentration at 37
o
C. Due to
factors such as the condition of the electrodes, the
measured slope may deviate from this ideal slope.
Therefore, the slope for the ISE accessory should fall
within the following ranges:
Na
+
38 to 68 mV/decade
K
+
38 to 68 mV/decade
Cl
-
-30 to -68 mV/decade
The slope is calculated according to the following
formula:
Equation:
S = = mV/decade
where:
S = slope
E
H
= voltage of high standard
E
L
= voltage of low standard
C
H
= concentration of high standard
C
L
= concentration of low standard
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
E
H
- E
L
C
H
C
L
Log
LOG (Concentration)
Electromotive
Force
(Voltage)
C (Low) C (IS) C (High)
EMF (High)
EMF (IS)
EMF (Low)
5 92
5.31.4 Single-Point Adjustment
An Internal Standard (IS), labelled Internal Reference
Solution, is measured as a sample during routine
calibration and before every sample. These
measurements are used to correct for drift due to
junction potential, electrode condition, etc., between
samples and to provide a periodic single-point
cal i brati on adj ustment as shown bel ow i n
Figure 5-54.
Figure 5-54: Single Point Calibration Adjustment
5.31.5 Compensation Overview
Because the low and high standards are aqueous, the
compensator is used to adjust the offset of the slope.
This compensates for activity differences between
the aqueous standards and protein-based serum.
This difference between the calculated and actual
values is referred to as the compensate value (C.
Value on the calibration report).
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
5.31.3 Internal Standard Calculation
In any ISE measurement system a number of
junctions between lead wires, membranes, and
reagents exist. The internal standard compensates
for the junction potential variations.
After the slope is established during calibration, to
establish the internal standard, the y-intercept (E
IS
) is
measured. The solution also is measured as a sample
before every sample to check the calibration curve (Y
intercept) for drift between calibrations and to provide
a periodic single-point calibration adjustment. The
calculated value of the internal standard, as well as
the voltage, is shown on the calibration report.
The concentration of Na
+
, K
+
, and Cl
-
in the internal
standard is calculated from the electromotive force
(voltage) of each electrode measured during
calibration according to the formula below.
Equation:
C
IS
= C
L
x 10
where:
C
IS
= concentration of the specific ion in the
internal standard
C
L
= input concentration of the low standard
E
IS
= electromotive force (voltage) for the
same specific ion of the internal
standard
E
L
= electromotive force (voltage) of the
l o w
standard for the specific ion
S = slope
The effect of the y-intercept shift is illustrated in
Section 5.31.4.
E
IS
- E
L
s
LOG (Concentration)
Electromotive
Force
(Voltage)
Calibration Curve
(Compensated)
Calibration Curve
(Corrected for E)
EMF (IS)
at later time
EMF (IS)
at calibration
C (IS) at
Calibration
(Fixed)
E
EMF
Shift (E)
5 93
5.31.6 Compensation Value
Calculation
The Serum-based is recommended compensator to
adjust for differences in electrode response between
aqueous and protein-based solutions.
The concentration of ions in the compensator is
calculated according to the following formula:
Equation:
C
X
= C
IS
x 10
where:
C
X
= measured concentrati on of the
specific ion in the compensator
C
IS
= concentration of the internal standard,
determined during calibration
E
C
compensator for the specific ion
E
IS
internal standard for the specific ion
S = slope
The formula for finding the compensation factor (K)
is:
K = assi gned val ue (Cal i brator) -
calculated value (Calibrator) (This
value is C
x
in the equation above.)
K is displayed as the Compensated Value found in the
ISE CALIBRATION MONITOR display. This value is
automatically updated by the instrument following
successful calibration. If during calibration the
percent difference in the current and previous
compensators is greater than the Calib. Limit set
under the ISE PARAMETER display, an alarm is
issued.
5.31.7 Reference Cartridge
A 1N KCl solution is measured concurrently with each
sample analysis. A reference cartridge is used for this
purpose. This function serves as a reference point for
all measurements and compensates for any
electronic variations in the system. All other voltages
are reported using reference cartridge voltage as the
zero point; i.e., the reference cartridge voltage is
subtracted from all other voltages.
5.31.8 Nernst Equation
The Nernst equation is used to calculate the
concentration for a specific ion in solution as follows:
Equation 1:
E = E
IS
+ x ln
where:
E = specific electrode (Na
+
, K
+
, Cl
-
)
Electromotive Force (EMF) (voltage)
E
IS
= EMF of the Internal Standard
R = gas constant
T = temperature
n = charge of the ion
F = Faradays constant
C
t
= ion concentration in the sample/diluent
mixture
C
i
= ion concentration in the internal filling
gel
f = activity coefficient
ln = natural log
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
RT
nF
(f x Ct)
(f x Ci)
E
C
- E
IS
s
5 94
Because the sodium, potassium, and chloride ions
each carry a single charge, R, T, n, and F are
combined into a single value referred to as the slope
(S). Also, because the instrument dilutes the sample
to approximately 1:31, the ionic strength and activity
coefficient (f) are essentially constant. These terms,
then, can be factored into the E
IS
term. The Nernst
equation can be rewritten to reflect the above stated
conditions as follows:
Equation 2:
E = E
IS
+ S x ln (C
t
)
where:
E = specific electrode electromotive force
(voltage)
E
IS
= internal standard electromotive force
(voltage) (with constants)
S = slope
C
t
= ion concentration in sample/diluent
mixture
ln = natural log
This rewritten equation demonstrates that the
electromotive force (voltage) of a specific electrode
is directly proportional to the log of the activity of the
diffusible ion in the sample/reagent mixture. This
equation can be likened to the basic equation used for
linear, photometric chemistries, as follows:
Equation 3:
ISE: E

= S x ln (C
t
) +

E
IS
Photometric: y = ax + b
where:
E = y (y axis)
S = a (slope)
ln C
t
= x (x axis)
E
IS
= b (y intercept)
The Nernst equation can be rewritten again to express
concentration as follows:
Equation 4:
C
t
= 10
where the definitions shown above are true.
5.31.9 Calculation of Unknown
Sample Concentrations
The concentration of the sodium, potassium, and
chloride in unknown samples is calculated by
determining the electromotive force (voltage) of the
specific electrode and calculating the results
according to the following equation:
Equation:
C
t
= K + C
IS
x 10
where:
C
t
= concentration of the specific ion in the
unknown sample/diluent (test) mixture
K = compensati on factor (COMP.
VALUE)
C
IS
= concentration of the internal standard,
determined during calibration
E
t
unknown sample for the specific ion
E
IS
internal standard for the specific ion
S = slope
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
E - E'
IS
s
E
t
- E
IS
s
( )
5 95
5.32 Result Integrity Checks
5.32.1 Introduction
Several methods are used by the system to ensure
that final results are valid. The messages found in
Section 4.5, Data Alarms, appear on the results
printout to indicate possible data errors. Some of
these also activate the audible alarm and reveal alarm
messages on the display.
5.32.2 Prozone Effect
Some tests (such as immunoglobulin methodologies)
use the principle of antibody/antigen complex
formation (agglutination) as a measurement
technique. The turbidity caused by this specific
agglutination can be measured by photometric
means.
The antibody/antigen complex formation is
predictable as long as an excess of reagent
(antibody) exists. In patient samples with very high
levels of antigen, however, the reaction may begin to
reverse (deagglutination) because of the effect of the
excess antigen. This is called a prozone effect and
without checking for this phenomenon, abnormally
high samples may give incorrect or even false normal
results.
The 911 analyzer may perform a check for the
prozone effect in a 1-point assay by adding a dilution
of the antigen as an additional reagent (T2, T3, or T4).
If the reaction continues in the same direction
(increasing or decreasing absorbance) as in the initial
reaction, then prozone is not occurring. If the reaction
proceeds in the opposite direction, after additional
reagent is added, then prozone is occurring and the
result is invalid and the data alarm XXXP is printed on
the patient report.
When the prozone limit is entered on the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen, "UPPER" or "LOWER" must
also be specified to indicate whether absorbance is
expected to increase or decrease (respectively) when
prozone is occurring. If "UPPER" is specified when
"LOWER" should be, all subsequent results for that
test will exhibit a prozone data alarm.
One-point assays are checked for prozone if one
measuring point is programmed. Two-point assays
are checked only if two measure points are
programmed. Figure 5-55 below shows an example of
a 1-point assay prozone check.
Figure 5-55: Prozone Check
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
S,
R1,
ST1
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 MP2 ST3 R3
Prozone Check
5 96
5.32.3 Linearity Verification (LIN, LIN 8)
Figures 5-56 and 5-57 represent the process by which
the instrument verifies the linearity of a kinetic
reaction. In the illustration below, the assay is a Rate
A, and absorbance measurements are taken during
rotations 22 through 49. For example, the observed
change in absorbance during rotations 44 through 49
(the last five rotations of the read period) is subtracted
from the observed change in absorbance during
rotations 22 through 27 (the first five rotations of the
read period). This difference is divided by the total
change in absorbance (A) per minute, then
multiplied by 100. The value obtained must be less
than the linearity limit defined in SYSTEM
PARAMETERS. If the value is above this number, a
"LIN." data alarm is issued. If any absorbance
reading taken during the programmed interval (22
through 49, in this example) exceeds the ABS. LIMIT
parameter, that absorbance reading is excluded from
the least squares rate calculation.
Calculation: x 100 > defi ned l i mi t,
then LIN. alarm
occurs
where:
D Ai = rate of absorbance change ( A/MIN) during
the first five rotations of the read period
D Af = rate of absorbance change ( A/MIN) during
the last five rotations of the read period
D A = total change in absorbance per minute
( A/MIN)
Figure 5-56: Linearity Verification - - LIN.
If the number of data points available for this
calculation is less than nine, the rate of absorbance
change during the last three read rotations of the
reaction is subtracted from the rate of absorbance
change during the first three read rotations of the
reaction. This is then divided by the total change in
absorbance ( A) per minute. If this value (x 100) is
greater than the value entered on the SYSTEM
PARAMETERS screen in the Linearity Limit (4-8)
field, a "LIN. 8" data alarm is issued.
If the absorbance change per minute is less than
6 X 10
-3
, no check is made.
Calculation: x 100 > defi ned l i mi t,
then LIN. 8 alarm
occurs
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
D Ai - D Af
D A
Di' - D Af'
D A
S,
R1,
ST1
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 MP2 ST3 R3
"LIN. "
Af
Ai
A
5 97
where:
DAi = rate of absorbance change ( A/MIN) during
the first three read rotations of the reaction
DAf = rate of absorbance change ( A/MIN) during
the last three read rotations of the reaction
DA = total change in absorbance per minute
( A/MIN)
Figure 5-57: Linearity Verification - - LIN. 8
5.32.4 Substrate Depletion (LIM. 1, 2, 3)
An "Absorbance Limit" value is designated on the
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen for each rate
assay. This value is included on the application
sheet for each rate chemistry. This value specifies
the absorbance of the reaction mixture at which
substrate concentration is too low for a reliable, linear
reaction to take place. The absorbance limit is
usually reached as a result of very high analyte
concentration in the sample, but may occur when
outdated or improperly prepared reagent is used.
In case of excessive sample absorbance (caused by
lipemia, icterus, etc.), the measured absorbance
value is compared with the initial absorbance level of
the reaction. The difference (sample absorbance
level - STD 1 absorbance level) is measured and the
"Absorbance Limit" value is adjusted accordingly
when checking for substrate depletion.
LIM. 1 - indicates that the reaction exceeded
the absorbance limit at all measure
points.
the limit at all but one measure point.
the limit at all but two measure points.
These flags allow for an approximation of the sample
dilution necessary to bring the reaction into the
measurable range. During auto rerun, these flags
cause the analyzer to make an on-board dilution and
use the decreased sample volume found in
CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS. All data alarms are
explained in detail in Chapter 4 of this manual.
Figure 5-58 below depicts this substrate depletion
detection.
Figure 5-58: Substrate Depletion
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
S,
R1,
ST1
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 MP2 ST3 R3
Absorbance Limit as set
in Chemistry Parameters
"LIM. 1"
"LIM. 2"
"LIM. 3"
S,
R1,
ST1
A
B
S
O
R
B
A
N
C
E
TIME
LEGEND:
S
R1
ST1
R3
ST3
MP1
MP2
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Sample addition
stirring after R1
stirring after R3
1st measuring point
2nd measuring point
MP1 MP2 ST3 R3
"LIN. 8"
Af
Ai A
5 98
5.33 Serum Index Function
5.33.1 Introduction
Serum indexes are calculations of absorbance
measurements that provide a semi-quantitative
representation of icterus, hemolysis, or lipemia
(turbidity) amounts present in samples. Serum
indexes may be determined in one of two ways:
using an existing chemistry channel
using a separate channel, with the serum index
function using saline as the reagent dispensed at
R1 timing.
Requirements for the test selected for running serum
indexes are listed below:
The test must be a rate-A reaction.
The test must read at a primary wavelength of
340 nm.
The test must have a reagent dispensed at R1
timing that is clear and non-reactive.
Recommended tests to use are AST or ALT.
5.33.2 Definition of Serum Indexes
The icterus index, I, is reported in icterus units that are
linear, up to 60 mg/dL, and semi-quantitative. For
example, an icterus index of 20 is equivalent to a
known unconjugated bilirubin concentration of
approximately 20 mg/dL.
The hemolysis index, H, is reported in hemolysis
units that are linear, up to 1000 mg/dL, and semi-
quantitative. For example, a hemolysis index of 500
is equivalent to a known hemoglobin concentration of
approximately 500 mg/dL.
The lipemia index, L, is reported in lipemia units
based on Intralipid
(Kabi-Vitrum, Inc.). These units

are linear, up to 1000 mg/dL, and semi-quantitative.
For example, a lipemia index of 1000 is equivalent to
a 1000 mg/dL Intralipid solution.
5.33.3 Serum Index Parameters
Before running serum indexes, make sure that the
parameters for icterus, hemolysis, and lipemia have
been loaded onto your System disk.
Press the PARAMETER key, followed by 1 ENTER,
to display the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen.
Enter 50, 51, or 52 to display the parameters for
lipemia (50), hemolysis (51), or icterus (52). The fixed
factors utilized for calculation of the serum index,
factors A through F, are displayed in the STD CONC.
column. The factors are identical for lipemia,
hemolysis, and icterus. If these factors do not
appear, call Technical Support.
The measurement results of reagent blank solutions
(480/505) for icterus, (570/600) for hemolysis, and
(660/700) for lipemia are automatically indicated as
S1 ABS on the CALIBRATION LIST screen and entry
of these values is not required.
Qualitative report names can be modified.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
1
ENTER
5 99
Figure 5-59 shows an example of the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen with factors A through F in the
STD CONC. column.
Figure 5-59: Serum Index Factors
5.33.4 Using Existing Chemistry
Channel
Press the GUIDANCE key to move to the second page
of the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. Move
the cursor to the third entry of the ASSAY CODE field.
Enter the channel number of the desired channel for
serum index measurement and press ENTER. Refer
to Secti on 2.48 to assi gn a pri nt order
to channels 50, 51, and 52.
Figure 5-60 shows an example of the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS display, with AST as the test
selected.
Figure 5-60: Serum Index Using Existing Chemistry
Channel
5.33.5 Using a Saline Channel
The following is a brief description of the procedure
used to program a saline channel for the serum index
function.
Do not assign a print line (order) for saline.
Factors for L, H, and I should be programmed as
shown in Section 5.33.3.
Follow the instructions in Section 2.54 for loading the
saline index parameters. Assign the index parameters
to a test key, according to these instructions.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Test
Data Mode
Control Interval
Expected Value <Serum> Expected Value < Urine>
Test Name
Report Name
Instrument Factor (Y=aX+b) a
b
Alarm
Unit LIPEM
Lipemia
[ ] [ mg/dL ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
LIPEM
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ 0 ] - [ 1000 ] [ 0 ] - [ 1000 ]
STD Conc. Pos. Sample Pre. Dil. Calib. Lot No. Qualitative [ No ]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
25
122000
10
1600
19000
180000
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Test
Assay Code
Assay Point
S. Vol. (Normal)
S. Vol. (Decrease)
S. Vol. (Increase )
ABS. Limit
Prozone Limit
Reagent
Calibration Type
R1
R2
R3
R4
Auto Time Out
Auto Change
Blank
Span
2 Point
Full
Lot
Bottle
SD Limit
Duplicate Limit
Sensitivity Limit
S1 ABS Limit
Compensated Limit
[ LIPEM ]
[ ] [ ] [ AST ]
[ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
< Serum > < Urine >
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ]
[ ] / [ ]
5 100
NOTE
Do not use the saline index key to select serum
indexes for a sample. Use the SERUM INDEX key for
making test selections.
Press the PARAMETER JOB key, followed by 1
ENTER, to display the first page of the CHEMISTRY
PARAMETERS screen. Press the test key to which
the index parameters were assigned and press
ENTER. Make sure the parameters have been loaded
as shown below in Figure 5-61.
Figure 5-61: Index Saline Parameters, page 1
Press the GUIDANCE key to display the second page
of the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. Make
sure the parameters match those shown in Figure
5-62 on the following page.
Figure 5-62: Index Saline Parameters, page 2
Press the GUIDANCE key to return to the first page
of the CHEMISTRY PARAMETERS screen. Enter
50, 51, or 52 in the Test field to display the parameters
for L, H, or I. Press the GUIDANCE key to move to
the second page of the Lipemia parameters.
Enter the channel number assigned to the index or
saline channel in the third ASSAY CODE field entry.
This entry will automatically be entered on the other
two serum index parameter screens. Figure 5-63
shows an example of the serum index parameters
using the saline channel.
1
ENTER
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Test
Data Mode
Control Interval
Expected Value <Serum> Expected Value < Urine>
Test Name
Report Name
Instrument Factor (Y=aX+b) a
b
Alarm
Unit INDEX
Index
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
INDEX 00299
On Board
0
Age (M) (F)
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ ] - [ ] [ ] - [ ]
[ 0 ] - [ 1000 ] [ 0 ] - [ 1000 ]
STD Conc. Pos. Sample Pre. Dil. Calib. Lot No. Qualitative [ No ]
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
501
501
501
501
501
501
10
10
10
10
10
10
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
1.0
0.0
10 Y 0.0 1000
20 Y 0.0 1000
0.0 1000
0.0 1000
0.0 1000
0.0 1000
0.0 100.0
000001
000002
000000
000000
000000
000000
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Test
Assay Code
Assay Point
S. Vol. (Normal)
S. Vol. (Decrease)
S. Vol. (Increase )
ABS. Limit
Prozone Limit
Reagent
Calibration Type
R1
R2
R3
R4
Auto Time Out
Auto Change
Blank
Span
2 Point
Full
Lot
Bottle
SD Limit
Duplicate Limit
Sensitivity Limit
S1 ABS Limit
Compensated Limit
[ LIPEM ]
[ RATE-A ] [ ] [ INDEX ]
[ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
< Serum > < Urine >
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ]
[ ] / [ ] 5 10 0 0
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
32000 32000 INCREASE
0 0 LOWER
250
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
00299
00299
00299
00299
LINEAR 1 0 0
0
0
0
0
0.1
100
0
-500 500
CANCEL
CANCEL
376 340
00400 0
5 101
Figure 5-63: Serum Index Using the Saline Channel
The saline used for the serum index function does not
have a full bar code label. You must manually set the
Registration from the REAGENT STATUS screen.
When all parameter information has been entered,
perform a parameter write from the ANALYZER
MAINTENANCE screen.
The saline index channel must be calibrated after
being entered the first time. Press ROUTINE,
followed by 2 ENTER, to display the CALIBRATION
MODE field. Press 2 ENTER to select a repeat
calibration. Move the cursor to the TESTS field.
Press 1 ENTER for a blank calibration. Press the
INDEX key to calibrate the saline index channel.
Press PAGE FORWARD two times to display the
START CONDITIONS screen. Move the cursor to the
Repeat Calibration field and press 1 ENTER to
select a repeat calibration.
5.33.6 Graphic Representation of
Serum Indexes
The bichromatic wavelength pairs used for serum
index measurement are 480 nm and 505 nm (range 1),
570 nm and 600 nm (range 2), and 660 nm and 700 nm
(range 3). The absorbance readings for the lipemia
index are taken in range 3. The absorbance readings
for the hemolysis index are taken in ranges 2 and 3.
The absorbance readings for the icterus index are
taken in ranges 1, 2, and 3. The calculation formulas
used for the serum indexes include corrections to
compensate for the spectral overlap.
Figure 5-64 is a graphic representation of the spectral
measurement of these serum characteristics.
Figure 5-64: Serum Index Measurement
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
Test
Assay Code
Assay Point
S. Vol. (Normal)
S. Vol. (Decrease)
S. Vol. (Increase )
ABS. Limit
Prozone Limit
Reagent
Calibration Type
R1
R2
R3
R4
Auto Time Out
Auto Change
Blank
Span
2 Point
Full
Lot
Bottle
SD Limit
Duplicate Limit
Sensitivity Limit
S1 ABS Limit
Compensated Limit
[ LIPEM ]
[ ] [ ] [ INDEX ]
[ ] - [ ] - [ ] - [ ]
< Serum > < Urine >
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ]
[ ] [ ]
[ ]
[ ] / [ ]
[ ] / [ ]
A
b
s
o
r
b
a
n
c
e
Wavelength
340 480 505 546 570 600 660 700
Hemolysis
Icterus
Lipemia
NADH
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3
(nm)
5 102
5.33.7 Calculation of Serum Indexes
Icterus Index
The formula to calculate the icterus index (I) is:
I = x [ (D Abs
1
) - E x { (D Abs
2
) - B
x (D Abs
3
) } - F x (D Abs
3
) ]
where:
I = icterus index
D = scaling factor for bilirubin
E = corrects bi l i rubi n measurement
(absorbance) for hemoglobin
B = corrects hemoglobin measurement
for lipemia
F = corrects bilirubin measurement for
lipemia
D Abs
1,2,3
= absorbance values of the 480 -
505 nm, 570 - 600 nm, and 660 -
700 nm bi chromati c ranges,
respectively, in relation to the blank
absorbances
Hemolysis Index
The formula to calculate the hemolysis index (H) is:
H = x [ (D Abs
2
) - B x (D Abs
3
) ]
where:
H = hemolysis index
A = scaling factor for hemoglobin
B = corrects hemoglobin measurement
for lipemia
D Abs
2,3
= absorbance of the 570 - 600 nm and
660 - 700 nm bichromatic ranges,
respectively, in relation to the blank
absorbances
Lipemia Index
The formula to calculate the lipemia index (L) is:
L = x (D Abs
3
)
where:
L = lipemia index
C = scaling factor for lipemia
D Abs
3
= absorbance of the 660 - 700 nm
bichromatic range in relation to the
blank absorbances
1
A
1
C
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
1
D
5 103
5.34 Real Time QC Evaluation
5.34.1 Introduction
Real Time QC is evaluated by a multi-rule Shewhart-
type method using the Westgard algorithm. This
algorithm applies the set of rules selected in REAL
TIME QC. Any combination of rules may be
specified. A pair of controls for each chemistry being
processed is compared against a known standard
deviation (SD) and mean. In some cases, only one
of the controls (X or Y) may fail the test applied by the
rule. When a control sample fails a test, a data alarm
is issued and the graph on the CRT displays a symbol
corresponding to the type of QC error detected. An
alarm may print on the patient report. The following
is an explanation of each QC rule, using a display
example where appropriate.
5.34.2 Rule 1: 1-2SD
1-2SD represents the control rule where one control
observation exceeds limits defined as mean 2SD.
Each control sample X and Y is compared against its
respective expected mean and standard deviation. If
both X and Y are within the mean 2SD, the QC data
are accepted. If either X or Y data are outside the
mean 2SD, the test fails, but no alarm is issued.
The next selected rule is then checked.
5.34.3 Rule 2: 1-3SD
Rule 2: 1-3SDAlarm QCERR1
1-3SD is the control rule violated when a single control
result exceeds the limit defined as mean 3SD. Each
control sample X and Y is compared against its
respective expected mean and standard deviation. If
both X and Y are within the mean 3SD, the QC data
are accepted.
If either X or Y data are outside the mean 3SD, a
QCERR1 alarm is issued for an indeterminate QC
error, unless a later rule is also violated. In that case,
the alarm for the last rule violated is issued. A +
displays in part of the highlighted area as shown in
Figure 5-65 below.
Figure 5-65: QCERR1 Alarm Situation
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
0
0
0
1
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
+
5 104
5.34.4 Rule 3: 2-2SD
Rule 3: 2-2SDAlarm SYSTM1
The results of one assay on each control are
evaluated (a total of two control results are tested).
The results of the most recent control pair of X and Y
are compared against standard deviations. If both X
and Y deviate outside 2SD and both are either above
or below the means, the test fails. A SYSTM1 data
alarm is issued for a systematic QC error, unless a
later rule is also violated. In that case, the alarm for
the last rule violated is issued. A "#" displays on the
graph as shown in Figure 5-66 below.
The SYSTM1 alarm is issued when the 2 results (both
X and Y in this case) are outside the 2SD limit,
across control material. This is a systematic
violation.
Figure 5-66: SYSTM1 Alarm Situation
The results of the two most recent assays of each
control are evaluated. A total of four control results are
tested. If either or both X and Y data deviate outside
2SD, the test fails. A SYSTM2 data alarm is issued
for a systematic QC error, unless a later rule is also
violated. In that case, the alarm for the last rule
violated is issued. A "#" displays on the graph.
Figures 5-67 and 5-68 on the next page show this
alarm.
The SYSTM2 alarm is issued when two control results
are outside of the 2SD limit, within a control material.
This is a systematic violation.
Figure 5-67: SYSTM2 Alarm Situation for Control X
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
0
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
#
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
1
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
*
#
5 105
Figure 5-68: SYSTM2 Alarm Situation for Control Y
5.34.5 Rule 4: R-4SD
Rule 4: R-4SDRANDM Alarm
R-4SD is the control rule in which there is a range or
a difference between the control materials that
exceeds 4SD, such as would be the case if the X
control exceeded the -2SD limit and the Y control
exceeded the +2SD limit.
The run size specified when Rule 4 is selected on the
Real Time QC display determines the number of
consecutive control X and Y samples tested. The
maximum deviations of X minus the minimum
deviations of Y, and the maximum deviations of Y
minus the minimum deviations of X are computed. If
either of these differences is greater that 4SD, the
test fails. A RANDM data alarm is issued for a
random QC error, and a "@" displays on the graph, as
shown in Figure 5-69 above.
Figure 5-69: RANDM Alarm Situation
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
1
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
*
#
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
0
1
0
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
@
5 106
5.34.6 Rule 5: 4-1SD
4-1SD is the control rule violated when four
consecutive control results exceed the same limit,
either mean + 1SD or mean - 1SD. The SYSTM3
alarm is issues when three control results are outside
the 2SD limit and 1 control result is outside the
2SD limit across control materials. This is a
systematic alarm.
The results of two consecutive assays of each
control are evaluated (total four samples tested). If
insufficient data are available, the test is not
performed. If all X and Y data exceed 1SD, and
either the current X or Y value exceeds 2SD, and all
are on the same side of the mean, then the test fails.
A SYSTM3 data alarm is issued for a systematic QC
alarm, and a "#" displays on the graph as shown below
in Figure 5-70.
The results of four consecutive assays of each
control are evaluated (total of eight samples tested).
If fewer that four samples are available, the test is not
performed. If all X or Y data exceed one standard
deviation, and fall on the same side of the mean, and
the current X or Y value exceeds 2 SD then the test
fails. A SYSTM4 data alarm is issued for a
systematic QC alarm, and a "#" displays on the graph
as shown in Figures 5-71 and 5-72 on the next page.
The SYSTM4 alarm is issued when three control
results are outside the 1SD limit and one control
result is outside the 2SD limit within a control
material. This is a systematic violation.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
0
0
1
1
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
#
+
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
3
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
#
*
*
*
5 107
5.34.7 Rule 6: 10x
Rule 6: 10XAlarm SYSTM5
10X is the control rule where there are 10 consecutive
control observations on the same side of the mean.
The SYSTM5 alarm is issued when nine control
results are on the same side of the mean and one
control was outside the 2SD limit, across control
materials. This is a systematic violation.
The results of five consecutive assays of each
control are evaluated (total 10 samples tested). If
fewer than five samples are available for each
control, the test is not performed. The signs of all
sample deviations for both controls are compared
with zero. If all are non-zero and have the same sign,
and one of the current X and Y samples exceeds 2SD,
then the test fails. A SYSTM5 data processing alarm
is issued for a systematic QC alarm, and a "#"
displays on the graph as shown above in Figure 5-73.
Rule 6: 10XAlarm SYSTM6
The results of 10 consecutive assays of each control
are evaluated (total 20 samples tested). If fewer than
10 samples are available for each control, the test is
not performed. All sample deviations are compared
with zero. If all are non-zero and have the same sign,
and the current sample (X or Y) exceeds 2SD, the test
fails. A SYSTM6 data alarm is issued for a
systematic QC alarm, and a "#" displays on the graph
as shown in Figures 5-74 and 5-75 on the following
page.
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
3
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
#
* *
*
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
4
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
# * *
* *
5 108
The SYSTM6 alarm is issued when nine control
results are on the same side of the mean and one
control result is outside the 2SD limit within a control
material. This is a systematic violation.
5.34.8 Rule 7: 1-2.5SD
Rule 7: 1-2.5SDAlarm QCERR2
1-2.5s symbolizes the control rule violated when one
control result exceeds the limit defined as mean
2.5SD.
If tighter QC restrictions are desired, this rule may be
selected in place of Rule 2: 1-3SD. If both this rule and
Rule 2 are selected, this rule takes precedent over
Rule 2. The deviation of a single sample is compared
against 2.5 SD for each control. If either control X or
Y is 2.5 SD, the test fails. A QCERR2 data
processing alarm is issued for an indeterminate QC
error, and a "+" displays on the graph as shown below
in Figure 5-76.
Figure 5-76: QCERR2 Alarm Situation
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
9
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
#
* * * *
* * *
* *
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
9
0
1
0
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
#
* * * *
* * *
* *
37.0 Stand-by 12/01/92 12:20
1 Real Time QC
Test
Control
S. Type
Target Mean
Target SD
( * )
(@)
( # )
( + )
0
0
0
1
Normal Data
Random Error
System Error
QC Error
0 1 2 3 -1 -2 -3
0
1
2
3
-1
-2
-3
1-2S
2-2S
4-1S
1-2.5S
1-3S
R-4S (1)
10X
(X) (Y)
[ C1 ]
[PTN-81 ] [PTA-157 ]
Serum Serum
113.2
3.5
95.6
3.0
+
5 109
5.34.9 Flowchart
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
Out of control
occurrence of alarm
In control
Control data
Xn, Yn
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
12S
12.5S 13S 22SA R4S 22SW 41SA 41SW 10XA 10XW
Figure 5-77: Real Time QC Flow Chart
5 110
5.35 Reagent Labelling
5.35.1 General Information
The following sections illustrate where specific
information may be found on reagent container labels,
reagent package labels, and reagent package
inserts.
WARNING
Failure to follow package insert instructions for
reagent preparation, storage, and expiration may
result in inaccurate patient results.
5.35.2 Reagent Labelling
5.35 Reagent Labelling and Package Inserts
5. CHEMISTRY THEORY
Illustration for example only.
Information may not reflect
current information.
C
h
o
l e
s t e
r o
l / H P
Reagent Number
Lot Number and
Expiration Date
Name of Test
Catalog Number
and
Application Code
Bar Code Label
Figure 5-78: 911 Analyzer Reagent Bottle

ROCHE Hitachi 911 User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ROCHE Hitachi 911 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BM/HITACHI 911

Copyright Boehringer Mannheim GmbH 1993

C or less) 32 positions each,

(Kabi-Vitrum, Inc.). These units

You might also like